Right choice for ultimate yield

LSIS strives to maximize customers' profit in gratitude of choosing us for your

partner.

Programmable Logic Controller

XGK/XGB Instructions and programming

XGT Series
User’s Manual

z Read this manual carefully before

installing, wiring, operating, servicing
or inspecting this equipment.

z Keep this manual within easy reach

for quick reference.

http://eng.lsis.biz
Safety Instruction

Before using the product …

For your safety and effective operation, please read the safety instructions
thoroughly before using the product.

► Safety Instructions should always be observed in order to prevent accident

or risk with the safe and proper use the product.

► Precautious measures can be categorized as “Warning” and “Caution”, and

each of the meanings is as follows.

This symbol indicates the possibility of serious injury

Warning or death if some applicable instruction is violated

This symbol indicates the possibility of severe or

Caution slight injury, and damages in products if some
applicable instruction is violated

Moreover, even classified events under its caution category may develop into
serious accidents depending on situations. Therefore we strongly advise users
to observe all precautions in a proper way just like warnings.

► The marks displayed on the product and in the user’s manual have the
following meanings.

Be careful! Danger may be expected.

Be careful! Electric shock may occur.

After reading this user’s manual, it should be stored in a place that is visible
to product users.
 Revision History
version Date Remark Revised position

V 1.0 2006.3 1. First Edition -

V 1.3 2006.8 1. XGB instructions are added. -

V 1.4 2008.3 1. Contents added
(1) “Safety Instruction” is added. -
(2) “About User’s Manual” is added. -
(3) LOAD4(8) instruction is added. 3-18
(4) AND4(8) instruction is added. 3-19
(5) OR4(8) instruction is added. 3-20
(6) R2L(P) instruction is added. 4-76
(7) L2R(P) instruction is added. 4-77
(8) LOAD4 X, LOAD8 X instruction is added. 4-98
(9) AND4 X, AND8 X instruction is added. 4-99
(10) OR4X, OR8 X instruction is added. 4-100
(11) Sample Programs are added 4-49, 4-53, 4-126,
4-191, 4-193, 4-194,
4-195, 4-196
(12) Data Control instruction is added 4-261, 4-265
2. Contents modified
(1) Instructions are modified. 4-78, 4-95, 4-96,
4-97, 4-105, 4-147,
4-149, 4-153, 4-167,
4-172, 4-173, 4-185,
4-187, 4-218, 4-228,
4-230, 4-232, 4-245,
4-266, 4-272, 4-274,
4-275, 4-278, 4-287,
4-289, 4-292, 4-298,
4-301, 4-306, 4-310,
4-315, 4-362

V 1.5 2009.12 1. Contents added

(1) “SFC language” is added Ch.5
(2) “ST language” is added Ch.6
(3) 16 instructions for converting real data are added Ch4.13.7~4.13.10
(4) 6 instructions for comparing input are added Ch4.15.19~4.15.21
(5) 4 instructions for moving are added Ch4.18.9~4.18.10
(6) 4 instructions for exchanging are added Ch4.19.5~4.19.6
(7) 16 instructions for logical operation are added Ch4.22.9~4.22.16
(8) Instructions related with XPM are added Ch4.42
2. Contents modified
version Date Remark Revised position

(1) Available languages are added Ch3.1

(2) “G X, GD X” instruction is modified Ch4.14.4
(3) “POR, FLT” instructions are modified Ch4.41.4, Ch.4.41.2
(4) “STP, PIDINIT” instructions are modified Ch4.41.10, Ch4.28.7
(5) Instruction list is modified Ch3.4
(6) Special relay list is modified Appendix 3

※ The number of User’s manual is indicated right part of the back cover.
ⓒ 2006 LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd All Rights Reserved.
About User’s Manual

About User’s Manual

Congratulations on purchasing PLC of LS Industrial System Co., Ltd.
Before use, make sure to carefully read and understand the User’s Manual about the functions,
performances, installation and programming of the product you purchased in order for correct use and
importantly, let the end user and maintenance administrator to be provided with the User’s Manual.

The Use’s Manual describes the product. If necessary, you may refer to the following description and order
accordingly. In addition, you may connect our website(http://eng.lsis.biz/) and download the information as a
PDF file.

Relevant User’s Manuals

Title Description

It describes specifications, system structure and EMC spec.

XGK-CPUA/CPUE/CPUH/CPUS
correspondence of CPU module, Power module, Base, I/O module and
User’s Manual
Extension cable

It describes XGB specifications regarding Power, I/O, Extension,

XGB Hardware User’s Manual
System structure, built-in High Speed Counter etc.

It describes XGB analog input, analog output, temperature input, built-

XGB Analog User’s Manual
in PID control etc.

It describes how to use XG5000 software especially about online

XG5000 User’s Manual functions such as programming, printing, monitoring and debugging by
using XGT series products.

XGK/XGB Series
It is the user’s manual for programming to explain how to use
Instructions & Programming
commands that are used PLC system with XGK CPU and XGB.
User’s Manual
 ◎ Contents ◎

Chapter 1 Summary and Characteristic .............................................................................................. 1-1

1.1 Summary .......................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.2 Characteristics................................................................................................................................. 1-1

Chapter 2 Function.......................................................................................................................2-1~2-56

2.1 Performance Specification ............................................................................................................. 2-1

2.2 Data Types and Application Methods............................................................................................ 2-5
2.2.1 Data types............................................................................................................................. 2-5
2.2.2 Bit data (Bit) .......................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.2.3 Nibble/Byte data (Nibble/Byte) ............................................................................................. 2-7
2.2.4 Word data (Word) ................................................................................................................. 2-8
2.2.5 Double word data (Dword).................................................................................................... 2-9
2.2.6 Real data (REAL,LREAL) ................................................................................................... 2-10
2.2.7 String data ......................................................................................................................... 2-12
2.3 Device Area .................................................................................................................................... 2-13
2.3.1 Classification of devices ..................................................................................................... 2-13
2.3.2 Input range per device ........................................................................................................ 2-14
2.3.3 I/O P.................................................................................................................................... 2-15
2.3.4 Auxiliary relay M.................................................................................................................. 2-16
2.3.5 Keep relay K ....................................................................................................................... 2-16
2.3.6 Link relay L ......................................................................................................................... 2-16
2.3.7 Timer T................................................................................................................................ 2-17
2.3.8 Counter C ........................................................................................................................... 2-18
2.3.9 Data register D.................................................................................................................... 2-19
2.3.10 Step control relay S........................................................................................................... 2-20
2.3.11 Special relay F .................................................................................................................. 2-21
2.3.12 Special module register U (Refresh area) ........................................................................ 2-21
2.3.13 File register R ................................................................................................................... 2-22
2.3.14 Communication register N ................................................................................................ 2-24
2.4 Comprehension of Instructions ................................................................................................... 2-25
2.4.1 Types of instructions ........................................................................................................... 2-25
2.4.2 Mnemonic generation ......................................................................................................... 2-27
2.4.3 Signed operation and Unsigned operation ......................................................................... 2-28
2.4.4 Indirect setting type ( # ) ..................................................................................................... 2-28
2.4.5 Index function( Z )............................................................................................................... 2-29
2.5 Precautions for programming...................................................................................................... 2-31
2.6 Parameter Setting.......................................................................................................................... 2-32
2.6.1 Fixed period operation mode.............................................................................................. 2-32
2.6.2 Setting & Assignment of I/O reservation function ............................................................... 2-33
2.6.3 Setting of time..................................................................................................................... 2-34
2.6.4 Setting of output control...................................................................................................... 2-34
2.6.5 Setting of timer area ........................................................................................................... 2-35
2.6.6 Setting of latch area in data memory.................................................................................. 2-35
2.6.7 Setting program progress when errors occurring ............................................................... 2-36
2.6.8 Interrupt setting................................................................................................................... 2-37
2.7 CPU processing............................................................................................................................. 2-38
2.7.1 Operation processing ........................................................................................................ 2-38
2.7.2 Description of operation in applicable mode ...................................................................... 2-39
2.8 Special Function............................................................................................................................ 2-42
2.8.1 Interrupt function................................................................................................................. 2-42
 2.8.2 Timer function ..................................................................................................................... 2-45
2.8.3 Program modification during Run ....................................................................................... 2-46
2.8.4 Self-diagnosis function........................................................................................................ 2-46
2.9 Program Check Function.............................................................................................................. 2-48
2.9.1 JMP-LABEL ........................................................................................................................ 2-48
2.9.2 CALL-SBRT/RET................................................................................................................ 2-49
2.9.3 MCS-MCSCLR ................................................................................................................... 2-50
2.9.4 FOR-NEXT/BREAK ............................................................................................................ 2-51
2.9.5 END/RET ............................................................................................................................ 2-52
2.9.6 Duplicated coil .................................................................................................................... 2-52
2.10 Error Handling ............................................................................................................................. 2-53
2.10.1 Error handling during Run mode ...................................................................................... 2-53
2.10.2 Error handling flag ............................................................................................................ 2-53
2.10.3 LED display of error .......................................................................................................... 2-53
2.10.4 Error codes during Run .................................................................................................... 2-54
2.10.5 Operation error code......................................................................................................... 2-56

Chapter 3 Instructions List ..........................................................................................................3-1~3-50

3.1 Classification of Instructions ......................................................................................................... 3-1

3.2 How to See Instruction List ............................................................................................................ 3-2
3.3 Basic Instructions ........................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.3.1 Contact point instruction ....................................................................................................... 3-3
3.3.2 Unite instruction .................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.3.3 Reverse instruction ............................................................................................................... 3-4
3.3.4 Master control instruction ..................................................................................................... 3-4
3.3.5 Output instruction.................................................................................................................. 3-4
3.3.6 Sequence/Last-input preferred instruction ........................................................................... 3-4
3.3.7 End instruction ...................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.3.8 Non-process instruction ........................................................................................................ 3-4
3.3.9 Timer instruction ................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.3.10 Counter instruction.............................................................................................................. 3-5
3.4 Application Instruction ................................................................................................................... 3-6
3.4.1 Data transfer instruction........................................................................................................ 3-6
3.4.2 BCD/BIN conversion instruction ........................................................................................... 3-7
3.4.3 Data type conversion instruction .......................................................................................... 3-8
3.4.4 Compare instruction............................................................................................................ 3-10
3.4.5 Increase/Decrease instruction ............................................................................................ 3-24
3.4.6 Rotate instruction................................................................................................................ 3-25
3.4.7 Move instruction.................................................................................................................. 3-26
3.4.8 Exchange instruction .......................................................................................................... 3-28
3.4.9 BIN operation instruction .................................................................................................... 3-29
3.4.10 BCD operation instruction................................................................................................. 3-31
3.4.11 Logic operation instruction ................................................................................................ 3-32
3.4.12 Data process instruction ................................................................................................... 3-34
3.4.13 Data table process instruction .......................................................................................... 3-36
3.4.14 Display instruction............................................................................................................. 3-36
3.4.15 String process instruction ................................................................................................. 3-37
3.4.16 Special function instruction ............................................................................................... 3-40
3.4.17 Data control instruction ..................................................................................................... 3-41
3.4.18 Time related instruction .................................................................................................... 3-42
3.4.19 Diverge instruction ............................................................................................................ 3-42
3.4.20 Loop instruction ................................................................................................................ 3-43
3.4.21 Flag instruction ................................................................................................................. 3-43
3.4.22 System instruction ............................................................................................................ 3-43
3.4.23 Interrupt related instruction............................................................................................... 3-43
3.4.24 Sign reversion instruction ................................................................................................. 3-44
3.4.25 File related instruction....................................................................................................... 3-44
3.4.26 F area control instruction .................................................................................................. 3-45
3.4.27 Bit control instruction in word area ................................................................................... 3-45
3.5 Special/Communication Instruction ............................................................................................ 3-46
3.5.1 Communication module related instruction ........................................................................ 3-46
3.5.2 Special module common instruction ................................................................................... 3-46
3.5.3 Exclusive motion control instruction ................................................................................... 3-46
3.5.4 Exclusive position control instruction.................................................................................. 3-47

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions ..............................................................................................4-1~4-421

4.1 Contact Instruction.......................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1.1 LOAD, LOAD NOT, LOADP. LOADN ................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 AND, AND NOT, ANDP, ANDN ............................................................................................. 4-3
4.1.3 OR, OR NOT, ORP, ORN ..................................................................................................... 4-4
4.2 Union Instruction............................................................................................................................. 4-7
4.2.1 AND LOAD ........................................................................................................................... 4-7
4.2.2 OR LOAD ............................................................................................................................. 4-9
4.2.3 MPUSH, MLOAD, MPOP ................................................................................................... 4-11
4.3 Reversion Instruction.................................................................................................................... 4-13
4.3.1 NOT .................................................................................................................................... 4-13
4.4 Master Control Instruction ........................................................................................................... 4-14
4.4.1 MCS, MCSCLR .................................................................................................................. 4-14
4.5 Output Instruction ......................................................................................................................... 4-16
4.5.1 OUT, OUT NOT, OUTP, OUTN ........................................................................................... 4-16
4.5.2 SET ..................................................................................................................................... 4-19
4.5.3 RST..................................................................................................................................... 4-20
4.5.4 FF........................................................................................................................................ 4-22
4.6 Sequence/Last-input Preferred Instruction .............................................................................. 4-23
4.6.1 SET Syy.xx ......................................................................................................................... 4-23
4.6.2 OUT Syy.xx......................................................................................................................... 4-25
4.7 End Instruction .............................................................................................................................. 4-26
4.7.1 END .................................................................................................................................... 4-26
4.8 Non-process Instruction ............................................................................................................... 4-27
4.8.1 NOP .................................................................................................................................... 4-27
4.9 Timer Instruction ........................................................................................................................... 4-28
4.9.1 Characteristics of Timer ...................................................................................................... 4-28
4.9.2 TON .................................................................................................................................... 4-30
4.9.3 TOFF................................................................................................................................... 4-32
4.9.4 TMR .................................................................................................................................... 4-34
4.9.5 TMON ................................................................................................................................. 4-36
4.9.6 TRTG .................................................................................................................................. 4-38
4.10 Counter Instruction ..................................................................................................................... 4-40
4.10.1 Characteristic of Counter.................................................................................................. 4-40
4.10.2 CTD................................................................................................................................... 4-42
4.10.3 CTU................................................................................................................................... 4-43
4.10.4 CTUD................................................................................................................................ 4-44
4.10.5 CTR................................................................................................................................... 4-47
4.11 Data Transfer Instruction ............................................................................................................ 4-48
4.11.1 MOV, MOVP, DMOV, DMOVP .......................................................................................... 4-48
4.11.2 MOV4, MOV4P, MOV8, MOV8P....................................................................................... 4-50
4.11.3 CMOV, CMOVP, DCMOV, DCMOVP................................................................................ 4-52
4.11.4 GMOV, GMOVP ................................................................................................................ 4-54
4.11.5 FMOV, FMOVP ................................................................................................................. 4-55
4.11.6 BMOV, BMOVP................................................................................................................. 4-56
4.11.7 GBMOV, GBMOVP ........................................................................................................... 4-57
4.11.8 RMOV, RMOVP, LMOV, LMOVP ...................................................................................... 4-58
4.11.9 $MOV, $MOVP.................................................................................................................. 4-59
4.12 Conversion Instruction ............................................................................................................... 4-60
4.12.1 BCD, BCDP, DBCD, DBCDP............................................................................................ 4-60
4.12.2 BCD4, BCD4P, BCD8, BCD8P......................................................................................... 4-63
4.12.3 BIN, BINP, DBIN, DBINP .................................................................................................. 4-64
 4.12.4 BIN4, BIN4P, BIN8, BIN8P ............................................................................................... 4-66
4.12.5 GBCD, GBCDP................................................................................................................. 4-67
4.12.6 GBIN, GBINP.................................................................................................................... 4-68
4.13 Convert Real Instruction............................................................................................................. 4-69
4.13.1 I2R, I2RP, I2L, I2LP .......................................................................................................... 4-69
4.13.2 D2R, D2RP, D2L, D2LP.................................................................................................... 4-70
4.13.3 R2I, R2IP, R2D, R2DP...................................................................................................... 4-71
4.13.4 L2I, L2IP, L2D, L2DP ........................................................................................................ 4-73
4.13.5 R2L, R2LP ........................................................................................................................ 4-75
4.13.6 L2R, L2RP ........................................................................................................................ 4-76
4.13.7 U2R, U2RP, U2L, U2LP................................................................................................... 4-77
4.13.8 UD2R, UD2RP, UD2L, UD2LP ........................................................................................ 4-78
4.13.9 R2U, R2UP, R2UD, R2UDP ............................................................................................ 4-79
4.13.10 L2U, L2UP, L2UD, L2UDP ............................................................................................. 4-81
4.14 Output Terminal Compare Instruction ( Unsigned )................................................................. 4-82
4.14.1 CMP, CMPP, DCMP, DCMPP ........................................................................................... 4-82
4.14.2 CMP4, CMP4P, CMP8, CMP8P ....................................................................................... 4-83
4.14.3 TCMP, TCMPP, DTCMP, DTCMPP .................................................................................. 4-84
4.14.4 GX(P), GDX(P) ............................................................................................................... 4-85
4.15 Input Terminal Compare Instruction ( Signed ) ........................................................................ 4-86
4.15.1 LOAD X, LOADD X........................................................................................................... 4-86
4.15.2 AND X, ANDD X................................................................................................................ 4-87
4.15.3 OR X, ORD X.................................................................................................................... 4-88
4.15.4 LOADR X, LOADL X......................................................................................................... 4-89
4.15.5 ANDR X, ANDL X.............................................................................................................. 4-90
4.15.6 ORR X, ORL.X.................................................................................................................. 4-91
4.15.7 LOAD$ X........................................................................................................................... 4-92
4.15.8 AND$ X ............................................................................................................................. 4-93
4.15.9 OR$ X ............................................................................................................................... 4-94
4.15.10 LOADG X, LOADDG X ................................................................................................... 4-95
4.15.11 ANDG X, ANDDG X ........................................................................................................ 4-97
4.15.12 ORG X, ORDG X ............................................................................................................ 4-98
4.15.13 LOAD3 X, LOADD3 X..................................................................................................... 4-99
4.15.14 AND3 X, ANDD3 X........................................................................................................ 4-100
4.15.15 OR3 X, ORD3 X............................................................................................................ 4-101
4.15.16 LOAD4 X, LOAD8 X ..................................................................................................... 4-102
4.15.17 AND4 X, AND8 X .......................................................................................................... 4-103
4.15.18 OR4 X, OR8 X .............................................................................................................. 4-104
4.15.19 ULOAD X, ULOADD X................................................................................................. 4-105
4.15.20 UAND X, UANDD X ..................................................................................................... 4-106
4.15.21 UOR X, UORD X.......................................................................................................... 4-107
4.16 Increase/Decrease Instruction ................................................................................................. 4-108
4.16.1 INC, INCP, DINC, DINCP ............................................................................................... 4-108
4.16.2 INC4, INC4P, INC8, INC8P............................................................................................. 4-109
4.16.3 DEC, DECP, DDEC, DDECP.......................................................................................... 4-110
4.16.4 DEC4, DEC4P, DEC8, DEC8P........................................................................................4-111
4.16.5 INCU, INCUP, DINCU, DINCUP..................................................................................... 4-112
4.16.6 DECU, DECUP, DDECU, DDECUP ............................................................................... 4-113
4.17 Rotation Instruction .................................................................................................................. 4-114
4.17.1 ROL, ROLP, DROL, DROLP........................................................................................... 4-114
4.17.2 ROL4, ROL4P, ROL8, ROL8P........................................................................................ 4-115
4.17.3 ROR, RORP, DROR, DRORP ........................................................................................ 4-116
4.17.4 ROR4, ROR4P, ROR8, ROR8P ..................................................................................... 4-117
4.17.5 RCL, RCLP, DRCL, DRCLP ........................................................................................... 4-118
4.17.6 RCL4, RCL4P, RCL8, RCL8P ........................................................................................ 4-119
4.17.7 RCR. RCRP. DRCR, DRCRP ......................................................................................... 4-120
4.17.8 RCR4, RCR4P, RCR8, RCR8P ...................................................................................... 4-121
4.18 Move Instruction........................................................................................................................ 4-122
4.18.1 BSFT, BSFTP ................................................................................................................. 4-122
4.18.2 BSFL, BSFLP, DBSFL, DBSFLP .................................................................................... 4-123
4.18.3 BSFL4, BSFL4P, BSFL8, BSFL8P ................................................................................. 4-124
 4.18.4 BSFR, BSFRP, DBSFR, DBSFRP.................................................................................. 4-125
4.18.5 BSFR4, BSFR4P, BSFR8, BSFR8P............................................................................... 4-126
4.18.6 WSFT, WSFTP ............................................................................................................... 4-127
4.18.7 WSFL, WSFLP, WSFR, WSFRP .................................................................................... 4-128
4.18.8 SR ................................................................................................................................... 4-129
4.18.9 BRR, BRRP.................................................................................................................... 4-130
4.18.10 BRL, BRLP................................................................................................................... 4-131
4.19 Exchange Instruction ................................................................................................................ 4-132
4.19.1 XCHG, XCHGP, DXCHG, DXCHGP ............................................................................... 4-132
4.19.2 GXCHG, GXCHGP ......................................................................................................... 4-133
4.19.3 SWAP, SWAPP ............................................................................................................... 4-134
4.19.4 GSWAP, GSWAPP ......................................................................................................... 4-135
4.19.5 SWAP2, SWAP2P.......................................................................................................... 4-136
4.19.6 GSWAP2, GSWAP2P .................................................................................................... 4-137
4.20 BIN Operation Instruction......................................................................................................... 4-138
4.20.1 ADD, ADDP, DADD, DADDP .......................................................................................... 4-138
4.20.2 SUB, SUBP, DSUB, DSUBP........................................................................................... 4-139
4.20.3. MUL, MULP, DMUL, DMULP......................................................................................... 4-140
4.20.4 DIV, DIVP, DDIV, DDIVP................................................................................................. 4-141
4.20.5 ADDU, ADDUP, DADDU, DADDUP................................................................................ 4-142
4.20.6 SUBU, SUBUP,DSUBU, DSUBUP ................................................................................. 4-143
4.20.7 MULU, MULUP, DMULU, DMULUP ............................................................................... 4-144
4.20.8 DIVU, DIVUP, DDIVU, DDIVUP...................................................................................... 4-145
4.20.9 RADD, RADDP, LADD, LADDP...................................................................................... 4-146
4.20.10 RSUB, RSUBP, LSUB, LSUBP .................................................................................... 4-147
4.20.11 RMUL, RMULP, LMUL, LMULP .................................................................................... 4-148
4.20.12 RDIV, RDIVP, LDIV, LDIVP........................................................................................... 4-149
4.20.13 $ADD, $ADDP .............................................................................................................. 4-150
4.20.14 GADD, GADDP, GSUB, GSUBP .................................................................................. 4-151
4.21 BCD Operation Instruction ....................................................................................................... 4-153
4.21.1 ADDB, ADDBP, DADDB, DADDBP ................................................................................ 4-153
4.21.2 SUBB, SUBBP, DSUBB, DSUBBP................................................................................. 4-154
4.21.3 MULB, MULBP, DMULB, DMULBP ................................................................................ 4-155
4.21.4 DIVB, DIVBP, DDIVB, DDIVBP....................................................................................... 4-156
4.22 Logic Operation Instruction ..................................................................................................... 4-157
4.22.1 WAND, WANDP, DWAND, DWANDP............................................................................. 4-157
4.22.2 WOR, WORP, DWOR, DWORP..................................................................................... 4-159
4.22.3 WXOR, WXORP, DWXOR, DWXORP ........................................................................... 4-161
4.22.4 WXNR, WXNRP, DWXNR, DWXNRP ............................................................................ 4-163
4.22.5 GWAND, GWANDP ........................................................................................................ 4-165
4.22.6 GWOR, GWORP ............................................................................................................ 4-167
4.22.7 GWXOR, GWXORP ....................................................................................................... 4-169
4.22.8 GWXNR, GWXNRP........................................................................................................ 4-171
4.22.9 BAND, BANDP............................................................................................................... 4-173
4.22.10 BOR, BORP ................................................................................................................. 4-175
4.22.11 BXOR, BXORP............................................................................................................. 4-177
4.22.12 BXNR, BXNRP............................................................................................................. 4-179
4.22.13 ABAND, ABANDP ........................................................................................................ 4-181
4.22.14 ABOR, ABORP ........................................................................................................... 4-182
4.22.15 ABXOR, ABXORP ...................................................................................................... 4-183
4.22.16 ABXNR, ABXNRP ......................................................................................................... 4-184
4.23 Display Instruction .................................................................................................................... 4-185
4.23.1 SEG, SEGP..................................................................................................................... 4-185
4.24 Data Process Instruction .......................................................................................................... 4-187
4.24.1 BSUM, BSUMP, DBSUM, DBSUMP .............................................................................. 4-187
4.24.2 BRST, BRSTP................................................................................................................. 4-188
4.24.3 ENCO, ENCOP............................................................................................................... 4-189
4.24.4 DECO, DECOP............................................................................................................... 4-190
4.24.5 DIS, DISP ....................................................................................................................... 4-191
4.24.6 UNI, UNIP ....................................................................................................................... 4-192
4.24.7 WTOB, WTOBP .............................................................................................................. 4-193
 4.24.8 BTOW, BTOWP .............................................................................................................. 4-194
4.24.9 IORF, IORFP................................................................................................................... 4-195
4.24.10 SCH, SCHP, DSCH, DSCHP........................................................................................ 4-196
4.24.11 MAX, MAXP, DMAX, DMAXP ....................................................................................... 4-198
4.24.12 MIN, MINP, DMIN, DMINP............................................................................................ 4-200
4.24.13 SUM, SUMP, DSUM, DSUMP ...................................................................................... 4-202
4.24.14 AVE, AVEP, DAVE, DAVEP........................................................................................... 4-204
4.24.15 MUX, MUXP, DMUX, DMUXP ...................................................................................... 4-206
4.24.16 DETECT, DETECTP ..................................................................................................... 4-207
4.24.17 RAMP ........................................................................................................................... 4-208
4.24.18 SORT, DSORT.............................................................................................................. 4-210
4.25 Data Table Process Instruction ................................................................................................ 4-212
4.25.1 FIWR, FIWRP ................................................................................................................. 4-212
4.25.2 FIFRD, FIFRDP .............................................................................................................. 4-214
4.25.3 FILRD, FILRDP............................................................................................................... 4-215
4.25.4 FIINS, FIINSP ................................................................................................................. 4-216
4.25.5 FIDEL, FIDELP ............................................................................................................... 4-217
4.26 String Process Instruction........................................................................................................ 4-218
4.26.1 BINDA, BINDAP, DBINDA, DBINDAP ............................................................................ 4-218
4.26.2 BINHA, BINHAP, DBINHA, DBINHAP ............................................................................ 4-220
4.26.3 BCDDA, BCDDAP, DBCDDA, DBCDDAP...................................................................... 4-222
4.26.4 DABIN, DABINP, DDABIN, DDABINP ............................................................................ 4-224
4.26.5 HABIN, HABINP, DHABIN, DHABINP ............................................................................ 4-226
4.26.6 DABCD, DABCDP, DDABCD, DDABCDP...................................................................... 4-228
4.26.7 LEN, LENP ..................................................................................................................... 4-230
4.26.8 STR, STRP, DSTR, DSTRP ........................................................................................... 4-231
4.26.9 VAL, VALP, DVAL, DVALP .............................................................................................. 4-233
4.26.10 RSTR, RSTRP, LSTR, LSTRP ..................................................................................... 4-235
4.26.11 STRR, STRRP, STRL, STRLP...................................................................................... 4-237
4.26.12 ASC, ASCP ................................................................................................................... 4-239
4.26.13 HEX, HEXP................................................................................................................... 4-241
4.26.14 RIGHT, RIGHTP, LEFT, LEFTP .................................................................................... 4-243
4.26.15 MID, MIDP .................................................................................................................... 4-245
4.26.16 REPLACE, REPLACEP................................................................................................ 4-246
4.26.17 FIND, FINDP................................................................................................................. 4-247
4.26.18 RBCD, RBCDP, LBCD, LBCDP.................................................................................... 4-248
4.26.19 BCDR, BCDRP, BCDL, BCDLP.................................................................................... 4-250
4.27 Special Function Instruction .................................................................................................... 4-252
4.27.1 SIN, SINP ....................................................................................................................... 4-252
4.27.2 COS, COSP.................................................................................................................... 4-253
4.27.3 TAN, TANP...................................................................................................................... 4-254
4.27.4 RAD, RADP .................................................................................................................... 4-255
4.27.5 DEG, DEGP .................................................................................................................... 4-256
4.27.6 SQRT, SQRTP ................................................................................................................ 4-257
4.28 Data Control Instruction ........................................................................................................... 4-258
4.28.1 LIMIT, LIMITP, DLIMIT, DLIMITP .................................................................................... 4-258
4.28.2 DZONE, DZONEP, DDZONE, DDZONEP...................................................................... 4-260
4.28.3 VZONE, VZONEP, DVZONE, DVZONEP ...................................................................... 4-262
4.28.4 PIDRUN .......................................................................................................................... 4-264
4.28.5 PIDPRMT........................................................................................................................ 4-267
4.28.6 PIDPAUSE ...................................................................................................................... 4-268
4.28.7 PIDINIT ........................................................................................................................... 4-269
4.28.8 PIDAT.............................................................................................................................. 4-270
4.28.9 PIDHBD .......................................................................................................................... 4-272
4.28.10 PIDCAS ........................................................................................................................ 4-273
4.28.11 SCAL, SCALP, DSCAL, DSCALP, RSCAL, RSCALP................................................... 4-274
4.28.12 SCAL2, SCAL2P, DSCAL2, DSCAL2P, RSCAL2, RSCAL2P ...................................... 4-277
4.29 Time related Instruction............................................................................................................ 4-279
4.29.1 DATERD, DATERDP ...................................................................................................... 4-279
4.29.2 DATEWR, DATEWRP..................................................................................................... 4-280
4.29.3 ADDCLK, ADDCLKP....................................................................................................... 4-281
 4.29.4 SUBCLK, SUBCLKP....................................................................................................... 4-282
4.29.5 SECOND, SECONDP..................................................................................................... 4-283
4.29.6 HOUR, HOURP .............................................................................................................. 4-284
4.30 Diverge Instruction.................................................................................................................... 4-285
4.30.1 JMP, LABEL .................................................................................................................... 4-285
4.30.2 CALL, CALLP, SBRT, RET ............................................................................................. 4-286
4.31 Loop Instruction ........................................................................................................................ 4-287
4.31.1 FOR, NEXT..................................................................................................................... 4-287
4.31.2 BREAK............................................................................................................................ 4-288
4.32 Flag Instruction.......................................................................................................................... 4-289
4.32.1 STC, CLC ....................................................................................................................... 4-289
4.32.2 CLE................................................................................................................................. 4-290
4.33 System Instruction .................................................................................................................... 4-291
4.33.1 FALS ............................................................................................................................... 4-291
4.33.2 DUTY .............................................................................................................................. 4-292
4.33.3 TFLK ............................................................................................................................... 4-293
4.33.4 WDT, WDTP ................................................................................................................... 4-294
4.33.5 OUTOFF ......................................................................................................................... 4-295
4.33.6 STOP .............................................................................................................................. 4-296
4.33.7 ESTOP............................................................................................................................ 4-297
4.33.8 INIT_DONE..................................................................................................................... 4-298
4.34 Interrupt related Instruction ..................................................................................................... 4-299
4.34.1 EI, DI ............................................................................................................................... 4-299
4.34.2 EIN, DIN.......................................................................................................................... 4-300
4.35 Sign Reversion Instruction....................................................................................................... 4-301
4.35.1 NEG, NEGP, DNEG, DNEGP.......................................................................................... 4-301
4.35.2 RNEG, RNEGP, LNEG, LNEGP...................................................................................... 4-302
4.35.3 ABS, ABSP, DABS, DABSP............................................................................................ 4-303
4.36 File related Instruction .............................................................................................................. 4-304
4.36.1 RSET, RSETP................................................................................................................. 4-304
4.36.2 EMOV, EMOVP, EDMOV, EDMOVP .............................................................................. 4-305
4.36.3 EBREAD ......................................................................................................................... 4-306
4.36.4 EBWRITE ....................................................................................................................... 4-307
4.36.5 EBCMP ........................................................................................................................... 4-308
4.36.6 EERRST ......................................................................................................................... 4-309
4.37 F area Control Instruction ........................................................................................................ 4-310
4.37.1 FSET............................................................................................................................... 4-310
4.37.2 FRST .............................................................................................................................. 4-311
4.37.3 FWRITE .......................................................................................................................... 4-312
4.38 Bit Control Instruction in Word Area ....................................................................................... 4-313
4.38.1 LOADB, LOADBN........................................................................................................... 4-313
4.38.2 ANDB, ANDBN................................................................................................................ 4-314
4.38.3 ORB, ORBN.................................................................................................................... 4-315
4.38.4 BOUT.............................................................................................................................. 4-316
4.38.5 BSET, BRESET .............................................................................................................. 4-317
4.39 Special/Communication Module related Instruction ............................................................. 4-318
4.39.1 GET, GETP ..................................................................................................................... 4-318
4.39.2 PUT, PUTP ..................................................................................................................... 4-320
4.40 Communication Module related Instruction ........................................................................... 4-322
4.40.1 P2PSN ............................................................................................................................ 4-322
4.40.2 P2PWRD ........................................................................................................................ 4-323
4.40.3 P2PWWR........................................................................................................................ 4-324
4.40.4 P2PBRD ......................................................................................................................... 4-325
4.40.5 P2PBWR......................................................................................................................... 4-326
4.41 Position Control Instruction (APM) ......................................................................................... 4-327
4.41.1 ORG................................................................................................................................ 4-327
4.41.2 FLT.................................................................................................................................. 4-328
4.41.3 DST................................................................................................................................. 4-329
4.41.4 IST .................................................................................................................................. 4-330
4.41.5 LIN .................................................................................................................................. 4-331
4.41.6 CIN.................................................................................................................................. 4-332
 4.41.7 SST ................................................................................................................................. 4-333
4.41.8 VTP ................................................................................................................................. 4-334
4.41.9 PTV ................................................................................................................................. 4-335
4.41.10 STP............................................................................................................................... 4-336
4.41.11 SKP ............................................................................................................................... 4-337
4.41.12 SSP............................................................................................................................... 4-338
4.41.13 SSS............................................................................................................................... 4-339
4.41.14 POR .............................................................................................................................. 4-340
4.41.15 SOR .............................................................................................................................. 4-341
4.41.16 PSO .............................................................................................................................. 4-342
4.41.17 NMV.............................................................................................................................. 4-343
4.41.18 INCH ............................................................................................................................. 4-344
4.41.19 RTP............................................................................................................................... 4-345
4.41.20 SNS .............................................................................................................................. 4-346
4.41.21 SRS .............................................................................................................................. 4-347
4.41.22 MOF.............................................................................................................................. 4-348
4.41.23 PRS .............................................................................................................................. 4-349
4.41.24 ZOE .............................................................................................................................. 4-350
4.41.25 ZOD .............................................................................................................................. 4-351
4.41.26 EPRS ............................................................................................................................ 4-352
4.41.27 TEA ............................................................................................................................... 4-353
4.41.28 TEAA............................................................................................................................. 4-354
4.41.29 EMG.............................................................................................................................. 4-355
4.41.30 CLR............................................................................................................................... 4-356
4.41.31 ECLR ............................................................................................................................ 4-357
4.41.32 PST ............................................................................................................................... 4-358
4.41.33 TBP ............................................................................................................................... 4-359
4.41.34 TEP ............................................................................................................................... 4-360
4.41.35 THP............................................................................................................................... 4-362
4.41.36 TMP .............................................................................................................................. 4-364
4.41.37 TSP ............................................................................................................................... 4-365
4.41.38 TCP............................................................................................................................... 4-366
4.41.39 WRT.............................................................................................................................. 4-368
4.41.40 SRD .............................................................................................................................. 4-369
4.41.41 PWR ............................................................................................................................. 4-370
4.41.42 TWR.............................................................................................................................. 4-371
4.41.43 TMD .............................................................................................................................. 4-372
4.42 Position Control Instruction (XPM).......................................................................................... 4-373
4.42.1 XORG ............................................................................................................................. 4-373
4.42.2 XFLT ............................................................................................................................... 4-374
4.42.3 XDST .............................................................................................................................. 4-375
4.42.4 XIST ................................................................................................................................ 4-376
4.42.5 XSST .............................................................................................................................. 4-377
4.42.6 XVTP .............................................................................................................................. 4-378
4.42.7 XPTV .............................................................................................................................. 4-379
4.42.8 XSTP .............................................................................................................................. 4-380
4.42.9 XSKP .............................................................................................................................. 4-381
4.42.10 XSSP ............................................................................................................................ 4-382
4.42.11 XSSS............................................................................................................................. 4-383
4.42.12 XPOR............................................................................................................................ 4-384
4.42.13 XSOR............................................................................................................................ 4-385
4.42.14 XPSO............................................................................................................................ 4-386
4.42.15 XNMV ........................................................................................................................... 4-387
4.42.16 XINCH........................................................................................................................... 4-388
4.42.17 XRTP ............................................................................................................................ 4-389
4.42.18 XSNS ............................................................................................................................ 4-390
4.42.19 XSRS ............................................................................................................................ 4-391
4.42.20 XMOF ........................................................................................................................... 4-392
4.42.21 XPRS ............................................................................................................................ 4-393
4.42.22 XEPRS.......................................................................................................................... 4-394
4.42.23 XTEAA .......................................................................................................................... 4-395
 4.42.24 XEMG ........................................................................................................................... 4-396
4.42.25 XCLR ............................................................................................................................ 4-397
4.42.26 XECLR.......................................................................................................................... 4-398
4.42.27 XPST ............................................................................................................................ 4-399
4.42.28 XSBP ............................................................................................................................ 4-400
4.42.29 XSEP ............................................................................................................................ 4-402
4.42.30 XSHP ............................................................................................................................ 4-404
4.42.31 XSMP............................................................................................................................ 4-406
4.42.32 XSES ............................................................................................................................ 4-407
4.42.33 XSCP ............................................................................................................................ 4-408
4.42.34 XSMD ........................................................................................................................... 4-410
4.42.35 XWRT ........................................................................................................................... 4-412
4.42.36 XSRD............................................................................................................................ 4-413
4.42.37 XCAM ........................................................................................................................... 4-414
4.42.38 XELIN ........................................................................................................................... 4-415
4.42.39 XSSSP ......................................................................................................................... 4-416
4.42.40 XPWR .......................................................................................................................... 4-417
4.42.41 XTWR ......................................................................................................................... 4-418
4.42.42 XSWR ......................................................................................................................... 4-419
4.43 Motion Control Instruction ....................................................................................................... 4-420
4.43.1 GETM, GETMP............................................................................................................... 4-420
4.43.2 PUTM, PUTMP ............................................................................................................... 4-421

Chapter 5 SFC...............................................................................................................................5-1~5-10

5.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 5-1

5.2 SFC Structure .................................................................................................................................. 5-2
5.2.1 Step ...................................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.2.2 Transition.............................................................................................................................. 5-2
5.2.3 Action ................................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2.4 Action Qualifier ..................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.3 Extension Regulation ..................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.3.1 Serial Connection ................................................................................................................. 5-7
5.3.2 Selection Branch .................................................................................................................. 5-7
5.3.3 Parallel Branch ..................................................................................................................... 5-8
5.3.4 Jump..................................................................................................................................... 5-9

Chapter 6 ST .................................................................................................................................6-1~6-22

6.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.2 Comments........................................................................................................................................ 6-1
6.3 Expression....................................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.3.1 + operator ............................................................................................................................. 6-4
6.3.2 - Operator ............................................................................................................................. 6-4
6.3.3 * Operator ............................................................................................................................. 6-5
6.3.4 / Operator.............................................................................................................................. 6-5
6.3.5 MOD operation ..................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.3.6 ** Operator............................................................................................................................ 6-7
6.3.7 AND or & Operator ............................................................................................................... 6-7
6.3.8 OR operator.......................................................................................................................... 6-8
6.3.9 XOR operator ....................................................................................................................... 6-8
6.3.10 = operator ........................................................................................................................... 6-9
6.3.11 <> operator ......................................................................................................................... 6-9
6.3.12 > operator ......................................................................................................................... 6-10
6.3.13 < operator ......................................................................................................................... 6-11
6.3.14 >= operator ....................................................................................................................... 6-11
6.3.15 <= operator ....................................................................................................................... 6-12
6.3.16 NOT operator ................................................................................................................... 6-13
 6.3.17 - operator .......................................................................................................................... 6-13
6.4 Statement ....................................................................................................................................... 6-14
6.4.1 Assignment statements ...................................................................................................... 6-14
6.4.2 Application instruction statements ...................................................................................... 6-14
6.4.3 Selection statements .......................................................................................................... 6-15
6.4.4 Repeat statements ............................................................................................................. 6-15
6.4.5 IF ........................................................................................................................................ 6-17
6.4.6 CASE.................................................................................................................................. 6-18
6.4.7 FOR .................................................................................................................................... 6-19
6.4.8 WHILE ................................................................................................................................ 6-20
6.4.9 REPEAT statement............................................................................................................. 6-21
6.4.10 EXIT ................................................................................................................................. 6-22

Appendix ....................................................................................................Appendix 1-1~Appendix 4-17

Appendix 1. Numeric System & Data Structure ................................................................Appendix 1-1
Appendix 2. Measurement and Precision of Timer ...........................................................Appendix 2-1
Appendix 3. List of Special Relays (F) ...............................................................................Appendix 3-1
Appendix 4. Execution Speed of Instruction .....................................................................Appendix 4-1
 Chapter 1 Summary and Characteristics

Chapter 1 Summary and Characteristics

1.1 Summary
This manual describes performance, function and available instructions of CPU module designed to use PLC
XGT series.

1.2 Characteristics
1) Easy programming tool supported (XG5000).
2) Program modification available during run mode.
3) Open network intended by international standard of communication protocol adopted.
4) Modification available simultaneously with monitoring during run mode.
5) Various special modules completely provided to enlarge the PLC application range.
6) Various instructions of about 758 kinds supported including floating point operation and string type operation.

Notes

Precautions for compatibility of XGK CPU PLC programs

1) I/O area and data register (D) area are different from each other, based on CPU module.
Refer to Device Area (2.3) to change programs
2) The existing program should be made back-up prior to change to a compatible program.
3) Parameters can not be converted.

Precautions for XGB PLC programming

1) This manual was made mainly the usage for XGK CPU. So in case of no supporting in XGB CPU,
it is marked that XGB is not available.

1-1
 Chapter 2 Function

Chapter 2 Function

2.1 Performance Specifications

Performance specifications of standard CPU module (XGK-CPUE/S) and high performance CPU module
(XGK-CPUA/H/U) are as follows;

Specification
Item Remarks
XGK-CPUE XGK-CPUS XGK-CPUA XGK-CPUH XGK-CPUU

Operation Method Cyclic operation, Time-driven operation, Fixed period operation -

Scan synchronized batch processing method (refresh method)

I/O Control Method -
Direct method by instruction
Ladder Diagram
Instructions List
Program Language -
SFC (Sequential Function Chart)
ST (Structured Text)

Number of Basic 40 -
Instructions Application 717 (232 types) -
LD 0.084 ㎲/Step 0.028 ㎲/Step -
Processing
MOV 0.252 ㎲/Step 0.084 ㎲/Step -
Speed
(Basic ±: 1.442 ㎲(S), 2.87 ㎲(D) ±: 0.602 ㎲(S), 1.078 ㎲(D) S: Single Real
Instruction) Real number
x: 1.948 ㎲(S), 4.186 ㎲(D) x: 1.106 ㎲(S), 2.394 ㎲(D) D: Double Real
operation
÷: 1.974 ㎲(S), 4.2 ㎲(D) ÷: 1.134 ㎲(S), 2.66 ㎲(D) number
Program Memory Capacity 16 ksteps 32 ksteps 32 ksteps 64 ksteps 128 ksteps -
I/O Point
1,536 3,072 3,072 6,144 -
(Installation Available)
P P00000 ~ P2047F (32,768) -
M M00000 ~ M2047F (32,768) -
K K00000 ~ K2047F (32,768) -
L L00000 ~ L11263F (180,224) -
F F00000 ~ F2047F (32,768) -
Area
100ms: T0000 – T0999
changeable
10ms : T1000 – T1499
T according to
1ms : T1500 – T1999
parameter
0.1ms: T2000 – T2047
setting
Data
Area C C0000 ~ C2047 -

S S00.00 ~ S127.99 -

D D0000 ~ D19999 D0000 ~ D32767 -

Special module
U U0.0~U1F.31 U0.0~U3F.31 U0.0~U3F.31 U0.0~U7F.31 data Refresh
area
Z Z000 ~ Z127 (128 ) Index register

N N00000 ~ N21503 -
1 block:
R 1 block 2 blocks 32 Kword
(R0 ~ R32767)
R device can be
Flash Area 2Mbyte, 32 blocks
controlled

2-1
 Chapter 2 Function

Specification
Item Remarks
XGK-CPUE XGK-CPUS XGK-CPUA XGK-CPUH XGK-CPUU
Total
256 -
programs
Initialization
1 -
Program task
Configuration Time-driven
32 -
task
Internal point
32 -
task
Operation mode Run, Stop, Debug -
Detection of operation delay, memory error, I/O error, battery error, power
Self-diagnostic function -
error, etc
Modbus slave
Program port RS-232C (1CH), USB (1CH) Supported by RS-
232C port
Data retention
Latch area setting in basic parameter -
at power failure
Maximum expansion stage 2 4 4 8 15m in total length
Internal current
940mA 960mA -
consumption
Weight 0.12kg -

2-2
 Chapter 2 Function

In case of XGB series, performance specifications of standard CPU module (XBM-DR16S, XBM-DN16S,
XBM-DN32S) are as follows;

Specification
Item Remarks
XBM-DR16S XBM-DN16S XBM-DN32S
Cyclic operation, Time-driven operation,
Operation Method -
Interrupt operation, Fixed period operation
Scan synchronized batch processing method (refresh method)
I/O Control Method -
Direct method by instruction
Ladder Diagram
Program Language -
Instructions List

Number of Basic 28 -
Instructions Application 677 -
Processing Speed
0.16 ㎲/Step -
(Basic Instruction)
Program Memory Capacity 10ksteps -

Maximum I/O Point 480 (Main unit + 7 expansions) -

P P0000 ~ P127F (2,048) -
M M0000 ~ M255F (4,096) -
K K00000 ~ K2559F (special area: K2600~2559F) (40,960) -
L L00000 ~ L1279F (20,480) -
F F000 ~ F255F (4,096) -
100ms, 10ms, 1ms : T000 ~ T255
T -
Data (Area changeable according to parameter setting)
Area C C000 ~ C255 -

S S00.00 ~ S127.99 -

D D0000 ~ D5119 (5120 words) Word

U U00.00 ~ U07.31 (Analog data Refresh area: 256 words) Word
Z Z000 ~ Z127 (128 words) Word
N N0000 ~ N3935 (3936 words) Word

Total programs 128 -

Initialization task 1 (_INT) -

Time-driven task Maximum 8 -

External point task Maximum 8 -

Internal device task Maximum 8 -

Operation mode RUN, STOP, DEBUG -

Self-diagnostic function Detection of operation delay, memory error, I/O error -

Program port RS-232C(Loader), RS-232C, RS-485 -

Data retention
Latch area setting in basic parameter -
at power failure
Internal current
400mA 240mA 300mA -
consumption
Weight 140g 100g 110g -

2-3
Chapter 2 Function

Specification
Item Remarks
XBM-DxxxS

Control by instruction, Auto-tuning, PWM output function,

PID control Force output, Set up operation scan time, Anti Windup, -
Delta MV function, SV-Ramp function

Dedicated protocol supported

Cnet I/F Modbus protocol supported RS-232C 1 port -
User define protocol supported RS-485 1 port

1 phase : 20 kHz 4 channel

Capacity -
2 phase : 10 kHz 2 channel
High-speed counter capacity

Support 4 counter modes through input pulse and ACC/DCC method.

• When 1 phase pulse is inputted, ACC/DCC counter
Counter • When 1 phase pulse is inputted, ACC/DCC counter by B phase input
-
mode • When 2 phase pulse is inputted, ACC/DCC pulse input counter
• When 2 phase pulse is inputted, ACC/DCC counter by phase
difference

• Internal/external preset
Additional • Latch counter
-
function • Comparison output
• The number of rotation per unit time

Control axis : 2 axis(X, Y)

Internal capacity

Control method : Position, Speed control

Control unit : Pulse
Standard
Positioning data : Select 30 data of every axis
function
(Operation step no.: 1~30)
Operation mode : End, Keep, Continuous operation
Operation method : Single, Repeat operation
Positioning function

Positioning method : Absolute / Incremental method

Positioning address range : -2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647
Positioning TR output
Speed : Max. 100kpps (Setting speed range: 1 ~ 100,000pps)
ACC/DCC processing (operation pattern: Trapezoidal method) type is
supported
DOG Signal* (Off) and HOME Signal method
Homing
DOG Signal (On) and HOME Signal method
method
DOG Signal method

JOG
Setting speed range: 1 ~ 100,000pps (High-speed/Low-speed)
operation

Additional Inching operation, speed synchronization, position synchronization,

function linear interpolation operation, etc.

Pulse catch Pulse width: 50 ㎲ 8 points (P0000 ~ P0007) -

External device
Pulse width: 50 ㎲ 8 points (P0000 ~ P0007) -
interrupt

Choose one among 1, 3, 5, 10, 20, 70, and 100ms.

Input filter -
(Selectable by module)
* DOG Signal: An approximate Home Signal

2-4
 Chapter 2 Function

2.2 Data Types and Application Methods

2.2.1 Data types

2.2.2 Bit data (Bit)

Bit data displays On/Off with 1 bit like contact or coil, or is processed by 1 bit unit inside the memory
without I/O. In order to set the bit of bit device or word device, the bit data can be used.

1) Bit device
It can be saved or read in bit unit (P, M, L, K, F, T, C and S are available. Refer to 2.3 Device Area for
details). In order to access bit data, bit unit should be specified. And the lowest place should be
marked in hexadecimal, which will make word data easily displayed in bit through the bit device.

P0000 0
Expression Expression of Bit
of Word (Hexadecimal)

P00000’s 1st bit

P00000 M00000

M00000’s 1 bit

2) How to set the bit of word device

Specify bit number applicable to word device number to use the bit data.
Expression is as follows;

Word device number Bit number

Here, Word device number is displayed in decimal and bit number in hexadecimal. For example, in
order to express D0010’s bit number 1, let it set D0010.1. D0011’s b10 bit is to be specified as
D0011.A.

2-5
Chapter 2 Function

th
D00010’s 10 bit

D00010.A M00000

b15 b0
D00010 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Remark

1) Bit device can be also processed in word unit like word device. However, such expression as P0010.1 is
unavailable differently from word device.

2-6
 Chapter 2 Function

2.2.3 Nibble / Byte data (Nibble/Byte)

Nibble and byte as newly added types of data to XGT are used in instructions with 4 or 8 attached at
the back of the name of each instruction.
Nibble and byte can be used with start bit input. And from input contact to 4/8 bits will be the data to
process.

1) Expression range
Nibble: 0~15 (4 bits)
Byte: 0~255 (8 bits)

2) How to use
(1) Bit device (P,M,K,F,L) : takes 4 or 8 bits from bit device’s contact used as operand. When 4
or 8 bits is taken, the bit which exceeds the applicable bit device’s area only will be processed as 0.
If the operand is the destination specified, the data of the exceeded area will be lost.

b15 b4 b0
P0000
(WORD)

P00004's Nibble data

MOV 4 P00004 P00010

b15 b4 b0
The operand with 4 or 8 P0001
attached at the back of (WORD)
instruction will be Nibble
and Byte data. P00010's Nibble data

(2) Word device: takes 4 or 8 bits from word device’s bit contact used as operand. When
specified bit contact is used as the source and 4 or 8 bits is taken from specified contact,
the bit which exceeds the applicable word unit will be processed as 0. As similarly as above, if
specified bit contact is used as the destination, the data exceeding the word will disappear.

b15 b4 b0
D00010
(WORD)
If the bit’s position is C with Byte data to
D00010.C’
take the upper 4 bits will be processed
Byte data
as 0 since exceeding the word range.
MOV 8 D00010.C D00100.4
0 0 0 0
b15 b0
The operand with 4 or 8 D00100
b4
(WORD)
attached at the back of
instruction will be Nibble
and Byte data.

Remark

1) Since T and C are used as bit or word data based on the instruction applied, which may cause confusion, T
and C devices can not be used in nibble & byte instructions.

2-7
Chapter 2 Function

2.2.4 Word data (Word)

Word data is 16-bit numeric data. It can be expressed in decimal and hexadecimal. If data is to be
expressed in hexadecimal, H should be added in front of the number.

· Decimal: -32,768 ~ 32,767 (Signed operation) or 0 ~ 65,535 (Unsigned operation)

· Hexadecimal: H0 ~ HFFFF
Word data can be expressed through word device or bit device.

1) Word device
Word device is specified in 1 point (word) unit.

P00010
MOV D10 D20

1 word such as D10, D20 is the object

2) Bit device
The bit device is expressed with its lowest digit (Digits expressed in hexadecimal – position to display
bit) taken out and will be designated as word data.

P00010
MOV H1234 P0000

b15 b0
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
P0000 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

1 2 3 4

1 word data of P0000 specified

Remark
1) XGK instructions are based on signed operation. U will be added to instructions based on unsigned
operation.
Example) ADD : Signed operation
ADDU: Unsigned operation

2-8
 Chapter 2 Function

2.2.5 Double word data (DWORD)

Double word data is 32-bit numeric data. It can be expressed in decimal and hexadecimal. If data is to
be expressed in hexadecimal, H should be added in front of the number.
· Decimal : -2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647 (Signed operation) or
0 ~ 4,294,967,295 (Unsigned operation)
· Hexadecimal : H0 ~ HFFFFFFFF
Double word data can be expressed through word device or bit device.

1) Word device
It specifies device number applicable to lower 16-bit data among 32-bit data.
Data of (Specified device number) and (Specified device number + 1) is used as double word data.

P00010
DMOV 1234 D21

2-point data (word) such as D21, D22 is the object

Double word instruction

2) Bit device
Like the expression of word data, the bit device is expressed with its lowest digit taken out, using the
data of (Specified device number) and (Specified device number + 1) as double word data.

P00010
DMOV 1234 P0001

2-point data (word) such as P0001, P0002 is the object

Double word instruction

2-9
Chapter 2 Function

2.2.6 Real data (REAL, LREAL)

Real data is 32bit/64bit floating decimal point data, where 32bit floating decimal point data is called Single
Real, and 64-bit floating decimal point data is called Double Real.
Expression is available only in decimal format (decimal point displayed). And both word device and bit
device are available.

(1) Expression range

Single Real number : - 3.402823466e+038 ~ -1.175494351e-038 or
0 or 1.175494351e-038 ~ 3.402823466e+038

Double Real number : - 1.7976931348623157e+308 ~ -2.2250738585072014e-308 or

0 or 2.2250738585072014e-308 ~ 1.7976931348623157e+308

(2) Supported operation instructions

4 basic operations, convert, compare and trigonometrical function instructions are supported.

(3) Area unavailable to express exists.

(Area symmetrically unavailable to express exists even in negative data)
Single Real number: Unsigned 0 ~ 1.40129846e-45
Signed -1.175494351e-038 ~ 1.175494351e-038

Double Real number: Unsigned 0 ~ 4.9406564584124654e-324

Signed -2.2250738585072014e-308 ~ 2.2250738585072014e-308

※ Floating decimal point operation error : Exception (operation error) supported in IEEE754 standard

Flag Designation Condition of Operation Error Remarks

Incorrect operation
F00570 If operation result is not correct due to limit of expression range
error latch
F00571 Underflow latch If operation result is less than min. regular absolute value
F00572 Overflow latch If operation result is more than max. regular absolute value
F00573 0-devision error latch If dividend is limited value other than 0, and divisor is 0
Invalid operation
F00574 If operation process is executed incorrectly
error latch
Incorrect operation
F0057A If operation result is not correct due to limit of expression range
error
F0057B Underflow If operation result is less than min. regular absolute value
F0057C Overflow If operation result is more than max. regular absolute value
F0057D 0-devision error If dividend is limited value other than 0, and divisor is 0
Invalid operation
F0057E If operation process is executed incorrectly
error
Irregular value input
F0057F If irregular data input
error

2-10
 Chapter 2 Function
Remark

1) Expression of real data meets IEEE754 format. However, its direct input with the format is impossible.
2) In case of XGB, even though it is satisfied to operation error condition, flag applied isn’t set.

2-11
Chapter 2 Function

2.2.7 String data

Among application instructions, string related instructions use the data type of number, alphabet,
special sign, etc. to save in ASCII code. In addition, Korean and Chinese letters which need 16-bit
code also can be used.

String data up to NULL code (h00) is regarded as one string row. And the maximum length of a string
row is 32 bytes (including NULL). In other words, up to 31 letters are available in English only, and up
to 15 letters are available in Korean only. And mixing them is also available.

If directly input string’s size exceeds the maximum limit, a warning message will be displayed in the
programming tool of XG5000 to keep such string from input. Data of maximum string input is of 31
bytes + NULL (1 byte).

Example)

2-12
 Chapter 2 Function

2.3 Device Area

2.3.1 Classification of devices
Devices are classified into bit device and word device, based on expression method and operand
processing method.

1) Bit device
(1) Available to express the bit without a ‘.’ (dot) when used in basic instructions as LOAD or OUT.
(2) P, M, K, F, T (bit contact), C (bit contact), L, S
(3) When index function used: If index function is used in bit device, it indicates the bit with the bit
position to which index register’s value is added. However, if bit device is used in application
instruction and the instruction’s operand is of word data, its operation will be in word.
Example) LOAD P00001[Z1] Æ If Z1=8, LOAD P(1+8) = LOAD P00009
MOV P00001[Z1] D10 Æ If Z1=8, MOV P00009 D00010

2) Word device
(1) Basic expression of device is in word unit.
(2) A ‘.’ (dot) is used to specify the device number’s desired bit position .
Example) D10’s BIT4 will be expressed as D10.4.
(3) Applicable device: D, R, U, T (present value area), C (present value area), Z
(4) When index function used: Indexing will be in word unit. And if index is used in operand which
expresses word device in bit, its indexing will be in word unit too. For example, if Z10 is to be used
in operand, its expression will be as D10[Z10].4 with the meaning identical to D(10+Z10’s value).4.

2-13
Chapter 2 Function

2.3.2 Input range per device

Size Bit contact Word data
Device Remark
XGK XGB XGK XGB XGK XGB
P00000 ~ P0000 ~ P0000 ~ P000 ~
P 32,768 points 2,048 points
P2047F P127F P2047 P127
M00000 ~ M0000 ~ M0000 ~ M000 ~
M 32,768 points 4,096 points
M2047F M255F M2047 M255
K00000 ~ K00000 ~ K0000 ~ K0000 ~
K 32,768 points 40,960 points
K2047F K2559F K2047 K2559
F00000 ~ F0000 ~ F0000 ~
F 32,768 points 4,096 points F000 ~ F255
F2047F F255F F2047
T0000 ~ T0000 ~
T ∗1) 2,048 points 256 points T000 ~ T255 T000 ~ T255
T2047 T2047
C0000 ~ C000 ~ C0000 ~ C000 ~
C ∗2) 2,048 points 256 points
C2047 C255 C2047 C255
U00.00.0 ~ U00.00.0 ~ U00.00 ~ U00.00 ~
U 3,072 Word 256 Word
U7F.31.F U07.31.F U7F.31 U07.31

Z 128 Word 128 Word Unavailable Unavailable Z0 ~ Z127 Z0 ~ Z127

S00.00 ~ S00.00 ~
S 128 Word 128 Word Unavailable Unavailable
S127.99 S127.99
L000000 ~ L00000 ~ L00000 ~ L0000 ~
L 180,224 points 20,480 points
L11263F L1279F L11263 L1279
N00000 ~
N 21K Word 3,936 Word Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable
N21503
D00000.0 ~ D0000.0 ~ D00000 ~ D0000 ~
D 32K Word 5,120 Word
D32767.F D5119.F D32767 D5119
R00000.0 ~ R00000 ~
R 32K Word n ∗3) - - -
R32767.F R32767
ZR00000 ~
ZR *4) (32K n) Word - Unavailable - -
ZR65535

Warning
In case of XGK
1) For N area, other than the area used for P2P in communication module is only available.
2) If P2P is used, assigning to N area is available up to 1~8 for P2P number, P2P No.1 consist of 00~63
blocks and for 1 block 41-word N area from N00000 to N00040 is automatically assigned for P2P
service.
3) This may cause operation error when programmed as duplicated with service area. So program with other
area than assigned for P2P service.
In case of XGB
1) In case of XGB, N area can be monitored only.
2) XGB standard type doesn’t support R, ZR area.

∗1)
The word data in timer represents the bit contact’s present value.
∗2)
The word data in counter represents applicable bit contact’s current value.
∗3)
‘n’ expression is a block number, If XGK-CPUH, XGK-CPUA, ‘n=2’ and XGK-CPUS, XGK-CPUE, ‘n=1’. 32K words are 1
block size, available bit contact to display is R00000.0 ~ R32767.F. In addition, word data can be also expressed only up
to R00000 ~ R32767. Refer to 2.3.13 for more details.
*4)
‘n’ expression is a block number, ZR expression range is different according to the size of the ‘n’. Refer to 2.3.13 for
details.
2-14
 Chapter 2 Function

2.3.3 I/O P
I/O P, as the area equivalent to external equipment is composed of push button used as input device,
input section to receive signals of switch or limit switch, solenoid used as output device, and output
section to deliver operation result to motor and lamp.
As for input section P, since input status is kept in PLC’s internal memory, contact A and B are available
to use. And as for output section P, contact A and B are also available. Other sections than used for I/O
in P area can be used just like the auxiliary relay M. According to instructions applied, it can be used in
word unit.

Fig.2.1 Example of I/O Program

Fig. 2.2 How to Embody P Area

2-15
Chapter 2 Function

As shown in Fig. 2.2, P area has sections correspondent 1:1 to each contact of I/O module, which
performs operation with CPU’s internal memory (P area) status regardless of I/O module’s contact
status while PLC is scanning (operating), wholly outputs the content of the internal memory P area
correspondent to output contact after the operation, and then saves the input module’s contact status
in the internal memory P area for the next operation.
Be careful input and output’s contact are assigned all to P area regardless of the status, which may
cause error due to confusion between input P area and output P area when programming.

2.3.4 Auxiliary relay M

As an internal relay inside PLC, direct external output is impossible, but if connected with I/O P, it will be
then possible. When power is On or RUN, other areas than specified as latch area by parameter setting
will be all eliminated to 0. A and B contacts can be used.

2.3.5 Keep relay K

Its application purpose is identical to the auxiliary relay M. However, when power is On or RUN, act like
a latch area 1 in basic parameter used as latch area to preserve the previous data.
A and B contacts be available. The data will be eliminated by the following operation. (Identically the
operation characteristic of latch area 1. Refer to CPU user’s manual 5.5.5 Data latch area setting.)
(1) Making a Delete program and execute a Delete program.
(1) Execute a function to delete memory of the PLC delete menu in XG5000.
(2) Reset key operating of CPU module or Overall reset by XG5000.

2.3.6 Link relay L

The area is for communication module use of flag area when communication module installed. It is
provide the information of communication module (O/S information, service information, flag information).
It is preserve the data identically to the operation characteristic of latch area 1.
If communication module is not used, it can be used identically to the auxiliary relay M.

Remark

1) Refer to the content of View Flag in Variable/comment in XG5000 Software for details on P2P and High-
speed link flag used for L area, or the manual of applicable communication module.

2-16
 Chapter 2 Function

2.3.7 Timer T
4 types of basic cycle available are 0.1ms(XGB not available), 1ms, 10ms and 100ms, whose
operation method is different respectively based on 5 kinds of instructions (TON, TOFF, TMR, TMON,
TRTG).

Maximum setting value is available up to hFFFF (65535) in decimal or in hexadecimal. Timer types
and Operation methods are as shown below in (Figure2.3).

Timer Instruction

Input Condition Timer Area Setting Value

Type of Timers Detail Operation Time Chart

Input On Delay Timer

TON On Delay Addition t
Output t = Setting Value

Input Off Delay Timer

t
TOFF Off Delay Subtraction
Output t = Setting Value

Input Integration Timer

Integration On
TMR Addition
Delay t1 t2
Output t = Setting Value
(t1+t2)

Input Monostable Timer

TMON Monostable Subtraction t

Output t = Setting Value

Input Retriggerable
t
TRTG Retriggerable Subtraction
Output t = Setting Value

Figure 2.3 Timer types & Operation Method

2-17
Chapter 2 Function

2.3.8 Counter C
The count starts at Rising Edge (Off → On) of input condition and stops if reset input then to eliminate
the present value to 0 or to replace it with setting value.

Operation methods are different from each other based on 4 kinds of instructions (CTU, CTD, CTUD,
CTR), with maximum setting value available up to hFFFF. Counter types and Operation Methods are as
shown below in Fig. 2.4.

Type of
Detail Operation Time Chart
Counters
Reset
Count
Pulse Setting Value
Up
CTU Addition
Counter Present
Value

Output

Reset
Count
Pulse Setting Value
Down
CTD Subtraction Present
Counter Value
Output

Reset
Addition
Pulse
Subtraction
Pulse
Up/Down Addition/ Setting Value
CTUD
Counter Subtraction Present
Value

Output

Reset
Count
Pulse
Setting Value
Ring
CTR Addition Present
Counter Value
Output

Fig. 2.4 Type of Counters and Operation Methods

2-18
 Chapter 2 Function

2.3.9 Data register D

It preserves internal data, where Read/Write is available in 16 bits, 32 bits and bit by bit in addition with
bit expression.
As for 32 bits, specified number is processed in the lower 16 bits, and specified number + 1 is
processed in the upper 16 bits.
Bit expression in data register uses the format of “Specified number.Specified bit”. At this moment,
specified bit is expressed in hexadecimal. (Refer to 2.2)
When power is On or RUN, other areas than specified as latch area by parameter will be all eliminated
to 0, and the latch area will be kept as before. Refer to Parameter Setting to specify the latch area.

Example) If 32-bit instruction is used with D10 specified.

Example) Expression of data register D’s bit

b15 b0

D00020 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

D00020.A
MOV h00F3 P00004

Description: The Execution of MOV instruction depends on D20’s bit A value.

2-19
Chapter 2 Function

2.3.10 Step control relay S

As a relay used to control step, it is divided into Last-input preferred and sequence control, based on
instructions (OUT, SET) applied.
When power is On or RUN starting, other areas than specified by parameter will be all eliminated to
the first step of 0.

Refer to the section of chapter 4 OUT Sxx.xx, SET Sxx.xx for more details

2-20
 Chapter 2 Function

2.3.11 Special relay F

This relay provide for information of System. It can be Read up to F0000~F1023 (F199 in case of XGB).
It is provide for overall information of PLC current status, O/S information, RTC data and System clock
etc.
Next area of F1024 (F200 in case of XGB) word is possible limited Write use of private instruction.
This area can be use inspection of external device Warning and Error. Refer to CPU user’s manual
Chapter 6.7.(in case of XGB, Chapter 6.6)

2.3.12 Special module register U (Refresh area)

This register is used to read data from special module installed on slot.
Data of special module installed by back-plain controller will be automatically updated in refresh area.
32 words per slot are assigned to U area.
Thus, U area is made up of 4,096 words in total (8 bases * 16 slots * 32 words = 4,096 words). In
XGB case, 256 words in total (1 base * 8 slots * 32 words = 256 words).
U area value used per slot is fixed regardless of slot which module is installed on or which is empty.

b15 b0 b15 b0
U00.00 Slot no. 0 U00.00 Slot no. 0
U00.31 U00.31
U01.00 Slot no. 1 U01.00 Slot no. 1
U01.31 U01.31

U7F.00 U07.00
Slot no. 127 Slot no. 7
U7F.31 U07.31

XGK XGB

Basic expression of U area is in Uxy.z, where x is for base number 0~ 7, y is for slot number 0 ~ F,
and z is for internal memory’s word number of special module.

U area is also expressed in bit with U3A.12.x (x: Bit position, in hexadecimal).
If no special module is installed on the actually specified slot, or effective data area specified is
exceeded, the specified area’s value will be 0 with no error found.
For example, if the refresh area of the special module installed on slot No.1 of base No. 1 are
effective only up to 4 words (No.0 ~ No.3), the word No.4 (U31.04) will be read as 0. Thus, h00F3 will
be saved in D00004.

P00052
ADD h00F3 U31.04 D00004

Use PUT(P) or GET(P) instruction to read or write value in other area than refresh area of the special
module installed.
Refer to Information about area of each module with special module user’s manual.
If the data is written in U area of D/A conversion module installed, It is refreshed at Scan End and it is
outputted.
Data can be written in specified position only with D/A conversion module.
If an instruction is used to save data in position on which other module than D/A conversion module is
installed, it is processed by NOP instruction. In this case, no error may occur.

2-21
Chapter 2 Function

2.3.13 File register R(in case of XGB standard type, not available)

File register is exclusively used for internal flash memory. Flash memory can not save the data when
processing scan program, since it takes a little time to save the data. So scan program using the flash
memory data move to the file register. If need to save the data, save to the flash memory again.

1) Characteristics
(1) As an exclusively used register for internal flash memory, it is used to read or write a block of internal
flash to the file register.

(2) The size of one block*1) is 32K word, identical to that of the block of internal flash memory.
(3) Write the data of file register in flash memory with EBWRITE instruction to keep the data permanently.
(4) File register operates same as latch area 1. Namely, Data is eliminated by Overall reset with reset
switch, reset with D.CLR and reset with XG5000.
(5) It will need several scans to read or write the block of file register to the block of flash memory.
Completion state can be checked via the bit of applicable block of F160 (_RBLOCK_RD_FLAG) and
F162 (_RBLOCK_WR_FLAG).
(6) Both index function and indirect setting are available. At this time, indirect setting range for ZR is up to
ZR0~ZR32767 words, and Index function ([Z]) range available is -32768~32767 among device
number of ZR. As for R, both indirect setting and index function are all available in the specified block
range. If applicable block range is exceeded, index-exceeded error occurred.

2) Size

XGB Compact type

Classification XGK-CPUS/CPUE XGK-CPUU/CPUH/CPUA
(XBC-DxxH)
File register 32K WORD * 1 block 32K WORD * 2 blocks 10K WORD * 1 block
32K WORD * 32
Internal flash memory 32K WORD * 32 blocks 10K WORD * 2 blocks
blocks

*1)
Only one block (block 0) of the file register is provided for XGK-CPUS, XGK-CPUE and XGB Compact type(XBC-DxxH).
And 2 blocks are provided for XGK-CPUU, XGK-CPUH and XGK-CPUA. In XGK PLC the internal flash memory have 32
blocks in total and in XGB compact type have 2blocks.
※ In case of XGB standard type, file register (R) is not available.
2-22
 Chapter 2 Function

3) How to express
(1) R - File register block unit expression (32K word fixed per block)
(2) ZR – Whole file register expression (range depends on unit type )
(3) Flash area has no device name, accessible by exclusive instruction.

Word
Device Bit expression
Write Read # [Z] Data preserved
Name expression (including
DW)
R O O O O O O Level of latch 1 area
ZR X O O O O O Level of latch 1 area
Internal Exclusive Exclusive
X X X X Permanently
Flash instruction instruction

(4) As for XGK-CPUH, configuration example of file register is as shown below;

4) Error flag
Number Size Designation Description Remarks
F158 Word Flag of block No. Displays presently used block No.
Representative flag of flash
F1590 BIT ON if any flash block Read flag is ON
block Read
Representative flag of flash
F1591 BIT ON if any flash block Write flag is ON
block Write
Representative flag of flash
F1592 BIT ON if any flash block Write error flag is ON
block Write error
F1600
BIT Flag of flash block n Read ON if data is read in block n 32
~ F161F
F1620
BIT Flag of flash block n Write ON if data is written in block n 32
~ F163F
ON if Write data in block n fails.
F1640 Flag of flash block n Write
BIT If error occurs, both applicable Write flag and Write 32
~ F165F error
representative flag keep ON state.

Note

(1) R, ZR device is not supported at XGB standard type. So reading/writing flash is not supported and
error flag is not supported.

2-23
Chapter 2 Function

2.3.14 Communication register N

Communication register is exclusively used for P2P register which is available for P2P service setting
when communication module of Cnet, FEnet, FDEnet and the others are installed on slot. P2P setting is
available with Network Manager (XG-PD) and private instructions. Communication register N used for
P2P setting with instructions.
Private instructions for P2P setting refer to ‘chapter 4. Details of instructions’. (XGB is not supported.)
It can be set 64 blocks (0~63) per P2P service (P2P 1~ P2P 8). And one block can assign 1 word station
number, 4 read areas and 4 save areas (1~4). Also, there are device name save area of 4 words and
variable number save area each read and save area.

P2P Station no. and save Block no. N device

Ref.
no. area XGK XGB XGK XGB
P2P 1 Station no. N00000 N00000
WRITE Device1 Name N00001 ~ N00004 N00001 ~ N00004
WRITE Device1 Size N00005 N00005
WRITE Device2 Name N00006 ~ N00009 N00006 ~ N00009
WRITE Device2 Size N00010 N00010
WRITE Device3 Name N00011 ~ N00014 N00011 ~ N00014
WRITE Device3 Size N00015 N00015
WRITE Device4 Name N00016 ~ N00019 N00016 ~ N00019
WRITE Device4 Size 0 N00020 N00020
READ Device1 Name N00021 ~ N00024 N00021 ~ N00024
READ Device1 Size N00025 N00025
READ Device2 Name N00026 ~ N00029 N00026 ~ N00029
READ Device2 Size N00030 N00030
READ Device3 Name N00031 ~ N00034 N00031 ~ N00034
READ Device3 Size N00035 N00035
READ Device4 Name N00036 ~ N00039 N00036 ~ N00039
READ Device4 Size N00040 N00040
1 ~ 63 1 ~ 31 N00041 ~ N02623 N00041 ~ N01311
P2P 2 0 ~ 63 0 ~ 31 N02624 ~ N05247 N01312 ~ N02623
P2P 3 0 ~ 63 0 ~ 31 N05248 ~ N07871 N02624 ~ N03935
P2P 4 0 ~ 63 - N07872 ~ N10495 -
P2P 5 0 ~ 63 - N10496 ~ N13119 -
P2P 6 0 ~ 63 - N13120 ~ N15743 -
P2P 7 0 ~ 63 - N15744 ~ N18367 -
P2P 8 0 ~ 63 - N18368 ~ N20991 -

Remark
(1) It can remove only [Online]-[Clear PLC] menu on XG5000 since XGK N area is always latched.
(2) N20992~N21503 area not used in P2P service can be used for Data register(D). But, it is basically
latched area different from D.
(3) XGB’s N area is only available to be monitored.

2-24
 Chapter 2 Function

2.4 Comprehension of Instructions

2.4.1 Types of instructions

XGK/XGB instructions are widely classified into basic instructions, application instructions and special
instructions.

1) Basic instructions
Basic instructions are composed of contact /coil related instruction such as LOAD/OUT,
timer/counter, master control and step control instruction.

2) Application instructions
Application instructions are almost the others than basic instructions. According to functions of
instructions, they can be classified as described in 3.4. In this chapter, they will be classified based on
operand types so to understand XGK/XGB instructions without difficulty.
Operand types are bit, nibble/byte, word/double word, real, string, etc.

2-25
Chapter 2 Function

2-26
 Chapter 2 Function

2.4.2 Mnemonic generation

1) Data Type
① None : Word
② D : Double word
③ R : Single Real number
④ L : Double Real number
⑤ $ : String
⑥ 4 : Nibble
⑦ 8 : Byte
⑧ B : Bit

2) Other Expressions
① G : Group
② P : Pulse type instruction
③ B : Data in BCD format
④ U : Unsigned data

Even if with some exceptions, the instructions derivable from one instruction will confirm to the
regulations specified below;
Only one letter can be positioned in front of the basic instruction, and 2 or more letters at the back.

Example) DADDBP
ADD

D 4
R 8
L B
$ P
G U
B

<Exceptions >
In Input Terminal Compare Instruction, the data type is positioned at the back of instruction.
All the instructions with prefix or suffix in front or at the back are not always derived instructions.

Example) GET, SUB, STOP

2-27
Chapter 2 Function

2.4.3 Signed operation and Unsigned operation

Basic instruction system of XGK/XGB is of signed operation. Both Signed / Unsigned operations are
all available for 4 basic operations, Increase/Decrease operation, and Compare operation among
operation instructions.

1) Operation instruction
① Signed operation instructions: ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, DADD, DSUB, DMUL, DDIV, INC, DEC, DINC,
DDEC.
② Unsigned operation instructions: ADDU, SUBU, MULU, DIVU, DADDU, DSUBU, DMULU, DDIVU, INCU,
DECU, DINCU, DDECU.
③ Difference: Signed operation dose not set CY, Z flag according to operation result. Namely,
if the program is prepared to add 1 to h7FFF with ADD instruction, its result will be
h8000 (-32768) with no flag set. On the other hand, unsigned operation instruction sets CY,
Z flag according to operation result.

2) Compare instructions
① Signed instructions : LOAD X, AND X, OR X, LOADR X, ANDR X, ORR X, LOAD$ X, AND$ X,
OR$ X, LOAD3 X, AND3 X, OR3 X, etc.
② Unsigned instructions: CMP, DCMP, CMP4, CMP8, TCMP, GCMP, etc.
③ Since Compare instructions have no flag (CY, Z) generated, the difference only is between
Signed and Unsigned compared.

2.4.4 Indirect setting type ( # )

① Value of the number that device’s data value specified in a device indicates is taken.
② For example, if the value of 20 is saved in D10 with #D10 used, it means that the value of
20 in D10, namely, D area’s 20th D20 is specified.
③ Available device: P area, M area, K area, L area, N area, D area, R area, ZR area
④ At this moment, each indirect setting can not exceed each device’s range. In other words, #P can not
be used to indicate M area.
⑤ If any value of indirectly specified device exceeds applicable device’s area, operation error flag
(F110) will be On.
⑥ Indirect setting is not available for bit, nibble and byte operand.

Example)

2-28
 Chapter 2 Function

Remark
1) Each device’s indirect setting range available is as follows;
P area, M area, L area, K area : respectively 0 ~ 2047
D area : 0 ~ 32767
R area : 0 ~ 32767
ZR area : 0 ~ 65535 (Limited by CPU type)
2) If the device value indirectly specified exceeds applicable device area, Operation Error Flag (F110) will be
Set. If the Error operation setting is set by ‘Continue running when an arithmetic error occurs’, Operation Error
Flag will be Set and the instruction will be skip. If it is not, Operation Error Flag becomes Set and CPU module
error is occurred and operation is stop concurrently.

2.4.5 Index function (Z)

1) Characteristics
① With device setting through index register, use index function in sequence program to let the used
device positioned with directly specified device number plus index register value. For example, if Z1 is
5 with P10 [Z1] used, P (10+5)=P15 will be the object to use.
② Index register Z0 ~ Z127 (128)
③ Setting range of the value available : -32768~32767
④ Index function of word/bit device
⑤ Available in indirect setting: #D00100[Z12]
⑥ If index result area is exceeded, operation error flag will be set (F110). If the Error operation setting is
‘Continue running when an arithmetic error occurs’, operation error flag will be set and instruction will be skip.

2) Devices available
① Bit device : P, M, L, K, F, T, C
② Word device : Present value of U, D, R, N, T, present value of C
Example) MOV T1 [Z1] D10 : If Z1’s value is 5, T(1+5) Æ T6’s present value is transferred to D10.
③ How to use index for U device : Index is unavailable for slot number like U10.3 [Z10], but only
available for channel. However, based on index value, different slot’s channel can be specified.

3) How to use
① Attach [] at the back of the operand to use.
② Example of bit device : Based on types of operands (bit/word) used for applicable instruction, its
indexing will be in bit/word unit.

Example.1) LOAD P10 [Z1]: If Z1’s value is 5, LOAD P (10+5) Æ LOAD P15 (bit).
Example.2) MOV P10 [Z1] D10: Where, since P10 means word, P10 [Z1] will be as P (10+5) =
P15word.

③ Example of word device: Indexing will be only in word unit. Absolute bit unit indexing is unavailable.

Example) LOAD D10[Z1].5 : If Z1’s value is 5, LOAD P(10+5).5 Æ LOAD P15.5 (bit).
Caution) Expression such as LOAD D10.5 [Z1] can not be used.

④ The index function can be helpfully used in variable with the meaning of arrangement, to take the
variable value designated as index or to save the value in the specified variable.
⑤ Indirectly specified index formula is also available.

Expression: #D00010 [Z010]

Description: Process #D00010 first. In other words, if D00010’s value is 100, it means #D00010 Æ
D00100. Then process D00100 [Z010].

Application: It can be applied as the arrangement notion of structure as shown below. Namely, it can
be set the start position D00100, D00200, D00300 etc. use of indirect designation. Then using the
function of Index, find the specified position.

2-29
Chapter 2 Function

#D00010[Z10]

Program Example)

P00020
D00100 #D00010
MOV [Z010] [Z003]

D00103 D00200[Z003]

D00205

Z10 3 Z003 5

D00010 200

D00100 h0042
D00200

D00103 h1234

D00205 h1234

2-30
 Chapter 2 Function

2.5 Precautions for Programming

1) Status of error found
① If the error found is the one described in the description of each instruction.
② If an applicable network dose not exist with link device used.
③ If an applicable module dose not exist with analog data register used.
④ If applicable device’s range is exceeded with index formula used.
⑤ If applicable device’s range is exceeded with indirectly setting applied.
⑥ If the size to save converted value exceeds the range of expression.
(If real value exceeds -32,768~32,767 range with R2I instruction used, operation error may occur)

2) Inspection of device range

① Instructions dealing with devices with variable length (instructions to specify the number of data
transferred such as GMOV, FMOV, GSWAP, etc.) inspect the device’s range. If the range is exceeded,
operation error (F110) may occur.
For details, see the error description of each instruction.
② Index formula when used will cause operation error if exceeding the used device’s range.
③ Indirect setting when applied will cause operation error if exceeding the used device’s range.
④ String instruction when used will cause operation error (F110) if exceeding the applicable device range
earlier than 31 letters starting from specified head number.
⑤ Device’s last number is unavailable for 32-bit or 64-bit related instructions.
In this case, the input will be limited in XG5000.

3) Inspection of device’s data

As for BCD data, other range than specified in the table will cause operation error (F110).

Instruction Data Size BCD format

BCD4(P) 4 bits 0~9
BCD8(P) 8 bits 0~99
BCD(P) 16 bits 0~9,999
DBCD(P) 32 bits 0~99,999,999

String data is not inspected. If data value is unavailable to express when applicable device value is monitored
in XG5000, its expression may be abnormal.
And the real data if exceeding the expression range available will cause operation error (F110).

2-31
Chapter 2 Function

2.6 Parameter Setting

Parameter setting can be through basic parameter settings on XG5000. Basic parameter setting window is
as shown below.

2.6.1 Fixed period operation mode

This function used for operating the PLC program by Fixed period operation mode. It is available to set
1ms~999ms in Fixed operation time mode. The time should be less than the value of Watchdog timer
and longer than Scan time. If value of Fixed operation time is set more than value of the Watchdog timer,
PLC do not operate normally since Watchdog timer error will be occur.

The way of checking status of Fixed period operation is menu [Online]-[PLC Information] on XG5000.
The status ‘(Fixed Period: 10ms)’ will be expressed on the PLC information window.

In case of current Scan time means execution of real program time that is not execution cycle time. The
reason is to show the spare time of Scan time when program Add/Delete, As providing real Scan time of
current program.
Maximum Scan time indicates Fixed Period time. If time exceed the Fixed Period time, Scan time will be
shown real exceeded Scan time.

2-32
 Chapter 2 Function

Remark

(1) If Scan time is longer than ‘Fixed time operation’ setting time, ‘_CONSTANT_ER [F0005C]’ flag is
‘ON’. And CHK LED is blinking. Also, Scan time is recorded in maximum Scan time.

2.6.2 Setting & Assignment of I/O reservation function

Each slot can designates sharing points of I/O in 16, 32 or 64 unit to specify special/communication module
if applicable. Empty slot shares 64 points at Fixed type and 16 points at Variable type.

Assignment of I/O number is divided into Fixed type and Variable type (XGB is not supported) available based
on basic parameter setting.

Classification Assignment example of I/O number

• 64 bits are assigned to each slot of base regardless of module installation or its type.
• I/O number applicable to 16 slots is assigned to one base. In other words, base No.1’s start number
will be P00640.

• For example, assignment of I/O number to 12-slot base will be as follows;

X Slot no. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
G P C In- In- In- In- Out- Out- Out- Out- In- Out- Out- Out-
W P put put put put put put put put put put put put
K 32 64 16
R U 16 16 32 32 64 32 16 32 32

P0 P40 P80 P120 P160 P200 P240 P280 P320 P360 P400 P440
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
P3F P7F P11F P15F P19F P23F P27F P31F P35F P39F P43F P47F
Assignment of
I/O number • All modules is allocated per 64 points.(including special, communication)
(Fixed type)
Slot no. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Main
Out-put 32

Special
Special
Input 16

Input 16

Input 64

Comm.

Unit

X
G P0 P40 P80 P120 P160 P200 P240 P280
B ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
P3F P7F P11F P15F P19F P23F P27F P31F

In case of setting module type by I/O parameter and real module type is different, module
mismatch error occurs and Run is not possible. Main unit

2-33
Chapter 2 Function
• Based on installed module specified per slot, points will be assigned thereto;
- Specified points will be assigned if installed module specified by I/O parameter.
- To the slot not specified by I/O parameter, points will be automatically assigned according to
actually installed module.
(Caution: 16 points will be assigned to 8-point module)
- 16 points will be assigned to empty slot which is not specified by I/O parameter
• Points only available to specify without module specified by I/O parameter.
• 16 points will be assigned to special module and slot with communication module
Assignment of I/O installed
• For example, assignment of I/O number to 12-slot base will be as follows;
number (Variable
type) Slot No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
P C In- In- In- In- Out- Out- Out- Out- In- Out- Out- Out-
W P put put put put put put put put put put put put
R U 16 16 32 64 16 32 32 64 32 16 32 32

P00 P10 P20 P40 P80 P90 P110 P130 P170 P190 P200 P220
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
P0F P1F P3F P7F P8F P10F P12F P16F P18F P19F P21F P23F

Remark
In case of XGK
1) Assignment type of I/O number is specified in basic parameter.
2) Base number of main base is '0' fixed, and a switch to specify base number is installed on the
expansion base.
3) If module type is specified by I/O parameter, it should be identical to the type of actually installed
module to start operation.
4) Fixed type assigns of I/O number in expansion step 1 first slot of 10 points Output module at
P00640~P0064F, Variable type assigns P00240~P0024F. Assigning I/O number of expansion
base can be certificated on System Monitor in XG5000.
5) Function of reserving module points to draw up a program without changing I/O number when
module replace with alternative device expansion or malfunctioning.
6) Refer to 2.3 Basic System in CPU manual for details. (The setting has to set in advance.)

2.6.3 Setting of time

1) Watchdog time setting

The time value setting of Scan Watchdog timer is to remove stop of PLC by error of program. Watchdog
time is to set available from 10ms to maximum 1000ms (1 second). Initial value is 50ms.

2) Setting of standard input filter

Set the value of input filter in DC input module. Refer to XG5000 user’s manual chapter 9 Parameter for
more details.

2.6.4 Setting of output control

It provides a function of output in debugging, maintaining output when error occurring, maintaining
output when Run changed to Stop, maintaining output when Stop changed to Run, deleting except for
latch area when error occurring as part of setting the output control on PLC operation status.

2-34
 Chapter 2 Function
2.6.5 Setting of timer area
Time setting (100ms, 10ms, 1 ms, 0.1ms) follows the timer number.

XGK XGB
Classification
Setting available Setting available
If not set (Default) If not set (Default)
area area
100ms T0000 ~ T2044 T0000 ~ T0999 T0000 ~ T253 T000 ~ T191

10ms T0001 ~ T2045 T1000 ~ T1499 T0001 ~ T254 T192 ~ T200

1ms T0002 ~ T2046 T1500 ~ T1999 T0002 ~ T255 T201 ~ T255

0.1ms T0003 ~ T2047 T2000 ~ T2047 - -

2.6.6 Setting of latch area in data memory

① After power is On (Reset), during [Program (Stop) mode Æ RUN mode] or [RUN mode Æ Program
(Stop) mode], it specifies latch area to keep present data. Devices with such a latch area available to
set are D, M, S, C, T, etc. K, L, N and R devices will be latched even if latch is not specified for a
latch device.
② Latch area can be set in device setting with latch area 1 and 2 as divided.
③ Latch area 1 and 2 can not be duplicated.
④ Both latch area 1 and 2 have latch function to keep data even if reset. The difference between the
two is that data of latch area 1 is deleted if overall reset in XG5000 while data of latch area 2 is being
preserved.
⑤ In order to delete data of latch area 2, keep Data Clearing Switch On for 3 seconds or more while
PLC is in Stop mode.

Data clearing key

Classification Stop<->Run Reset Overall reset
(minimum 3 second)
Latch area 1 Data kept Data kept Data cleared Data cleared

Latch area 2 Data kept Data kept Data kept Data cleared
K, L, R devices Data kept Data kept Data cleared Data cleared

N device Data kept Data kept Data kept Data kept

Remark

(1) XGB doesn’t have data clear key. So latch area 2 is deleted only by Online -> Clear PLC.

2-35
Chapter 2 Function

2.6.7 Setting program progress when errors occurring

1) Continue running when an arithmetic error occurs

It determines continuing operation whether or not error occurred when instruction is executed (except
for floating-point operation instruction).

① Operation in set
Operation error flag is changed to Set, Error Step is recorded in F0048 (DWORD) when operation
error is occurred. In the case of Error information is recorded in System Log, PLC operation status
is continued Run status. Also, CHK LED is blinking until operation error is removed.

② Operation in cancellation
PLC operation status is immediately changed on error status when operation error is occurred.
Operation error flag is changed to Set, Error Step is recorded in F0048 (DWORD). In the case of
should be remove operation error and execute Run again.

2) Continue running when a floating point error occurs (XGB not available)
It determines whether operation will continue or not by error occurred when floating point operation
instruction is executed. Set/Cancellation operation is identical with ‘Continue running when an
arithmetic error occurs’.

3) Continue running when a fuse error occurs (XGB not available)

It determines whether operation will continue or not by short of fuse built in module. After setting of
Error information is recorded in System Log and PLC operation status continue Run status. PLC
operation status will be changed error status when function setting is canceled.

4) Continue running when a I/O module error occurs (XGB not available)
It is not possible control at CPU by malfunctioning I/O module installed, it determines whether
operation will continue or not.

5) Continue running when a special module error occurs (XGB not available)
It is not possible control at CPU by malfunctioning special module installed, it determines whether
operation will continue or not.

6) Continue running when a communication module error occurs (XGB not available)
It is not possible control at CPU by malfunctioning communication module installed, it determines
whether operation will continue or not.

Remark

If module need to change the reason of 3), 4), 5), 6), it can be change in running status using [Online]-
[Module Changing Wizard] at XG5000.

2-36
 Chapter 2 Function

2.6.8 Interrupt setting

(1) Function
It tentatively stops scan program’s operation to process internal/external signals produced regularly or
irregularly and then deal with applicable functions according to priority which is available from 2 to 7.

(2) Type of task programs and setting range of task number

•Task programs are classified into 3 types as follows;
▶ Cyclic cycle task program: up to 32 available for XGK, up to 8 for XGB
▶ Internal device task program: up to 32 available, up to 8 for XGB

• Cyclic cycle task program

▶ Program is executed based on the specified time interval.
▶ Setting range of the task number available is 0 ~ 31 for XGK, 0 ~ 7 for XGB.

• Internal device task program

▶ Applicable program is executed if start condition of internal device is fulfilled.
▶ Detection of device’s start condition is executed after scan program.
▶ Setting range of the task number available is 64 ~ 95 for XGK, 16 ~ 23 for XGB.

Remark

1) Please refer to 2.8.1 Interrupt Function for more details.

2-37
Chapter 2 Function

2.7 CPU processing

2.7.1 Operation processing
Operation

1) Input refresh
It reads data from input module before program is executed to save wholly in specified data memory’s
input (P) area.

2) Output refresh
It outputs data in data memory’s output (P) area wholly to output module after END instruction is
executed.

3) In case I/O direct instruction is executed (IORF instruction)

It will perform I/O refresh while program is executed for the I/O module specified by instruction.

4) In case output’s OUT instruction is executed:

It will save sequence program’s operation result in output area of data memory and refresh output
contact after END instruction is executed.

Remark

1) Scan: It is a series of operations to read contact status from input module to save in P area (input refresh) and
then perform instructions from 0000 step to END in cyclic sequence based on the previous process to deal
with self-diagnosis, timer and counter, and write the value changed by program executed in output module
(output refresh).

2-38
 Chapter 2 Function

2.7.2 Description of operation in applicable mode

CPU module’s operation status is classified into Run mode, Stop mode and Debug mode.
How to perform operation will be described below based on each operation mode.

1) Run mode

This mode is used to perform normal program operation.

First scan start in RUN mode

Data area initialized

Check program if effective so to

decide to execute it or not

Input refresh executed

Program executed, Interrupt

program executed

Check installed module if

abnormal or displaced

Output refresh executed

Communication service/other
internal process

RUN mode kept Change

operation mode

Change to other mode

Run in operation mode changed

(1) Process after mode changed

Data area will be initialized at start, and program will be checked if effective to decide to execute or not.

(2) Operation process

I/O refreshes and program operation will be executed.
It detects operation condition of interrupt program to execute interrupt program.
It checks installed module if abnormal or displaced.
It deals with communication service and other internal processing.

2-39
Chapter 2 Function

2) Stop mode
It is the mode in Stop status without program operation. Program transfer is available only in remote STOP mode
via XG5000.

(1) Process after mode changed

Output image area will be eliminated, with output refresh executed.

(2) Operation process

① It executes I/O refresh.
② It checks installed module if abnormal or displaced.
③ It deals with communication service and other internal processing.

3) Debug mode
This mode is used to search for program defects and to trace operation process. Changing to this mode is only
available in STOP mode, where details of program execution status and each data can be checked to inspect
the program.

(1) Process after mode changed

① Data area will be initialized in the beginning of the mode changed.
② Output image area will be eliminated, with input refresh executed.

(2) Operation process

① It executes I/O refresh.
② It performs debug run according to setting status.
③ After debug run to the last of the program, it executes output refresh.
④ It checks installed module if abnormal or displaced.
⑤ It performs communication and other services.

(3) Conditions of debug run

4 conditions of debug run are as described below. And if ever reached, the brake pointer of different kind can
be specified.

Operation condition Description of operation

Executed one by one
operation unit After one operation unit executed by Run instruction, it will stop.
(step over)
Break Point executed
If Break Point is specified in program, it will stop at the specified point.
as specified
Executed based on If contact area to detect or status to stop is specified (Read, Write, Value), it will
contact’s status stop when the specified operation occurs at the specified contact.
Executed based on
If the number of scans to run is specified, it will stop after run as many as the
the number of scans
specified number of scans.
specified

(4) How to operate

① Perform Run after conditions of debug run are set in XG5000.
② Interrupt program can be specified in each interrupt unit to decide to run or not (Enable / Disable).
(Refer to Chapter 12. Debugging in XG5000 user’s manual for more details.)

2-40
 Chapter 2 Function

4) Change of operation mode

(1) How to change operation mode

Run mode can be changed as follows;

① Changeable by mode key of CPU module

② Changeable by connecting programming tool (XG5000) with CPU’s communication port
③ Changeable by other CPU module connected with network via XG5000 connected to CPU’s
communication port
④ Changeable by XG5000, HMI and computer link module connected to network
⑤ Changeable by ‘STOP‘ instruction’ while program is executed

(2) Types of Operation modes

① Operation mode can be specified as below;

XGK XGB
Operation mode Remote
XG5000 command
switch allowable Operation mode Operation mode
switch
RUN X X RUN Local RUN (RUN)

Remote RUN
RUN On Remote RUN
(RUN)

STOP STOP Remote STOP Remote STOP

(STOP)
Debug Debug RUN Debug (Debug)
Executing mode Previous Changed operation
Off
change operation mode mode
RUN -> STOP - X STOP Remote Stop
(STOP)

② In case of XGK, operation mode can be changed to remote mode only if in status of ‘Remote Allowable:
On’, ‘Mode Switch: STOP’.
In case of XGB, operation mode can be changed to remote mode if in status of ‘Mode Switch: STOP’
③ To change ‘RUN’ to ‘STOP’ with the switch, let the switch positioned at
(Stop) Æ Run Æ Stop.

Remark

1) If operation mode is changed to RUN mode by using switch in remote RUN mode, PLC will
keep on running without interruption.
2) Though modification during RUN is available in Local RUN mode, the operation of the mode
change via XG5000 is limited. Let it set to Local RUN mode only not to allow mode to change in
remote area.

2-41
Chapter 2 Function

2.8 Special Function

2.8.1 Interrupt function

How to set XG5000 of XGT programming S/W will be described below simply to help understand interrupt
function. (Refer to XG5000 manual for details on XG5000.)

Scan Program

Interrupt 1
Interrupt 1 found (Program 1)

Interrupt 2
Interrupt 2 found (Program 2)

Interrupt 3
(Program 3)

Interrupt 2 found
Interrupt 3 found

Interrupt 2
(Program 2)

Interrupt 4
Interrupt 4 found
(Program 4)

END

Remark

1) If power is On, all the interrupt will be enabled.

2-42
 Chapter 2 Function

1) Interrupt programming

Create the task in the XG5000’s project window as below and add the program for each task to execute.
Refer to XG5000 manual for more details.

2) Types of tasks

Types and functions of tasks are as specified below.

Types Cyclic cycle task Internal contact task

(Interval task) (Single task)
Standard
XGK XGB XGK XGB
Quantity 32 8 32 8

Operation Cyclic cycle

Specified conditions of internal device
conditions (up to 4,294, 967. 295 second available in 1ms unit)

Detection & Executed by searching for condition after scan

Executed periodically per setting time
Execution program completed

Detection
Max. 0.2 ms delayed Delayed as much as max. scan time
delayed time

Execution 2 ~ 7 levels setting

As specified in the left
priority (Level 2 is most prioritized)

Specified in the range Specified in the range Specified in the range Specified in the range
Task
of 0~31 by user not to of 0~7 by user not to of 64~95 by user not to of 16~23 by user not to
number
be duplicated be duplicated be duplicated range be duplicated

3) Processing of task program

Common processing method and precautions for task program will be described.

(1) Characteristics of task program

· Task program dose not repeat every scan differently from scan program but perform execution only
when its conditions are met. Task program shall be prepared in due consideration of this.

· For example, if timer and counter are used for cyclic cycle task program with a cycle of 10 seconds,
tolerance of the timer can be maximum 10 seconds. And since the counter checks its input status every
10 seconds, any input changed within 10 seconds will not be counted.

2-43
Chapter 2 Function

(2) Execution priority

. Task program with higher priority will be processed first if there are lots of standing-by tasks to execute.
If standing-by tasks are with the same priority, the task that appeared earlier will be processed first.

. If cyclic cycle execution task and external contact task occur at the same time, the external
contact task will be executed first.

. Priority of tasks can be assigned only in each task.

. Priority of task programs shall be specified in consideration of characteristics, importance and requested
execution-related emergency of program.

(3) Processing delayed time

Processing delay of task program is caused by the following factors, which shall be considered when
setting task or programming.

. Task’s detection delay (refer to details of each task)

. Program execution delay due to execution of precedent task program

(4) Initialization and Relation between scan program and task program
. User defined task dose not start when initialization task program is executed.

. Since scan program’s priority is the lowest, task program will be preferably processed with the scan
program stopped if task occurs. Thus, if tasks occur frequently during 1 scan or are concentrated
intermittently, scan time may increases abnormally, which needs precautions against when setting
condition of task.

(5) Protection of executed program from task program

.If continuity of program execution might be lost while performed, by a task program with higher priority,
the task program can be partially prevented from execution. At this time, DI (task program operation
disallowed) or ‘EI (task program operation allowed)’ application instruction can be used to protect program.

. Insert ‘DI’ application instruction in the start position to protect or ‘EI’ application instruction in the position
to cancel the protection. Initialization task will not be under the influence of ‘DI’ or ‘EI’ application
instruction.

4) Processing of cyclic cycle task program

When task program’s task (operation condition) is set to cyclic cycle, its processing is as described below.

(1) Setting items in task

. Specify execution cycle and priority of the task which will be operation condition of the task program to
execute. And check task number to manage task.

(2) Processing of cyclic cycle task

. Execute cyclic cycle task program applicable at specified time intervals (execution cycle).

2-44
 Chapter 2 Function

(3) Precautions for cyclic cycle task program used

. If the same task program is requested to operate with cyclic cycle task program presently executed or
standing by, the newly generated task will be ignored.

. Only in Run mode, timer that requests execution of cyclic cycle task program will be added. Power
failure time will be all ignored.

. When setting cyclic cycle task program’s execution cycle, consider that execution request of several
cyclic cycle task programs may occur at a time.
If 4 cyclic cycle task programs are used with a cycle of 2, 4, 10 and 20 seconds, execution request of 4
cyclic cycle task programs will occur at a time every 20 seconds, causing a problem to increase the
scan time in a moment.

5) Processing of internal device task program

When execution range of task program’s task (operation condition) is extended from the contact to device,
the extended internal device task program will be processed as described below.

(1) Setting items in task

. Specify device’s condition and priority which will be the operation condition of the task program to
execute. And check task number to manage task.

(2) Processing of internal device task

. If devices’ conditions which will be operation condition of internal device task program are identical
according to priority after scan program is executed completely in CPU module, it will start to execute.

(3) Precautions for internal device task program used

. Internal device task program starts to execute when the moment of scan program is completed. Thus,
even if internal device task program’s execution conditions are produced in the scan program or task
program, its execution will be allowed not instantly but the moment scan program is completed.

. Execution request of internal device task program inspects the execution conditions when the moment
scan of program is completed. Thus, internal device task’s execution conditions if once produced and
lost for 1 scan by scan program or task program will not execute the task because the execution can not
be detected at the time when execution conditions are inspected.

2.8.2 Timer function (Not supported in XGB standard type)

Timer device (RTC) is built in CPU module. RTC keeps timer operation with battery back-up despite power
off or momentary power failure.
RTC’s timer data can be used to manage system running history or error record. Present time of RTC is
renewed every scan in Flag (F0053, F0054, F0055, F0056) related with timer.
Refer to CPU user’s manual 6.2 more details about function of timer.

2-45
Chapter 2 Function

2.8.3 Program modification during RUN

① If XG5000 program identify with PLC’s program, program can be modified without change to operation mode.
② Only one Program Block (PB) can be modified when one cycle modification in Run, modification has no limitation
in the one Program Block (PB). (There are 2 Program Block in the PLC)
③ There is a difference of modification time during Run by media type (RS-232C/USB) which is connected with
PLC and Read/Write data size during Run mode. Also, The shorter modification time during Run, The larger Scan
change quantity. At this moment, Battery Error Flag F00045 becomes On.
④ If error occurs in modification during Run, PLC executes previous program modification during Run.

2.8.4 Self-diagnosis function

(1) Self-diagnosis function is used to diagnose PLC system error of CPU module itself.
(2) If PLC system is powered on or an operation error occurs, it will be detected to prevent the system from
abnormal operation.

1) Scan Watch-dog Timer

WDT (Watch-Dog Timer) is used to detect program overloaded due to PLC CPU module’s H/W or S/W
error.

(1) Watch-dog timer is used to detect operation delayed due to user program error. Detection time of
Watch-dog timer is set in XG5000’s basic parameter.

(2) Watch-dog timer monitors scan progressing time during operation, and when the specified detection
time if exceeded is detected, it will stop PLC operation immediately and then make all output off.

(3) If detection time of delayed operation (Scan Watch-dog Time) is expected to be exceeded in
processing specific area of user program while being executed (with FOR ~ NEXT instruction, CALL
instruction used), use ‘WDT’ instruction to clear the timer. ‘WDT’ instruction will initialize the elapsed
time of the detection timer of delayed operation and restart to measure the time starting from 0.

(4) In order to delete the Watch-dog error status, let it powered back on, operate manual reset switch, or
change the mode to STOP.

WDT 0 1 2 3 ….. …8 9 0 1 2 … 0 1 2 … …6 7 0 1 2 …
Count (ms)

WDT Reset SCAN END WDT instruction execution SCAN END

Remark

1) Setting range of watch-dog timer is 10 ~ 1000ms (1ms unit).

2) Please refer to 6.1 Self-diagnosis in XGK CPU manual for more details and 6.2 in XGB hardware manual

2-46
 Chapter 2 Function

2) I/O module check function

This function is used to check I/O module for error at start and during run.

(1) In case a module is installed different from specified in parameter or in error at start, or
(2) In case I/O module is displaced or in error during run,

Applicable error will be detected with warning lamp (ERR) on in front of CPU module and CPU will stop
running.

If module installation error is detected, applicable bit in F area will be respectively ON as described below;

F area Description Ref.

F104[0~B] Applicable slot bit will be On if module installed on main base is in installation error. -
Applicable slot bit will be On if module installed on expansion base step 1 is in
F105[0~B]
installation error.
Not
Applicable slot bit will be On if module installed on expansion base step 2 is in
F106[0~B] support
installation error.
-ed in
Applicable slot bit will be On if module installed on expansion base step 3 is in
F107[0~B] XGB
installation error.
Applicable slot bit will be On if module installed on expansion base step 4 is in
F108[0~B]
installation error.
Applicable slot bit will be On if module installed on expansion base step 5 is in
F109[0~B]
installation error.
Applicable slot bit will be On if module installed on expansion base step 6 is in
F110[0~B]
installation error.
Applicable slot bit will be On if module installed on expansion base step 7 is in
F111[0~B]
installation error.

3) Checking battery voltage used for memory back-up (Not supported in XGB standard type)

It is used to detect the battery voltage lower than the memory back-up voltage and inform the user of the
status. The warning lamp (BAT) will be on in front of CPU module.
Please refer to 4.3.3 Battery durability in CPU manual for details on action to take.

2-47
Chapter 2 Function

2.9 Program Check Function

2.9.1 JMP-LABLE

(1) The number of JMPs is 512 available for XGK, 128 for XGB in the whole program. If used JMPs exceed
512(XGK) or 128(XGB), no program will be downloaded. And JMP can not be used as duplicated with the
same label.
With JMP conditions satisfied to jump to applicable label, all instructions between JMP instruction and
LABEL will not be operated.

(2) JMP instruction without label can not be downloaded as checked when downloading program. In addition,
in case there is label inside SBRT – RET block, which is regarded error too, no program will be
downloaded.

M00020
JMP XXX_SKIP

END

SBRT function 1

XXX_SKIP Application Error: Jump unavailable to

the inside of subroutine
END

(3) Please refer to Chapter 4.30.1 JMP, LABEL about the JMP-LABEL for more details.

2-48
 Chapter 2 Function

2.9.2 CALL-SBRT/RET
(1) The number of CALLs is 512 available in the whole program. CALL instruction can be used as
duplicated, but SBRT/RET can not be duplicated. If CALL instruction used, SBRT/RET instruction
should be surely used.
M00020
CALL function 1

END
Application Error :”Function 1" no
subroutine

(2) The subroutine should be used at the back of END.

(3) In addition, the subroutine should be finished by RET instruction. If SBRT and RET are used only
without CALL, it can be set as Warning/Error in Inspect Program menu in XG5000.

(4) Refer to Chapter 4.30.2 CALL, CALLP, SBRT, RET instruction about the CALL-SBRT/RET for more
details.

2-49
Chapter 2 Function

2.9.3 MCS-MCSCLR
(1) Interlock with higher priority will be first performed, and its cancellation in reverse order.

MCS 0 : High

MCS 7 : LOW

(2) If an interlock with higher priority is cancelled, interlocks with lower priority will be cancelled too.

MCS 0
MCS 1

MCSCLR 0 ( 0,1 all cancelled )

MCSCLR 1 : Error

(3) Stand Alone or END, RET instruction included block will be processed as error.

MCS 0

END

MCSCLR 0 : Error

(4) Refer to Chapter 4.4.1 MCS, MCSCLR about the MCS-MCSCLR for more details.

2-50
 Chapter 2 Function

2.9.4 FOR-NEXT / BREAK

(1) Number of application times of FOR and NEXT instruction should be identical. FOR-NEXT Block
Nesting is available up to 16 steps.
(2) Stand Alone or END, RET instruction included block will be processed as error.
(3) BREAK instruction should be positioned between FOR-NEXT.

LOAD P0000
FOR 1 : Normal
FOR 2
FOR 3

NEXT
NEXT
NEXT

END

LOAD P0001

FOR 20

NEXT
NEXT : Error

END

LOAD P0002
FOR 20 : Error (Stand Alone)

END

NEXT : Error
END

(4) Please refer to chapter 4.31 Loop Instruction about the FOR-NEXT/BREAK for more details.

2-51
Chapter 2 Function

2.9.5 END/RET
In case there is no END instruction to complete 1 scan or no RET instruction to finish subroutine in the
program, it will be regarded as error.

LOAD P0012

JMP 10

JMP 10
: Missing END

END
SBRT

LOAD P0000

OUT P0010 : Missing RET

2.9.6 Duplicated Coil

If the same devices are programmed as duplicated among prepared instructions, it can be set as warning
or error on Inspect Program menu in XG5000.

LOAD P0000
OUT M0000

OUT M0000 : Warning or error (setting )

OUT M0001

Remark
1) Item available for setting warning or error in XG5000
- Solely used label (without JMP)
- Solely used subroutine ( without CALL)
- Duplicated coil processed
The item above can be processed with warning or error selected in Check Program menu of Menu - View in
XG5000.

2-52
 Chapter 2 Function

2.10 Error Handling

2.10.1 Error handling during RUN mode

If operation error is found during Run (indirectly specified address exceeded, BCD operation error, etc.),
to keep running or not will be decided in Error Operation Setup (depends on setting of ‘Continue running
when an arithmetic error occurs’) of XG5000 basic parameter settings item.
If ‘Continue running when an arithmetic error occurs’ is set PLC status keeps Run mode and PLC history
record ‘Continue running, arithmetic error, error step: XX, error code: XX’ in System Log. If ‘Continue
running when an arithmetic error occurs’ is not set the error information window will be pop-up and PLC is
changed to Stop mode when error is occurred. ‘Continue running when an arithmetic error occurs’ is a
default setting in basic parameter settings.

2.10.2 Error handling of error flag

F0110 checks for error whenever each instruction is executed to display ON (if abnormal) and OFF (if
normal). However, instructions which are not under the influence of error will keep the previous status.
F0115 if once error occurs will be latched as kept ON. Thus, if an error is found in previous instruction and
no error found in present instruction, F0110 will be OFF and F0115 will be ON.

Program Result F110 F115

ADD D0000 h0010 M020 Normal Off Off
MOV D0000 #D0010 error On On
LOAD P0000 On On
INC D0000 Off On
LOAD P0001 Off On
WAND P001 M010 #D0400 error On On
LOAD P0002 On On
WAND P001 M010 D0300 Off On
CLE Off Off
WAND P001 M010 D0500 error On On
LOAD P0003 On On

2.10.3 LED display of error

LED displayed
LED name Status
XGK XGB
Green LED
Warning or error displayed during Run
Blinking
RUN/STOP -
1. Warning or error displayed during Stop Red LED
2. If an error to stop Run detected Blinking
Red LED
ERR If an error detected to make Run unavailable On
Blinking
BAT Battery voltage low On
1. When the ‘Change module’ switch is set to ‘Change module’.
2. During run in ‘Debug mode’
3. In ‘Compulsory ON’ setting status
On
4. If ‘Error mask’ or ‘SKIP’ flag is set. -
CHK 5. If slight error (warning) is found during Run.
6. If added base is in power error.
In case error occurred when ‘Continue running when an
Red LED
arithmetic error occurs’ is set at Error Operation Setup in
Blinking
XG5000 Basic Parameter Settings.

Remark

In case of CPU module error, please refer to 4.2 Part Names and Functions in CPU manual for details on
LED display.

2-53
Chapter 2 Function

2.10.4 Error codes during RUN

Operation
Code Cause Action (Restart mode after action) LED status Diagnosis Stage
status
If error repeated after power is ON again, Whole
2 Data Bus abnormal Error Power ON
contact Customer Service Center LEDs blink
If error repeated after power is ON again, in regular
3 Data RAM abnormal Error order Power ON
contact Customer Service Center
If error repeated after power is ON again,
4 Time IC(RTC) error Error ERR : ON Power ON
contact Customer Service Center
Program memory If error repeated after power is ON again,
6 Error ERR : ON Power ON
abnormal contact Customer Service Center
If error repeated after power is ON again,
10 USB IC error Error ERR : ON Power ON
contact Customer Service Center
If error repeated after power is ON again,
11 Back-up RAM error Error ERR : ON Power ON
contact Customer Service Center
If error repeated after power is ON again,
12 Back-up Flash error Error ERR : ON Power ON
contact Customer Service Center
If error repeated after power is ON again, Power ON
13 Base information error STOP ERR : ON
contact Customer Service Center Convert to Run mode

Back-up flash program Rerun after back-up flash program Reset

22 Error ERR : ON
faulty corrected Convert to RUN mode

Rerun after reloading program

Change the battery in error
Reset
23 Program abnormal Change CPU module if program STOP ERR : ON
Convert to RUN mode
reloaded is abnormal in preservation
state
Rerun after reloading I/O parameter
Change the battery in error
Reset
24 I/O parameter error Change CPU module if I/O parameter STOP ERR : ON
Convert to RUN mode
reloaded is abnormal in preservation
state
Rerun after reloading basic parameter
Change the battery in error
Reset
25 Basic parameter error Change CPU module if basic parameter STOP ERR : ON
Convert to RUN mode
reloaded is abnormal in preservation
state
Download the program again and Restart
Exceeded execution area Reset
26 If error repeated after restart contact STOP ERR : ON
error Convert to RUN mode
Customer Service Center
Download the program again and Restart
Reset
27 Compile error If error repeated after restart contact STOP ERR : ON
Convert to RUN mode
Customer Service Center
Rerun after module or parameter
Discordant between
corrected by checking for incorrect slot
parameter setting STOP ERR : ON
30 position via XG5000 Convert to RUN mode
module and installed (RUN) (P.S. : ON)
Reference flag : Discordant module type
module
error flag
Rerun after module installation corrected
Module escaped or by checking for incorrect slot position via
STOP ERR : ON
31 installed additionally XG5000 (based on parameter) Scan Ended
(RUN) (P.S. : ON)
during run Reference flag: Module installation error
flag
Rerun after fuse replaced by checking for
Built-in module fuse slot position of blown fuse via XG5000 STOP ERR : ON
32 Scan Ended
blown during run (based on parameter) (RUN) (P.S. : ON)
Reference flag: Fuse blown error flag
Rerun after module replaced by checking
Normal access for slot position where access error found
STOP ERR : ON
33 unavailable to I/O via XG5000 (based on parameter) Scan Ended
(RUN) (P.S. : ON)
module’s data during run Reference flag: I/O module Read/Write
error flag

2-54
 Chapter 2 Function

Operation
Code Cause Action (Restart mode after action) LED status Diagnosis Stage
status
Rerun after module replaced by
Normal access checking for slot position where
unavailable to access error found via XG5000 STOP ERR : ON
34 Scan Ended
special/link module’s (based on parameter) (RUN) (P.S. : ON)
data during run Reference flag : special/link module
interface error
Abnormal system shot down due to
noise or hardware error
PLC CPU malfunction 1) If error repeated after power is ON RUN: ON
39 STOP At ordinary times
or abnormal end again, contact Customer Service ERR : ON
Center
2) Take action against noise
Program’s scan time
exceeds range of Rerun after checking delayed scan
RUN: ON While program
40 delayed scan time time specified by parameter to modify STOP
ERR : ON executed
detection specified by parameter or program as applicable
parameter during run
Operation error while Eliminate operation error -> Reload RUN: ON While program
41 STOP
user program executed program -> Rerun ERR : ON executed
Stack exceeds normal
RUN: ON While program
42 range while program Rerun STOP
ERR : ON executed
executed

Reset after checking base setting Reset

43 Base duplicated STOP ERR : ON
switch Convert to RUN mode

Rerun after reloading timer index STOP RUN: ON

44 Timer index error Scan Ended
program modified (RUN) ERR : ON
Error detected in Refer to external equipment’s serious
external equipment due error flag detected to repair faulty STOP ERR : ON
50 Scan Ended
to user program during equipment prior to Rerun (based on (RUN) (P.S. : ON)
run parameter)
If error repeated after rerun, check
Stand-by task number
installation environment STOP ERR : ON While program
55 exceeds range
(If error still repeated, contact (RUN) (P.S. : ON) executed
specified
Customer Service Center)
Power back On after eliminating error
E_STOP function RUN: ON While program
60 cause which starts E_STOP function STOP
executed ERR : ON executed
of the program
During STOP: Check detailed
information of operation error via
STOP ERR : ON While program
61 Operation error XG5000 to correct program
(RUN) (P.S. : ON) executed
During RUN: Refer to Error step in F
area
Power back On if no error in battery
Data memory back-up
500 Converted to STOP mode If in remote STOP ERR : ON reset
unavailable
mode
Reset time via XG5000, etc
501 Time data error - CHK: ON At ordinary times
if no error in battery
502 Battery voltage low Change battery in Power ON status - BAT: ON At ordinary times

2-55
Chapter 2 Function

2.10.5 Operation error code

Code Error CPU status Cause Action

Indirect setting Run/Stop based on If operand with indirect setting or index Modify applicable step’s indirect
16
index error parameter setting used exceeds applicable device’s range setting/index area
Group
instruction Run/Stop based on If N value to set group range in group
17 Modify N value
range check parameter setting instructions exceeds device’s range
error
Run/Stop based on If divisor is 0, when Divide instructions Change the value of divisor to
18 0-division error
parameter setting (except RDIV, LDIV) executed other than 0
BCD convert Run/Stop based on If BCD related instruction’s operand Modify data to be within BCD
19
error parameter setting value exceeds BCD format displayed range
If bank setting value in file related
File bank Run/Stop based on
20 instructions exceeds the max. bank Modify bank setting value
setting error parameter setting
range
FPU operation Run/Stop based on If an error occurs when real operation
21 Modify data
related error parameter setting instruction is used
If available data size to display is
Data format Run/Stop based on
22 different when converting data format Modify data
convert error parameter setting
(Real<->Integer)
Run/Stop based on If BMOV instruction’s setting value
23 BMOV error Modify setting value
parameter setting exceeds 16
DECO/ENCO Run/Stop based on With DECO, ENCO instruction used if
24 Modify setting value
error parameter setting range setting value exceeds 8
Run/Stop based on With DIS/UNI instruction used if N value
25 DIS/UNI error Modify N value
parameter setting exceeds 4
Data control Run/Stop based on If data control related instruction’s range
26 Modify range
related error parameter setting is exceeded
Time Run/Stop based on
27 Time related instruction error Modify time data
data error parameter setting
Run/Stop based on MUX/DMUX instruction setting value
28 MUX error Modify setting value
parameter setting error
Data table
Run/Stop based on FIINS, FIDEL instruction setting value
29 instruction Modify setting value
parameter setting error
error
Run/Stop based on If the number to be converted among
30 SEG error Modify setting value
parameter setting formats specified exceeds 4
ASCII value Run/Stop based on
31 ASCII data related instruction error Modify data
error parameter setting
Position
If 3 or more axes are set with position
module Run/Stop based on
32 module instruction used Modify axis setting value
Setting axis parameter setting
(check only for 3 or more unconditionally)
error
String
Run/Stop based on String process related instruction error
33 processing Modify based on instructions
parameter setting Refer to Instructions List
error
Run/Stop based on
34 SORT error SORT/DSORT instruction setting error Modify setting value
parameter setting
FOR nesting Run/Stop based on If the number of FOR instruction’s
35 Modify program
error parameter setting nesting exceeds 16
Task Run/Stop based on
36 If the task number is 96 or higher Modify task number
number error parameter setting
Device range Run/Stop based on If the device area settings exceeds
37 Modify device area
check error parameter setting instruction specification
Data related
Run/Stop based on If the setting related with P2P instruction
38 P2P setting Modify data
parameter setting exceeds the range
error

2-56
 Chapter 3 Instruction List
Chapter 3 Instruction List
3.1 Classification of Instructions
Classification Instructions Details Remarks
Contact Point Instruction LOAD, AND, OR related Instructions
Unite Instruction AND LOAD, OR LOAD, MPUSH, MLOAD, MPOP
Reverse Instruction NOT
Master Control Instruction MCS, MCSCLR
OUT, SET, RST, 1 Scan Output Instruction, Output Reverse
Output Instruction
Basic Instruction (FF)
Instructions Sequence/Last-input
Step Control Instruction ( SET Sxx.xx, OUT Sxx.xx )
Preferred Instruction
End Instruction END
Non-Process Instruction NOP
Timer Instruction TON, TOFF, TMR, TMON, TRTG
Counter Instruction CTD, CTU, CTUD, CTR
4/8/64 Bits
Data Transfer Instruction Transfers specified Data, Group, String
available
4/8 Bits
Conversion Instruction Converts BIN/BCD of specified Data & Group
available
Data Type Conversion
Converts Integer/Real Number
Instruction
Output Terminal Compare Compare to
Saves compared results in special relay
Instruction Unsigned
Input Terminal Compare Saves compared results in BR. Compares Real Number, Compare to
Instruction String & Group. Compares 3 Operands Signed
Increase/Decrease 4/8 Bits
Increases or decreases specified data 1 by 1
Instruction available
Rotates specified data to the left and right, 4/8 Bits
Rotate Instruction
including Carry available
Moves specified data to the left and right, word by word, bit 4/8 Bits
Move Instruction
by bit available
Exchanges between devices, higher & lower byte, group
Exchange Instruction
data
Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication & Division for Integer/
BIN Operation Instruction Real Number, Addition for String, Addition & Subtraction for
Group
BCD Operation Instruction Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, Division.
Application Logic Multiplication, Logic Addition, Exclusive OR, Exclusive
Instructions Logic Operation Instruction
NOR, Group Operation
Error Display, WDT Initialize, Output Control, Operation
System Instruction
Stop, etc.
Encode, Decode, Data Disconnect/Connect, Search, Align,
Data Process Instruction
Max., Min., Total, Average, etc.
Data Table Process
Data Input/Output of Data Table
Instruction
String related Convert, Comment Read, String Extract,
String Process Instruction
ASCII Convert, HEX Convert, String Search, etc.
Special Function Trigonometric Function, Exponential/Log Function, Angle/
Instruction Radian Convert, etc.
Data Control Instruction Max/Min Limit Control, Dead-zone Control, Zone Control
Time related Instruction Date Time Data Read/Write, Time Data Adjust & Convert
Diverge Instruction JMP, CALL
Loop Instruction FOR/NEXT/BREAK
Flag related Instruction Carry Flag Set/Reset, Error Flag Clear
Special/Communication
Data Read/Write by BUSCON Direct Access
related Instruction
Interrupt related Instruction Interrupt Enable/Disable
Sign Reverse Instruction Reverse Integer/Real Signs, Absolute Value Operation

3-1
Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.2 How to See Instruction List

* How to see XGK Instructions list is as follows.

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps
MOV MOV S D 2
16 Bits
transfer (S) (D)
MOVP MOVP S D 3
32 Bits 2
DMOV DMOV S D
(S+1,S) (D+1,D )
transfer
DMOVP S D
DMOVP 3
Double Real LMOV
RMOV S D (S+3,S+2,S+1,S) 2
Number
transfer (D+3,D+2,D+1,D)
LMOVP 3

① ② ③ ④ ⑤

① Classification: classifies instructions into applications.

② Designations: displays instruction names to be used in program.
- Display rules: Instructions shall be basically displayed in word unit. According to data size, operation
characteristics, real number data process, string process, the rules are as follows;
- Based on Data Size & Type
D: stands for Double Word related instruction.
R: stands for Single Real Number related instruction.
L: stands for Double Real Number related instruction.
$: stands for String related instruction.
G: stands for Group operation.
4: stands for Nibble related instruction, used only at the back of instruction.
8: stands for Byte related instruction, used only at the back of instruction.
3: stands for process instruction for 3 operands, used only at the back of instruction.
- Based on Operation Characteristics
P: stands for 1 time executable instruction when input signal is changed OFF Æ ON, used only at the
back of instruction.
③ Symbol: displays symbols used in program, showing the number of used operands and the type of Source
or Destination. Operand display rules are as follows;
S: stands for Source, with data value not changed after calculated. At the moment, Data Size depends
on used instruction.
D: stands for Destination, with data value changeable after calculated. At the moment, Data Size
depends on used instruction.
N, n: displays the number to process.
St, En: stands for Start and End, used only in BSFT & WSFT.
Sb: stands for Source in case Bit Position is specified, mostly used in Nibble/Byte instruction.
Db: stands for Destination in case Bit Position is specified, mostly used in Nibble/Byte instruction.
Z: stands for control word, which means previously specified format as based on each instruction.
④ Description: describes general functions of instruction.
⑤ Basic: stands for the number of Basic Steps of instruction, which means the number of steps in case
indirect specification, index formula and direct variable input were not used.

3-2
 Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.3 Basic Instructions

3.3.1 Contact-point instruction
Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description Steps

LOAD A Contact Point Operation Start 1

LOAD NOT B Contact Point Operation Start 1

AND A Contact Point Series-Connected 1

AND NOT B Contact Point Series-Connected 1

OR A Contact Point Parallel-Connected 1

OR NOT B Contact Point Parallel-Connected 1

Contact
Point
LOADP P Positive Convert Detected Contact Point 2
Negative Convert Detected Contact
LOADN N 2
Point
Positive Convert Detected Contact Point
ANDP P 2
Series-Connected
Negative Convert Detected Contact
ANDN N 2
Point Series-Connected
Positive Convert Detected Contact Point
ORP P 2
Parallel-Connected
Negative Convert Detected Contact
ORN N 2
Point Parallel-Connected

3.3.2 Union instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

AND LOAD A B A,B Block Series-Connected 1

A
OR LOAD A,B Block Parallel-Connected 1
B

Unite Operation Result Push up to

MPUSH 1
present
MPUSH
Operation Result Load
MLOAD MLOAD 1
Previous to Diverge Point

MPOP Operation Result Pop Previous

MPOP 1
to Diverge Point

Remark

1) The number of Basic Steps means the case that indirect specification, index formula and direct
variable input were not used. In other words, it represents the minimum number of the steps of the
applicable instruction.
2) The number of steps depends on indirect specification, index formula and pulse application used.

3-3
Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.3.3 Reversion instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

Reverse NOT Previous Operation results Reverse 1

3.3.4 Master Control instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

MCS MCS n Master Control Setting (n:0~7) 1

Master
Control
MCSCLR MCSCLR n Master Control Cancel (n:0~7) 1

3.3.5 Output instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

OUT Operation Results Output 1

OUT NOT Operation Results Reverse Output 1

OUTP P 1 Scan Output if Input Condition rises 2

Output OUTN N 1 Scan Output if Input Condition falls 2

SET S Contact Point Output On kept 1

RST R Contact Point Output Off kept 1

Output Reverse if Input Condition

FF FF D 1
rises

3.3.6 Sequence/Last-input preferred instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps
Syy.xx
SET S Sequence Control 1
S
Step
Control
Syy.xx
OUT S Last-input Preferred 1

3.3.7 End instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps
End END END Program End 1

3.3.8 Non-process instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps
Non-process Instruction, used
Non-Process NOP Ladder not displayed 1
in Nimonic

3-4
 Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.3.9 Timer instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

Input
TON TON T t t 2
T
Input
TOFF TOFF T t t 2
T
Input t1+t2 = t

TMR TMR T t ←
2
Timer t1→ ← t2 →
T
Input
t
TMON TMON T t 2
T

Input
TRTG TRTG T t t 2
T

3.3.10 Counter instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

Reset
Count
Pulse Setting
CTD CTD C c 2
Present

Output

Reset
Count
Pulse Setting
CTU CTU C c 2
Present

Output

Counter Reset
Increased
Pulse
Decreased
Pulse
CTUD CTUD C U D c 4
Setting
Present

Output

Reset
Count
Pulse Setting
CTR CTR C c 2
Present

Output

3-5
Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4 Application Instruction

3.4.1 Data transfer instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description Steps

MOV MOV S D 2
16 bits
Transfer (S) (D)
MOVP MOVP S D 3

DMOV DMOV S D 2
32 bits
Transfer (S+1,S) (D+1,D )
DMOVP DMOVP S D 3

Short RMOV RMOV S D 2

Real Number (S+1,S) (D+1,D )
Transfer RMOVP RMOVP S D 3

Long LMOV LMOV S D 2

(S+3,S+2,S+1,S)
Real Number
Transfer LMOVP LMOVP S D (D+3,D+2,D+1,D) 3

(Sb): Bit Position

MOV4 MOV4 Sb Db b15 b0 3
4 bits 4bit trans
Transfer
MOV4P MOV4P Sb Db 4
(Db): Bit Position

(Sb): Bit Position

MOV8 MOV8 Sb Db b15 b0 3
8 bits
Transfer 8bit trans
MOV8P MOV8P Sb Db 4
(Db): Bit Position

CMOV CMOV S D 1’s complement 2

(S) (D)
CMOVP CMOVP S D 3
1’s complement
Transfer
DCMOV DCMOV S D 2
1’s complement
(S+1,S) (D+1,D )
DCMOVP DCMOVP S D 3

GMOV GMOV S D N (S) (D)

16 bits N 4
Group Transfer
GMOVP GMOVP S D N

FMOV FMOV S D N (S) (D)

Multiple
N 4
Transfer
FMOVP FMOVP S D N

b1 b
BMOV BMOV S D Z (S) 5 0
Specified Bits … 4
Transfer (D)
BMOVP BMOVP S D Z * Z: Control Word

(S) b15 b0
GBMOV GBMOV S D Z N : N 4
Specified Bits (S+N)
(D)
…
Group Transfer
:
GBMOVP GBMOVP S D Z N 5
(D+N)
* Z: Control Word

3-6
 Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.1 Data Transfer Instruction (continued)

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

$MOV $MOV S D 2
String String started from (S)
Transfer String started from (D)
$MOVP $MOVP S D 3

3.4.2 BCD/BIN conversion instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps
To BCD
BCD BCD S D (S) (D) 2

BCDP BCDP S D BIN( 0~9999 ) 3

BCD
Conversion DBCD S D To BCD
DBCD 2
(S+1,S) (D+1,D )
DBCDP DBCDP S D BIN( 0~99999999 ) 3

BCD4 Sb Db
(Sb):Bit, BIN(0~9)
BCD4 b15 b0
3

To 4bit BCD
BCD4P BCD4P Sb Db 4
4/8 Bits (Db): Bit
BCD
Conversion (Sb):Bit, BIN(0~99)
BCD8 BCD8 Sb Db 3
b15 b0

To 8bit BCD
BCD8P BCD8P Sb Db 4
(Db):Bit
BIN BIN S D To BIN 2
(S) (D)
BINP BINP S D BCD( 0~9999 ) 3
BIN
Conversion DBIN S D
DBIN To BIN 2
(S+1,S) (D+1,D )
DBINP DBINP S D 3
BCD( 0~99999999 )

BIN4 BIN4 Sb Db (Sb):Bit, BCD(0~9) 3

b15 b0

To 4bit BIN
BIN4P BIN4P Sb Db 4
4/8 Bits (Db):Bit
BIN
Conversion (Sb):Bit, BCD(0~99)
BIN8 BIN8 Sb Db 3
b15 b0

To bit BIN
BIN8P BIN8P Sb Db 4
(Db):Bit

GBCD GBCD S D N
Data (S) to N converted to BCD,
and (D) to N saved 4
Group GBCDP GBCDP S D N
BCD,BIN
Conversion GBIN GBIN S D N
Data (S) to N converted to BIN, and
(D) to N saved 4
GBINP GBINP S D N

3-7
Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.3 Data type conversion instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

I2R I2R S D To Real 2

(S) (D+1,D)
16 Bits I2RP I2RP S D Int( -32768~32767 ) 3
Integer/Real
Conversion I2L I2L S D
To Long
(S) (D+3,D+2,D+1,D) 2

I2LP S D
Int( -32768~32767 )
I2LP 3

D2R D2R S D To Real 2

(S+1,S) (D+1,D)

32 Bits D2RP D2RP S D Dint(-2147483648~2147483647) 3

Integer/Real
Conversion D2L To Long
D2L S D (S+1,S) (D+3,D+2,D+1,D) 2

D2LP D2LP S D Dint(-2147483648~2147483647) 3

R2I R2I S D To INT 2

(S+1,S) (D)
Short R2IP R2IP S D Whole Sing Real Range 3
Real/Integer
Conversion R2D R2D S D To DINT 2
(S+1,S) (D+1,D)
R2DP R2DP S D Whole Sing Real Range 3

To INT
L2I L2I S D (S+3,S+2,S+1,S) 2
(D)
Whole Double Real Range
Long L2IP L2IP S D 3
Real/Integer
Conversion L2D L2D S D
To DINT
(S+3,S+2,S+1,S) (D+1,D)
2

Whole Double Real Range

L2DP L2DP S D 3

Short R2L R2L S D Long conversion 2

Real/Long (S+1,S) (D+3,D+2,D+1,D)
Real Short real entire range
conversion R2LP R2LP S D 3

Long L2R L2R S D Real conversion 2

Real/Long (S+3,S+2,S+1,S) (D+1,D)
Real Long real entire range
conversion L2RP L2RP S D 3

U2R U2R S D Real conversion 2

(S) (D+1,D)
16bit U2RP U2RP S D Uint( 0~65,535) 3
unsigned
integer/Real Lreal conversion
conversion U2L S D 2
U2L
(S) (D+3,D+2,D+1,D)

U2LP U2LP S D Uint( 0~65,535) 3

UD2R UD2R S D Real conversion 2

(S+1,S) (D+1,D)
32bit UD2RP UD2RP S D UDint(0~4,294,967,295) 3
unsigned
integer/Real Real conversion
conversion UD2L S D 2
UD2L
(S+1,S) (D+1,D)

UD2LP UD2LP S D UDint(0~4,294,967,295) 3

3-8
 Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.3 Data type conversion instruction (Cont.)

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

R2U R2U S D UINT conversion 2

(S+1,S) (D)
Short
real/unsigned R2UP R2UP S D Short real entire range 3
integer
UDINT conversion
conversion R2UD R2UD S D
(S+1,S) (D+1, D)
2

R2UDP R2UDP S D Short real entire range 3

L2U L2U S D UINT conversion 2

(S+3,S+2,S+1,S) (D)
Long
real/unsigned L2UP L2UP S D Long real entire range 3
integer
UDINT conversion
conversion L2UD L2UD S D
(S+3,S+2,S+1,S)
2
(D+1, D)
L2UDP L2UDP S D 3
Long real entire range

Remark

1) In case of XGK, Integer value and Real value will be saved respectively in quite different format. For such
reason, Real Number Data should be converted as applicable before used for Integer Operation.

3-9
Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.4 Comparison instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

CMP CMP S1 S2 2
CMP(S1,S2) and applicable Flag Set
Unsigned
(S1, S2 is Word)
Compare CMPP CMPP S1 S2 3
with Special
Relay DCMP DCMP S1 S2 2
CMP(S1,S2) and applicable Flag Set
used
(S1, S2 is Double Word)
DCMPP DCMPP S1 S2 3

CMP4 CMP4 S1 S2 3
CMP(S1,S2) and applicable Flag Set
(S1, S2 is Nibble)
CMP4P CMP4P S1 S2 4
4/8 Bits
Compare
CMP8 CMP8 S1 S2 3
CMP(S1,S2) and applicable Flag Set
(S1, S2 is Byte)
CMP8P CMP8P S1 S2 4

TCMP S1 S2 D
CMP(S1,S2))
TCMP :
CMP(S1+15,S2+15) 4
Table TCMPP TCMPP S1 S2 D Result:(D) ~ (D+15), 1 if identical
Compare
DTCMP DTCMP S1 S2 D CMP((S1+1,S1),(S2+1,S2))
:
CMP((S1+31,S1+30),(S2+31,S2+30)) 4
DTCMPP DTCMPP S1 S2 D Result:(D) ~ (D+15)

GEQ GEQ S1 S2 D N
4
GEQP GEQP S1 S2 D N

GGT GGT S1 S2 D N
4
GGTP GGTP S1 S2 D N

GLT GLT S1 S2 D N
Compares S1 data to S2 data word 4
Group GLTP GLTP S1 S2 D N by word, and saves its result in
Compare Device (D) bit by bit from the lower
(16 Bits) GGE GGE S1 S2 D N bit
( N ≤ 16 ) 4
GGEP GGEP S1 S2 D N

GLE GLE S1 S2 D N
4
GLEP GLEP S1 S2 D N

GNE GNE S1 S2 D N
4
GNEP GNEP S1 S2 D N

Remark

1) CMP(P), DCMP(P), CMP4(P), CMP8(P), TCMP(P) & DTCMP(P) Instructions all process the results of
Unsigned Compare. All the other Compare Instructions will perform Signed Compare.

3-10
 Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.4 Comparison instruction (continued)

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

GDEQ GDEQ S1 S2 D N
4
GDEQP GDEQP S1 S2 D N

GDGT GDGT S1 S2 D N
4
GDGTP GDGTP S1 S2 D N

GDLT GDLT S1 S2 D N
Compares S1 data to S2 data 2 by 4
Group GDLTP GDLTP S1 S2 D N 2 words, and saves its result in
Compare Device (D) bit by bit from the lower
(32 Bits) GDGE GDGE S1 S2 D N bit
( N ≤ 16 ) 4
GDGEP GDGEP S1 S2 D N

GDLE GDLE S1 S2 D N
4
GDLEP GDLEP S1 S2 D N

GDNE GDNE S1 S2 D N
4
GDNEP GDNEP S1 S2 D N

3-11
Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.4 Comparison instruction (continued)

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

LOAD= = S1 S2

LOAD> > S1 S2
16 Bits
LOAD< < S1 S2 Compares (S1) to (S2), and saves
Data
its result in Bit Result(BR) (Signed 2
Compare >= S1 S2
LOAD>= Operation)
(LOAD)
LOAD<= <= S1 S2

LOAD<> <> S1 S2

AND= = S1 S2

AND> > S1 S2
16 Bits Performs AND operation of (S1) &
AND< < S1 S2
Data (S2) Compare Result and Bit Result
2
Compare AND>= >= S1 S2
(BR), and then saves its result in
(AND) BR (Signed Operation)
AND<= <= S1 S2

AND<> <> S1 S2

OR= = S1 S2

OR> > S1 S2

16 Bits OR< Performs OR operation of (S1) &

< S1 S2
Data (S2) Compare Result and Bit Result
2
Compare (BR), and then saves its result in
(OR) OR>= >= S1 S2 BR (Signed Operation)

OR<= <= S1 S2

OR<> <> S1 S2

LOADD= D= S1 S2

LOADD> D> S1 S2
32 Bits
LOADD< D< S1 S2 Compares (S1) to (S2), and saves
Data
its result in Bit Result(BR) (Signed 2
Compare D>= S1 S2
LOADD>= Operation)
(LOAD)
LOADD<= D<= S1 S2

LOADD<> D<> S1 S2

3-12
 Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.4 Comparison instruction (continued)

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

ANDD= D= S1 S2

ANDD> D> S1 S2
Performs AND operation of (S1) &
32 Bits
ANDD< D< S1 S2 (S2) Compare Result and Bit Result
Data
(BR), and then saves its result in 2
Compare D>= S1 S2
ANDD>= BR (Signed Operation)
(AND)
ANDD<= D<= S1 S2

ANDD<> D<> S1 S2

ORD= D= S1 S2

ORD> D> S1 S2

Performs OR operation of (S1) &

32bt ORD< D< S1 S2 (S2) Compare Result and Bit Result
Data
(BR), and then saves its result in 2
Compare
ORD>= BR (Signed Operation)
(OR) D>= S1 S2

ORD<= D<= S1 S2

ORD<> D<> S1 S2

LOADR= R= S1 S2

LOADR> R> S1 S2
Performs OR operation of (S1) &
Short LOADR< R< S1 S2 (S2) Compare Result and Bit Result
Real Number
(BR), and then saves its result in 2
Compare
LOADR>= R>= S1 S2 BR (Signed Operation)
(LOAD)

LOADR<= R<= S1 S2

LOADR<> R<> S1 S2

ANDR= R= S1 S2

ANDR> R> S1 S2

Short ANDR< R< S1 S2

Compares (S1+1,S) to (S2+1,S2)
Real Number and saves its result in Bit Result
2
Compare (BR) (Signed Operation)
ANDR>= R>= S1 S2
(AND)

ANDR<= R<= S1 S2

ANDR<> R<> S1 S2

3-13
Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.4 Comparison instruction (continued)

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

ORR= R= S1 S2

ORR> R> S1 S2

Short ORR< R< S1 S2

Compares (S1+1,S1) to (S2+1,S2)
Real Number and saves its result in Bit Result
2
Compare (BR) (Signed Operation)
(OR) ORR>= R>= S1 S2

ORR<= R<= S1 S2

ORR<> R<> S1 S2

LOADL= L= S1 S2

LOADL> L> S1 S2

Long Compares (S1+3,S1+2,S1+1,S) to

Real Number LOADL< L< S1 S2 (S2+3,S2+2, S2+1,S2) and saves
Compare its result in Bit Result(BR) (Signed 2
(LOAD) LOADL>= L>= S1 S2 Operation)

LOADL<= L<= S1 S2

LOADL<> L<> S1 S2

ANDL= L= S1 S2

ANDL> L> S1 S2

Performs AND operation of (S1+

Long ANDL< L< S1 S2 1,S1) & (S2+1,S2) Compare Result
Real Number
and Bit Result(BR), and then saves 2
Compare
ANDL>= L>= S1 S2 its result in BR (Signed Operation)
(AND)

ANDL<= L<= S1 S2

ANDL<> L<> S1 S2

3-14
 Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.4 Comparison instruction (continued)

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

ORL= L= S1 S2

ORL> L> S1 S2

Performs OR operation of (S1

Double Real ORL< L< S1 S2
+1,S1) & (S2+1,S2) Compare
Number Result and Bit Result(BR), and
2
Compare then saves its result in BR
(OR) ORL>= L>= S1 S2
(Signed Operation)

ORL<= L<= S1 S2

ORL<> L<> S1 S2

LOAD$= $= S1 S2

LOAD$> $> S1 S2

String LOAD$< $< S1 S2 Compares (S1) to (S2) Starting

Compare String and saves its result in Bit 2
(LOAD) LOAD$>= $>= S1 S2 Result(BR)

LOAD$<= $<= S1 S2

LOAD$<> $<> S1 S2

AND$= $= S1 S2

AND$> $> S1 S2

AND$< $< S1 S2
Performs AND operation of (S 1)
String
& (S2) Starting String Compare
Compare 2
Result and Bit Result(BR), and
(AND) AND$>= $>= S1 S2
then saves its result in BR

AND$<= $<= S1 S2

AND$<> $<> S1 S2

3-15
Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.4 Comparison instruction (continued)

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

OR$= $= S1 S2

OR$> $> S1 S2

Performs OR operation of (S1)

String OR$< $< S1 S2 & (S2) Starting String Compare
Compare Result and Bit Result(BR), and 2
(OR) then saves its result in BR
OR$>= $>= S1 S2

OR$<= $<= S1 S2

OR$<> $<> S1 S2

LOADG= G= S1 S2 N

LOADG> G> S1 S2 N
Compares (S1), (S1+1), …,
16 Bits LOADG< G< S1 S2 N (S1+N) to (S2), (S2+1), … ,
Data (S2+N) 1 to 1, and then saves
4
Group Compare LOADG>= G>= S1 S2 N 1 in Bit Result(BR) if each
(LOAD) value compared meets given
condition
LOADG<= G<= S1 S2 N

LOADG<> G<> S1 S2 N

ANDG= G= S1 S2 N

ANDG> G> S1 S2 N
Performs AND operation of
16 Bits ANDG< (S1), (S1+1), …, (S1+N) &
G< S1 S2 N
Data (S2), (S2+1), … , (S2+N) 1 to
4
Group Compare 1 Compare Result and Bit
(AND) ANDG>= G>= S1 S2 N Result (BR), and then saves its
result in BR
ANDG<= G<= S1 S2 N

ANDG<> G<> S1 S2 N

ORG= G= S1 S2 N

ORG> G> S1 S2 N

Performs OR operation of (S1),

16 Bits ORG< G< S1 S2 N (S1+1), …, (S1+N) & (S2),
Data (S2+1), … , (S2+N) 1 to 1
4
Group Compare Compare Result and Bit Result
(OR) ORG>= G>= S1 S2 N (BR), and then saves its result
in BR

ORG<= G<= S1 S2 N

ORG<> G<> S1 S2 N

3-16
 Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.4 Comparison instruction (continued)

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

LOADDG= DG= S1 S2 N

LOADDG> DG> S1 S2 N
Compares (S1), (S1+1), …,
32 Bits
LOADDG< DG< S1 S2 N (S1+N) to (S2), (S2+1), … ,
Data
(S2+N) 1 to 1, and then saves
Group 4
LOADDG>= DG>= S1 S2 N 1 in Bit Result(BR) if each
Compare value compared meets given
(LOAD) condition
LOADDG<= DG<= S1 S2 N

LOADDG<> DG<> S1 S2 N

ANDDG= DG= S1 S2 N

ANDDG> DG> S1 S2 N
Performs AND operation of
32 Bits
ANDDG< (S1), (S1+1), …, (S1+N) &
Data DG< S1 S2 N
(S2), (S2+1), … , (S2+N) 1 to
Group 4
1 Compare Result and Bit
Compare ANDDG>= DG>= S1 S2 N Result(BR), and then saves its
(AND) result in BR
ANDDG<= DG<= S1 S2 N

ANDDG<> DG<> S1 S2 N

ORDG= DG= S1 S2 N

ORDG> DG> S1 S2 N

Performs OR operation of
32 Bits
ORDG< DG< S1 S2 N (S1), (S1+1), …, (S1+N) &
Data
(S2), (S2+1), … , (S2+N) 1 to
Group 4
1 Compare Result and Bit
Compare DG>= S1 S2 N Result(BR), and then saves its
ORDG>=
(OR) result in BR

ORDG<= DG<= S1 S2 N

ORDG<> DG<> S1 S2 N

3-17
Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.4 Comparison instruction (continued)

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

LOAD3= =3 S1 S2 S3

LOAD3> >3 S1 S2 S3

Three 16-Bit LOAD3< <3 S1 S2 S3 Saves 1 in Bit Result(BR) if each

Data Compare value of (S1), (S2), (S3) meets 4
(LOAD) LOAD3>= >=3 S1 S2 S3 given condition

LOAD3<= <=3 S1 S2 S3

LOAD3<> <>3 S1 S2 S3

AND3= =3 S1 S2 S3

AND3> >3 S1 S2 S3
Performs AND operation of (S1),
Three 16-Bit AND3< <3 S1 S2 S3 (S2), (S3) Compare Result by
Data Compare given condition and Bit Result 2
(AND) AND3>= >=3 S1 S2 S3 (BR), and then saves its result in
BR
AND3<= <=3 S1 S2 S3

AND3<> <>3 S1 S2 S3

OR3= =3 S1 S2 S3

OR3> >3 S1 S2 S3

Performs OR operation of (S1),

Three 32-Bit OR3< <3 S1 S2 S3 (S2), (S3) Compare Result by
Data Compare given condition and Bit Result 4
(OR) OR3>= (BR), and then saves its result in
>=3 S1 S2 S3 BR

OR3<= <=3 S1 S2 S3

OR3<> <>3 S1 S2 S3

LOADD3= D=3 S1 S2 S3

LOADD3> D>3 S1 S2 S3

Three 16-Bit LOADD3< D<3 S1 S2 S3 Saves 1 in Bit Result(BR) if each

Data Compare value of (S1+1,S1), (S2+ 1,S2), 4
(LOAD) LOADD3>= D>=3 S1 S2 S3 (S3+1,S3) meets given condition

LOADD3<= D<=3 S1 S2 S3

LOADD3<> D<>3 S1 S2 S3

3-18
 Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.4 Comparison instruction (continued)

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

ANDD3= D=3 S1 S2 S3

ANDD3> D>3 S1 S2 S3
Performs AND operation of (S1+
Three 32-Bit ANDD3< D<3 S1 S2 S3 1,S1), (S2+1,S2), (S3+1,S3) Compare
Data Compare Result by given condition and Bit 4
(AND) ANDD3>= D>=3 S1 S2 S3 Result(BR), and then saves its
result in BR
ANDD3<= D<=3 S1 S2 S3

ANDD<> D<>3 S1 S2 S3

ORD3= D=3 S1 S2 S3

ORD3> D>3 S1 S2 S3

Performs OR operation of (S1+1,

ORD3<
Three 32-Bit D<3 S1 S2 S3 S1), (S2+1,S2), (S3+1,S3) Compare
Data Compare Result by given condition and Bit 4
(OR) Result (BR), and then saves its
ORD3>= D>=3 S1 S2 S3 result in BR

ORD3<= D<=3 S1 S2 S3

ORD3<> D<>3 S1 S2 S3

LOAD4= 4= S1 S2

LOAD4> 4> S1 S2

Performs LOAD compare operation

LOAD4< 4< S1 S2
of (S1), (S2) as Nibble unit by given
4-Bit Data
condition and then saves its result 3
Compare
in Bit Result (BR).
(LOAD) LOAD4>= 4>= S1 S2
(Unsigned opereation)

LOAD4<= 4<= S1 S2

LOAD4<> 4<> S1 S2

3-19
Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.4 Comparison instruction (continued)

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

AND4= 4= S1 S2

AND4> 4> S1 S2
Performs compare operation of (S1),
4-Bit AND4< 4< S1 S2 (S2) as Nibble unit, after AND
Data Compare operation of its result and Bit 3
(AND) AND4>= 4>= S1 S2 Result(BR), and then save BR
(Unsigned operation)
AND4<= 4<= S1 S2

AND4<> 4<> S1 S2

OR4= 4= S1 S2

OR4> 4> S1 S2

Performs compare operation of (S1),

OR4< (S2) as Nibble unit, after OR
4-Bit 4< S1 S2
Data Compare operation of its result and Bit 3
(OR) Result(BR), and then save BR
OR4>= 4>= S1 S2 (Unsigned operation)

OR4<= 4<= S1 S2

OR4<> 4<> S1 S2

LOAD8= 8= S1 S2

LOAD8> 8> S1 S2

LOAD8< Performs LOAD compare operation

8-Bit 8< S1 S2
of (S1), (S2) as Byte unit and then
Data Compare 3
saves its result in Bit Result (BR).
(LOAD) LOAD8>= 8>= S1 S2
(Unsigned opereation)

LOAD8<= 8<= S1 S2

LOAD8<> 8<> S1 S2

3-20
 Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.4 Comparison instruction (continued)

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

AND8= 8= S1 S2

AND8> 8> S1 S2
Performs compare operation of (S1),
8-Bit AND8< 8< S1 S2 (S2) as Byte unit, after AND
Data Compare operation of its result and Bit 3
(AND) AND8>= 8>= S1 S2 Result(BR), and then save BR
(Unsigned operation)
AND8<= 8<= S1 S2

AND8<> 8<> S1 S2

OR8= 8= S1 S2

OR8> 8> S1 S2

Performs compare operation of (S1),

8-Bit OR8< 8< S1 S2 (S2) as Byte unit, after OR operation
Data Compare of its result and Bit Result(BR), and 3
(OR) then save BR
OR8>= 8>= S1 S2 (Unsigned operation)

OR8<= 8<= S1 S2

OR8<> 8<> S1 S2

ULOAD= U= S1 S2

ULOAD> U> S1 S2

Unsigned ULOAD< U< S1 S2

Performs compare operation of (S1)
16-bit data
and (S2), and then save Bit Result 2
compare
(BR) (Unsigned operation)
(LOAD) ULOAD>= U>= S1 S2

ULOAD<= U<= S1 S2

ULOAD<> U<> S1 S2

3-21
Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.4 Comparison instruction (continued)

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

UAND= U= S1 S2

UAND> U> S1 S2

Performs compare operation of

Unsigned UAND< U< S1 S2 (S1), (S2), after AND operation
16bit data
of its result and Bit Result(BR), 2
compare and then save BR
(AND) UAND>= U>= S1 S2
(Unsigned operation)

UAND<= U<= S1 S2

UAND<> U<> S1 S2

UOR= U= S1 S2

UOR> U> S1 S2

Performs compare operation of

Unsigned UOR< U< S1 S2 (S1), (S2), after OR operation of
16bit data
its result and Bit Result(BR), and 2
Compare then save BR
(OR) UOR>= U>= S1 S2 (Unsigned operation)

UOR<= U<= S1 S2

UOR<> U<> S1 S2

3-22
 Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.4 Comparison instruction (continued)

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description Steps

ULOADD= UD= S1 S2

ULOADD> UD> S1 S2

Unsigned ULOADD< UD< S1 S2

Performs compare operation of
32bit data
(S1), (S2), and then save BR 2
compare
(Unsigned operation)
(LOAD) ULOADD>= UD>= S1 S2

ULOADD<= UD<= S1 S2

ULOADD<> UD<> S1 S2

UANDD= UD= S1 S2

UANDD> UD> S1 S2

Performs compare operation of

Unsigned UANDD< UD< S1 S2 (S1), (S2), after AND operation of its
32bit data
result and Bit Result(BR), and then 2
Compare save BR
(AND) UANDD>= UD>= S1 S2
(Unsigned operation)

UANDD<= UD<= S1 S2

UANDD<> UD<> S1 S2

UORD= UD= S1 S2

UORD> UD> S1 S2

Performs compare operation of

Unsigned 32 UORD< UD< S1 S2 (S1), (S2), after OR operation of its
bit data
result and Bit Result(BR), and then 2
compare save BR
(OR) UORD>= UD>= S1 S2 (Unsigned operation)

UORD<= UD<= S1 S2

UORD<> UD<> S1 S2

3-23
Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.5 Increase/Decrease instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

INC INC D
(D)+1 (D) 2
INCP INCP D

DINC DINC D
BIN Data (D+1,D)+1 (D+1,D) 2
Increase DINCP DINCP D
/
Decrease DEC DEC D
(Signed) (D)-1 (D) 2
DECP DECP D

DDEC DDEC D
(D+1,D)-1 (D+1,D) 2
DDECP DDECP D

INC4 INC4 Db (D:x bit ~ D:x bit+4) + 1 2

INC4P INC4P Db (D:x bit ~ D:x bit+4) 3

INC8 INC8 Db (D:x bit ~ D:x bit+8) + 1 2

4/8 Bits Data (D:x bit ~ D:x bit+8)
Increase INC8P INC8P Db 3
/
Decrease DEC4 DEC4 Db (D:x bit ~ D:x bit+4) - 1 2
(Signed)
(D:x bit ~ D:x bit+4)
DEC4P DEC4P Db 3

DEC8 DEC8 Db (D:x bit ~ D:x bit+8) - 1 2

(D:x bit ~ D:x bit+8)
DEC8P DEC8P Db 3

INCU INCU D
(D)+1 (D)
2
INCUP INCUP D

DINCU DINCU D
(D+1,D)+1 (D+1,D)
BIN Data 2
Increase DINCUP DINCUP D
/
Decrease DECU DECU D
(D)-1 (D)
(Unsigned) 2
DECUP DECUP D

DDECU DDECU D
(D+1,D)-1 (D+1,D)
2
DDECUP DDECUP D

3-24
 Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.6 Rotation instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

ROL ROL D n 2
b15 b0
CY D
ROLP ROLP D n 3
Rotate to Left
DROL DROL D n b31 b15 b0 2
CY D+1 D
DROLP DROLP D n 3

ROL4 ROL4 Db n b+3 b 3

CY D
ROL4P ROL4P Db n 4
4/8 Bits
Rotate to Left b+7 b
ROL8 ROL8 Db n 3
CY D
ROL8P ROL8P Db n 4

ROR ROR D n 2
b15 b0
D CY
RORP RORP D n 3
Rotate to Right
DROR DROR D n b31 b15 b0 2
D+1 D CY
DRORP DRORP D n 3
b+3 b
ROR4 ROR4 Db n D CY 3

ROR4P ROR4P Db n 4
4/8 Bits
Rotate to Right b+7 b
ROR8 ROR8 Db n D CY 3

ROR8P ROR8P Db n 4

RCL RCL D n 2
b15 b0
CY D
Rotate to Left RCLP RCLP D n 3
(including
Carry) DRCL DRCL D n b31 b15 b0 2
CY D+1 D
DRCLP DRCLP D n 3
b+3 b
RCL4 RCL4 Db n CY D 3
4/8 Bits
RCL4P RCL4P Db n 4
Rotate to Left
(including b+7 b
RCL8 RCL8 Db n CY D 3
Carry)
RCL8P RCL8P Db n 4

RCR RCR D n 2
b15 b0
Rotate D CY
RCRP RCRP D n 3
to Right
(including
DRCR DRCR D n b31 b15 b0 2
Carry) D+1 D CY
DRCRP DRCRP D n 3
b+3 b
RCR4 RCR4 Db n D CY 3
4/8 Bits
RCR4P RCR4P Db n 4
Rotate to Right
(including b+7 b
RCR8 RCR8 Db n D CY 3
Carry)
RCR8P RCR8P Db n 4

3-25
Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.7 Move instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps
St Ed
BSFT BSFT St Ed b15 b0 3
Bits Move
BSFTP BSFTP St Ed 4
0

b15 b0
BSFL BSFL D n 2
(D)

BSFLP BSFLP D n CY 0 3
Move to Higher
Bit b31 b0
DBSFL DBSFL D n 2
(D+1, D) … …
DBSFLP DBSFLP D n CY 0 3

b+3 b
BSFL4 BSFL4 Db n
D
3
Move to Higher BSFL4P BSFL4P Db n CY 0
Bit within 4/8
b+7 b
Bits range BSFL8 BSFL8 Db n
D
3
BSFL8P BSFL8P Db n CY 0

b15 b0
BSFR BSFR D n (D) 2

0
BSFRP BSFRP D n CY 3
Move to Lower
Bit b31 b0
DBSFR DBSFR D n 2
(D+1, D) … …
0 CY
DBSFRP DBSFRP D n 3
b+3 b
BSFR4 BSFR4 Db n D
3
0 CY
Move to Lower BSFR4P BSFR4P Db n
Bit within 4/8 b+7 b
Bits range BSFR8 BSFR8 Db n D
3
BSFR8P BSFR8P Db n 0 CY

WSFT WSFT St Ed h0000 St (Start Word) 2

Word Move ..
Ed (End Word)
WSFTP WSFTP St Ed 3

WSFL WSFL D1 D2 N h0000 D1

.. N
3
WSFLP WSFLP D1 D2 N D2
Word Data
Move to
Left/Right WSFR WSFR D1 D2 N D1
.. N 3
h0000 D2
WSFRP WSFRP D1 D2 N

Moves N bits starting from Db bit

Bit Move SR SR Db I D N along Input direction (I) and Move 2
direction (D)

3-26
 Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.7 Move insturction (Continued)

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

BRR BRR S D n1 n2 Rotates data of S[0] ~ S[n1-1] 5

Byte move byte n2 time right and saves
(Right) result in D[0] ~ D[n1-1]
BRRP BRRP S D n1 n2 5

Rotates data of S[0] ~ S[n1-1]

BRL BRL S D n1 n2 5
Byte move byte n2 time left and saves result
(left) in D[0] ~ D[n1-1]
BRLP BRLP S D n1 n2 5

3-27
Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.8 Exchange instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

XCHG XCHG D1 D2 2
(D1) (D2)
XCHGP XCHGP D1 D2 3
Data
Exchange
DXCHG DXCHG D1 D2 2
(D1+1, D1) (D2+1, D2)
DXCHGP DXCHGP D1 D2 3

Group GXCHG GXCHG D1 D2 N (D1) (D2)

Data : : N 4
Exchange GXCHGP GXCHGP D1 D2 N

b15 b0
SWAP SWAP D (D) Upper Byte Lower Byte
Higher/Lower
Byte 2
Exchange SWAPP D (D) Lower Byte Upper Byte
SWAPP

GSWAP GSWAP D N 2
Group
Exchanges Higher/Lower
Byte
Byte of Words N starting from D
Exchange GSWAPP GSWAPP D N 3

Higher/Lower SWAP2 SWAP2 S D b15 b0 2

(S) Upper Byte Lower Byte
Byte
Exchange 3
SWAP2P SWAP2P S D (D) Lower Byte Upper Byte

Group GSWAP2 GSWAP2 S D

Exchanges Higher/Lower 2
Byte Byte of Words N starting from S
Exchange GSWAP2P GSWAP2P S D N
and saves result from D 3

3-28
 Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.9 BIN operation instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

ADD ADD S1 S2 D
(S1)+(S2) (D) 4
ADDP ADDP S1 S2 D
Integer Addition
(Signed)
DADD DADD S1 S2 D
(S1+1,S1)+(S2+1,S2)
4
(D+1,D)
DADDP DADDP S1 S2 D

SUB SUB S1 S2 D
(S1)-(S2) (D) 4
Integer SUBP SUBP S1 S2 D
Subtraction
(Signed) DSUB DSUB S1 S2 D (S1+1,S1)-(S2+1,S2)
4
(D+1,D)
DSUBP DSUBP S1 S2 D

MUL MUL S1 S2 D
(S1)×(S2) (D+1,D) 4
Integer MULP MULP S1 S2 D
Multiplication
(Signed) DMUL DMUL S1 S2 D (S1+1,S1)×(S2+1,S2)
4
(D+3,D+2,D+1,D)
DMULP DMULP S1 S2 D

DIV DIV S1 S2 D (D) Quotient

(S1)÷(S2)
(D+1) Remainder 4
DIVP DIVP S1 S2 D
Integer Division
(Signed) (S1+1,S1)÷(S2+1,S2)
DDIV DDIV S1 S2 D
(D+1,D) Quotient
4
DDIVP S1 S2 D (D+3,D+2) Remainder
DDIVP

ADDU ADDU S1 S2 D
(S1)+(S2) (D)
4
ADDUP ADDUP S1 S2 D
Integer Addition
(Unsigned)
DADDU DADDU S1 S2 D (S1+1,S1)+(S2+1,S2)
(D+1,D) 4
DADDUP DADDUP S1 S2 D

SUBU SUBU S1 S2 D
(S1)-(S2) (D)
4
Integer SUBUP SUBUP S1 S2 D
Subtraction
(Unsigned) DSUBU DSUBU S1 S2 D (S1+1,S1)-(S2+1,S2)
(D+1,D) 4
DSUBUP DSUBUP S1 S2 D

MULU MULU S1 S2 D
(S1)×(S2) (D+1,D)
4
Integer MULUP MULUP S1 S2 D
Multiplication
(Unsigned) DMULU DMULU S1 S2 D (S1+1,S1)×(S2+1,S2)
(D+3,D+2,D+1,D) 4
DMULUP DMULUP S1 S2 D

3-29
Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.9 BIN operation instruction (continued)

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

DIVU DIVU S1 S2 D
(D) Quotient
(S1)÷(S2) 4
(D+1) Remainder
DIVUP DIVUP S1 S2 D
Integer Division
(Unsigned) (S1+1,S1)÷(S2+1,S2)
DDIVU DDIVU S1 S2 D
(D+1,D) Quotient 4
DDIVUP DDIVUP S1 S2 D (D+3,D+2) Remainder

RADD RADD S1 S2 D (S1+1,S1)+(S2+1,S2)

(D+1,D) 4
RADDP RADDP S1 S2 D
Real Number
Addition (S1+3,S1+2,S1+1,S1)
LADD LADD S1 S2 D
+(S2+3,S2+2,S2+1,S2)
4
LADDP LADDP S1 S2 D (D+3,D+2,D+1,D)

RSUB RSUB S1 S2 D (S1+1,S1)-(S2+1,S2)

(D+1,D)
4
RSUBP RSUBP S1 S2 D
Real Number
Subtraction (S1+3,S1+2,S1+1,S1)
LSUB LSUB S1 S2 D
-(S2+3,S2+2,S2+1,S2)
4
LSUBP LSUBP S1 S2 D (D+3,D+2,D+1,D)

RMUL RMUL S1 S2 D (S1+1,S1)×(S2+1,S2)

4
(D+1,D)
RMULP RMULP S1 S2 D
Real Number
Multiplication (S1+3,S1+2,S1+1,S1)
LMUL LMUL S1 S2 D
×(S2+3,S2+2,S2+1,S2)
4
LMULP LMULP S1 S2 D (D+3,D+2,D+1,D)

RDIV RDIV S1 S2 D (S1+1,S1)÷(S2+1,S2)

(D+1,D) 4
RDIVP RDIVP S1 S2 D
Real Number
Division (S1+3,S1+2,S1+1,S1)
LDIV LDIV S1 S2 D
÷(S2+3,S2+2,S2+1,S2)
4
LDIVP LDIVP S1 S2 D (D+3,D+2,D+1,D)

$ADD $ADD S1 S2 D
String Connects S1 String with S2 String
4
Addition to save in D
$ADDP $ADDP S1 S2 D

(S1) (S2) (D)

GADD GADD S1 S2 D N 4
Group Addition + = N
GADDP GADDP S1 S2 D N 5

(S1) (S2) (D)

GSUB GSUB S1 S2 D N 4
Group
- = N
Subtraction
GSUBP GSUBP S1 S2 D N 5

3-30
 Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.10 BCD operation instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

ADDB ADDB S1 S2 D
(S1)+(S2) (D) 4
ADDBP ADDBP S1 S2 D
BCD Addition
DADDB DADDB S1 S2 D (S1+1,S1)+(S2+1,S2)
4
(D+1,D)
DADDBP DADDBP S1 S2 D

SUBB SUBB S1 S2 D
(S1)-(S2) (D) 4
SUBBP SUBBP S1 S2 D
BCD Subtraction
DSUBB DSUBB S1 S2 D
(S1+1,S1)-(S2+1,S2)
4
(D+1,D)
DSUBBP DSUBBP S1 S2 D

MULB MULB S1 S2 D
(S1)×(S2) (D+1,D) 4
MULBP MULBP S1 S2 D
BCD
Multiplication
DMULB DMULB S1 S2 D (S1+1,S1)×(S2+1,S2)
(D+3,D+2,D+1,D) 4
DMULBP DMULBP S1 S2 D

DIVB DIVB S1 S2 D (D) Quotient

(S1)÷(S2)
(D+1) Remainder 4
DIVBP DIVBP S1 S2 D
BCD Division
(S1+1,S1)÷(S2+1,S2)
DDIVB DDIVB S1 S2 D
(D+1,D) Quotient
4
DDIVBP S1 S2 D (D+3,D+2) Remainder
DDIVBP

3-31
Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.11 Logic operation instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

WAND WAND S1 S2 D Word AND

(S1) & (S2) (D) 4
WANDP WANDP S1 S2 D
Logic
Multiplication
DWAND DWAND S1 S2 D
DWord AND
(S1+1,S1) & (S2+1,S2) (D+1,D) 4
DWANDP DWANDP S1 S2 D

WOR WOR S1 S2 D
Word OR 4
WORP WORP S1 S2 D (S1) | (S2) (D)
Logic Addition
DWOR DWOR S1 S2 D DWord OR
(S1+1,S1) | (S2+1,S2) (D+1,D) 4
DWORP DWORP S1 S2 D

WXOR WXOR S1 S2 D Word Exclusive OR

(S1) ^ (S2) (D) 4
WXORP WXORP S1 S2 D
Exclusive
OR
DWXOR DWXOR S1 S2 D DWord Exclusive OR
(S1+1,S1) ^ (S2+1,S2) (D+1,D) 4
DWXORP DWXORP S1 S2 D

WXNR WXNR S1 S2 D
Word Exclusive NOR
4
(S1) ^ (S2) (D)
WXNRP WXNRP S1 S2 D
Exclusive
NOR
DWXNR DWXNR S1 S2 D
DWord Exclusive NOR 4
(S1+1,S1) ^ (S2+1,S2) (D+1,D)
DWXNRP DWXNRP S1 S2 D

GWAND GWAND S1 S2 D N 4
(S1) (S2) (D)

& = N
GWANDP GWANDP S1 S2 D N 5

GWOR GWOR S1 S2 D N (S1) (S2) (D) 4

| = N
GWORP GWORP S1 S2 D N 5
Group
Logic Operation
GWXOR GWXOR S1 S2 D N (S1) (S2) (D) 4
^ = N
GWXORP GWXORP S1 S2 D N 5

GWXNR GWXNR S1 S2 D N (S1) (S2) (D) 4

^ = N
GWXNRP GWXNRP S1 S2 D N 5

3-32
 Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.11 Logic operation instruction (Continued)

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

BAND BAND S1 S2 D N (S1) (S2) (D)

Byte
Logic & = N 6
Multiplication BANDP BANDP S1 S2 D N

(S1) (S2) (D)

BOR BOR S1 S2 D N
Byte | = N 6
Logic Addition
BORP BORP S1 S2 D N

Byte BXOR BXOR S1 S2 D N (S1) (S2) (D)

Exclusive ^ 6
= N
OR BXORP BXORP S1 S2 D N

Byte BXNR BXNR S1 S2 D N (S1) (S2) (D)

Exclusive ^ = N
6
NOR BXNRP BXNRP S1 S2 D N

Array ABAND ABAND S D N (S1)

Byte logical 5
N & = (D)
mutiplication ABANDP ABANDP S D N

Array byte ABOR ABOR S D N (S1)

Logical | 5
addition N = (D)
ABORP ABORP S D N

Array ABXOR ABXOR S D N

(S1)
Byte Exclusive 5
OR N ^ = (D)
ABXORP ABXORP S D N

Array ABXNR ABXNR S D N

(S1)
byte
5
Exclusive N ^ = (D)
NOR ABXNRP ABXNRP S D N

3-33
Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.12 Data process instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps
b15 b0
BSUM BSUM S D S 2

1’s number
BSUMP BSUMP S D D 3
Bit Check
b31 b15 b0
DBSUM DBSUM S D S+1 S 2

1’s number
DBSUMP DBSUMP S D D 3

BRST BRST D N
Bit Reset Resets N Bits (starting from D) to 0 2
BRSTP BRSTP D N

S D
ENCO ENCO S D N
... ...
Encode 4
N bits
ENCOP ENCOP S D N 2N bits 2binary

S D
DECO DECO S D N
... ...
Decode 4
N bits
DECOP DECOP S D N 2binary 2N bits

DIS DIS S D N ... ... D

...
S .. D+1
D+N-1
4
Data DISP DISP S D N ...

Disconnect &
Connect D ...
UNI UNI S D N
D+1
D+N-1
.. ...
S 4
... ...
UNIP UNIP S D N

S Lower D
WTOB WTOB S D N Higher Lower
.. h00
h00 Higher D+1
S+N-1 Higher Lower h00 Lower
4
Word/ WTOBP WTOBP S D N h00 Higher
Byte
Conversion BTOW BTOW S D N D
D+1
h00
h00
Lower
Higher
Higher Lower
.. S

h00 Lower Higher Lower S+N-1 4

BTOWP BTOWP S D N h00 Higher

IORF IORF S1 S2 S3 Right after masking I/O data (located 4

I/O
on S1) with S2 and S3 data, perform
Refresh
IORFP IORFP S1 S2 S3 process 4

SCH SCH S1 S2 D N 4

SCHP SCHP S1 S2 D N
Finds S1 value within S2 ~ N range 5
Data and saves the first identical valued
Search position in D and S1’s identical valued
DSCH DSCH S1 S2 D N 4
total number in D+1

DSCHP DSCHP S1 S2 D N 5

MAX MAX S D n
Saves the max value in D among N
4
words starting from S
MAXP MAXP S D n
Max. Value
Search
DMAX DMAX S D n
Saves the max value in D among N
4
double words starting from S
DMAXP DMAXP S D n

3-34
 Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.12 Data process instruction (continued)

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

MIN MIN S D n
Saves the min value in D among N
4
words starting from S
MINP MINP S D n
Min. Value
Search
DMIN DMIN S D n
Saves the min value in D among N
4
double words starting from S
DMINP DMINP S D n

SUM SUM S D n
Adds up N words starting from S to
4
save in D
SUMP SUMP S D n
Sum
DSUM DSUM S D n
Adds up N double words starting
4
from S to save in D
DSUMP DSUMP S D n

AVE AVE S D n
Averages N words starting from S
4
to save in D
AVEP AVEP S D n
Average
DAVE DAVE S D n
Averages N double words starting
4
from S to save in D
DAVEP DAVEP S D n

MUX MUX S1 S2 D N S2 S1st data 4

D
N
MUXP MUXP S1 S2 D N 5
MUX
DMUX DMUX S1 S2 D N S2+1 S2 S1st data 4
N D+1 D

DMUXP DMUXP S1 S2 D N 5

DETECT DETECT S1 S2 D N Detects N data from S1, to save the 4

Data
first value larger than S2 in D, and
Detect
DETECTP DETECTP S1 S2 D N the extra number in D+1 5

Saves linear-changed value in D1

during n3 scanning of initial value
Ramp Signal
RAMP RAMP n1 n2 D1 n3 D2 n1 to final n2 and present scanning 5
Output
number in D1+1, and changes D2
value to ON after completed

S : Head Address of Sort Data

SORT SORT S n1 n2 D1 D2 n1 : Number of Words to sort
Data n1+1 : Sorting Method
5
Align n2: Operation number per Scan
SORTP SORTP S n1 n2 D1 D2 D1 : ON if complete
D2 : Auxiliary Area

3-35
Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.13 Data table process instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

FIWR FIWR S D Adds S to the last of Data Table D ~ 2

Data
D+N, and increases Data Table
Write
FIWRP FIWRP S D Length(N) saved in D by 1 3

FIFRD FIFRD S D Moves first data, S+1 of Data Table 2

First-input
S ~ S+N to D (pull 1 place after origin
Data
deleted) and decreases Data Table
Read Length(N) saved in D by 1 S
FIFRDP FIFRDP S D 3

FILRD FILRD S D Moves last data, S+N of Data Table 2

Last-Input
S ~ S+N to D (origin deleted) and
Data
decreases Data Table Length(N)
Read
FILRDP FILRDP S D saved in D by 1 S 3

FIINS FINS S D n Adds S to ‘N’th place of Data Table D

Data ~ D+N (origin data pulled by 1), and
4
Insert increases Data Table Length(N)
FIINSP FINSP S D n saved in D by 1

FIDEL FDEL S D n Deletes ‘N’th data of Data Table S ~

Data S+N (pull 1 place) and decreases
4
Pull Data Table Length(N) saved in D by
FIDELP FDELP S D n 1

3.4.14 Display instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

SEG SEG S D Z
7 Segment Converts S Data to 7-Segment as
4
Display adjusted in Z Format so to save in D
SEGP SEGP S D Z

3-36
 Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.15 String Process instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

BINDA BINDA S D Converts S of 1-word BIN value to 2

Decimal ASCII Cord to save in
Convert to BINDAP BINDAP S D starting D 3
Decimal
ASCII
DBINDA DBINDA S D Converts S of 2-word BIN value to 2
Cord
Decimal ASCII Cord to save in
DBINDAP DBINDAP S D starting D 3

BINHA BINHA S D Converts S of 1-word BIN value to 2

Hexadecimal ASCII Cord to save
Convert to BINHAP BINHAP S D in starting D 3
Hexadecimal
ASCII
DBINHA DBINHA S D Converts S of 2-word BIN value to 2
Cord
Hexadecimal ASCII Cord to save in
DBINHAP DBINHAP S D starting D 3

BCDDA BCDDA S D 2
Converts S of 1-word BCD to ASCII
Convert BCD Cord to save in starting D
BCDDAP BCDDAP S D 3
to Decimal
ASCII
DBCDDA DBCDDA S D 2
Cord Converts S of 2-word BCD to ASCII
Cord to save in starting D
DBCDDAP DBCDDAP S D 3

DABIN DABIN S D 2
Converts S S+2,S+1,S’s Decimal
ASCII Cord to BIN to save in D
Convert DABINP DABINP S D 3
Decimal ASCII
to BIN DDABIN DDABIN S D Converts S+5~S’s Decimal ASCII 2
Cord to BIN value to save in D+1 &
DDABINP DDABINP S D D 3

HABIN HABIN S D 2
Converts S+1,S’s Hexadecimal ASCII
Cord to BIN value to save in D
Convert HABINP HABINP S D 3
Hexadecimal
ASCII to BIN DHABIN DHABIN S D 2
Converts S+3~S’s Hexadecimal ASCII
Cord to BIN to save in D
DHABINP DHABINP S D 3

DABCD DABCD S D 2
Converts S+1,S’s Decimal ASCII
Cord to BCD to save in D
Convert DABCDP DABCDP S D 3
Decimal ASCII
to BCD DDABCD DDABCD S D 2
Converts S+3~S’s Decimal ASCII
Cord to BCD to save in D
DDABCDP DDABCDP S D 3

LEN LEN S D 2
String Saves String Length with S starting
Length Detect in D
LENP LENP S D 3

3-37
Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.15 String process instruction (continued)

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

STR STR S1 S2 D
Adjusts S2 saved word
data to S1 saved place
4
number to convert to String
STRP STRP S1 S2 D
Convert BIN16/32 to and save in D
String Adjusts S2 saved double
DSTR DSTR S1 S2 D
word data to S1 saved
4
place number to convert to
DSTRP DSTRP S1 S2 D
String and save in D

VAL VAL S D1 D2
Adjusts S saved string to
number to save in word
4
D1 and saves the place
VALP VALP S D1 D2
Convert String to number in D2
BIN16/32 Adjusts S saved string to
DVAL DVAL S D1 D2
number to save in double
4
word D1 and saves the
DVALP DVALP S D1 D2
place number in D2
Adjusts Floating decimal
RSTR RSTR S1 S2 D
point point Real Number
Data (S1: number, S2: 4
RSTRP RSTRP S1 S2 D places) to String format to
Convert Real Number to save in D
String Adjusts Floating decimal
LSTR LSTR S1 S2 D
point point Double Real
Number Data (S1:number, 4
LSTRP LSTRP S1 S2 D S2:places) to String format
to save in D
STRR STRR S D Converts String S to Floating
decimal point point Real 2
Convert String to Real STRRP STRRP S D Number Data to save in D
Number
STRL STRL S D
Converts String S to
Floating decimal point
2
point Double Real Number
STRLP STRLP S D
Data to save in D

ASC ASC S D cw
Converts BIN Data to
ASCII in Nibble unit,
ASCII Conversion 4
based on cw’s format from
ASCP ASCP S D cw
S to save in D
Converts 2N ASCII saved
HEX HEX S D N
in N words from S in byte
HEX Conversion unit to Nibble unit of 4
HEXP HEXP S D N Hexadecimal BIN so to
save in D
RIGHT RIGHT S D N Extracts N string from S
String Extract from
string’s final letter to save 4
Right
RIGHTP RIGHTP S D N in starting D

LEFT LEFT S D N Extracts N string from S

String Extract from Left string’s first letter to save 4
LEFTP LEFTP S D N in starting D

MID MID S1 S2 D
Extracts string which
conforms to S2 condition
String Random Extract 4
among S1 string to save in
MIDP MIDP S1 S2 D
starting D

3-38
 Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.15 String process instruction (continued)

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

REPLACE REPLACE S1 D S2 Processes S1 String as

String Random
applicable to S2 Condition to 4
Replace
REPLACEP REPLACEP S1 D S2 save in D String

FIND FIND S1 S2 D N Finds identical String to S2 in

String Find S1 ~ N data to save the 4
FINDP FINDP S1 S2 D N absolute position in D

RBCD RBCD S1 S2 D
Adjusts Floating decimal point
point Real Number Data S1 to
4
S2 place to convert to BCD,
RBCDP RBCDP S1 S2 D
Parse Real and then to save in D
Number to BCD Adjusts Floating decimal point
LBCD LBCD S1 S2 D
point Double Real Number
4
Data S1 to S2 place to convert
LBCDP LBCDP S1 S2 D
to BCD, and then to save in D

BCDR BCDR S1 S2 D
Adjusts BCD Data S1 to S2
Convert BCD
place to convert to Floating
Data to Real 4
decimal point point Real
Number BCDRP BCDRP S1 S2 D
Number, and then to save in D
BCDFormat 을 BCDL Adjusts BCD Data S1 to S2
BCDR S1 S2 D
단장형 Real place to convert to Floating
decimal point point Double 4
Number 로 Real Number, and then to
BCDLP BCDLP S1 S2 D
Convert save in D

3-39
Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.16 Special function instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

SIN SIN S D 2
SIN Operation SIN(S+1,S) (D+1,D)
SINP SINP S D 3

COS COS S D 2
COS
COS(S+1,S) (D+1,D)
Operation
COSP COSP S D 3

TAN TAN S D 2
TAN(S+1,S) (D+1,D)
TAN Operation TANP TANP S D 3

ATANP ATANP S D 3

RAD RAD S D (S+1,S) (D+1,D) 2

RAD
Converts angle to radian
Conversion
RADP RADP S D 3

DEG DEG S D (S+1,S) (D+1,D) 2

Angle
Conversion Converts radian to angle
DEGP DEGP S D 3

SQRT SQRT S D 2
Square Root (S+1,S) (D+1,D)
SQRTP SQRTP S D 3
Operation
LNP LNP S D 3

3-40
 Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.17 Data control instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

LIMIT LIMIT S1 S2 S3 D 4
If S1 < S2, then
LIMITP LIMITP S1 S2 S3 D D = S2 5
Limit If S2 < S1 < S3, then
Control D = S1
DLIMIT DLIMIT S1 S2 S3 D If S3 < S1, then 4
D = S3
DLIMITP DLIMITP S1 S2 S3 D 5

DZONE DZONE S1 S2 S3 D 4
If S1 < -S2, then
DZONEP DZONEP S1 S2 S3 D D = S1+S2-S2(S3/100) 5
Dead-zone If –S2 < S1 < S2, then
Control D = (S3/100)S1
DDZONE DDZONE S1 S2 S3 D If S1 < S2, then 4
D = S1-S2+S2(S3/100)
DDZONEP DDZONEP S1 S2 S3 D 5

VZONE VZONE S1 S2 S3 D 4
If S1 < -S2(S3/100), then
VZONEP VZONEP S1 S2 S3 D D = S1-S2+S2(S3/100) 5
Vertical-zone If –S2(S3/100) <S1< S2(S3/100), then
Control D = (100/S3)S1
DVZONE DVZONE S1 S2 S3 D If S1 < S2(S3/100), then 4
D = S1+S2-S2(S3/100)
DVZONEP DVZONEP S1 S2 S3 D 5

PIDRUN PIDRUN N Operates PID Loop N 2

Stops PID Loop N

PIDPAUSE PIDPAUSE N 2
momentarily

Changes PID Loop N’s Parameter.

PIDPRMT PIDPRMT S N ( SV(word) / Ts(word) / Kp(real) 2
/ Ti(real) / Td(real) )
Built-in
PID Control
Instruction PIDINIT PIDINIT N Initializes operation of all PID Loops 2

Operates a saved parameter by user

PIDAT PIDAT N 2
or a PID loop auto-tuning at K area
Operates a forward / reverse operation
PIDHBD F R saved by user or a mixed operation 2
PIDHBD
connecting PID loop at K area
Operates an internal / external loop
PIDCAS M S 2
PIDCAS parameter or a Cascade operation
connecting PID loop at K area

3-41
Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.18 Time related instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

Date/Time DATERD DATERD D

Reads PLC Time to save in D ~ D+6
Data 2
(Yr/Mn/Dt/Hr/Mn/Sd/Day)
Read DATERDP DATERDP D

Date/Time DATEWR DATEWR S Input

Data S ~ S+6’s Time Data in PLC 2
Write DATEWRP DATEWRP S (Yr/Mn/Dt/Hr/Mn/Sd/Day)

ADDCLK ADDCLK S1 S2 D
Adds S1 ~ S1+2 & S2 ~ S2+2 Time
Time Data
Data to save in D ~ D+2 in Time 4
Increase
ADDCLKP S1 S2 D
Data format (Hr/Mn/Sd)
ADDCLKP

SUBCLK SUBCLK S1 S2 D
Extracts S2 ~ S2+2’s Time Data from
Time Data
S1 ~ S1+2 to save in D ~ D+2 in 4
Decrease
SUBCLKP S1 S2 D
Time Data format (Hr/Mn/Sd)
SUBCLKP

SECOND SECOND S D 2
Converts Time Data S ~ S+2 to
seconds to save in double word D
SECONDP SECONDP S D 3
Time Data
Format
Conversion HOUR HOUR S D 2
Converts the seconds saved in
double word S to Hr/Mn/Sd to save
HOURP S D
in D ~ D+2
HOURP 3

3.4.19 Divergence instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

JMP JMP LABEL Jumps to LABEL location 1

Divergence
Instruction Jumps and designates the location
LABEL LABEL 5
to move to

CALL CALL LABEL

Calls Function applicable to LABEL 1

CALLP CALLP LABEL
Subroutine
Call Functional Designates Function to be called by
SBRT SBRT LABEL 1
CALL

RET RET RETURN 1

3-42
 Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.20 Loop instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

FOR FOR N 2
Operates FOR~NEXT section n times
Loop
NEXT NEXT 1
Instruction
BREAK BREAK Escapes from FOR~NEXT section 1

3.4.21 Flag instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

Carry STC STC Carry Flag( F0112 ) SET 1

Flag Set,
Reset CLC CLC Carry Flag( F0112 ) RESET 1
Error Flag
CLE CLE Error Latch Flag(F0115) RESET 1
Clear

3.4.22 System instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps
Self Diagnosis
Error Display FALS FALS n 2
(Error Display )
On during n1 Scan, Off during n2
Scan Cluck DUTY DUTY D n1 n2 4
Scan

TFLK D1 S1 S2 D2 On during S1 set time, Off during S2

Time Cluck TFLK 5
set time

WDT WDT
WDT
Watch Dog Timer Clear 1
Initialize
WDTP WDTP

Output Control OUTOFF OUTOFF All Output Off 1

Finishes applicable scan to end PLC
Operation Stop STOP STOP 1
Operation
Emergent Ends PLC operation right after
ESTOP ESTOP 1
Operation Stop Instruction executed
Initialization Task
INIT_DONE INIT_DONE End of Initialization Task 1
End

3.4.23 Interrupt related instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

All Channels EI EI All Channels Interrupt allowed 1

Interrupt
Setting DI DI All Channel Interrupt prohibited 1
Individual
EIN EIN N Individual Channel Interrupt allowed 2
Channel
Interrupt
DIN DIN N Individual Channel Interrupt prohibited 2
Setting

3-43
Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.24 Sign reversion instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

NEG NEG D
Saves D value again in D with 2’s
2
complement taken
NEGP NEGP D
2’s
complement
DNEG DNEG D
Saves (D+1,D) value again in (D+1,D)
2
with 2’s complement taken
DNEGP DNEGP D

RNEG RNEG D
Reverses D Real Number Sign then
2
to save again
Real Number RNEGP RNEGP D
Data Sign
Reverse LNEGR LNEG D
Reverses D Double Real Number
2
Sign then to save again
LNEGP LNEGP D

ABS ABS D
Converts D highest Bit to 0 2
ABSP ABSP D
Absolute Value
Operation
DABS DABS D
Converts (D+1,D)
2
highest Bit to 0
DABSP DABSP D

3.4.25 File related instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

RSET RSET S
Block Changes Block Number of file register
2
Conversion to S Number
RSETP RSETP S

EMOV EMOV S1 S2 D
Flash
Transfers S2 word data in S1 Block
Word Data 4
to D
Transfer EMOVP EMOVP S1 S2 D

Flash EDMOV EDMOV S1 S2 D

Double Word Transfers S2+1, S2 double word data
4
Data in S1 Block to D+1, D
Transfer EDMOVP EDMOVP S1 S2 D

Block Read EBREAD EBREAD S1 S2 Reads Flash Memory Block 2

Block Write EBWRITE EBWRITE S1 S2 Writes Flash Memory Block 2

Block Compares R Area’s Bank with Flash

EBCMP EBCMP S1 S2 D1 D2 4
Compare Area’s Block
Block Error Initializes Setting and status of PID
EERRST EERRST N 2
Clear loop N

3-44
 Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.4.26 F area control instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

FSET FSET D F area bit Set 2

F area
Control FRST FRST D F area bit Reset 2
instruction
FWRITE FWRITE S D F area data Write 2~3

3.4.27 Bit control instruction in word area

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps
Make Nth bit at Device D area a
LOADB B D N 2
present operation result
Reverse Nth bit at Device D area and
LOADBN BN D N 2
set it a present operation result
B D N
Perform AND Operation of Nth bit at
ANDB Device D area and a present 2
operation result
BN D N Reverse Nth bit at Device D area and
ANDBN perform AND Operation of it and a 2
present operation result
Loop Perform OR Operation of Nth bit at
instruction B D N
ORB Device D area and a present 2
operation result
Reverse Nth bit at Device D area and
ORBN B D N perform OR Operation of it and a 2
present operation result
Output Nth bit at Device D area as a
BOUT BOUT D N 2
present operation result
If it meets a condition, set Nth bit at
BSET BSET D N 2
Device D area
If it meets a condition, reset Nth bit at
BRESET BRESET D N 2
Device D area

3-45
Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.5 Special/Communication Instruction

3.5.1 Communication module related instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps
Sets opposite station No. for P2P
Station No. Set P2PSN P2PSN n1 n2 n3 Communication. n1:P2P No., n2:Block, 4
n3:Station No.
Sets word data Read Area
Read Area Set n1:P2P No., n2:Block, n3:Variable
P2PWRD P2PWRD n1 n2 n3 n4 n5 5
(WORD) sequence, n4:Variable Size,
n5:Device

Sets word data Write Area

Write Area Set n1:P2P No., n2:Block, n3:Variable
P2PWWR P2PWWR n1 n2 n3 n4 n5 5
(WORD) sequence, n4:Variable Size,
n5:Device

Sets bit data Read Area

Read Area Set n1:P2P No., n2:Block, n3:Variable
P2PBRD P2PBRD n1 n2 n3 n4 n5 5
(BIT) sequence, n4: Variable Size,
n5:Device

Sets bit data Write Area

Write Area Set n1:P2P No., n2:Block, n3:Variable
P2PBWR P2PBWR n1 n2 n3 n4 n5 5
(BIT) sequence,n4:Variable Size,
n5:Device

3.5.2 Special module common instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

GET GET sl S D N 4
Reads data of special module
memory is installed on
GETP GETP sl S D N 5
Special
Module
Read/Write PUT PUT sl S1 S2 N 4
Writes data on special module
memory is installed on
PUTP PUTP sl S1 S2 N 5

3.5.3 Exclusive motion control instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

GETM GETM sl S D N Reads N Double Word Data to D 4

CPU Area from motion module’s
memory address (S) installed on s1
GETMP GETMP sl S D N slot 5
Motion Module
Read/Write
PUTM PUTM sl S1 S2 N 4
Writes N Double Word Data from S2
device on motion module’s memory
PUTMP sl S1 S2 N address (S1) installed on s1 slot
PUTMP 5

3-46
 Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.5.4 Exclusive position control instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps
Instructions Positioning Module’s ax
Return to Origin ORG
ORG sl ax axis installed on sl slot to return to 2
Point XORG
Origin Point
Instructions Positioning Module’s ax
Floating Origin FLT
FLT sl ax axis installed on sl slot to set 2
Point XFLT
Floating Origin Point
Instructions Positioning Module’s ax
axis installed on sl slot to start
DST
Direct Start DST sl ax n1 n2 n3 n4 n5 directly with Target Position(n1), 8
XDST
Target Speed(n2), Dwell Time(n3),
M Code(n4) & Control Word(n5)
Instructions Positioning Module’s ax
IST
Indirect Start IST sl ax n axis installed on sl slot to start n 4
XIST
step indirectly

Instructions Positioning Module’s ax

Linear
LIN LIN sl ax n1 n2 axis installed on sl slot to let n2 axes 4
Interpolation
operate n1 step by Linear Interpolation

Instructions Positioning Module’s ax

Circular
CIN CIN sl ax n1 n2 axis installed on sl slot to let n2 axes 4
Interpolation
operate n1 step by Circular Interpolation

Instructions Positioning Module’s ax

Simultaneous SST axis installed on sl slot to let n4 axes
SST sl ax n1 n2 n3 n4 5
Start XSST operate n1(X), n2(Y), n3(Z) steps by
Simultaneous Start
Instructions Positioning Module’s ax
Speed/Position VTP axis installed on sl slot to switch
VTP sl ax 2
Control Switch XVTP Speed to Position
Control
Instructions Positioning Module’s ax
Position/Speed PTV
PTV sl ax axis installed on sl slot to switch 2
Control Switch XPTV
Position to Speed Control
Instructions Positioning Module’s ax
STP
Decelerated Stop STP sl ax axis installed on sl slot to stop as 2
XSTP
decelerated.

SKP Instructions Positioning Module’s ax

Skip SKP sl ax 2
XSKP axis installed on sl slot to skip

Instructions Positioning Module’s ax

axis installed on sl slot to do
Position SSP
SSP sl ax n1 n2 n3 Position Sync with main axis of n3, 5
Synchronization XSSP
n1 sync-positioned and n2 step
operated
Instructions Positioning Module’s ax
Speed SSS axis installed on sl slot to do Speed
SSS sl ax n1 n2 n3 5
Synchronization XSSS Sync with main axis of n3, n1
master and n2 slave
Instructions Positioning Module’s ax
Position POR axis installed on sl slot to override
POR sl ax n 4
Override XPOR Position to change the target
position to n

3-47
Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.5.4 Exclusive position control instruction (continued)

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps

Instructions Positioning Module’s ax axis

Speed SOR
SOR sl ax n installed on sl slot to override Speed to change 4
Override XSOR
the target speed to n

Position Instructions Positioning Module’s ax axis

specified PSO installed on sl slot to override position
PSO sl ax n1 n2 4
Speed XPSO specified speed to change the target speed to
Override n2 from n1 position

Instructions Positioning Module’s ax axis

Continuous NMV NMV sl ax installed on sl slot to operate continuously to n 2
Operation XNMV
step

INCH Instructions Positioning Module’s ax axis

Inching INCH sl ax n 4
XINCH installed on sl slot to inch to n position

Return to Position Instructions Positioning Module’s ax axis

RTP
Previous to RTP sl ax installed on sl slot to return to position previous 2
XRTP
Manual Operation to manual operation

Instructions Positioning Module’s ax axis

Operation SNS
SNS sl ax n installed on sl slot to change operation step to 4
Step Change XSNS
n

Repeated Instructions Positioning Module’s ax axis

SRS
Operation SRS sl ax n installed on sl slot to change repeated 4
XSRS
Step Change operation step to n

M Code MOF Instructions Positioning Module’s ax axis

MOF sl ax 2
Off XMOF installed on sl slot to make M code off

Present
PRS Instructions Positioning Module’s ax axis to
Position PRS sl ax n 4
XPRS change present position to n
Change

Zone Allows zone output of Positioning Module

ZOE ZOE sl ax 2
Allowed installed on sl slot

Zone Prohibits zone output of Positioning Module

ZOD ZOD sl ax 2
Prohibited installed on sl slot

Encoder Value EPRS Changes Encoder Value of Positioning Module

EPRS sl ax n 4
change XERPS installed on sl slot to n

Changes n1 step’s target position or speed of

Teaching TEA TEA sl ax n1 n2 n3 n4 Positioning Module’s ax axis installed on sl 5
slot

Changes multiple target positions or speed of

Teaching TEAA
TEAA sl ax n1 n2 n3 n4 Positioning Module’s ax axis installed on sl 5
Array XTEAA
slot

EMG Instructions Positioning Module installed on sl

Emergent Stop EMG sl ax 2
XEMG slot to perform Emergent Stop

3-48
 Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.5.4 Exclusive position control instruction (continued)

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps
Resets Error originated from
CLR
Error Reset CLR sl ax n Positioning Module’s ax axis 4
XCLR
installed on sl slot
Error Deletes Error History originated
ECLR
History ECLR sl ax from Positioning Module’s ax axis 2
XECLR
Reset installed on sl slot
Performs Point Operation of
Point PST
PST sl ax n Positioning Module’s ax axis 4
Operation XPST
installed on sl slot
Changes n2 to n1 among basic
Basic Parameter TBP
TBP sl ax n1 n2 parameters of Positioning Module’s 4
Teaching XSBP
ax axis installed on sl slot

Extended Changes n2 to n1 among extended

TEP
Parameter TEP sl ax n1 n2 parameters of Positioning Module’s 4
XSEP
Teaching ax axis installed on sl slot
Changes n2 to n1 among returned
Return to Origin
THP parameters to origin point of
Point Parameter THP sl ax n1 n2 4
XSHP Positioning Module’s ax axis
Teaching
installed on sl slot
Manual Changes n2 to n1 among manual
Operation TMP
TMP sl ax n1 n2 operation parameters of Positioning 4
Parameter XSMP
Teaching Module’s ax axis installed on sl slot
Changes input signal parameter of
Input Signal
TSP Positioning Module’s ax axis
Parameter TSP sl ax n 4
XSES installed on sl slot to the value set in
Teaching
n1
Common Changes n2 to n1 among common
TCP
Parameter TCP sl ax n1 n2 parameters of Positioning Module 4
XSCP
Teaching installed on sl slot

Instructions Positioning Module’s ax

Parameter WRT axis installed on sl slot to save
WRT sl ax n 4
Save XWRT present parameter of n axis in flash
ROM.

Reads and saves present state of

Present State SRD
SRD sl ax D Positioning Module’s ax axis 4
Read XSRD
installed on sl slot in D area of CPU

Writes n1 value of S area of CPU on

Point Operation PWR point operation step area of
PWR sl ax S n1 4
Step Write XPWR Positioning Module’s ax axis
installed on sl slot in

Plural Writes n1 value of S area of CPU on

Teaching TWR TWR sl ax S n1
plural teaching data area of
4
Data XTWR Positioning Module’s ax axis
Write installed on sl slot in
Convert n2 value of n3 step of
Data TMD operation data to n1 value on
TMD sl ax n1 n2 n3 4
Write XSMD Positioning Module’s ax axis
installed on sl slot in

3-49
Chapter 3 Instruction List

3.5.4 Exclusive position control instruction (continued)

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description
Steps
Instructs Positioning Module’s ax
CAM axis installed on sl slot to execute
XCAM X CAM sl ax n1 n2 4
operation CAM operation with CAM data of n2
with n1 designated as main axis
Instructs Positioning Module’s ax
Ellipse axis installed on sl slot to execute
XELIN X ELI N sl ax n1 n2 n3 4
interpolation Ellipse interpolation with n1 step, n2
rate and n3 anlge.

3-50
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.1 Contact point Instruction
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.1.1 LOAD, LOAD NOT, LOADP, LOADN
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
LOAD
S O O O O O O - O O - O - - - 1/2
LOAD NOT
- - -
LOADP
S O O O O O O - O O - O - - - 2
LOADN

LOAD S

LOAD NOT S

LOADP S P

LOADN S N

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Bit device’s contact / Word device’s bit contact BIT

1) LOAD, LOAD NOT

(1) LOAD means a circuit’s A contact Operation Start, LOAD NOT means B contact Operation Start.
(2) On/Off information of specified contact (S) is regarded operation result. At this moment, applicable bit value
(0 or 1) is regarded operation result for D area’s bit specified.

2) LOADP, LOADN
(1) LOADP is Operation Start Instruction at Rising edge of pulse. Operation result is On when specified contact
changes Off to On (Rising edge of pulse), and only when applicable bit value changes 0 to 1 in case of D area
bit specified.
(2) LOADN is Operation Start Instruction at Falling edge of pulse. Operation result is On when specified contact
changes On to Off (Falling edge of pulse), and only when applicable bit value changes 1 to 0 in case of D area
bit specified.

Remark

(1) S area’s bit specified is displayed in Hexadecimal. Namely, Dxxxxx.0 ~ Dxxxxx.F available.
For example, D00010.A means 10th Bit of word applicable to D10.
(2) For LOAD/AND/OR Instruction, index formula is available for Operand.
- LOAD P1[Z2] stands for LOAD P (1+[Z2] value) and LOAD D10[Z1].5 for LOAD D (10+[Z1]).5
- What is different is that index formula is added to bit value since P device is of bit, while index
formula is
added to word value since D device is of word.
(3) LOAD/LOAD NOT Instruction if used with index formula increases the number of steps by 1. And the
number of steps becomes 2 steps.
(4) It influences Error flag (F110) when Index formula is used in contact instruction.

4-1
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

3) Program Example
(1) Where if Input Condition P00020 is On, P00060 Output will be On, and at the same time P00061 Output will
be Off. And while D00020.3 changes 0Æ1 for 1 scan, P00062 Output will be On, and while D00020.3 changes
1Æ0 for 1 scan, P00063 Output will be On.

[ Ladder Program]

P00020 P00060
0 ( )
P00020 P00061
2 ( )
D00020.3 P00062
4 P ( )
D00020.3 P00063
6 N ( )
b15 b3 b0
D20 1/0

[Mnemonic Program]

Step Mnemonic Operand

0 LOAD P00020
1 OUT P00060
2 LOAD NOT P00020
3 OUT P00061
4 LOADP D00020.3
5 OUT P00062
6 LOADN D00020.3
7 OUT P00063

[Time Chart]

4-2
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.1.2 AND, AND NOT, ANDP, ANDN
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
AND
S O O O O O O - O O - O - - - 1/2
AND NOT
- - -
ANDP
S O O O O O O - O O - O - - - 2
ANDN

AND S

AND NOT S

ANDP S P

ANDN S N

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Bit device’s contact / Word device’s bit contact BIT

1) AND, AND NOT

(1) AND is A contact series-Connected instruction, and AND NOT is B contact series-connected instruction.
(2) AND or AND NOT operation of previous operation result and specified contact (S) is regarded as its result.

2) ANDP, ANDN
(1) ANDP is A contact series-connected instruction at Rising Pulse, and ANDN is B contact series-connected
instruction at Falling Pulse.
(2) When applicable contact changes, in other words, when ANDP is at Rising Pulse and ANDN is at Falling
Pulse, AND or AND NOT operation of previous operation result and specified contact(S) is regarded as its result.

3) Program Example
(1) Where after Input Condition P00020 and P00021 is AND operated, its result and P00022 is AND NOT
operated, whose result will be output in P00060, and D00020.3 value and P00023 is ANDP operated, whose
result and P00024 is ANDN operated to output its result in P00061.

[Ladder Program] [Mnemonic Program]

P00020 P00021 P00022 P00060 Step Mnemonic Operand

0 0 LOAD P00020
1 AND P00021
2 AND NOT P00022
D00020.3 P00023 P00024 P00061 3 OUT P00060
4 N P 4 LOAD D00020.3
5 ANDP P00023
6 ANDN P00024
7 OUT P00061

Remark
(1) AND/AND NOT Instruction if used with index formula increases the number of steps by 1.

4-3
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.1.3 OR, OR NOT, ORP, ORN
Area Available Flag
Instruction Cons Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
t. (F110) (F111) (F112)
OR
S O O O O O O - O O - O - - - 1/2 - - -
OR NOT
ORP
S O O O O O O - O O - O - - - 2 - - -
ORN

OR S

OR NOT S

ORP S
P

ORN S
N

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Bit device’s contact / Word device’s bit contact BIT

1) OR, OR NOT
(1) OR is 1 contact’s A contact parallel-connected instruction, and OR NOT is B contact parallel-connected
instruction.
(2) OR or OR NOT operation of previous operation result and specified contact (S) is regarded as its result.

2) ORP, ORN
(1) ORP is A contact parallel-connected instruction at Rising Pulse, and ORN is B contact parallel-connected
instruction at Falling Pulse.
(2) When applicable contact changes, in other words, when ORP is at Rising Pulse and ORN is at Falling Pulse,
OR or OR NOT operation of previous operation result and specified contact (S) is regarded as its result.

3) Program Example
(1) Where even if one input condition between P020 and P021 contacts is On, P061 is Output.

[Ladder Program] [Mnemonic Program]

P00020 P00022 Step Mnemonic Operand
0 0 LOAD P00020
1 OR P00021
2 OUT P00022
P00021

OR P00021

Remark
(1) OR/OR NOT Instruction if used with index formula increases the number of steps by 1.

4-4
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

[Example 4-1] Forward/Reverse Operation of Motor [LOAD, AND, OR, OUT]

1) Operation
Press instant contact push button PB1 to rotate motor clockwise, or PB2 to rotate motor counterclockwise.
Rotation direction can be changed even if the motor is not stopped. Press instant contact push button PB0 to
stop the motor.

2) System Diagram

3) Program Example

[Ladder Program]

P00031 P00030 P00032 P00061 P00060

0 ( ) *1)
P00060

P00032 P00030 P00031 P00060 P00061

6 ( ) *2)
P00061

12 END

[Mnemonic Program]

Step Mnemonic Operand

0 LOAD P00031
1 OR P00060
2 AND NOT P00030
3 AND NOT P00032
4 AND NOT P00061
5 OUT P00060
6 LOAD P00032
7 OR P00061
8 AND NOT P00030
9 AND NOT P00031
10 AND NOT P00060
11 OUT P00061
12 END
4-5
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

*1) Clockwise Motor Operation

Clockwise motor operation and interlock ‘P00032 P00061’ setting
P00032 P00061

*2) Counterclockwise Motor Operation

Counterclockwise motor operation and interlock ‘P00031 P00060’ setting

P00031 P00060

Remark

< Self Holding Circuit >

P00031 P00030 P00060

0
P00060

(1) P00031 if On makes Output P00060 On, which makes self-used input a contact P00060 On and
keeps the On state till P00030 signal is input. Such a circuit is called Self Holding Circuit.

4-6
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.2 Union Instruction

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.2.1 AND LOAD
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
AND LOAD - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 - - -

AND LOAD

A Block B Block

1) Function
(1) It performs AND Operation of A Block and B Block.
(2) If AND LOAD is continuously used, normal operation is not available when the max. usable number is
exceeded.
(3) Up to 15 times (16 blocks) available if continuously used.

2) Program Example
(1) Where Input Condition P00020, P00024 or P00020, P00025 or P00022, P00026 is On, P00060 is Output.

[Ladder Program] [Mnemonic Program]

P00020 P00023 P00024 P00026 P00060 Step Mnemonic Operand

0 0 LOAD P00020
P00021 P00025 1 OR NOT P00021
2 OR P00022
P00022 3 LOAD NOT P00023
4 AND P00024
AND LOAD
5 OR P00025
6 AND LOAD
7 AND NOT P00026
8 OUT P00060

[Time Chart]

P00020 OFF ON

OFF ON
P00022
OFF ON
P00026
OFF ON
P00060

4-7
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

3) References
In case Circuit Block is series-connected continuously, program input is of 2 types as follows.

M00000 M00002 M00004 M00006 M00008 P00050

( )
M00001 M00003 M00005 M00007 M00009

END

AND LOAD times unlimited AND LOAD times limited

LOAD M00000 LOAD M00000

OR OR M00001
M00001 LOAD
LOAD M00002
M00002 OR M00003
OR M00003 LOAD M00004
AND LOAD OR M00005
LOAD M00006
LOAD M00004 OR M00007
OR LOAD M00008
M00005
OR M00009
AND LOAD
AND LOAD
LOAD M00006 AND LOAD
OR AND LOAD
* M00007 AND LOAD
AND LOAD OUT P00060
LOAD END
M00008
OR M00009
AND LOAD
OUT P00060
END

Limited to 30 circuits: (Contact + coil) If used continuously, up to

up to 32 available 15 instructions (16 blocks) available

Remark

1) In XG5000, the program above if made by Ladder and displayed by Mnemonic will be of unlimited
application times of AND LOAD.

4-8
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.2.2 OR LOAD
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
OR LOAD - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 - -

A block

OR LOAD

B block

1) OR LOAD
(1) Performs OR operation of A Block and B Block to get the result.
(2) If OR LOAD is continuously used, normal operation is not available when the maximum usable number is
exceeded.
(3) Up to 15 times (16 blocks) available if continuously used.

2) Program Example
(1) Where Input condition P00020, P00025 or P00024, P00025 is On, P00060 and P00061 is output

[Ladder Program] [Mnemonic Program]

P00020 P00022 P00025 P00060 Step Mnemonic Operand

0 0 LOAD P00020
1 AND NOT P00022
2 OR NOT P00023
3 AND P00024
P00023 P00024 P00026 P00061 4 OR LOAD
OR LOAD 5 AND P00025
6 OUT P00060
7 AND NOT P00026
8 OUT P00061

[Time Chart]

OFF ON
P00020
OFF ON
P00024
OFF ON
P00025
OFF ON
P00060
OFF ON
P00061

4-9
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

3) References
In case Circuit Block is series-connected continuously, program input is of 2 types as follows.

M00000 M00001 P00006

0

M00002 M00003

M00004 M00005

M00006 M00007

M00008 M00009

16 END

OR LOAD times unlimited OR LOAD times unlimited

LOAD M00000 LOAD M00000

AND M00001 AND M00001
LOAD M00002
LOAD M00002
AND M00003
AND M00003 LOAD M00004
OR LOAD AND M00005
LOAD M00004 LOAD M00006
AND M00005 AND M00007
LOAD M00008
OR LOAD
AND M00009
LOAD M00006 OR LOAD
AND M00007 OR LOAD
OR LOAD OR LOAD
LOAD M00008 OR LOAD
OUT P00060
AND M00009
END
OR LOAD
OUT P00060
END

If used continuously, up to 15
OR LOAD times unlimited instructions (16 blocks) available

Remark

1) In XG5000, the program above if made by Ladder and displayed by Mnemonic will be of unlimited application
times of OR LOAD.

4-10
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.2.3 MPUSH, MLOAD, MPOP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
MPUSH
MLOAD - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 - - -
MPOP

MPUSH

MLOAD

MPOP

1) MPUSH, MLOAD, MPOP

(1) Makes Ladder’s Multiple Diverge available.
(2) As for MPUSH & MPOP, 16 steps are available.
(3) MPUSH: saves result operated up to present.
(4) MLOAD: only reads previous operation result for next operation with specified area value not changed.
(5) MPOP: deletes previous result saved after reading previous operation result saved in diverged point.

M00000 M00001 P00060

①

M00002 P00061
②

M00003 P00062
③

M00004 P00063
④

① MPUSH: saves M00000 state in PLC’s internal memory. Used as first divergence.
② MLOAD: reads saved M00000 state and performs next operation. Used as divergence’s relay.
③ MLOAD: reads saved M00000 state and performs next operation.
④ MPOP: reads saved M00000 in PLC’s internal memory and performs operation and resetting.
Used as divergence end.

4-11
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

2) References
[Ladder Program]
P00020 P00021 P00022 P00023 P00024 P00060
00000
P00025 P00061

P00026 P00062

P00027 P00063

P00028 P00064

P00029 P00065

P0002A P00066

00027 END

[Mnemonic Program]

Step Mnemonic Operand

0000 LOAD P00200
0001 MPUSH
0002 AND P00021
0003 MPUSH
0004 AND P00022
0005 AND P00023
0006 MPUSH
0007 AND P00024
0008 OUT P00060
0009 MLOAD
0010 AND P00025
0011 OUT P00061
0012 MPOP
0013 AND P00026
0014 OUT P00062
0015 MLOAD
0016 AND P00027
0017 OUT P00063
0018 MPOP
0019 AND P00028
0020 OUT P00064
0021 MLOAD
0022 AND P00029
0023 OUT P00065
0024 MPOP
0025 AND P0002A
0026 OUT P00066
0027 END

4-12
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.3 Reversion Instruction

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.3.1 NOT
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
NOT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 - - -

NOT

1) NOT
(1) NOT reverses the previous result.
(2) If Reverse Instruction(NOT) is used, A contact circuit is reversed to B contact circuit, B contact circuit to A
contact circuit, and series-connected circuit is reversed to parallel-connected circuit, parallel-connected circuit to
series-connected circuit for the left circuit of Reverse Instruction.

2) Program Example
Program ① and ② outputs the same result.

[Program ①]

P00020 P00021 P00022 P00023 P00024 P00060

[Program ②]

P00020 P00060

P00021

P00022

P00023

P00024

4-13
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.4 Master Control Instruction

XGK XGB
4.4.1 MCS, MCSCLR ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
MCS
n - - - - - - - - - O - - - - 1 - - -
MCSCLR

MCS MCS n

MCSCLR MCSCLR n

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
n Up to 0~15 available to set integer and n(Nesting). WORD(0~15)

1) MCS, MCSCLR
(1) If MCS’s input condition is On, up to MCSCLR identical to MCS number will be executed. And if input
condition is Off, nothing will be executed.
(2) Priority is that MCS number 0 is the highest, 15 the lowest, which should be used in priority sequence.
Clearing will be to the contrary.
(3) MCSCLR clearing of high priority data will also clear MCS Block with low priority.
(4) MCS or MCSCLR should be used in priority sequence.

2) Program Example
Where 2 MCS Instructions are used and “0” with high priority is used for MCSCLR Instruction.

Remark

1) If MCS’s On/Off Instruction is Off, MCS ~ MCSCLR’s operation result will as follows; Be careful when using
MCS (MCSCLR) Instruction.
· Timer Instruction: Not Processed. Identical Process to contact Off
· Counter Instruction: Not Processed (Present value kept)
· OUT Instruction: Not Processed
· SET, RST Instruction: Result Kept
4-14
-

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

[Example 4.2] Circuit with Common LINE [MCS, MCSCLR]

Use master control (MCS, MCSCLR) Instruction for programming since the circuit state of PLC Program will not
be as shown below.

[Relay Circuit]

[Master control used]

4-15
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.5 Output Instruction

XGK XGB
4.5.1 OUT, OUT NOT, OUTP, OUTN ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
OUT
D O - O - - - - O O - O - - - 1/2 - - -
OUT NOT
OUTP
D O - O - - - - O O - O - - - 2 - - -
OUTN

OUT D

OUT NOT D /

OUTP D P

OUTN D N

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
D Contact to be On/Off / Word device’s bit contact. BIT

1) OUT, OUT NOT

(1) OUT is used to output operation result of OUT Instruction as it is in specified device.
(2) OUT NOT is used to output reversed operation result of OUT NOT Instruction in specified device.
(3) Refer to 4.6 Subsequent Input Sequence Preferred Instruction for details on OUT Sxx.yy.

2) OUTP, OUTN
(1) As for OUTP, when up to OUTP Instruction operation result changes Off → On, specified contact is On for 1
scan and the others than that, it will be Off. If specified contact is of word device’s bit contact, applicable bit will
be 1 only for 1 scan and the others than that, it will be 0.
(2) As for OUTN, when up to OUTN Instruction operation result changes On Æ Off, specified contact is On for 1
scan and the others than that, it will be Off. If specified contact is of word device’s bit contact, applicable bit will
be 1 only for 1 scan and the others than that, it will be 0.
(3) Master-K’s D, D NOT Instruction is the Instruction changed.

4-16
-

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

3) Program Example

(1) OUTP Example: performs OUTP Instruction when input contact P00032 changes Off to On.

[Ladder Program] [Mnemonic Program]

P00032 M00002 Step Nnemonic Operand

0 P 0 LOAD P00032
M00002 P00060 1 OUTP M00002
3 2 LOAD M00002
3 OR P00060
P00060
4 OUT P00060

Self-holding where 1 scan On is output as P00060

[Time Chart]

OFF ON
P00032
1 Scan On
OFF ON
M00002
1 Scan On
OFF ON
P00060 Dotted line is P00060 output part via self-holding

(2) OUTN Example: performs D Instruction when input contact P00032 changes Off to On.

[Ladder Program] [Mnemonic Program]

P00033 M00003 Step Nnemonic Operand

0 N 0 LOAD P00033
M00003 P00061 1 OUTN M00003
3 2 LOAD M00003
3 OR P00061
P00061
4 OUT P00061

Self-holding where 1 scan On is output as P00061

·
[Time Chart]
P00033
ON OFF
-> <-
OFF ON 1 Scan On
M00003
-> <- 1 Scan On
ON
P00061 OFF
Dotted line is P00061 output part via self-holding

Remark

1) Since OUTP, OUTN Instructions are On only for1 scan based on applicable input condition, Output to P area
needs careful attention.

4-17
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

[Example 4.3] Output On/Off Operation [OUTP/OUTN]

(1) Operation
Press instant contact push button PB0 to make Output On first, and press again to make Output Off.
Whenever PB0 is pressed, Output is repeatedly On and Off.

(2) System Diagram

Digital input module Digital output module

P00000 P00006

PB0 0 0 On/Off repeated

1 1

Program
2 2

3 .

. .

. .

. .

[Ladder Program] [Mnemonic Program]

Step Nnemonic Operand

P00000 M00002
0 LOAD P00000
0 P
1 OUTP M00000
2 LOAD P00060
P00060 M00000 P00060
3 AND NOT M00000
2
4 LOAD NOT P00060
P00060 M00000 5 AND M00000
6 OR LOAD
7 OUT P00060
8 END
8 END

[Time Chart]

OFF ON
P00000

OFF ON
P00060

4-18
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.5.2 SET
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
SET D O - O - - - - O O - O - - - 1 - - -

SET S

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
D Contact to keep On state / Word device’s bit contact BIT

1) SET
(1) If input condition is On, output is kept On although specified output contact is kept On to make Input Off. If
specified output contact is of Word device’s bit contact, its applicable bit should be 1.
(2) Contact if On by SET Instruction can be Off by RST Instruction.
(3) Refer to 4.6 Subsequent Input Sequence Preferred Instruction for details on SET Syy.xx.

2) Program Example
(1) Where the state of P00060 & P00061 is checked when input contact P00020 changes Off Æ On.

[Ladder Program] [Mnemonic Program]

Step Mnemonic Operand

P00020 P00060
0 0 LOAD P00 0 20
1 OUT P00 0 60
P00020 P00061 2 LOAD P00 0 20
2 S 3 SET P00 0 61

[Time Chart]

OFF ON
P00020

OFF ON
P00060

OFF ON
P00061

4-19
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.5.3 RST
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
RST D O - O O O - - O - - O - - - 1 - - -

RST R

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
D Contact to keep Off state / Word device’s bit contact BIT

1) RST
(1) If input condition is On, output is kept Off although specified output contact is kept Off to make Input Off. If
specified output contact is of Word device’s bit contact, its applicable bit should be 0.

2) Program Example
(1) Where the output state of P00060 & P00061 is checked and P00061 output is made Off when input
condition P00020 changes On Æ Off.

[Ladder Program] [Mnemonic Program]

P00020 P00060 Step Mnemonic Operand

0 0 LOAD P00020
1 OUT P00060
P00020 P00061
2 LOAD P00020
2 S
3 SET P00061
P00021 P00061 4 LOAD P00021
4 R 5 RST P00061
·

[Time Chart]

OFF ON
P00020
OFF ON
P00021

OFF ON
P00060

OFF ON
P00061

4-20
-

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

[Example 4.4] Precautions against Power Failure

About differences between P & K areas & Set/Reset Operation

(1) Differences between Input/Output Relay(P) and Keep Relay(K)

All the following sequences are of self-keep circuit with the same operation. However, if Output is cut off
during On and then powered again, its output state will be different.

On Off P00060 Power failed Power recoverd

On
P00060 Off

On Off K00000 P00060

K00000 K00000

Self- keep Memory at Power failure

(2) Differences in operation between Input/Output Relay(P) and Keep Relay(K) areas at SET/RST Instruction
Set/Reset Instructions have Self-Keep function to keep the state once when Output is set (On) till “Off” input
comes in. However, because of differences between Input/Output Relay(P) Area and Keep Relay(K) Area, the
operation after power recovered will be different.

On P00060 Power failed Power recoverd

S On
K00000
S Off
Off P00060
S P00060
K00000
S K00000

4-21
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.5.4 FF
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
FF D O - O - - - - O O - O - - - 1 - - -

FF FF D

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type

D Bit device’s contact / Word device’s bit contact BIT

1) FF
(1) Reverses specified device’s state when input contact changes Off Æ On by Bit Output Reverse Instruction.

2) Program Example
(1) Where P0060 state is reversed when input contact P0020 is changed from Off to On.

[Ladder Program]

P00020
0 FF P00060

2 END

[Mnemonic Program]

Step Mnemonic Operand

0 LOAD P00020
1 FF P00060
2 END

[Time Chart]

P00020 OFF ON

P00060 OFF ON

4-22
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.6 Sequence/Last-input Preferred Instruction

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.6.1 SET Syy.xx
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
SET S - - - - - O - - - - - - - - 1 - - -

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
As S device contact, yy is for group number, xx for step number.
Syy.xx BIT
Group Number is available 0~127, and step number 0~99

1) SET Syy.xx(Sequence Control)

(1) In the same group with previous step number On, if present step number’s input condition contact state is On,
present step number will be On and the previous step number will be Off.
(2) If Present step number is On,it will be self-held to keep On state although input contact is Off.
(3) Even if input condition contacts are On at a time, only one step number will be On in a group.
(4) At initial Run, Syy.00 is On.
(5) SET Syy.xx Instruction will be cleared if Syy.00’s input contact is On.

2) Program Example

(1) Sequence Control Program with S01.xx group used

[Ladder Program] [Mnemonic Program]

P00030 S01.01 Step Mnemonic Operand

0 S
0 LOAD P00030
P00031 S01.02 1 SET S01.01
2 S 2 LOAD P00031
P00032 S01.00 3 SET S01.02
4 S 4 LOAD P00032
5 SET S01.00

RESET

(2) Sequence Control will be output if the previous step is On and its own condition contact is On.

[Time Chart]

P00030

P00031

P00032
Input condition contact to clear S01

S01.01

S01.02

4-23
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

[Example 4.5] Sequence Control [SET S]

Where Process 2 is executed only after Process 1 is complete, and Process 1 is executed again after Process
3 is complete in applicable sequence.

[Ladder Program]

[Time Chart]

OFF ON
Start

S00.01 OFF ON

Process OFF ON
1 End
S00.02 OFF ON

Process OFF ON
2 End

ON
S00.03 OFF

Process
OFF ON
3 End
Emergent OFF ON
stop
S00.00
ON OFF

4-24
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.6.2 OUT Syy.xx
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
OUT S - - - - - O - - - - - - - - 1 - - -

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
As S device contact, yy is for group number, xx for step number.
Syy.xx BIT
Group Number is available 0~127, and step number 0~99

1) OUT Syy.xx (Subsequent Input Preferred)

(1) Differently from SET Syy.xx, applicable step operates if input condition contact is On regardless of step
sequence.
(2) Only one step number will be On in the same group even if lots of input condition contacts are On. Finally
program is on priority.
(3) Present step number if On will be self-held to keep On state although input contact is Off.
(4) OUT Syy.xx Instruction will be cleared if Sxx.00’s input contact is On.

2) Program Example

Subsequent Input Preferred Control Program with S02 group used

[Ladder Program] [Mnemonic Program]

P00020 S02.01
Step Mnemonic Operand
0 LOAD P00020
P00021 S02.23 1 OUT S02.01
2 LOAD P00021
P00022 S02.99 3 OUT S02.23
4 LOAD P00022
5 OUT S02.98
P00023 S02.00 6 LOAD P00023
7 OUT S02.00

END

No P00020 P00021 P00022 P00023 S02.01 S02.23 S02.98 S02.00

1 On Off Off Off On

2 On On Off Off On

3 On On On Off On

4 On On On On On

4-25
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.7 End Instruction

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.7.1 END
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
END - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 - - -

END END

1) END
(1) Displays Program End.
(2) Returns to 0000 Step to process after END Instruction is processed.
(3) END Instruction should be surely input last in program. If not input, Missing End Error will occur.

Remark

What is 1 scan?

As shown below; A cycle of Input Refresh Æ User Program ExecutedÆ Self Diagnosis Æ Output Refresh is 1 scan.

Input Refresh

0000 LOAD P00020

0001 AND P00021

1scan

Operation end of user program

Self-diagnosis

Output refresh

4-26
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.8 Non-process Instruction

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.8.1 NOP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
NOP - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 - - -

No Ladder Symbol. (used only in Mnemonic)

1) NOP
(1) It means No Operation Instruction which has no effect on operation result of applicable circuit till then.
(2) Only used in Mnemonic Program.
(3) NOP is used to debug sequence program and to clear instruction while keeping the number of steps
temporarily.

2) Program Example

(1) Where steps are increased if Mnemonic Program is changed to Ladder Program with NOP Instruction used.

[Mnemonic Program]

Step Mnemonic Operand

0 LOAD P00020
1 AND P00021
2 NOP
3 OUT P00060
4 LOAD P00022
5 OUT P00061
6 END

[Ladder Program]

Remark

1) Instruction process time of NOP Instruction differs based on unit type. However, the program process time Scan
time) can be reduced by clearing the instruction which needs time to process.
2) NOP Instruction can not be input from Ladder, and NOP registered in Mnemonic will not be displayed on the
Ladder screen but the number of steps displayed as included.

4-27
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.9 Timer Instruction

4.9.1 Characteristics of Timer
1) Basic Characteristics
(1) 4 types (100ms, 10ms, 1ms, 0.1ms) of Timers are available. In Basic Parameter, according to each timer number,
time setting is available.
(2) 5 Instructions for timer are available based on operational characteristics as follows.

Instruction Designations Operation characteristics

If input condition is ON, Timer Contact Output OFF
TON ON Timer When Timer’s present value reaches setting value, Timer Contact Output will be
ON
If input condition is ON, present value will be setting value and Timer Contact
TOFF OFF Timer output ON.
If present value decreases to 0, Timer Contact Output OFF
Integral Even if input condition is OFF, present value is kept
TMR
Timer if accumulated timer value reaches setting value, Timer Contact Output ON
If input condition is ON, present value will be setting value and Timer Contact
Monostable Output ON
TMON
Timer Even if input condition is OFF and present value still decreases to 0, contact
Output OFF
Retrigger Same function as Monostable Timer. If input condition is again ON when present
TRTG
Timer value decreases, the present value will be again setting value to start operation.

(3) Up to 2,048 Timers can be used regardless of its type, and the setting value range available is 0~65, 535.
Repeated use of the same timer number is impossible. If the same timer number is used repeatedly regardless of
index used, it will be processed as repeated use, which makes Program Download unavailable.

(4) Timer value setting available device (Operand available) is integers of P, M, K, U, D, R, etc. with index functions
available. However, at this moment available index range is Z0 ~ Z3.
(5) In order to reset Timer, turn input contact OFF or use reset coil. While reset coil is ON, Timer dose not operate.
(6) If Reset Instruction is used to reset Timer, be sure to input in the same format as used in Timer format as shown
below; If TON T0001[Z000] D00010[Z003] is used, Timer format used in reset coil should be T0001[Z000], or
program error will occur in XG5000 to make Program Download unavailable.
(7) Timer makes present value updated and contact ON/OFF after END Instruction executed. Thus, Timer Instruction
may make operational error. Refer to Appendix 2. Measurement and Precision of Timer for details.

4-28
-

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

Remark

1) Due to index function, timers with different characteristics if operated at a time will be executed individually to
produce abnormal operation. If index function is to be used, pay attention to this.

4-29
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
4.9.2 TON ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
T - - - O - - - - - - - - - -
TON 2/3 - - -
t O - - - - - - - - O O - O O

Input Condition
TON TON T t

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
T Timer Contact to use WORD
stands for Timer’s setting value. Integer or word device available
t WORD
Setting Time = Basic cycle (100ms, 10ms, 1ms or 0.1ms) x setting value (t)

1) TON (On Timer)

(1) The moment input condition is On, present value increases and Timer Contact will be On if setting time (t) is
reached.
(2) If input condition is Off or meets Reset Instruction, Timer Output is Off and present value “0”.

Input signal ← t →

Timer contact
point output (Increased)

2) Program Example
(1) In 20 sec after P00020 is On, when Timer’s present value is the same as setting, T0097 will be On, and
P00065 is On.
(2) If input condition is Off before present value reaches setting value, present value will be “0”. If P00021 is On,
T0097 will be Off and present value “0”.

[Ladder Program] [Mnemonic Program]

P00020
0 TON T0097 200 Step Mnemonic Operand
0 LOAD P00020
T0097 P00065 1 TON T0097 200
3 3 LOAD T0097
4 OUT P00065
P00021 T0097
5 LOAD P00021
5 R
6 RST T0097

[Time Chart]

P00020
← t = 20 sec →

P00065

4-30
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

[Example 4.6] Flicker Circuit [TON]

(1) Operation: uses 2 timers to flicker Output..

[System Diagram]

Input Module Output module

P00002 P00006
Start 0 L
0
1
1 Program LAMP
2
2
3
3
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
F F

[Time Chart]

P00002

T0 T1

P00060

[Program]

4-31
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.9.3 TOFF
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
T - - - O - - - - - - - - - -
TOFF 2/3 - - -
t O - - - - - - - - O O - O O

Input Condition Contact

TOFF TOFF T t

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
T Timer Contact to use WORD

Stands for Timer’s setting value. Integer or word device available

t WORD
Setting Time = Basic cycle (100ms, 10ms, 1ms or 0.1ms) x Setting value( t)

1) TOFF (Off Timer)

(1) The moment input condition is On, present value will be setting value and Output On.
(2) If input condition is Off, Timer Present value decreases from setting value and the moment present value is
“0”, output will be Off.
(3) If Reset Instruction is met, Timer Output will be Off and present value “0”.

Input signal
← t →

Timer contact
point output
(Dcreased)

2) Program Example
(1) If input P00020 contact is On, T0000 contact is On at the same time and Output P00065 is On.
(2) After input P00020 is Off, Timer starts to decrease. And if present value is “0”, Timer Contact will be Off.
(3) If P00022 is On, present value will be “0”.

[Ladder Program]

[Time Chart]

P00020
t=5

P00065

4-32
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

[Example 4.7] Conveyer Control [TON, TOFF]

(1) Operation
It makes several conveyers operate (A → B → C) and stop (C → B → A) in applicable sequence.

[System Diagram]

[Ladder Program]

P00020 A. Conveyor Stop delayed time set (5 sec.)

0000 TOFF T0010 100
T0010 P00060
0004 ( )
P00020 B. Conveyor Operation delayed time set (5 sec.)
0006 TON T0000 50
T0000 B. Conveyor Stop delayed time set (5 sec.)
0010 TON T0011 50
T0000 P00061
0014 ( )
T0011
0017
P00020 C. Conveyor Operation delayed time (10 sec.)
0021 TON T0001 10
T0001 P00020 P00062
0024 ( )

END

[Time Chart]

Operation OFF ON
(P00020)
T0000
A(P00060) OFF ON T0000 : 5 sec.
T0000 T0001 : 10 sec.
OFF ON
B(P00061) T0010 : 10 sec.
T0011
T0001
OFF ON T0011 : 5 sec.
C(P00062)

4-33
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.9.4 TMR
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
T - - - O - - - - - - - - - -
TMR 2/3 - - -
t O - - - - - - - - O O - O O

Input Condition Contact

TMR TMR T t

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
T Timer Contact to use WORD

Stands for timer’s setting value. Integer or word device available

t WORD
Setting Time = Basic cycle (100ms, 10ms, 1ms or 0.1ms) x Setting value( t)

1) TMR (Accumulating Timer)

(1) If present value increases while input condition is allowed and its accumulated value reaches timer’s setting
value, Timer Contact will be ON. Since accumulating timer keeps timer value even if power cut off, there will be
no problem in case of PLC power failure at night (If used in non-volatile area).
(2) If Reset input condition is allowed, Timer Contact will be Off and present value “0”.

Input Signal
Present
accumulated time
t1 t2
Timer contact
point output (Increased)
Setting time (t) = t1 + t2

2) Program Example
(1) Where contact P0020 is repeatedly On, Off and On then to make T0096 On and Output contact P0061 On
(t1 + t2 = 30sec).
(2) If Reset Signal P0023 is On, present value will be “0” and P0061 Off.

[Ladder Program]

[Time Chart]

P00023
P00020
Setting
T0096
(Present) t = 10
t = 20
P00061

4-34
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

[Example 4.8] Tools’s Life Alarm Circuit [TMR]

(1) Operation
It measures application time of tool such as machining center and outputs alarm to exchange tools.

(2) System Diagram

Digital input module

Digital input module
P00006
P00002
0 0 L
Program
Sensor 1
1 (Measures tool
used time) 2 Lamp
2
Motor .
.
. .
. .
Exchange circuit . .
. .
. .
F F

Address Description
P00020 Drill Downward Detected
P00021 Drill Exchange Compete
P00060 Tools’s Life Alarm
T0000 Tools’s Life Setting Timer

[Ladder Program]

The Accumulating Timer shown above is recommended to be of the type in non-volatile area.
(Timer used here is in volatile area)

4-35
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
4.9.5 TMON ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
T - - - O - - - - - - - - - -
TMON 2/3 - - -
t O - - - - - - - - O O - O O

Input condition contact

TMON TMON T t

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
T Timer Contact to use WORD

Stands for Timer’s setting value. Integer or word device available

t WORD
Setting Time= Basic cycle (100ms, 10ms, 1ms or 0.1ms) x Setting value( t)

1) TMON (Monostable Timer)

(1) The moment input condition is On, Timer Output is On and if Timer’s present value start to decrease from
setting value to “0”, Timer Output will be Off.
(2) After Timer Output is On, it disregards the change of input condition On and Off.
(3) If Reset input condition is allowed, Timer Contact will be Off and present value “0”.

Input Signal

Setting time (t)

Timer contact
point output (Decreased)

2) Program Example
(1) If P00020 is On, contact T0000 will be promptly On and Timer decreases.
(2) While P00020 is repeatedly On and Off it will keep decreasing.
(3) If Reset Signal P00023 is On, present value will be “0” and Output Off.

[Ladder Program]

[Time Chart]

4-36
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

[Example 4.9] Signal Vibration-Proof Circuit [TMON]

(1) Operation
It keeps from vibration of passing signal of object with irregular speed (limit switch) so to get stable signal.

(2) System Diagram

Digital input module

Limit switch signal in P00002
case of low speed
0 Signal stabilized
Moves to left/right
Object 1
2
.
L.S Limit switch signal in .
case of high speed .
. T
.
.
F

Address Description
P00020 Limit switch used to detect position
M00020 Specific Time Output Relay
T0000 Vibration-proof Timer

(3) Program

4-37
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.9.6 TRTG
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
T - - - O - - - - - - - - - -
TRTG 2/3 - - -
t O - - - - - - - - O O - O O

Input Condition Contact Point

TRTG TRTG T t

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
T Timer Contact to use WORD

Stands for Timer’s setting value. Integer or word device available

t WORD
Setting Time= Basic cycle (100ms, 10ms, 1ms or 0.1ms) x Setting value( t)

1) TRTG (Retriggerable Timer)

(1) If input condition is allowed, Timer Output will be On and if Timer’s present value starts to decrease from
setting value to “0”, Timer Output will be Off.
(2) If input Condition changes Off → On again before Timer’s present value is “0”, Timer’s present value will be
reset to setting value.
(3) If Reset input condition is allowed, Timer Contact will be Off and present value “0”.

Input signal
t
t
Timer contact
point output
(Decreased)

2) Program Example
(1) If P00020 is On, contact T0096 is On at the same time, and if Timer decreases to “0”, P00065 is Off.
(2) If P00020 input condition is allowed before “0” is reached, present value will be setting value and will
decrease again.
(3) If Reset Signal P00023 is On, present value will be “0” and Output Off.

[Ladder Program]

[Time chart]

P00020
t=5 sec

t
P00065

(Decreased)

4-38
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

[Example 4.10] Error Detect Circuit of Returning Equipment [TRTG]

(1) Operation
It detects error of Returning Equipment with product provided at regular intervals

(2) System Diagram

(3) Program

(4) Time Chart

Detected ( P00020)
Signal

Timer ( T0005)
T

Normal ( M00100)

4-39
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.10 Counter Instruction

4.10.1 Characteristics of Counter
1) Basic Characteristics

(1) Counter increases/decreases present value whenever rising edge of pulse is input. And if setting value is
reached, it makes Output On.
(2) Counter has 4 instructions based on operation characteristics.

Instruction Designations Operation characteristics

If counter decreases from setting value by 1 and reaches 0 whenever
CTD Down Counter
pulse is input, Output is On
If counter increases setting value by 1 and exceeds setting value
CTU Up Counter
whenever pulse is input, Output is On
If pulse is input in Up terminal, counter increases by 1. If present value
Up-Down
CTUD reaches setting value, Output is On. And if pulse is again input, present
Counter
value is On
If counter increases setting value by 1 and reaches setting value whenever
CTR Ring Counter
pulse is input, Output is On. And if pulse is again input, present value is On

(3) Up to 2,048 Counters can be used regardless of its type, and the setting value range available is
0~65,535. Repeated use of the same counter number is impossible. If the same counter number is used
repeatedly regardless of index used, it will be processed as repeated use, which makes Program
Download unavailable.

(4) Counter value setting available device (Operand available) is integers of P, M, K, U, D, R, etc. with index
functions available. However, at this moment available index range is Z0 ~ Z3.
(5) If Reset Instruction is used to reset Counter, be sure to input in the same format as used in Counter format
as shown below; If CTU C0010[Z000] P0010[Z003] is used,
Counter format used in reset coil shall be C0010[Z000], or program error will occur in XG5000 to make
Program Download unavailable.

4-40
-

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

(6) As for CTUD Instruction, input contact shall be off in other than reset coil in order to reset counter.
(7) As for CTU & CTUD Instructions, even if setting value is exceeded, counter value will keep increasing with
UP counter pulse continuously input. However, no more than 65535 will be increased. Thus, use RST
Instruction to initialize CTU & CTUD Instructions’ value to 0.

Remark

1) Due to index function, counters with different characteristics if operated at a time will be executed individually to
produce abnormal operation. If index function is to be used, pay attention to this.

4-41
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.10.2 CTD
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
C - - - - O - - - - - - - - -
CTD 2/3 - - -
N O - - - - - - - - O O - O O

Count Input
CTD CTD C N

Reset Signal
R

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
C Counter contact to use WORD
N Set Value (0 ~ 65535) WORD

1) Function
(1) It decreases by 1 from setting value whenever rising edge of pulse is input. And if “0” is reached, Output will
be On.
(2) If Reset Signal is On, Output will be Off and present value will be setting value.

[Time Chart]

2) Program Example
(1) If P00030 contact is On 5 times, P00060 Output will be On when present value is counted down to “0”.
(2) If P00031 contact is On, Output will be Off and present value will be setting value.

[Ladder Program]

P00030
CTD C0010 5
P00031 C0010
(R )
C0010 P00060
( )

[Time Chart]

4-42
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.10.3 CTU ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
C - - - - O - - - - - - - - -
CTU 2/3 - - -
N O - - - - - - - - O O - O O
Count Input
CTU CTU C N

Reset Signal
R

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
C Counter contact to use WORD
N Setting value (0 ~ 65535) WORD

1) Function
(1) It increases present value by 1 whenever Rising edge of the pulse is input. And if present value exceeds
setting value, Output will be On and maximum counter (65,535) will be counted.
(2) If Reset Signal is On, Output will be Off and present value will be “0”.

[Time Chart]

2) Program Example
(1) If counted up to P00030 contact with present value identical to setting value, P00060 Output will be On.
(2) If P00031 contact is On, Output will be Off and present value will be initialized to “0”.

[Ladder Program]

P00030
CTU C0010 10
P00031 C0010
( R )
C0010 P00060
( )

[Time Chart]

P00031

P00030
Setting value
C0010

P00060

4-43
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.10.4 CTUD
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
C - - - - O - - - - - - - - -
CTUD U O O O O O - - O O - O - - - 2/3 - - -
D O O O O O - - O O - O - - -
N O - - - - - - - - O O - O O

Count Input
CTUD CTUD C U D N
Reset Signal
(R)

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
C Counter contact to use WORD
U Increases present value by 1 (+1) BIT
D Decreases present value by 1 (-1) BIT
N Setting Value (0 ~ 65,535) WORD

1) Function
(1) It increases present value by 1 whenever Rising edge of the pulse is input in U device. And if present value
exceeds setting value, Output will be On and maximum counter (65,535) will be counted.
(2) It decreases present value by 1 whenever Rising edge of the pulse is input in D device.
(3) If Reset Signal is On, present value will be “0”.
(4) If U & D device’s pulse are On at the same time, present value will not change.
(5) Up-Down Counter operates when Count Input Signal remained On status.

[Time Chart]

Reset Signal

Incr Pulse
Decr Pulse
Setting

Present
Counter contact
point output

4-44
-

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

2) Program Example
(1) If present value is the same as setting value with count up to P00030 contact, P00060
Output will be On.
(2) It will be counted Down due to P00031 contact’s Rising edge of the pulse.
(3) If Reset Condition is met, Output will be Off and counter’s present value “0”.
(4) Increment and Decrement Counter is possible by F00099 (Always On status) of Counter Enabled signal.

[Ladder Program]

FOOO99
CTUD C0000 P00030 P00031 20
P00032 C0000
( R )
C0000 P00060
( )

[Time Chart]

4-45
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

[Example 4.11] Adjustment Control of the Number of Motor Operation [CTUD]

(1) Operation
As for 4 motors to be controlled, press instant contact push button PB1 to increase operation motor number by 1, and
press PB2 to decrease by 1. When 4 motors are operated, press PB1 to stop all the motors. When 1 motor is
operated, press PB2 to make no motor operate.

(2) System Diagram

Digital Input Digital output

Module P00003 Module P00006
PB1 0 P 0
PB2 1 r 1
2 o 2
3 g 3
.. r .
a ..
. m
M4 M3 M2 M1 . .
. .

(3) Program

FOOO99
CTUD C0001 P00030 P00031 1
C0005 C0001
( R )
FOOO99
CTUD C0002 P00030 P00031 2
C0005 C0002
( R )
FOOO99
CTUD C0003 P00030 P00031 3
C0005 C0003
( R )
FOOO99
CTUD C0004 P00030 P00031 4
C0005 C0004
( R )
FOOO99
CTUD C0005 P00030 P00031 5
C0005 C0005
( R )
C0001 P00060
( )
C0002 P00061
( )
C0003 P00062
( )
C0004 P00063
( )
4-46
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.10.5 CTR ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
C - - - - O - - - - - - - - -
CTR 2/3 - - -
N O - - - - - - - - O O - O O

Count Input
CTR CTR C N
Reset Signal
(R)

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
C Counter contact to use WORD
N Setting value (0 ~ 65,535) WORD

1) Function
(1) It increases present value by 1 whenever riseing edge of the pulse is input. And if present value reaches
setting value and then input signal changes Off→On, present value will be On.
(2) If present value reaches setting value, Output will be On.
(3) If present value is lower than setting value or reset condition is On, Output will be Off.

[Time Chart]

Reset Signal

Count Pulse
Setting
Present

Counter contact
point output

2) Program Example
(1) If present value is the same as setting value due to count up by rising edge of the pulse of P00030 contact,
P00060 Output will be On.
(2) If P00030 contact is On at 11th time, P00060 Output will be Off and present value will be reset to 0.

[Ladder Program]

P00030
CTR C0010 10
P00031 C0010
R
C0010 P00060

[Time Chart]

P00031

P00030 Setting

C0005
P00060

4-47
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.11 Data transfer Instruction

XGK XGB
4.11.1 MOV, MOVP, DMOV, DMOVP ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry(
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) F112)
MOV(P) S O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
2~5 O - -
DMOV(P) D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O

MOV, DMOV S D

MOVP, MOVP
P S D

means MOV/DMOV

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Data to transfer or device number data is saved in WORD/DWORD
D Device number to save data transferred WORD/DWORD

1) MOV (Move)
It transfers specified S device’s word data to D.

1word

S 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1

D 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1

2) DMOV (Double Move)

It transfers specified S+1,S device’s double word data to D+1,D.

3) Program Example
(1) Whenever P00020 is on, h00F3 data is moved to P0004 word by MOVP instruction

h00F3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1

P0004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1

4-48
-

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

(2) Whenever P00001 is on, data (hF0F0 FF33) of P0002, P0001 is moved to P0006, P0005 double word by
MOVP instruction

P0002 P0001

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

P0006 P0005
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

Remark

1) If Timer or Counter is used by MOV instruction’s operand, applicable timer or counter’s present value (1 word) can be
read or changed.

4-49
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
4.11.2 MOV4, MOV4P, MOV8, MOV8P ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
MOV4(P) S O - O - - - - O O O O - - -
3~5 - - -
MOV8(P) D O - O - - - - O O - - - - -

MOV4, MOV8 S D

MOV4P, MOV8P P S D

means MOV4/MOV8

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Data to transfer or bit position of device number data is saved in NIBBLE/BYTE
D Bit position of device number to save data transferred NIBBLE/BYTE

1) MOV4, MOV8 (MOV4: Move Nibble / MOV8: Move Byte)

(1) Function
It transfers 4-bit or 8-bit data S to D.
MOV4(P) transfers higher 4-bit data from specified S bit to applicable area to higher 4-bit data from D.
MOV8(P) transfers higher 8-bit data from specified S bit to applicable area to higher 8-bit data from D. As for
integers to transfer, only the data as big as applicable instruction will be transferred with the other disregarded.

(2) Precautions
According to devices of Bit (P, M, L, K) and Word (D, R, U), Data will be differently processed. Bit device
takes other bits from the next word if Source S is out of word range during Instruction executed. If Destination
D’s area for saving exceeds the word, other bits will be saved also in the next word. If bit device’s last word has
been specified and instruction is to be executed including the next word, the process should be as described in
word device.
Word device if out of word range when Sourced S follows instruction, will fill the area exceeded with 0. And if
Destination D exceeds word, the exceeded data will not be processed.

2) MOV8 P0003A D10.3

(1) If Source Device is of bit, and data to transfer is out of the specified word range, it will be transferred to the
next area’s bit value.

4-50
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

3) MOV8 D00003.A D10.3

(1) If Source Device is of word, and data to transfer is out of the specified word range, the range exceeded will
be disregarded and filled with 0 in Destination.

4) Program Example
Where 4-Bit Data from P00004 is transferred to D0.2 ~ D0.5 by MOV4P Instruction whenever Input Signal
P00020 is On.

P00020
MOV4P P00004 D00000.2

Remark

1) Dxxx.x Rxxx.x Uxx.xx.x areas are not transferred to D+1 area but disregarded if MOV4, MOV8 instruction results
exceed the area.

4-51
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.11.3 CMOV, CMOVP, DCMOV, DCMOVP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
CMOV(P) S O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
2~4 O - -
DCMOV(P) D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O

CMOV, DCMOV S D

CMOVP, DCMOVP P S D

means CMOV/DCMOV

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Data to transfer or device number data is saved in WORD/DWORD
D Device number to save data transferred WORD/DWORD

1) CMOV (Complement Move)

(1) It takes 1’s complement in word data S to transfer its result to D.
1word

S 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 Before

D 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 After

2) DCMOV (Double Complement Move)

(1) DCMOV(P) Instruction takes 1’s complement to transfer twice CMOV(P) Instruction data. (Double word
transfer)

1word 1word

0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 Before
S+1 S

After
1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0
D+1 D

4-52
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

3) Program Example
(1) If Input P00020 is On, it takes P00002 word data’s 1’s complement to transfer to P0006.

P00020
CMOV P0002 P0006

1 Word

S 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1

( P0002)

D 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0
CMOV execution ( P0006)

4-53
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.11.4 GMOV, GMOVP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
GMOV(P) D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O 4~6 O - -
N O - O - - - O - - O O O O O

GMOV GMOV S D N

GMOVP GMOVP S D N

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
S Data to transfer or device number data is saved in WORD
D Device number to save data transferred WORD
N Number to transfer in group (0 ~ 65536) WORD

[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
To be set, if N’s range exceeds specified area. Applicable instruction result is not
Error F110
processed.

1) GMOV (Group Move)

(1) It transfers N word data from S to D.
(2) MOV Instruction transfers word 1: 1, and GMOV Instruction transfers word N: N.

S h0002 D h0002
S+1 h0007 Group D+1 h0007
. h007F transfortation . h007F
N N
. .
. .
S+N-1 h005A D+N - 1 h005A

Word value

2) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal P00020 is On, D00000, D00001, D00002 word data is saved in P00004, P00005, P00006.

S(Source) D(Destination)
GMOV
D00000 h0001 h0001 P00004
Execute
D00001 h0004 h0004 P00005
N
D00002 h005F h005F P00006
(Before) (After)

4-54
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.11.5 FMOV, FMOVP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
FMOV(P) D O - O O O O - - - O O O O 4~6 O - -
N O - O - - - O - - O O O O O

FMOV FMOV S D N

FMOVP FMOVP S D N

[Area Setting]

Operand Description Data Size

S Data to transfer or device number data is saved in WORD
D Device number to save data transferred WORD
N Number to transfer in group (0 ~ 65,536) WORD

[Flag Set]

Flag Description Device Number

To be set, if Z’s range exceeds specified area. Applicable instruction result is not
Error F110
processed.

1) FMOV (File Move)

(1) It transfers Word data S for N Word from D in regular order.
(2) It is mainly used to initialize data’s specific area.
(3) If N’s range exceeds specified area, Error Flag (F110) will be set but not processed.
P00020
FMOV D00000 M0000 4

S1(Source) FMOV execution D (Destination)

D00000 h0052 h0052 M00000
Word h0052 M00001
N=4
value h0052 M00002
h0052 M00003
(After)

2) Program Example

Whenever Input Signal P00020 is On, D00002 word data is saved in P0004, P0005, P0006.

FMOVP execution
D00002 h0098 h0098 P0004
Word h0098 P0005
Value
h0098 P0006

4-55
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.11.6 BMOV, BMOVP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
BMOV(P) D O - O O O O - - - O O O O O 4~6 O - -
Z - - - - - - O - - - O O O O

BMOV BMOV S D N

BMOVP BMOVP S D N

[Area Setting]

Operand Description Data Type

S Area Number data is saved in WORD
D Destination Area Number WORD
Z Format to execute BMOV(P) WORD

[Flag Set]

Flag Description Device Number

To be set, if Z’s range exceeds specified area. Applicable instruction result is not
Error F110
processed.

1) BMOV (Bit Move)

(1) By the format set in Z, specified number of bits will be transferred to D from word data S.
Z’s format

b15 b8 b0
0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 h4906

S’s start bit D’s start bit Transmission number (Hex.: 10 -> h0A)

(2) Z’s transferred bits: up to h00 ~ h10 available

(3) Error Flag(F110) will be set but the result will be not processed if D+Z’s result range is exceeded.

2) Program Example
Whenever Input Signal P00030 is On, 4-bit from the 0th bit in P0002 area will be saved in P0006 starting from
P0063 bit.

4-56
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.11.7 GBMOV, GBMOVP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O
GBMOV(P) 4~7 O - -
Z - - - - - - O - - O O O O O
N - - - - - - O - - O O O O O

GBMOV GBMOV S D Z N

GBMOVP GBMOVP S D Z N

[Area Setting]

Operand Description Data Type

S Area Number data is saved in WORD
D Destination Area Number WORD
Z Format to execute GBMOV(P) WORD
N Number to execute GBMOV(P) (0 ~ 32,767) WORD

[Flag Set]

Flag Description Device Number

To be set, if Z’s range exceeds specified area. Applicable instruction result is not
Error processed. F110
To be set, if N’s range exceeds specified area.

1) GBMOV (Group Bit Move)

(1) It transmits N words from S’s data to starting D in regular order in group by Z’s format.
[Z’s format]

b15 b8 b0
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 h130A

S’s start bit D’s start bit Transmission number (Hex.: 10->h0A)

(2) If Z is h130A, it transmits S’s 10-bit data from the No.1 bit will be moved to D’s No.3 bit in regular order in
group.
(3) If area exceeded while executed, set Error Flag.

2) Program Example
(1) In case of D10000=h2408 and P1200=4 which is saved , If Intput contact P00000 is on, GBMOV instruction
will be executed.
(2) This example shows the group bit transmission. The transmitted data are sequentially saved in the 8-bit
data area of P1100 and bit 4 of P1100 receives bit 2 (b02) of P1000 first. 4 word data in the range of
P1000 to P1003 are moved to the range of P1100 to P1103 area in the same method.

P00000
GBMOV P1000 P1100 D10000 P1200

4-57
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.11.8 RMOV, RMOVP, LMOV, LMOVP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
RMOV(P) S O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
2~5 O - -
LMOV(P) D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O

RMOV, LMOV S D

RMOVP, LMOVP P S D
means RMOV/LMOV

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Data to transfer or device number data is saved in REAL/LREAL
D Device number to save data transferred REAL/LREAL

1) RMOV( Real Move)

(1) It transfers S+1,S device’s Real Data to D+1,D.
(2) If input a constant in S, decimal input type can be input. Hexadecimal input type is not permitted.

2) LMOV (Long Real Move)

(1) It transfers S+3,S+2,S+1,S’s Long Real Data to (D+3,D+2,D+1,D).
(2) If input a constant in S, decimal input type can be input. Hexadecimal input type is not permitted.

3) Program Example
(1) If input contact point P00000 is On, Long Real data 1.234 is saved in D1000 by Long Real data.

4-58
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.11.9 $MOV, $MOVP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O - O O O - O - - O O O O O
$MOV(P) 2~18 O - -
D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O

$MOV $MOV S D

$MOVP $MOVP S D

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
S String to transfer or device’s head number string is saved in STRING
D Device’s head number to save string transferred STRING

[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If out of S or D device’s range. F110

1) $MOV (Character string Move)

(1) It transfers string starting with S to device starting with D.
b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S 2nd letter First letter D 2nd letter First letter
S+1 4th letter 3rd letter D+1 4th letter 3rd letter
S+2 6th letter 5th letter D+2 6th letter 5th letter

h00 nth letter h00 nth letter

NULL: displays the last of text

If NULL is saved in S+n’s lower byte, 0x00 will be saved in D+n’s higher byte.
b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S h42(B) h41(A) S h42(B) h41(A)
S+1 h44(D) h43(C) D+1 h44(D) h43(C)
h46(F) h00 D+2 h00 h00
S+2
Higher byte is not transferred. Higher byte of 0x00 is saved.

Up to 31 letters is available for string to transfer.

2) Program Example
(1) If input contact point P00000 is On, ‘string Data’ is saved in D2000.

4-59
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.12 Conversion Instruction

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.12.1 BCD, BCDP, DBCD, DBCDP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
BCD(P) S O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
2~4 O - -
DBCD(P) D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O

BCD, DBCD S D

BCDP, DBCDP S D

means BCD/DBCD

[Area Setting]

Operand Description Data Type

S Device Number data is saved in WORD/DWORD
D Device number of Destination area WORD/DWORD

[Flag Set]

Flag Description Device Number

As for BCD(P) when S’ value is other than 0~9999 (h270F).
Error F110
As for DBCD(P) when S+1,S’s value is other than 0~99999999 (h5F5E0FF)

1) BCD (Binary-Coded Decimal)

(1) It converts specified S device’s BIN data (0~h270F) to BCD so to save in D.

Instruction Data Size BIN format BCD format

BCP(P) 16-bit 0~h270F 0~9999
DBCD(P) 32-bit 0~h05F5E0FF 0~99999999

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

S: h270F 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

Convert to BCD
3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

D: BCD 9999 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1

3 2 1 0
X10 X10 X10 X10

4-60
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

2) DBCD (Binary-Coded Decimal)

(1) It converts specified (S+1,S) device’s BIN Data (0~h05F5E0FF) to BCD so to save in D+1 and D
respectively.

3) Error
(1) If BIN Data after converted to BCD exceeds the range displayed, it sets Error Flag(F110).

4) Program Example
(1) Where ‘h1111’ data which is saved in D00001 after converted to BCD is output to P0005 if Input Signal
P00020 is On.
P00020
BCD D00001 P0005

4-61
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

[Example 4.12] Counter’s (Timer) External Output of Present Value [BCD, BMOV]

(1) Operation
If the warehouse keeps 30 products in stock, conveyer will stop and the number kept in stock will be displayed
out.

(2) System Diagram

Digital Input Module Digital Output Module

(P00031) P00003 P00004
(P00030)
Photoelectric S/W P
Photoelectric S/W „ „ „ „ „ 0 0
„ R
„ 1 O 1
„
G
„ „ „ „ Output 2 R 2
„ „ „ A
Input „ 3 M 3
„ „ „ „ „ 4
Conveyer Motor ·
„ „ „ „ „ „ „ Photoelectric
M S/W · 5

· 6
y 7
· Digital
Counter Adjusting S/W Output
· ·
(P00032) Counter Unit
· F
1 8 0
·
·
F

(3) Program

F00099
CTUD C0000 P00030 P00031 30
P00032 C0000
( R )
C0000 P0006F
( )
F00099
BCD C0000 M0000

BMOV M0000 P0004 8

4-62
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.12.2 BCD4, BCD4P, BCD8, BCD8P
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
BCD4(P) S O - O - - - - O O O O - - -
3~5 O - -
BCD8(P) D O - O - - - - O O - - - - -

BCD4, BCD8 S D

BCD4P, BCD8P P S D

means BCD4/BCD8

[Area Setting]

Operand Description Data Type

S Data to convert to BCD or bit position of device number data is saved in NIBBLE/BYTE
D Bit position of device number to save data converted NIBBLE/BYTE

[Flag Set]

Flag Description Device Number

As for BCD4 when S’s value is other than 0~9.
Error F110
As for BCD8 when S’s value is other than 0~99.

1) BCD4
(1) It converts specified S device’s 4-bit BIN data to (0~9) BCD4 and saves in specified D device area.
(2) Error Flag (F110) will be set if S value is other than (0~9).

2) BCD8
(1) It converts specified S device’s 8-bit BIN data to (0~9) BCD8 and saves in specified D device area.
(2) Error Flag (F110) will be set if S value is other than (0~99).

3) Program Example
(1) If P00000 is On, ‘9’s Nibble data will be BCD converted to ‘h9’ from P0200’s No. 4 bit.
(2) If P00001 is On, ‘99’s Byte data will be BCD converted to ‘h99’ from P0400’s No. 8 bit.

4-63
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.12.3 BIN, BINP, DBIN, DBINP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
BIN(P) S O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
2~4 O - -
DBIN(P) D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O

BIN, DBIN S D

BINP, DBINP S D

means BIN/DBIN

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Area Number or BCD Data BCD Data is saved in WORD/DWORD
D Area data converted to BIN is saved in WORD/DWORD

[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
As for BIN(P), S’s data is other than BCD format (0~9999)
Error F110
As for DBIN(P), S+1,S’s data is other than BCD format (0~99999999)

1) BIN (Binary)
(1) It converts specified S device’s BCD data (0~9999) to BIN data and it is saved in D.

Instruction Data Size BCD format BIN format

BCP(P) 16-bit 0~9999 0~h270F
DBCD(P) 32-bit 0~99999999 0~h05F5E0FF

3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

S: BCD 9999 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1

3 2 1 0
X 10 X 10 X 10 X 10

Convert to BIN

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

D: 0x270F 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1

2) DBIN (Double Binary)

(1) It converts specified S+1,S device’s BCD data( 0~99999999) to BIN data and it is saved in D+1,D.

4-64
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

S : BCD 99999999
S+1 (Higher 4 places) S (Lower 4 places)

3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10

Covert to BIN
31 16 15 3 2 1 0
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

D+1 (Higher 16-bit) D (Lower 16-bit)

D : h05F5EOFF

3) Program Example
Where P0000 BCD data after converted to BIN data is saved in D0002 if Input Signal P00020 is On.

3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
P0000 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 h2709

3 2 1 0
x10 x10 x10 x10

Convert to BIN

D0002 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 h0A95

4-65
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.12.4 BIN4, BIN4P, BIN8, BIN8P
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
BIN4(P) S O - O - - - - O O O O - - -
3~5 O - -
BIN8(P) D O - O - - - - O O - - - - -

BIN4, BIN8 S D

BIN4P, BIN8P P S D

means BIN4/BIN8

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Data to convert or bit position of device number data is saved in NIBBLE/BYTE
D Bit position of device number to save data converted NIBBLE/BYTE

[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
As for BIN4(P), S’s device value is other than BCD format (0~9)
Error F110
As for BIN8(P), S’s device value is other than BCD format (0~99)

1) BIN4
(1) It converts specified S device’s 4-bit BCD data (0~9) to BIN4 and saves in D.
(2) Error Flag (F110) will be set if S’s value is other than BCD format (0~9).

2) BIN8
(1) It converts specified S device’s 8-bit BCD data (0~99) to BIN8 and saves in D.
(2) Error Flag (F110) will be set if S value is other than BCD format (0~99)

3) Program Example
(1) If Input signal P00000 is On, BCD data is converted and saved from P0200’s No.4 bit.
If Input signal P00001 is On, BCD data is converted and saved from P0400’s No.8 bit.

P00000
BIN4 h9 P02004
P00001
BIN8 h99 P04008

4-66
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.12.5 GBCD, GBCDP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O O O O O - - - - O O O O O
GBCD(P) D O - O O O - - - - - O O O O 4~6 O - -
N O - O O O - - - - O O O O O

GBCD GBCD S D N

GBCDP GBCDP S D N

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Data to convert to BCD or Device number data is saved in WORD
D Device number to save BCD data converted WORD
N Total number of data to convert to BCD WORD

[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
If one value among N data is other than 0~9999(h270F)
Error F110
To be Set if N’s range exceeds specified area

1) GBCD (Group Binary Coded Decimal)

(1) It converts specified S word data of N BIN value to BCD and saves respectively in starting D in regular
order.
(2) It converts N BIN data ‘0~9999’ from specified S device to GBCD and saves in starting D 1:1.
(3) Error Flag (F110) will be set if specified D’s N value from S is other than "0~9999".

2) Program Example
(1) If Input signal P00000 is On, 5 word data from P1000~P1004 is Group BCD converted respectively
and saved in P1100~P1104 area.

Remark

1) In Basic Parameter with ‘Continue running when an arithmetic error occurs’, if 1 value among N data is other
than 0~9999, other data will not be converted to BCD nor operated.

4-67
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.12.6 GBIN, GBINP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O O O O O - - - - O O O O O
GBIN(P) D O - O O O - - - - - O O O O 4~6 O - -
N O - O O O - - - - O O O O O

GBIN GBIN S D N

GBINP GBINP S D N

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S BCD Data to convert to BIN or Device number data is saved in WORD
D Device number to save BIN data converted WORD
N Total number of data to convert to BIN WORD

[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
If one value among N data is other than BCD 0~9999.
Error F110
To be set if N’s range exceeds specified area

1) GBIN (Group Binary)

(1) It converts specified S word data of N BCD value to BIN and saves respectively in starting D in regular
order.
(2) It converts specified S device’s BCD data (h0~h9999) to GBIN as many as specified N and saves in D.
(3) Error Flag (F110) will be set if OP1’s value is other than BCD format (h0~h9999).

2) Program Example
(1) If Input signal P00000 is On, 5 word BCD data from P1000 to P1004 is Group BCD respectively
converted and saved in from P1100 to P1104 area.

P00000
GBIN P1000 P1100 5

Remark

1) In Basic Parameter with ‘Continue running when an arithmetic error occurs’, if any value among specified S’s
N datas is other than BCD format, all the n datas will not be operated.

4-68
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.13 Convert Real Instruction

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.13.1 I2R, I2RP, I2L, I2LP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
I2R(P) S O O O O O - - - - O O O O O
2~4 - - -
I2L(P) D O - O O O - - - - - O O O O

I2R, I2L S D

I2RP, I2LP P S D

means I2R/I2L

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Area Number where Integer Data is saved, or Integer Data INT
D Device Position to save data converted to Real Data Format REAL/LREAL

1) I2R (Integer to Real)

(1) It converts specified S 16-Bit Integer data to Single Real (32-Bit) and saves in D+1, D.

b15 b0 b31 b15 b0

S h04D2 h449A h4000
(1234) D+1 D

2) I2L (Integer to Long real)

(1) It converts specified S 16-Bit Integer data to Long Real (64-Bit) and saves in D+3,D+2,D+1,D.

b15 b0 b63 b48 b32 b16 b0

S h04D2 h4093 h4800 h0000 h0000
(1234) D+3 D+2 D+1 D

3) Program Example
(1) If Input signal P0000 is On, It converts Integer ‘1234’ to Real and save in 2 word data area from D1200
to D1201.

P00000
12R 1234 D1200

4-69
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.13.2 D2R, D2RP, D2L, D2LP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
D2R(P) S O O O O O - - - - O O O O O
2~4 - - -
D2L(P) D O - O O O - - - - - O O O O

D2R, D2L S D

D2RP, D2LP P S D

means D2R/D2L

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Area Number where Double Integer Data is saved, or Double Integer Data DINT
D Device Position to save data converted to Real Data Format REAL/LREAL

1) D2R (Double Integer to Real)

(1) D2R(P) converts S+1,S specified 32-Bit Double Integer data to Real Number(32-Bit) to save in D+1, D.
(2) If 32-bit Interger data value exceeds valid range (24-bit) of Floating point Real data, accuracy become lower
and then inaccuracy error flag (F0057A) is set. But PLC operation status does not change.

b31 b15 b0 b31 b15 b0

S+1,S h00BC h614E h4B3C h614E
(12345678) D+1 D

2) D2L (Double Integer to Long real)

(1) D2L(P) converts S+1,S specified 32-Bit Double Integer data to Long Real number (64-Bit) to save in
D+3,D+2,D+1,D.

b31 b15 b0 b63 b48 b32 b16 b0

S+1,S h00BC h614E h4167 h8C29 hC000 h0000
(12345678) D+3 D+2 D+1 D

3) Program Example
(1) In case of Double Integer data ‘812121’ is saved in 2 Word data area from P1000 to P1001, If Input
signal P00000 is On, Double Integer data ‘812121’ is converted to Real data in 2 Word area from P1100 to
P1101.

P00000
D2R P1000 P1100
.

4-70
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.13.3 R2I, R2IP, R2D, R2DP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
R2I(P) S O O O O O - - - - O O O O O
2~4 O - -
R2D(P) D O - O O O - - - - - O O O O

R2I, R2D S D

R2IP, R2DP P S D

means R2I/R2D

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Area Number where Real number is saved, or Real number REAL
D Device Position to save data converted to Real Data Format INT/DINT

[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
When R2I Instruction used and S specified Single Real Number is out of
-32,768~32,767 range.
Error F110
When R2D Instruction used and S specified Single Real Number is out of
-2,147,483,648 ~2,147,483,647 range.

1) R2I (Real to Integer)

(1) R2I converts S+1,S specified Real Number(32-bit) to 16-bit Integer data to save in D.

b31 b15 b0 b15 b0

S+1, S h4640 hE6B6 D h303A
(12345.678) (12346)

(2) If S+1,S specified Real Number value exceeds -32,768~32,767 range, operation error occurs.
At this moment, the result of 32,767 will be saved if input value is bigger than 32,767, and -32,768 will be
saved if input value is smaller than -32,768.
(3) Value of below decimals is will be omitted after rounding off the nearest integer.

2) R2D (Real to Double Integer)

(1) R2D converts S+1,S specified 32-bit Integer data to Long Real Number(32-bit) and saves in D+1,D.

b31 b15 b0 b31 b15 b0

S+1, S h47F1 h2065 D+1, D h0001 hE241
(123456.78) (123457)

(2) If S+1,S specified Real Number’s value exceeds -2,147,483,648~2,147,483,647 range, operation error
occurs. At this moment, the result of 2,147,483,647 will be saved if Real value is bigger than 2,147,483,647, and
-2,147,483,648 will be saved if Real value is smaller than -2,147,483,648.
(3) Value of below decimals is will be omitted after rounding off the nearest integer.

4-71
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

3) Error
(1) When R2I Instruction used and S specified Single Real Number is out of -32,768~32,767 range, operation error
occurs.
(2) When R2D Instruction used and S specified Single Real Number is out of -2,147,483,648~2,147,483,647 range,
operation error occurs.

4) Program Example
(1) If Input signal P00000 is On, Real data ‘45688.8123’ is converted to Interger data of ‘45689’ in 2 Word
from P1100 to P1101.

P00000
R2D 45688.8123 P1100

4-72
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.13.4 L2I, L2IP, L2D, L2DP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
L2I(P) S O O O O O - - - - O O O O O
2~4 O - -
L2D(P) D O - O O O - - - - - O O O O

L2I, L2D S D

L2IP, L2DP P S D

means L2I/L2D

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Area Number where Long Real Data is saved, or Long Real Data LREAL
D Device Position to save data converted to IntegerData Format INT/DINT

[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
In case of L2I Instruction used and S specified Real Number is out of -32,768~32,767
range.
Error F110
In case of L2D Instruction used and S specified Real Number is out of -2,147,483,648
~2,147,483,647 range.

1) L2I (Long real to Integer)

(1) L2I(P) converts S+3,S+2,S+1,S specified Long Real Number to Integer (16-bit) to save in D.

b63 b48 b32 b16 b0 b15 b0

H4093 H4A45 H84FD H0FF6 D H04D2
D+3 D+2 D+1 D (1234)
(1234.5678901234)

(2) If S+3,S+2,S+1,S specified Long Real Number’s value exceeds -32,768 ~ 32,767 range, operation error
occurs. At this moment, the result of 32,767 will be saved if input value is bigger than 32,767, and -32,768 will
be saved if input value is smaller than -32,768.
(3) Value of below decimals is will be omitted after rounding off the nearest integer.

2) L2D (Long real to Double Integer)

(1) D2L(P) converts S+3,S+2,S+1,S specified Long Real Data to Double Integer data (32-bit) to save in D+1,D.

b63 b48 b32 b16 b0 b31 b15 b0

H4167 H8C29 HDCD6 HE8B0 D+1, D H00BC H614E
S+3 S+2 S+1 S (12345678)
(12345678.901234)

(2) If S+3,S+2,S+1,S specified Real Number’s value exceeds -2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647 range, operation
error occurs. At this moment, the result of 2,147,483,647 will be saved if Real value is bigger than
2,147,483,647, and -2,147,483,648 will be saved if Real value is smaller than -2,147,483,648.
(3) Value of below decimals is will be omitted after rounding off the nearest integer.

4-73
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

3) Program Example
(1) In case of Long Real data from D1000~D1003=13456.6 is saved, If Input signal P0000 is On, Integer
data of 13457 is converted and it is saved in P1100.

P00000
L2I D1000 P1100

4-74
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ X
4.13.5 R2L, R2LP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O O O O O - - - - O O O O O
R2L(P) 2~4 - - -
D O - O O O - - - - - O O O O

R2L S D

R2LP P S D

means R2L

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Area Number where Real Data is saved, or Long Real Data REAL
D Area Number where Long Real Data is saved, or Long Real Data LREAL

[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
To be set, in case of FPU operation error flag F0057E, F0057C, F0057B, F0057A are
Error F110
Set.

1) R2L (Real to Long Real)

(1) R2L converts S+1,S specified Real Number (32-bit) to Long real (64-bit) to save in D+3, D+2, D+1, D.

b31 b15 b0 b63 b48 b32 b16 b0

S+1,S h4B3C h614E h4167 h8C29 hC000 h0000
(12345678) D+3 D+2 D+1 D

2) Error
It doesn’t occur operation errors except input data is not Real number.

3) Program Example

4-75
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4.13.6 L2R, L2RP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O O O O O - - - - O O O O O
L2R(P) 2~4 O - -
D O - O O O - - - - - O O O O

L2R S D

L2RP P S D

means L2R

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Area Number where Long Real Data is saved, or Long Real Data LREAL
D Area Number where Real Data is saved, or Long Real Data REAL

[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
To be set, in case of FPU operation error flag F0057E, F0057C, F0057B, F0057A are
Error F110
Set.

1) L2R (Long real to Real)

(1) L2R(P) converts S+3,S+2,S+1,S specified Long Real Number to Real to save in D+1, D.

b63 b48 b32 b16 b0 b31 b15 b0

0x4167 0x8C29 0xDCD6 0xE8B0 D+1, D 0x4B3C 0x614E
S+3 S+2 S+1 S
(12345678.901234)
(12345678.901234)

2) If S+3,S+2,S+1,S specified Long Real Number’s value exceeds Real Number’s range, operation error
occurs. Long Real Number’s range is | 2-1022 to 21023 | , Real Number’s range is | 2-126 to 2127 |.

3) Program Example
(1) In case of Long Real data from D1000~D1003=13456.6 is saved, If Input signal P0000 is On, Real data of
13456.6 is converted and it is saved in P1100.

4-76
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ X
4.13.7 U2R, U2RP, U2L, U2LP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
U2R(P) S O O O O O - - - - O O O O O
2~4 - - -
U2L(P) D O - O O O - - - - - O O O O

COMMAND
U2R, U2L

COMMAND
U2RP, U2LP P

means U2R/U2L

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data type
S Area number where unsigned integer data is saved, or unsigned inter data UINT

D Area number where converted real data is saved REAL/LREAL

1) U2R ( Unsigned Integer to Real )

(1) Converts 16 bit unsigned integer data set by S to short real data (32 bit) and save it in D+1, D.

b15 b0 b31 b15 b0

S H04D2 H449A H4000
(1234) D+1 D

2) U2L (Unsigned Integer to Long real )

(1) Converts 16 bit unsigned integer data set by S to long real data (64 bit) and save it in D+3, D+2, D+1, D.

b15 b0 b63 b48 b32 b16 b0

S H04D2 H4093 H4800 H0000 H0000
(1234) D+3 D+2 D+1 D

3) Program example
Input signal P00000 is on, unsigned data of 1234 is converted to real data and it is saved in
D1200~D1201.

4-77
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.13.8 UD2R, UD2RP, UD2L, UD2LP ○ X

Area Available Flag

Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
UD2R(P) S O O O O O - - - - O O O O O
2~4 - - -
UD2L(P) D O - O O O - - - - - O O O O

COMMAND
UD2R, UD2L S D

COMMAND
UD2RP, UD2LP P

means UD2R/UD2L

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data type
S Area number where double unsigned integer data is saved, or unsigned inter data UDINT
D Area number where changed real data is saved REAL/LREAL

1) UD2R ( Double Unsigned Integer to Real )

(1) Converts 32 bit double unsignded integer data set by S+1, S to shourt real data (32 bit) and save it D+1, D.
(2) In case 23 bit unsigned integer data exceeds effective range (24 bit) of short floating point type real data,
accuracy is removed and inaccuracy error flag (F0057A) is set. Tough inaccuracy error flag is set, there is no
changed in PLC operation.

b31 b15 b0 b31 b15 b0

S+1, S H00BC H614E H4B3C H614E
(12345678) D+1 D

2) UD2L ( Double Unsigned Integer to Long real )

(1) Converts 32 bit double unsigned integer data set by S+1, S to long real data (64 bit) and save it D+3, D+2,
D+1, D.

b31 b15 b0 b63 b48 b32 b16 b0

S+1, S H00BC H614E H4167 H8C29 H0000 H0000
(12345678) D+3 D+2 D+1 D

3) Program example
In case ‘812121’ is saved in P1000~P1001, if input signal P0000 is on, converted real data is saved in
P1100~P1101.

4-78
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.13.9 R2U, R2UP, R2UD, R2UDP ○ X

Area Available Flag

Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
R2U(P) S O O O O O - - - - O O O O O
2~4 O - -
R2UD(P) D O - O O O - - - - - O O O O
COMMAND
R2U, R2UD
S D

COMMAND
R2UP, R2UDP P S D

means R2U/R2UD

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data type
S Area number where real data is saved, or real data REAL
D Area number where converted unsigned integer data is saved UINT/UDINT
[Flag setting]
Device
Flag Description
number
In case of using R2U, when short real data set by S exceeds 0~65,535
Error F110
In case of using R2UD, when short real data set by S exceeds 0~4,294,967,295

1) R2U ( Real to Unsigned Integer )

(1) Converts short real data (32bit) set by S+1, S to unsigned interger data and save it in D.

b31 b15 b0 b15 b0

S+1, S h4640 hE6B6 D h303A
(12345.678) (12346)

(2) In case short real data set by S+1, S exceeds 0~65,535, operation error occrs. At this time, in case result
value is larger than 65,535, 65,535 is saved and in case result value is smallter than 0, 0 is saved.
(3) The value under decimal point is ignored

2) R2UD ( Real to Double Unsigned Integer )

(1) Converts short real data (32bit) set by S+1, S to double unsigned interger data (32 bit) and save it in D+1, D.

b31 b15 b0 b31 b15 b0

S+1, S h47F1 h2065 D+1, D h0001 hE241
(123456.78) (123457)

(2) In case short real data set by S+1, S exceeds 0~4,294,967,295, operation error occurs. At this time, in case
result value is larger than 65,535, 65,535 is saved and in case result value is smallter than 0, 0 is saved.
(3) The value under decimal point is ignored

4-79
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

3) Error
(1) In case of using R2U, when short real data set by S exceeds 0~65,535, operation error (F110) occurs.
(2) In case of using R2UD, when short real data set by S exceeds 0~4,294,967,295, operation error (F110)
occurs.

4) Program example
If input signal P00000 is on, converts real data ‘45688.8123’ to interger data and saves ‘45689’ in P1100~P1101.

4-80
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.13.10 L2U, L2UP, L2UD, L2UDP ○ X

Area Available Flag

Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
L2U(P) S O O O O O - - - - O O O O O
2~4 O - -
L2UD(P) D O - O O O - - - - - O O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data type
S Area number where long real data is saved, or long real data LREAL
D Area number where converted unsigned data is saved UINT/UDINT
[Flag setting]
Device
Flag Description
number
In case of using L2U, when long real data set by S exceeds 0~65,535
Error F110
In case of using L2UD, when long real data set by S exceeds 0~4,294,967,295

1) L2U ( Long real to Unsigned Integer )

(1) Converts long real data set by S+3, S+2, S+1, S to unsigned integer (16 bit) and save it in D.

b63 b48 b32 b16 b0 b15 b0

H4093 H4A45 H84FD H0FF6 D H04D2
D+3 D+2 D+1 D (1234)
(1234.5678901234)

(2) In case short real data set by S+3, S+2, S+1, S exceeds 0~65,535, operation error occrs. At this time, in
case result value is larger than 65,535, 65,535 is saved and in case result value is smallter than 0, 0 is saved.
(3) The value under decimal point is ignored

2) L2UD (Long real to Double Unsigned Integer )

(1) Converts long real data set by S+3, S+2, S+1, S to double unsigned integer data (32 bit) and save it in D+1,
D.

b63 b48 b32 b16 b0 b31 b15 b0

H4167 H8C29 HDCD6 HE8B0 D+1, D H00BC H614E
S+3 S+2 S+1 S (12345678)
(12345678.901234)

(2) In case short real data set by S+3, S+2, S+1, S exceeds 0~4,294,967,295, operation error occrs. At this time,
in case result value is larger than 65,535, 65,535 is saved and in case result value is smallter than 0, 0 is saved.
(3) The value under decimal point is ignored
3) Program example
In case D1000~D1003=13456.6 long real type data is saved, if input signal P00000 is on, 13457 integer data is
saved in P1100.

4-81
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.14 Output Terminal Compare Instruction (Unsigned)

XGK XGB
4.14.1 CMP, CMPP, DCMP, DCMPP ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
CMP(P) S1 O O O O O - O O O O O O O O
2~4 - - -
DCMP(P) S2 O O O O O - O O O O O O O O

CMP, DCMP S1 S2

CMPP, DCMPP P S1 S2

means CMP/DCMP

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data or Data address to compare with S2 WORD/DWORD
S2 Data or Data address to compare with S1 WORD/DWORD

1) CMP (Compare)
(1) It compares S1 with S2 in size to set applicable flag of 6 special relays as its result.
(Unsigned Operation)

Flag F120 F121 F122 F123 F124 F125

SET basis < ≤ = > ≥ ≠
S1> S2 0 0 0 1 1 1
S1< S2 1 1 0 0 0 1
S1= S2 0 1 1 0 1 0

(2) If S1 and S2 is compared, operation result (S1=S2) is set to special flag.

(3) In the program, 6 special relays display the result of Compare Instruction previously used.
(4) 6 special relays can be used unlimitedly.

2) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=100 and P1100=10, If Input signal P00000 is On, F123 is set because P1000 is
bigger than P1100 (P1000>P1100).

P00000
CMP P1000 P1100

4-82
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.14.2 CMP4, CMP4P, CMP8, CMP8P ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
CMP4(P) S1 O - O - - - - O O O O - O O
2~4 - - -
CMP8(P) S2 O - O - - - - O O O O - O O

CMP4, CMP8 S1 S2

CMP4P, CMP8P P S1 S2

means CMP4/CMP8

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data to compare or device’s start bit to compare NIBBLE/BYTE
S2 Data to compare or device’s start bit to compare NIBBLE/BYTE

1) CMP4 (Compare Nibble)

(1) It compares OP1’s specified 4-bit with OP2’s specified 4-bit data to set applicable flag.
(2) It compares OP1 with OP2 in size so to set 6 special relays’ applicable flag as its result (Unsigned Operation).
(3) 6 special relays display the result of Compare Instruction previously used.
(4) 6 special relays (F120~F125) can be used unlimitedly.

2) CMP8 (Compare Byte)

(1) It compares OP1’s specified 8-bit with OP2’s specified 8-bit data to set applicable flag.
(2) It compares OP1 with OP2 in size so to set 6 special relays’ applicable flag as its result (Unsigned Operation).
(3) 6 special relays display the result of Compare Instruction previously used.
(4) 6 special relays(F120~F125) can be used unlimitedly.

3) Program Example
(1) In case of P01004=10 and P02008=15, If Input signal P00000 is On, F120 of Flag is set because P01004
is smaller than P02008.
(2) Range possible to compare is a unit of Nibble, so Setting is available from 0 to 15.
(3) It is only compare the value which is saved from No. 4 bit of P0100 to the value which is saved from No. 8
of P0200.

P00000
CMP4 P01004 P02008

4-83
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.14.3 TCMP, TCMPP, DTCMP, DTCMPP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O O O O O O O O
TCMP(P)
S2 O O O O O - O O O - O O O O 4~6 O - -
DTCMP(P)
D O - O O O - O O O - O O O O

TCMP, DTCMP S1 S2 D

TCMPP, DTCMPP P S1 S2 D

means TCMP/DTCMP

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data or Data address to compare with S2 WORD/DWORD
S2 Data address to compare with S1 WORD/DWORD
D Area (1 Word) to save the result of compared S1 and S2 WORD/DWORD

[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Error The value of ‘S2 area + 15 (WORD/DWORD)’ is exceeded range of applicable device. F110

1) TCMP (Table Compare)

(1) It compares specified Compare Data S1 with 16-word data starting S2 to output to specified D area’s 16 bits
(‘1‘ if identical, ‘0’ if different).
(2) S1 sets word data or data address, and S2 sets table head area address.

2) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal P00020 is On, It is compare Data ‘h0057’ saved in D0000 to 16-word data from D0002.
And compared result ‘5’ is saved in P0006.

4-84
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.14.4 GX(P), GDX(P)
(GEQ, GEQP, GGT, GGTP, GLT, GLTP, GGE, GGEP, GLE, GLEP, GNE, GNEP, GDEQ,
GDEQP, GDGT, GDGTP, GDLT, GDLTP, GDGE, GDGEP, GDLE, GDLEP, GDNE,
GDNEP)
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - - O O O
GX(P) S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O 4~6 O - -
GDX(P) D O O O O O - O - - - O O O
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data or Data address to compare with S2 WORD
S2 Data address to compare with S1 WORD
D Device area to save the result (1 word) WORD
N Number to execute Compare Instruction (0 ~ 16) WORD
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If N value exceeds applicable device’s area. F110

1) Word Data Group Compare Instruction

(1) It compares specified Compare Data S1 with N word data starting S2 1:1 to save in specified D number’s
lower bit up to Nth Bit.
(2) If Compare Condition is met, 1 will be saved in D.
(3) If Compare Condition is not met, 0 will be saved in D.
(4) It can input contant value from 0 to 65,535 in S1. Operation of instruction is as shown below.
Operation Result
S2 32000 S1 32000 D h0005
S1+1 4321
S1+2 32000
N

S1+(N-2) 1234
S1+(N-1) 5678

2) Program Example
Operation Result
D1000 1234 D1100 1234 D1200 h00FF
D1001 5678 D1101 5678
D1002 5000 D1102 5000
8 = 8

D1006 7777 D1106 7777

D1007 4321 D1107 4321

If Input signal P0000 is On, it compare 8-word data and compared result h00FF is saved in D1200.
P00000
GEQ D1000 D1100 D1200 8

4-85
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.15 Input Terminal Comparison Instruction (Signed)

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.15.1 LOAD X, LOADD X
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
LOAD X S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
2~3 - - -
LOADD X S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O

LOAD(D) X S1 S2

means LOAD(D) X

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data or Data address to compare with S2 INT/DINT
S2 Data or Data address to compare with S1 INT/DINT

1) LOAD X (=, >, <, >=, <=, < >)

(1) It compares S1 with S2. And if identical to X Condition, present operation result will be On. And the other
operation results will be Off.
X Condition Condition Operation result
= S1 = S2 On
<= S1 ≤ S2 On
>= S1 ≥S2 On
<> S1 ≠ S2 On
< S1 < S2 On
> S1 > S2 On

(2) Comparison of S1 and S2 is executed by Signed Operation. Thus, the result will be as follows;
h8000( -32768) ~ hFFFF( -1) < 0 ~ h7FFF( 32767) .

2) LOADD X (D=, D>, D<, D>=, D<=, D< >)

(1) It compares S1 with S2. And if identical to X Condition, present operation result will be On. And the other
operation results will be Off.
X Condition Condition Operation result
= S1 = S2 On
<= S1 ≤ S2 On
>= S1 ≥S2 On
<> S1 ≠ S2 On
< S1 < S2 On
> S1 > S2 On

(2) Comparison of S1 and S2 is executed by Signed Operation. Thus, the result will be as follows;
h80000000(-2147483648) ~ hFFFFFFFF( -1) < 0 ~ h7FFFFFFF(2147483647).
3) Program Example
(1) In case of D1000=10 and D2000=10, Compare Input Signal is On and then h1500 is saved in P0160
area.

= D1000 D2000 MOV h1500 P0160

4-86
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.15.2 AND X, ANDD X
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
AND X S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
2~3 - - -
ANDD X S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O

AND(D) X S1 S2

means AND(D) X
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data or Data address to compare with S2 INT/DINT
S2 Data or Data address to compare with S1 INT/DINT

1) AND X (=, >, <, >=, <=, < >)

(1) It compares S1 with S2. And if identical to X Condition, result will be On, if not identical, it will be Off, and its
result and present BR value will be AND operated to lead to a new operation result.
X Condition Condition Operation result
= S1 = S2 On
<= S1 ≤ S2 On
>= S1 ≥S2 On
<> S1 ≠ S2 On
< S1 < S2 On
> S1 > S2 On

(2) Comparison of S1 and S2 is executed by Signed Operation. Thus, the result will be as follows;
h8000( -32768) ~ hFFFF( -1) < 0 ~ h7FFF( 32767) .

2) ANDD X (D=, D>, D<, D>=, D<=, D< >)

(1) It compares S1 with S2. And if identical to X Condition, result will be On, if not identical, it will be Off, and its
result and present BR value will be AND operated to lead to a new operation result.
X Condition Condition Operation result
= S1 = S2 On
<= S1 ≤ S2 On
>= S1 ≥S2 On
<> S1 ≠ S2 On
< S1 < S2 On
> S1 > S2 On
(2) Comparison of S1 and S2 is executed by Signed Operation. Thus, the result will be as follows;
h80000000(-2147483648) ~ hFFFFFFFF( -1) < 0 ~ h7FFFFFFF(2147483647).

3) Program Example
(1) In case of D1000=10 and D2000=10, If Input Signal P00000 is On, AND logic operation will be operated with the
compared result of ‘On’ status of Compare Input Signal and then ‘1500’ is saved in P1600 area.

P00000
= D1000 D2000 MOV 1500 P1600

4-87
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
4.15.3 OR X, ORD X ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
OR X S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
2~3 - - -
ORD X S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O

OR(D) X
S1 S2

means OR(D) X
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data or Data address to compare with S2 INT/DINT
S2 Data or Data address to compare with S1 INT/DINT

1) OR X (=, >, <, >=, <=, < >)

(1) It compares S1 with S2. And if identical to X Condition, result will be On, if not identical, it will be Off, and its
result and present operation result will be OR operated to lead to a new operation result.
X Condition Condition Operation result
= S1 = S2 On
<= S1 ≤ S2 On
>= S1 ≥S2 On
<> S1 ≠ S2 On
< S1 < S2 On
> S1 > S2 On
(2) Comparison of S1 and S2 is executed by Signed Operation. Thus, the result will be as follows;
h8000( -32768) ~ hFFFF( -1) < 0 ~ h7FFF( 32767) .

2) ORD X (D=, D>, D<, D>=, D<=, D< >)

(1) It compares S1 with S2. And if identical to X Condition, result will be On, if not identical, it will be Off, and its
result and present operation result will be OR operated to lead to a new operation result.
X Condition Condition Operation result
= S1 = S2 On
<= S1 ≤ S2 On
>= S1 ≥S2 On
<> S1 ≠ S2 On
< S1 < S2 On
> S1 > S2 On
(2) Comparison of S1 and S2 is executed by Signed Operation. Thus, the result will be as follows;
h80000000(-2147483648) ~ hFFFFFFFF( -1) < 0 ~ h7FFFFFFF(2147483647).

3) Program Example
(1)If Input Signal P00000 becomes On or ‘=’ Compare Input Signal becomes On because D1000=10 and D2000=10,
1500 is saved in P1600.

P00000
MOV 1500 P1600

= D1000 D2000

4-88
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.15.4 LOADR X, LOADL X ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMKL F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
LOADR X S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
2~5 - - -
LOADL X S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O

LOADR X S1 S2
LOADL X
means LOADR X / LOADL X
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Real Number Data to compare or Device Number to specify Real Number Data REAL/LREAL
S2 Real Number Data to compare or Device Number to specify Real Number Data REAL/LREAL

1) LOADR X (R=, R<, R>, R<=, R>=, R< >)

(1) It compares S1 with S2. And if identical to X Condition, present operation result will be On.
X Condition Condition Operation result
= S1 = S2 On
<= S1 ≤ S2 On
>= S1 ≥S2 On
<> S1 ≠ S2 On
< S1 < S2 On
> S1 > S2 On
(2) S1 and S2 as floating decimal real number will be compared for operation based on X Condition.
(3) Be sure that X Condition R= used. The value of floating decimal real number depends on accuracy.

2) LOADL X (L=, L<, L>, L<=, L>=, L< >)

(1) It compares S1 with S2. And if identical to X Condition, present operation result will be On.
X Condition Condition Operation result
= S1 = S2 On
<= S1 ≤ S2 On
>= S1 ≥S2 On
<> S1 ≠ S2 On
< S1 < S2 On
> S1 > S2 On
S1 and S2 as long floating decimal real number will be compared for operation based on X Condition.
Be sure that X Condition R= used. The value of floating decimal real number depends on accuracy.

3) Program Example
(1) In case of D1000=1.5 and D2000=1.5, Real ‘=’ Compare Input Signal is On and then 1234 is saved in
P1600.

R = D1000 D2000 MOV 1234 P1600

4-89
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
4.15.5 ANDR X, ANDL X ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
ANDR X S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
2~5 - - -
ANDL X S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O

ANDR X S1 S2
ANDL X
means ANDR X / ANDL X
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Real Number Data to compare or Device Number to specify Real Number Data REAL/LREAL
S2 Real Number Data to compare or Device Number to specify Real Number Data REAL/LREAL

1) ANDR X (R=, R>, R<, R>=, R<=, R< >)

(1) It compares S1 with S2. And if identical to X Condition, result will be On, if not identical, it will be Off, and its
result and present operation result will be AND operated to lead to a new operation result..
X Condition Condition Operation result
= S1 = S2 On
<= S1 ≤ S2 On
>= S1 ≥S2 On
<> S1 ≠ S2 On
< S1 < S2 On
> S1 > S2 On
(2) S1 and S2 as floating decimal real number will be compared for operation based on X Condition.

2) ANDL X (L=, L>, L<, L>=, L<=, L< >)

(1) It compares S1 with S2. And if identical to X Condition, result will be On, if not identical, it will be Off, and its
result and present operation result will be AND operated to lead to a new operation result.
X Condition Condition Operation result
= S1 = S2 On
<= S1 ≤ S2 On
>= S1 ≥S2 On
<> S1 ≠ S2 On
< S1 < S2 On
> S1 > S2 On
(2) S1 and S2 as long floating decimal real number will be compared for operation based on X Condition.

3) Program Example
(1) If Real ‘=’ Compare Input Signal is On since Input signal P00000 becomes On and D1000=1.5 and
D2000=1.5, the result of AND operation becomes On and then 1234 is saved in P1600.

P00000
R = P1000 P2000 MOV 1234 P1600

4-90
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.15.6 ORR X, ORL X ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
ORR X S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
2~5 - - -
ORL X S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O

ORR X
ORL X
S1 S2

Means ORR X / ORL X

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Real Number Data to compare or Device Number to specify Real Number Data REAL/LREAL
S2 Real Number Data to compare or Device Number to specify Real Number Data REAL/LREAL

1) ORR X (R=, R>, R<, R>=, R<=, R< >)

(1) It compares S1 with S2. And if identical to X Condition, result will be On, if not identical, it will be Off, and its
result and present operation result will be OR operated to lead to a new operation result.
X Condition Condition Operation result
= S1 = S2 On
<= S1 ≤ S2 On
>= S1 ≥S2 On
<> S1 ≠ S2 On
< S1 < S2 On
> S1 > S2 On
(2) S1 and S2 as floating decimal real number will be compared for operation based on X Condition.

2) ORL X (L=, L>, L<, L>=, L<=, L< >)

(1) It compares S1 with S2. And if identical to X Condition, result will be On, if not identical, it will be Off, and its
result and present operation result will be OR operated to lead to a new operation result.
X Condition Condition Operation result
= S1 = S2 On
<= S1 ≤ S2 On
>= S1 ≥S2 On
<> S1 ≠ S2 On
< S1 < S2 On
> S1 > S2 On
(2) S1 and S2 as long floating decimal real number will be compared for operation based on X Condition.

3) Program Example
(1) If Real ‘=’ Compare Input Signal is On since Input signal P00000 becomes On and D1000=1.21 and
D2000=1.21, 1234 is saved in P1600.

P00000
MOV 1234 P1600

R = D1000 D2000

4-91
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
4.15.7 LOAD$ X ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
LOAD$ X 2~17 - - -
S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O

LOAD$ X S1 S2

means LOAD$ X

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 String to compare or Device Number string is saved in STRING
S2 String to compare or Device Number string is saved in STRING

1) LOAD$ X ($=, $<, $>, $<=, $>=, $< >)

(1) Refer to below table, The compare results becomes On when character code is identical.

X Condition Condition Compared results

= S1 = S2 On
<= S1 ≤ S2 On
>= S1 ≥S2 On
<> S1 ≠ S2 On
< S1 < S2 On
> S1 > S2 On

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S1 42H (B) 41H (A) S2 42H (B) 41H (A)
S1+1 44H (D) 43H (C) = S2+1 44H (D) 43H (C)
S1+2 00H 45H (E) S2+2 00H 45H (E)
"ABCDE" "ABCDE"

(2) Character code is compared with Hexadecimal number. According to the compared result, the status will be
changed On or Off.
(However, front place of string and length is preferred potentially)

2) Program Example
(1) In case of the string which is respectively saved D1000=‘English’ and D2000=‘English’, string Compare
Input Signal becomes On, ‘3456’ is saved in P1600.

$ = D1000 D2000 MOV 3456 P1600

4-92
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.15.8 AND$ X
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
AND$ X 2~17 - - -
S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O

AND$ X S1 S2

means AND$ X
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 String to compare or Device Number string is saved in STRING
S2 String to compare or Device Number string is saved in STRING

1) AND$ X ($=,$>,$<,$>=,$<=,$< >)

(1) Refer to below table, The compare results becomes On when character code is identical.

X Condition Condition Compared results

= S1 = S2 On
<= S1 ≤ S2 On
>= S1 ≥S2 On
<> S1 ≠ S2 On
< S1 < S2 On
> S1 > S2 On

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S1 42H (B) 41H (A) S2 42H (B) 41H (A)
S1+1 44H (D) 43H (C) = S2+1 44H (D) 43H (C)
S1+2 00H 45H (E) S2+2 00H 45H (E)
"ABCDE" "ABCDE"

(2) Character code is compared with Hexadecimal number. According to the compared result, the status will be
changed On or Off.
(However, front place of string and length is preferred potentially)
(3) And its result and present operation result will be AND operated to lead to a new operation result.

2) Program Example
(1) In case of P00000 becomes On and saved string is respectively D1000=’English’ and D2000=’English’,
string Compare Input Signal becomes On and AND operation calculates and then 1567 is saved in
P1600.

P00000
$ = D1000 D2000 MOV 1567 P1600

4-93
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
4.15.9 OR$ X ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
OR$ X 2~17 - - -
S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O

OR$ X
S1 S2

means OR$ X
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 String to compare or Device Number string is saved in STRING
S2 String to compare or Device Number string is saved in STRING

1) OR$ X ($=,$>,$<,$>=,$<=,$< >)

(1) If all character codes are identical, equal sign will be on. And its result and present operation result will
be OR operated to lead to a new operation result.

X Condition Condition Compared results

= S1 = S2 On
<= S1 ≤ S2 On
>= S1 ≥S2 On
<> S1 ≠ S2 On
< S1 < S2 On
> S1 > S2 On

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S1 42H (B) 41H (A) S2 42H (B) 41H (A)
S1+1 44H (D) 43H (C) = S2+1 44H (D) 43H (C)
S1+2 00H 45H (E) S2+2 00H 45H (E)
"ABCDE" "ABCDE"

2) Program Example
(1) Input Signal P00000 becomes On or saved string becomes respectively D1000=‘English2’ and
D2000=‘English2’ string Compare Input Signal becomes On and then ‘1234’ is saved in P1700.

P00000
MOV 1234 P1700

$ = D1000 D2000

4-94
-

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.15.10 LOADG X, LOADDG X ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
LOADG X
4/5 O - -
LOADDG X S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

LOADG X LOADGX S1 S2 N

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data or Data address to compare with S2 INT/DINT
S2 Data or Data address to compare with S1 INT/DINT
N Number of groups to compare WORD
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If N value exceeds applicable device’s area. F110

1) LOADG X (G=, G>, G<, G>=, G<=, G< >)

(1) It compares S1 with S2 for the number of N. And if all identical to X Condition, present operation result will be On.
Comparison of S1 and S2 is executed by Signed Operation. Thus, the result will be as follows; h8000( -32768) ~
hFFFF( -1) < 0 ~ h7FFF( 32767) .

2) LOADDG X (DG=, DG>, DG<, DG>=, DG<=, DG< >)

(1) It compares S1 with S2 for the number of N. And if all identical to X Condition, present operation result will be On.
Comparison of S1 and S2 is executed by Signed Operation. Thus, the result will be as follows; h80000000(-
2147483648) ~ hFFFFFFFF( -1) < 0 ~ h7FFFFFFF(2147483647).

4-95
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

3) Program Example
(1) It compares the 8-word data from D1000 to D1007 with 8-word data from D1100 to D1107 in the group.
And if identical to operation result, Compare Input Signal becomes On and the 1300 is saved in P1400.
(2) In case of comparison of group, If only one is not identical in operation result, Compare Input Signal will
not become On.

G = D1000 D1100 8 MOV 1300 P1400

4-96
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.15.11 ANDG X, ANDDG X ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
ANDG X
S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O 4/5 O - -
ANDDG X
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

ANDG X ANDGX S1 S2 N

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data or Data address to compare with S2 INT
S2 Data or Data address to compare with S1 INT
N Number of groups to compare WORD

[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If N value exceeds applicable device’s area. F110

1) ANDG X (G=, G>, G<, G>=, G<=, G< >)

(1) It compares S1 with S2 for the number of N. And if all identical to X Condition, result will be On, if not
identical, it will be Off, and its result and present BR will be AND operated to lead to a new operation result.
Comparison of S1 and S2 is executed by Signed Operation. Thus, the result will be as follows; h8000(-32768) ~
hFFFF(-1) < 0 ~ h7FFF 32767).

2) ANDDG X (DG=, DG>, DG<, DG>=, DG<=, DG< >)

(1) It compares S1 with S2 for the number of N. And if all identical to X Condition, result will be On, if not
identical, it will be Off, and its result and present BR will be AND operated to lead to a new operation result.
Comparison of S1 and S2 is executed by Signed Operation. Thus, the result will be as follows; h80000000(-
2147483648) ~ hFFFFFFFF( -1) < 0 ~ h7FFFFFFF(2147483647).

3) Program Example
(1) Input Signal becomes On and then P1000=10,P1001=20, P2000=5 and P2001=10, It compares 2-
word data by group and if result of comparison is On, 1500 saved in P1600.

P00000
G > P1000 P2000 2 MOV 1500 P1600

4-97
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.15.12 ORG X, ORDG X
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
ORG X
S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O 4/5 O - -
ORDG X
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

ORG X
ORGX S1 S2 N

means ORG X
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data or Data address to compare with S2 INT
S2 Data or Data address to compare with S1 INT
N Number of groups to compare WORD

[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If N value exceeds applicable device’s area. F110

1) ORG X (G=, G>, G<, G>=, G<=, G< >)

(1) It compares S1 with S2 for the number of N. And if all identical to X Condition, result will be On, if not
identical, it will be Off, and its result and present operation result will be OR operated to lead to a new operation
result. Comparison of S1 and S2 is executed by Signed Operation. Thus, the result will be as follows; h8000( -
32768) ~ hFFFF( -1) < 0 ~ h7FFF( 32767).

2) ORDG X (DG=, DG>, DG<, DG>=, DG<=, DG< >)

(1) It compares S1 with S2 for the number of N. And if all identical to X Condition, result will be On, if not
identical, it will be Off, and its result and present operation result will be OR operated to lead to a new operation
result. Comparison of S1 and S2 is executed by Signed Operation. Thus, the result will be as follows;
h80000000(-2147483648) ~ hFFFFFFFF( -1) < 0 ~ h7FFFFFFF(2147483647).
3) Program Example
(1) Input Signal becomes On and then P1000=10,P1001=20, P2000=5 and P2001=10, It compares 2-word data by
group and if result of comparison is On, 1500 saved in P1600.

P00000
MOV P1500 P1600

G= P1000 P2000 P2010

4-98
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.15.13 LOAD3 X, LOADD3 X ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
LOAD3 X
4/5 - - -
LOADD3 X S2 O O O O O - O - -- O O O O O
S3 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O

LOAD(D)3 X S1 S2 S3

means LOAD(D)3 X

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data to compare or Device Number to specify Data to compare INT
S2 Data to compare or Device Number to specify Data to compare INT
S3 Data to compare or Device Number to specify Data to compare INT

1) LOAD3 X (=3, >3, <3, >=3, <=3, < >3)

(1) It compares 3 specified word data of S1, S2, S3 to compare based on X Condition. And if identical to X,
Condition, result will be On, if not identical, it will be Off, so to result in a new operation result.
(2) In case of size comparison condition, operation result will be ON if condition is met in the following order of
S1, S2, S3. However, in case of condition <>, operation result will be ON if S1, S2, S3 is all different from each
other. That is to say, if S1≠S2≠S3 and S1=S3, operation result will be OFF.
(3) Comparison of S1 and S2 is executed by Signed Operation.
(4) Thus, the result will be as follows; h8000( -32768) ~ hFFFF( -1) < 0 ~ h7FFF( 32767) .

2) LOADD3 X (D=3, D>3, D<3, D>=3, D<=3, D< >3)

(1) It compares 3 specified double word data of (S1+1,S1), (S2+1,S2), (S3+1,S3) to compare based on X.
Condition. And if identical to X Condition, result will be On, if not identical, it will be Off, so to result in a new
operation result.
(2) In case of size comparison condition, operation result will be ON if condition is met in the following order of
(S1+1,S1), (S2+1,S2), (S3+1,S3). However, in case of condition <>, operation result will be ON if (S1+1,S1),
(S2+1,S2), (S3+1,S3)is all different from each other. That is to say, if (S1+1,S1)≠(S2+1,S2)≠(S3+1,S3) and
(S1+1,S1)=(S3+1,S3), operation result will be OFF.
(3) Comparison of S1 and S2 is executed by Signed Operation. Thus, the result will be as follows; h80000000(-
2147483648) ~ hFFFFFFFF( -1) < 0 ~ h7FFFFFFF(2,147,483,647).

3) Program Example
(1) In case of D1000=100, _D1200=100 and _D1300=100, All three data of word data is identical so
Compare Input Signal becomes On and then 1,234 is saved in P1500.

3 = D1000 D1200 D1300 MOV 1234 P1500

4-99
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
4.15.14 AND3 X, ANDD3 X ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
AND3 X
S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O 4/5 - - -
ANDD3 X
S3 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O

AND(D)3 X S1 S2 S3

means AND(D)3 X

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data to compare or Device Number to specify Data to compare INT
S2 Data to compare or Device Number to specify Data to compare INT
S3 Data to compare or Device Number to specify Data to compare INT

1) AND3 X (=3, >3, <3, >=3, <=3, < >3)

(1) It compares 3 specified word data of S1, S2, S3 to compare based on X Condition. And if identical to X
Condition, result will be On, if not identical, it will be Off, and its result and present operation result will be AND
operated to lead to a new operation result.
(2) Comparison of S1 and S2 is executed by Signed Operation. Thus, the result will be as follows; h8000( -
32768) ~ hFFFF( -1) < 0 ~ h7FFF( 32767) .

2) ANDD3 X (D=3, D>3, D<3, D>=3, D<=3, D< >3)

(1) It compares 3 specified double word data of (S1+1,S1), (S2+1,S2), (S3+1,S3) to compare based on X
Condition. And if identical to X Condition, result will be On, if not identical, it will be Off, and its result and present
operation result will be AND operated to lead to a new operation result.
(2) Comparison of S1 and S2 is executed by Signed Operation. Thus, the result will be as follows; h80000000(-
2147483648) ~ hFFFFFFFF( -1) < 0 ~ h7FFFFFFF(2,147,483,647).

3) Program Example
(1) Input Signal P00000 becomes On and D1000=100, _D1200=100 and _D1300=100, three data of word data is
identical so Compare Input Signal becomes On and then 1,234 is saved in P1500.

P00000
3 = D1000 D1200 D1300 MOV 1234 P1500

4-100
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.15.15 OR3 X, ORD3 X
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
OR3 X
S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O 4/5 - - -
ORD3 X
S3 O O O O O - O - O O O O O

OR3(D) X

S1 S2 S3

means OR3(D) X

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data to compare or Device Number to specify Data to compare INT
S2 Data to compare or Device Number to specify Data to compare INT
S3 Data to compare or Device Number to specify Data to compare INT

1) OR3 (=3, <3, >3, <=3, >=3, < >3)

(1) It compares 3 specified word data of S1, S2, S3 to compare based on X Condition. And if identical to X
Condition, result will be On, if not identical, it will be Off, and its result and present operation result will be OR
operated to lead to a new operation result.
(2) Comparison of S1 and S2 is executed by Signed Operation. Thus, the result will be as follows; h8000( -
32768) ~ hFFFF(-1) < 0 ~ h7FFF(32767).

2) ORD3 (D=3, D<3, D>3, D<=3, D>=3, D< >3)

(1) It compares 3 specified double word data of (S1+1,S1), (S2+1,S2), (S3+1,S3) to compare based on X
Condition. And if identical to X Condition, result will be On, if not identical, it will be Off, and its result and present
operation result will be OR operated to lead to a new operation result.
(2) Comparison of S1 and S2 is executed by Signed Operation. Thus, the result will be as follows; h80000000(-
2,147,483,648) ~ hFFFFFFFF( -1) < 0 ~ h7FFFFFFF(2,147,483,647).

3) Program Example
(1) Input Signal P00000 becomes On or Word data becomes D1000=100, _D1200=100, _D1300=100 and then if
Word data is identical, Compare Input Signal becomes On and then 1234 is saved in P1600.

P00000
MOV 1234 P1600

3 = D1000 D1100 D1200

4-101
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.15.16 LOAD4 X, LOAD8 X XGK XGB

○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
LOAD4 X S1 O - O - - - - O O O O - - -
3~4 - - -
LOAD8 X S2 O - O - - - - O O O O - - -

[Area setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data or data address to compare with S2 NIBBLE/BYTE
S2 Data or data address to compare with S1 NIBBLE/BYTE

1) LOAD4 X (4=, 4>, 4<, 4>=, 4<=, 4<>)

(1) It compares S1 and S2 with NIBBLE unit and if it meets X condition, it turns On current operation result.
Other operation result is turned Off.
(2) Comparing S1 and S2 is executed as Unsigned operation.

2) LOAD8 X (8=, 8>, 8<, 8>=, 8<=, 8<>)

(1) It compares S1 and S2 with Byte unit and if it mees the X condition, it turns On current operation result.
Other operation result is turned Off.
(2) Comparing S1 and S2 is executed as Unsigned operation.

X condition Ccondition Operation result

= S1 = S2 On
<= S1 ≤ S2 On
>= S1 ≥ S2 On
<> S1 ≠ S2 On
< S1 < S2 On
> S1 > S2 On

3) Program example
(1) In case of D01000.0=10, D02000.0=10, compare input signal is turned On and it saves h1500 at P0160 area.

(2) In case of D01000.0=255, D02000.0=255, compare input signal is turned On and it saves h0015 at P0160
area.

4-102
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.15.17 AND4 X, AND8 X

XGK XGB
○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
AND4 X S1 O - O - - - - O O O O - - -
3~4 - - -
AND8 X S2 O - O - - - - O O O O - - -

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data or data address to compare with S2 NIBBLE/BYTE
S2 Data or data address to compare with S1 NIBBLE/BYTE

1) AND4 X ( 4=, 4>, 4<, 4>=, 4<=, 4<>)

(1) If it compares S1 and S2 with Nibble unit and it meets X condition, it is turned On, if not, it is turned Off. And it
takes AND operation this operation and current BR value and take them as new operation result.
(2) Comparing S1 and S2 is executed as Unsigned operation.

2) AND8 X ( 8=, 8>, 8<, 8>=, 8<=, 8<>)

(1) If it compares S1 and S2 with Byte unit and it meets X condition, it is turned On, if not, it is turned Off. And it
takes AND operation this operation and current BR value and take them as new operation result.
(2) Comparing S1 and S2 is executed as Unsigned operation

X condition Condition Operation result

= S1 = S2 On
<= S1 ≤ S2 On
>= S1 ≥ S2 On
<> S1 ≠ S2 On
< S1 < S2 On
> S1 > S2 On

3) Program example
(1) In case of D01000.5=10, D02000.5=10, if input signal P00000 is turned On, it takes AND operation of
compare input on result and save 1500 at P1600 area

(2) In case of D01000.5=255, D02000.5=255, if input signal P00000 is turned On, it takes AND operation of
compare input on result and save 1500 at P1600 area

4-103
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.15.18 OR4 X, OR8 X XGK XGB

○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
OR4 X S1 O - O - - - - O O O O - - -
3~4 - - -
OR8 X S2 O - O - - - - O O O O - - -

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data or data address to compare with S2 NIBBLE/BYTE
S2 Data or data address to compare with S1 NIBBLE/BYTE

1) OR4 X ( 4=, 4>, 4<, 4>=, 4<=, 4<>)

(1) If it compares S1 and S2 with NIBBLE unit and it meets X condition, it is turned On, if not, it is turned Off. And
it takes AND operation of this operation and current BR value and take them as new operation result.
(2) Comparing S1 and S2 is executed as Unsigned operation.

2) OR8 X ( 8=, 8>, 8<, 8>=, 8<=, 8<>)

(1) If it compares S1 and S2 with BYTE unit and it meets X condition, it is turned On, if not, it is turned Off. And it
takes AND operation of this operation and current BR value and take them as new operation result.
(2) Comparing S1 and S2 is executed as Unsigned operation..

X condition condition Operation result

= S1 = S2 On
<= S1 ≤ S2 On
>= S1 ≥ S2 On
<> S1 ≠ S2 On
< S1 < S2 On
> S1 > S2 On
3) Program example
(1) In case of D01000.5=10, D02000.5=10, if input signal P00000 is turned On, it takes OR operation of
compare input on result and save 1500 at P1600 area

(2) In case of D01000.5=255, D02000.5=255, if input signal P00000 is turned On, it takes OR operation of
compare input on result and save 1500 at P1600 area

4-104
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.15.19 ULOAD X, ULOADD X ○ X

Area Available Flag

Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
ULOAD X S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
2~3 - - -
ULOADD X S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O

ULOAD(D) X S1 S2

means ULOAD(D) X

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data type
S1 Data or Data address to compare with S2 UINT/UDINT
S2 Data or Data address to compare with S1 UINT/UDINT

1) ULOAD X ( =, >, <, >=, <=, < >)

(1) It compares S1 with S2. And if identical to X Condition, present operation result will be On. And the other
operation results will be Off.

X Condition Condition Operation result

= S1 = S2 On
<= S1 ≤ S2 On
>= S1 ≥ S2 On
<> S1 ≠ S2 On
< S1 < S2 On
> S1 > S2 On

(2) Comparison of S1 and S2 is executed by Unsigned Operation

2) ULOADD X ( D=, D>, D<, D>=, D<=, D< >)

(1) It compares S1 with S2. And if identical to X Condition, present operation result will be On. And the other
operation results will be Off.
X Condition Condition Operation result
= S1 = S2 On
<= S1 ≤ S2 On
>= S1 ≥ S2 On
<> S1 ≠ S2 On
< S1 < S2 On
> S1 > S2 On

(2) Comparison of S1 and S2 is executed by Unsigned Operation

3) Program example
In case of D1000=10 and D2000=10, Compare Input Signal is On and then h1500 is saved in P0160
area.

U == D1000 D2000 MOV h1500 P0160

4-105
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.15.20 UAND X, UANDD X ○ X

Area Available Flag

Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
UAND X S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
2~3 - - -
UANDD X S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O

Command
UAND(D) X S1 S2

means UAND(D) X

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data type
S1 Data or data address to compare with S2 UINT/UDINT
S2 Data or data address to compare with S1 UINT/UDINT

1) UAND X ( =, >, <, >=, <=, < >)

(1) It compares S1 with S2. And if identical to X Condition, result will be On, if not identical, it will be Off, and its
result and present BR value will be AND operated to lead to a new operation result.

X condition Condition Operation result

= S1 = S2 On
<= S1 ≤ S2 On
>= S1 ≥ S2 On
<> S1 ≠ S2 On
< S1 < S2 On
> S1 > S2 On

(2) Comparison of S1 and S2 is executed by Unsigned Operation

2) UANDD X ( D=, D>, D<, D>=, D<=, D< >)

(1) It compares S1 with S2. And if identical to X Condition, result will be On, if not identical, it will be Off, and its
result and present BR value will be AND operated to lead to a new operation result.
X condition Condition Operation result
= S1 = S2 On
<= S1 ≤ S2 On
>= S1 ≥ S2 On
<> S1 ≠ S2 On
< S1 < S2 On
> S1 > S2 On

(2) Comparison of S1 and S2 is executed by Unsigned Operation

3) Program example
In case of D1000=10 and D2000=10, If Input Signal P00000 is On, AND logic operation will be operated with the
compared result of ‘On’ status of Compare Input Signal and then ‘1500’ is saved in P1600 area.

P00000
U== D1000 D2000 MOV 1500 P1600

4-106
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.15.21 UOR X, UORD X ○ X

Area Available Flag

Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
UOR X S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
2~3 - - -
UORD X S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O

Command
UOR(D) X

means UOR(D) X

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data type
S1 Data or Data address to compare with S2 UINT/UDINT
S2 Data or Data address to compare with S1 UINT/UDINT

1) UOR X (=, >, <, >=, <=, < >)

(1) It compares S1 with S2. And if identical to X Condition, result will be On, if not identical, it will be Off, and its
result and present operation result will be OR operated to lead to a new operation result.
X Condition Condition Operation result
= S1 = S2 On
<= S1 ≤ S2 On
>= S1 ≥ S2 On
<> S1 ≠ S2 On
< S1 < S2 On
> S1 > S2 On

(2) Comparison of S1 and S2 is executed by Signed Operation.

2) UORD X (D=, D>, D<, D>=, D<=, D< >)

(1) It compares S1 with S2. And if identical to X Condition, result will be On, if not identical, it will be Off, and its
result and present operation result will be OR operated to lead to a new operation result.
X Condition Condition Operation result
= S1 = S2 On
<= S1 ≤ S2 On
>= S1 ≥S2 On
<> S1 ≠ S2 On
< S1 < S2 On
> S1 > S2 On

(2) Comparison of S1 and S2 is executed by Signed Operation.

3) Program example
If Input Signal P00000 becomes On or ‘=’ Compare Input Signal becomes On because D1000=10 and D2000=10,
1500 is saved in P1600.

P00000
MOV 1500 P1600

U == D1000 D2000

4-107
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.16 Increase/Decrease Instruction

XGK XGB
4.16.1 INC, INCP, DINC, DINCP ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
INC(P)
D O - O O -- O - - - O O O O O 2/3 - - -
DINC(P)

Command
INC, DINC D
Command
INCP, DINCP P D

means INC/DINC
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
D Data address to perform operation. INT

1) INC (Increment)
(1) It saves the result of D plus 1 again in D.
(2) It performs Signed Operation.

2) DINC (Double Increment)

(1) It saves the result of D+1,D plus 1 again in D+1,D.

3) Flag Process
(1) As for INC/DINC Instruction, no flag will be processed by operation result.

4) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal P00001 Off status is changed to On status, 5678 adds 1 and then 5679 which is added
result saved in P1100. When P00001 is repeated Off and On status, the value saved in P1100 is increased
one.
(5678 -> 5679 -> 5680 -> 5681, ...)

P1100 P1100

b15 b0 b15 b0
5678 +1 5679

4-108
-

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.16.2 INC4, INC4P, INC8, INC8P
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
INC4(P)
D O - O - - - - O O - O - - - 2/3 - - -
INC8(P)

Command
INC4, INC8 D

Command
INC4P, INC8P P D

means INC4/INC8
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
D Data address to perform operation. NIBBLE/BYTE

1) INC4 (Nibble Increment)

(1) It saves the result of D plus 1 again in D within Nibble data size range.
(2) It performs Signed Operation.

2) INC8 (Byte Increment)

(1) It saves the result of D plus 1 again in D within Byte data size range.
(2) It performs Signed Operation.

3) Flag Process
(1) As for INC/DINC Instruction, no flag will be processed by operation result. Carry Flag (F112) is not generated
when Maximum value is increased 1.

4) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal P00000 is changed On from Off status, the result 2 which is the saved value 1 from No. 4 Bit of
P0100 plus 1 is saved in No.4 Bit of P0100 by Nibble unit. When P00001 is repeated On from Off status the value
which is saved in P0100 is increased 1 (h0015 -> h0025 -> h0035 -> h0045).

P0100 P0100

b15 b0 b15 b0
h0015 +1 h0025

P00000
INC4P P01004

4-109
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
4.16.3 DEC, DECP, DDEC, DDECP ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
DEC(P)
D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O 2/3 - - -
DDEC(P)

Command
DEC, DDEC D
Command

DECP, DDECP P D

means DEC/DDEC
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
D Data address to perform operation. INT

1) DEC (Decrement)
(1) It saves the result of D minus 1 again in D.
(2) D is processed as Signed Integer.

b15 b0 b15 b0
DEC
S 1 2 3 4 -1
S 1 2 3 3

2) DDEC (Double Decrement)

(1) It saves the result of D+1,D minus 1 again in D+1, D.
b31 b0 b31 b0
DDEC
S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -1
S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7

3) Flag Process
(1) As for INC/DINC Instruction, no flag will be processed by operation result. Carry Flag (F112) is not generated
when Minimum value is decreased 1.

4) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal P00000 is changed to On from Off status, the result 1233 of 1234 minus 1 is saved in P1000.
When P00000 is repeated On from Off status the value which is saved in P1000 is decreased 1 (1234->1233-
>1232->1231->1230…..).

P0100 P0100

b15 b0 b15 b0
1234 -1 1233

P00000
DECP P1000

4-110
-

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.16.4 DEC4, DEC4P, DEC8, DEC8P
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
DEC4(P)
D O - O - - - - O O - O - - - 2/3 - - -
DEC8(P)

Command
DEC4, DEC8 D

Command
DEC4P, DEC8P P D

means DEC4/DEC8
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
D Data address to perform operation. NIBBLE/BYTE

1) DEC4 (Nibble Decrement)

(1) It saves the result of D plus 1 again in D within Nibble data size range.
(2) It performs Signed Operation.

2) DEC8 (Byte Decrement)

(1) It saves the result of D plus 1 again in D within Byte data size range.
(2) It performs Signed Operation.

3) Flag Process
(1) As for INC/DINC Instruction, no flag will be processed by operation result. Carry Flag (F112) is not generated
when Minimum value is decreased 1.

4) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal P00000 is changed On from Off status, the result 6 of the value 7 which is saved from No. 4
Bit in P0100 minus 1 is saved from No.4 Bit in P0100. When P00000 is repeated On from Off status the value
which is saved in P1000 is decreased 1. (h0075 -> h0065 -> h0055 -> h0045 -> h0035…).

P0100 P0100

b15 b0 b15 b0
h0075 -1 h0065

P00000
DEC4P P01004

4-111
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
4.16.5 INCU, INCUP, DINCU, DINCUP ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
INCU(P)
D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O 2/3 O O O
DINCU(P)

Command

INCU, DINUC D
Command

INCUP, DINCUP P D

means INCU/DINCU

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
D Data address to perform operation. WORD
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
To be set if INCU(P) is executed when D is 32767(h7FFF).
Error F110
To be set if DINCU(P) is executed when D is 2147483647(h7FFFFFFF).
Zero To be set if (D)INCU(P) is executed when D is –1(FFFF or FFFFFFFF). F111
Carry To be set if (D)INCU(P) is executed when D is –1(FFFF or FFFFFFFF). F112

1) INCU (Increment)
(1) It saves the result of D plus 1 again in D.
(2) It performs Unsigned Operation.
(3) If INCU(P) is executed when D’s value is 65,535 (h7FFF), 0(h0000) will be output and Zero Flag and Carry Flag
will be set.

2) DINCU (Double Increment)

(1) It saves the result of D+1,D plus 1 again in D+1,D.
(2) It performs Unsigned Operation.
(3) If DINCU(P) is executed when D+1,D’s value is 4,294,967,295(hFFFFFFFF), 0 (h00000000) will be output and
Zero Flag and Carry Flag will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=100, When Input Signal P00000 is changed to On from Off status, the value saved in P1000 is
increased 1.

P00000
INCUP P1000

Remark

(1) INC(P), DINC(P), DEC(P), DDEC(P) Instructions used in MK series to perform Unsigned Operation have been
changed in XGK as shown below. If Increase/Decrease Instructions have been used in previous program
version of XGK, see below to modify the data.
INC(P) Æ INCU(P) DEC(P) Æ DECU(P)
DINC(P) Æ DINCU(P) DDEC(P) Æ DDECU(P)

4-112
-

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.16.6 DECU, DECUP, DDECU, DDECUP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
DECU(P)
D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O 2/3 - O O
DDECU(P)

Command
DECU, DDECU D

Command
DECPU, DDECUP P D

means DECU/DDECU
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
D Data address to perform operation. WORD
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Zero To be set if (D)DEC(P) is executed when D is 1. F111
Carry To be set when D is 0 ~ hFFFF. F112

1) DECU (Decrement)
(1) It saves the result of D minus 1 and it save in D again.
(2) D is processed as Unsigned operation.
(3) If DECU(P) is executed when D is 0(h0000), 65,535(hFFFF) will be output and Carry Flag will be set.
(4) If (D)DECU(P) is executed when D is 1, 0 will be output and Zero Flag will be set.

2) DDECU (Double Decrement)

(1) It saves the result of D, D+1 minus 1 again in D, D+1.
(2) D is processed as Unsigned operation.
(3) If (D)DECU(P) is executed when D, D+1 is 1, 0 will be output and Zero Flag will be set.
(4) If DDECU(P) is executed when D, D+1 is 0(h00000000), 4,294,967,295(hFFFFFFFF) will be output and Carry
Flag will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If P1000=100, When Input Signal P00000 is repeated changing to On from Off status, the saved value in P1000 is
decreased 1.

P00000
DECUP P1000

4-113
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.17 Rotation Instruction

XGK XGB
4.17.1 ROL, ROLP, DROL, DROLP ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
ROL(P) D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O
2~4 - - O
DROL(P) n O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

Command

ROL, DROL D n
Command
ROLP, DROLP P D n

means ROL/DROL

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
D Data address to perform operation. WORD/DWORD
n Number of bits to rotate to the left. WORD
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Carry If Carry is caused during rotation, Carry Flag will be set. F112

1) ROL (Rotate Left)

(1) It rotates D’s 16 Bits for the number of bits specified to the left bit by bit, and the highest bit will rotate to Carry Flag
(F112) and the lowest bit. (Rotation within 1 word)

Carry Flag b15 b0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1
Rotation to the left

2) DROL (Double Rotate Left)

(1) It rotates D and D+1’s 32 Bits data for n bits to the left, not including Carry Flag.

3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=h1234, when Input signal P00000 is changed to On from Off status, It rotates 4 bits to
the left bit by bit and then h2341 will be saved in P1000.

P00000
ROLP P1000 4

4-114
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.17.2 ROL4, ROL4P, ROL8, ROL8P
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
ROL4(P) D O - O - - - - O O - - - - -
2~4 - - O
ROL8(P) n O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

Command

ROL4, ROL8 D n
Command
ROL4P, ROL8P P D n

means ROL4/ROL8

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
D Data address to perform operation. NIBBLE/BYTE
n Number of bits to rotate to the left. WORD
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Carry If Carry is caused during rotation, Carry Flag will be set. F112

1) ROL4( Rotate Left)

(1) It rotates D’s 4 bits for the number of n bits specified to the left bit by bit, and the highest bit among 4 bits will
rotate to Carry Flag and the lowest bit. (Rotation within 4 bits)
(2) If Carry is caused during rotation, Carry Flag will be set.

2) ROL8 (Double Rotate Left)

(1) It rotates D’s 8 bits for the number of n bits specified to the left bit by bit, and the highest bit among 8 bits will
rotate to Carry Flag and the lowest bit. (Rotation within 8 bits)
(2) If Carry is caused during rotation, Carry Flag will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) In case of P01004~P01007=h3, when Input Signal P00000 is changed to On from Off status, It rotates 2 bits to
the left bit by bit, and then ‘hc’ will be saved in P01004~P01007.

P00000
ROL4P P01004 2

4-115
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
4.17.3 ROR, RORP, DROR, DRORP ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
ROR(P) D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O
2~4 - - O
DROR(P) n O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

Command
ROR, DROR D n
Command
RORP, DRORP P D n

means ROR/DROR

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
D Data address to perform operation. WORD/DWORD
n Number of bits to rotate to the left. WORD
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Carry If Carry is caused during rotation, Carry Flag will be set. F112

1) ROR (Rotate Right)

(1) It rotates D’s 16 bits for the number of bits specified to the right bit by bit, and the lowest bit will rotate to Carry
Flag (F112) and the highest bit. (Rotation within 1 word)

b15 b0 Carry Flag

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0
Rotation to the right

2) DROR (Double Rotate Right)

(1) It rotates D and D+1’s 32 bits data for n bits to the right, not including Carry Flag.

3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=h1234, Input Signal P00000 is changed to On from Off status, It rotates 4 bits to the right bit by
bit and then h4123 is saved in P1000.

P00000
RORP P1000 4

4-116
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.17.4 ROR4, ROR4P, ROR8, ROR8P ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
ROR4(P) D O - O - - - - O O - - - - -
2~4 - - O
ROR8(P) n O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

Command
ROR4, ROR8 D n
Command
ROR4P, ROR8P P D n

means ROR4/ROR8
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
D Data address to perform operation. NIBBLE/BYTE
n Number of bits to rotate to the left. WORD
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Carry If Carry is caused during rotation, Carry Flag will be set. F112

1) ROR4 (Nibble Rotate Right)

(1) It rotates D’s 4 bits for the number of n bits specified to the right bit by bit, and the lowest bit among 4 bits will
rotate to Carry Flag and the highest bit. (Rotation within 4 bits)
(2) If Carry is caused during rotation, Carry Flag will be set.

2) ROR8 (Byte Rotate Right)

(1) It rotates D’s 8 bits for the number of n bits specified to the right bit by bit, and the lowest bit among 8 bits will
rotate to Carry Flag and the highest bit. (Rotation within 8 bits)
(2) If Carry is caused during rotation, Carry Flag will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) In case of P01004=h00C3, Input Signal P00000 is changed to On from Off status, It rotates 2 Bits to the
right bit by bit and then h0033 is saved in P01004.

P00000
ROR4P P01004 2

4-117
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
4.17.5 RCL, RCLP, DRCL, DRCLP ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
RCL(P) D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O
2~4 - - O
DRCL(P) n O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

Command
RCL, DRCL D n
Command

RCLP, DRCLP P D n

means RCL/DRCL
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
D Data address to perform operation. WORD/DWORD
n Number of bits to rotate to the left. WORD
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Carry If Carry is caused during rotation, Carry Flag will be set. F112

1) RCL (Rotate Left with Carry)

(1) It rotates word data D’s individual bit for the number of N to the left bit by bit, and the highest bit data moves to
Carry Flag (F112) and the original Carry Flag (F112) moves to the lowest bit. (Rotation within 1 word)

Carry Flag b15 b0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1
Rotation to the right

2) DRCL (Double Rotate Left with Carry)

(1) It rotates D and D+1’s 32 bits data for n bits to the left, not including Carry Flag.

Carry Flag D+1 D

(F112)
b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b18 b17 b16 b15 b14 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Rotation for n bits

3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=hF000, when Input Signal is changed to On from Off status, It rotates 4 bits to the left bit
by bit and then hE00 is saved in P1000 and Carry Flag will be set.

P00000
RCLP P1000 4

4-118
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.17.6 RCL4, RCL4P, RCL8, RCL8P ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
RCL4(P) D O - O - - - - O O - - - - -
2~4 - - O
RCL8(P) n O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

Command
RCL4, RCL8 D n
Command
RCL4P, RCL8P P D n

means RCL4/RCL8

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
D Data address to perform operation. NIBBLE/BYTE
n Number of bits to rotate to the left. WORD
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Carry If Carry is caused during rotation, Carry Flag will be set. F112

1) RCL4 (Nibble Rotate Left with Carry)

(1) It rotates D’s 4 bits for the number of n bits specified to the left bit by bit, and the highest bit among 4 bits moves to
Carry Flag and the original Carry Flag moves to the lowest bit. (Rotation within 4 bits)
(2) If Carry is caused during rotation, Carry Flag will be set.

2) RCL8 (Byte Rotate Left with Carry)

(1) It rotates D’s 8 bits for the number of n bits specified to the left bit by bit, and the highest bit among 8 bits moves
to Carry Flag and the original Carry Flag moves to the lowest bit. (Rotation within 8 bits)
(2) If Carry is caused during rotation, Carry Flag will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) In case of P0100c~P0100F=’hF’, Input Signal P00000 is changed to On from Off status, It rotates 4 bits to the left.
hE000 will be saved in P0100 and Carry Flag will be set.

P00000
RCL4P P0100C 4

4-119
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.17.7 RCR, RCRP, DRCR, DRCRP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
RCR(P) D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O
2~4 - - O
DRCR(P) n O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

Command
RCR, DRCR D n
Command
RCRP, DRCRP P D n

means RCR/DRCR

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
D Data address to perform operation. WORD/DWORD
n Number of bits to rotate to the right. WORD
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Carry If Carry is caused during rotation, Carry Flag will be set. F112

1) RCR (Rotate Right with carry)

(1) It rotates word data D’s individual bit for the number of N to the right bit by bit, and the highest bit data moves to
Carry Flag (F112) and the original Carry Flag (F112) moves to the lowest bit. (Rotation within 1 word)

b15 b0 Carry Flag

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0
Rotation to the right

2) DRCR (Double Rotate Right with carry)

(1) It rotates D and D+1’s 32 bits data for n bits to the right, including Carry Flag.

D+1 D Carry Flag

(F112)
b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b18 b17 b16 b15 b14 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Rotation for n bits

3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=hF, When Input Signal P00000 is changed to On from Off status, It rotates 4 bits to the right bit
by bit and then h0000 will be saved in P1000 and Carry Flag will be set.

P00000
RCRP P1000 4

4-120
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.17.8 RCR4, RCR4P, RCR8, RCR8P
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
RCR4(P) D O - O - - - - O O - - - - -
2~4 - - O
RCR8(P) n O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

Command
RCR4, RCR8 D n
Command
RCR4P, RCR8P P D n

means RCR4/RCR8
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
D Data address to perform operation. NIBBLE/BYTE
n Number of bits to rotate to the right. WORD
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Carry If Carry is caused during rotation, Carry Flag will be set. F112

1) RCR4 (Nibble Rotate Right with carry)

(1) It rotates D’s 4 bits for the number of n bits specified to the right bit by bit, and the lowest bit among 4 bits moves
to Carry Flag and the original Carry Flag moves to the highest bit. (Rotation within 4 bits)
(2) If Carry is caused during rotation, Carry Flag will be set.

2) RCR8 (Byte Rotate Right with carry)

(1) It rotates D’s 8 bits for the number of n bits specified to the right bit by bit, and the lowest bit among 8 bits moves
to Carry Flag and the original Carry Flag moves to the highest bit. (Rotation within 8 bits)
(2) If Carry is caused during rotation, Carry Flag will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) In case of P01000~P01003=hF, When Input Signal P00000 is changed to On from Off status, It rotates 4 bits to
the right and then h000E will be saved in P01000 and Carry Flat will be set.

P00000
RCR4P P01000 4

4-121
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.18 Move Instruction

XGK XGB
4.18.1 BSFT, BSFTP ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
St O - O - - - - O O - - - - -
BSFT(P) 3/4 - - -
Ed O - O - - - - O O - - - - -

Command
BSFT St Ed
Command
BSFTP P St Ed

means BSFT

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
St Start bit of BSFT Operation BIT
Ed End bit of BSFT Operation BIT

1) BSFT (Bit Shift)

(1) It shifts bits data from Start Bit (St) to End Bit (Ed) bit by bit.
(2) Bit shift direction
- S1 < Ed: left shift
- S1 > Ed: right shift

2) Program Example
(1) In case of P0070=h8000, when Input Signal P00000 is changed to On from Off status, It shifts to the right from
Start bit P0070F to End bit P00704 bit by bit because P0070F is larger than P00704 (P0070F > P00704).

P00000
BSFTP P0070F P00704

4-122
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.18.2 BSFL, BSFLP, DBSFL, DBSFLP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
BSFL(P) D O - O O O - - - - - O O O O
2~4 - - O
DBSFL(P) n O - O O O - - - - O O O O O

Command
BSFL, DBSFL D n
Command
BSFLP, DBSFLP P D n

means BSFL/DBSFL
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
D Device Number to shift bits. WORD/DWORD
n Number of times to shift word data S to the left bit by bit. WORD
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Carry Carry Flag will be On/Off based on the bit cut away last. F112

1) BSFL (Bit Shift Left)

It shifts D’s word data’s individual bit to the left for the number of N bit by bit.
b15 b0
D 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 Before

CY When N=2

D 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 After

0 0
2) DBSFL (Double Bit Shift Left)
It shifts D+1,D’s double word data’s individual bit to the left for the number of N bit by bit.

D+1 D
b31 b15 b0
1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 Before

CY When N=2

D 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 After

Filled with 0
3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=’h000F’, When P00000 is changed to On from Off status, it rotates 4 bit to the left bit
by bit and ‘h00F0’ is saved in P1000’.

P00000
BSFL P1000 4

4-123
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.18.3 BSFL4, BSFL4P, BSFL8, BSFL8P
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
BSFL4(P) D O - O - - - - O O - - - - -
3~5 - - O
BSFL8(P) n O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

Command
BSFL4, BSFL8 D n
Command

BSFL4P, BSFL8P P D n

means BSFL4/BSFL8

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
D Start bit position of BSFL Operation NIBBLE/BYTE
n Number of bits among 4/8 bits to shift to the left from specified D bit position. WORD
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Carry Carry Flag will be On/Off based on the bit cut away last. F112

1) BSFL4 (Nibble Bit Shift Left)

(1) It shifts n bits among 4 bits to the left from specified D bit position.

2) BSFL8 (Byte Bit Shift Left)

(1) It shifts D’s 8-bit data’s individual bit to the left for the number of specified n bits bit by bit.
(2) Carry Flag will be On/Off based on the bit cut away last.

3) Program Example
(1) In case of P0100=‘h00F0’, it shifts 4 bits from No. 4 bit to the left and ‘h03C0’ will be saved in P0100.
P00000
BSFL4 P01004 2

4-124
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.18.4 BSFR, BSFRP, DBSFR, DBSFRP ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
BSFR(P) D O - O O O - - - - - O O O O
2~4 - - O
DBSFR(P) n O - O O O - - - - O O O O O

Command
BSFR, DBSFR D n

Command
BSFRP, DBSFRP P D n

means BSFR/DBSFR
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
D Device Number to shift bits WORD/DWORD
n Number of times to shift word data S to the right bit by bit. WORD
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Carry Carry Flag will be Set/Reset based on the bit cut away last. F112

1) BSFR (Bit Shift Right)

(1) It shifts D’s word data’s individual bit to the right for the number of specified D’s bits bit by bit.
(2) Carry Flag will be On/Off based on the bit cut away last.

2) DBSFR (Double Bit Shift Right)

(1) It shifts D+1,D’s double word data’s individual bit to the right for the number of N bit by bit.
(2) Carry Flag will be On/Off based on the bit cut away last.

3) Program Example
(1) In case of D01000=’h001F’, if Input Signal P00000 is changed to On from Off status, it rotates bits to the right for
4 times and then ‘h0001’ will be saved in D01000 and Carry Flag will be set.

P00000
P BSFR D01000 4

4-125
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.18.5 BSFR4, BSFR4P, BSFR8, BSFR8P
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
BSFR4(P) D O - O - - - - O O - - - - -
3/4 - - O
BSFR8(P) n O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

Command
BSFR4(P) D n
Command
BSFR8(P) P D n

means BSFL

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
D Start bit position of BSFR Operation NIBBLE/BYTE
n Number of bits among 4/8 bits to shift to the right from specified D bit position. WORD
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Carry Carry Flag will be Set/Reset based on the bit cut away last. F112

1) BSFR4 (Nibble Bit Shift Right)

(1) It shifts D’s 4-bit data’s individual bit to the right for the number of specified n bits bit by bit.
(2) Carry Flag will be Set/Reset based on the bit cut away last.

2) BSFR8 (Byte Bit Shift Right)

(1) It shifts D’s 8-bit data’s individual bit to the right for the number of specified n bits bit by bit.
(2) Carry Flag will be Set/Reset based on the bit cut away last.

3) Program Example
(1) In case of P0100=’h00F0’, If Input Signal is changed to On from Off status, it rotates bits to the right from No.4 bit
by bit for 4 times and then ‘h000F’ will be saved in P0100.

P00000
BSFR4 P01004 4

4-126
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.18.6 WSFT, WSFTP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O - O O O - O - - - O O O O
WSFT(P) 2~4 O - -
D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O

Command
WSFT St Ed
Command
WSFTP P St Ed

means WSFT

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
St Address of Start word data of WSFT Operation WORD
Ed Address of End word data of WSFT Operation WORD

1) WSFT (Word Shift)

(1) It shifts words data from Start Word (St) to End Word (Ed) word by word.

b15 b0 b15 b0
Start word 1234 Start word 0 Shift word
2345 1234 by word
3456 2345
If St < Ed
4567 3456
End word 5678 End word 4567

(2) Direction of Word Shift

- S1 < S2 (e.g. WSFT D0000 D0003) → downward
- S1 > S2 (e.g. WSFT D0003 D0000) → upward

2) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal P00000 is changed to On from Off status, ‘1234’ saved in D01000 will be downward by 1
word and saved in D01001.

b15 b0 b15 b0
D01000 1234 D01000 0 Shift by 1 word
2345 1234
3456 2345
4567 3456
D01004 5678 D01004 4567

P00000
WSFTP D01000 D01004

4-127
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.18.7 WSFL, WSFLP, WSFR, WSFRP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
D1 O - O O O - O - - - O O O O
WSFL(P)
D2 O - O O O - O - - - O O O O 4~6 - - -
WSFR(P)
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

Command
WSFL, WSFR D1 D2 N

Command
WSFLP, WSFRP P D1 D2 N

means WSFL/WSFR

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
D1 Device Number of the section to shift words. WORD
D2 Device Number of the section to shift words. WORD
N Number of words to shift at a time. WORD

1) WSFL (Word Shift Left)

(1) It shifts words between D1 and D2 toward the upper word of number N. And 0s as many as the lower words
shifted at this moment, will be saved in the replaced position.

2) WSFR (Word Shift Right)

(1) It shifts words between D1 and D2 toward the lower word of number N. And 0s as many as the upper words
shifted at this moment, will be saved in the replaced position.

3) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal P00020 is changed to On from Off status, 9-word data from P0000 to P0008 will be shifted to the
right by 2-word and 0 will be saved in P0007,P0008.

P00020
WSFR P0000 P0008 2

4-128
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.18.8 SR
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
Db O - O - - - - O O - - - - -
I O - O O O - - O O - - - - -
SR 3 O - -
D O - O O O - - O O - - - - -
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

Command
SR SR Db I D N

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
Db Start bit of area to shift in bit unit
I Data of input to shift in bit unit BIT
D Shift direction in bit unit
N Number of bits to shift WORD
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Error Flag will be set if N value exceeds maximum ‘Db’ area when SR instruction is
Error F110
executed.

1) SR
(1) It shifts N data from Shift Start Bit Db when Inpunt Signal which is execution condition of SR instruction is changed
to On from Off status.
(2) It shifts bits to the right if input direction bit is On, and to the left if off.
(3) The bits empty after data shifted will be filled with input data bit’s value.

D direction, shifted for S2

2) Program Example
(1) In case of M00012=0 and M00013=0, when 1 initial Clock of Input Signal F00093 is changed to On from
Off status, it shifts 8-bit data to the left from D0000’s No. 0 bit and empty bit of input data is changed to 0.
(2) If Input bit data M00012=1, empty bit is charged ‘1’
(3) If shift direction bit M00013=1, direction of bit data is changed to the right and Bit Shift is executed with 1
second cycle.

F00093
SR D00000.0 M00012 M00013 8

4-129
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.18.9 BRR, BRRP ○ X

Area Available Flag

Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O O - O O - O - - -
S2 O O O O O O - O O - O - - -
BRR(P) 5~8 - - -
D O O O O O O - O O - O - - -
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

COMMAND
BRR S D n1 n2

COMMAND
BRRP P S D n1 n2

means BRR

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data type
S Head address to execute operation BYTE
D Head address to save operation result BYTE
n1 The number of byte to rotate right WORD
n2 The number of right rotation WORD

1) BRR (Byte Rotate Right)

(1) rotates data of S[0]~S[n1-1] byte n2 times with byte unit right and save result in D[0]~D[n1-1].
(2) In case n1 is 0, operation is not executed.

2) Program example
If input signal P00000 is Off -> On, rotates 4 byte data starting from P10000 3 times with byte unit right and save
result in P11000.

4-130
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.18.10 BRL, BRLP ○ X

Area Available Flag

Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O - - - - O O - O - - -
S2 O O O O O O - O O - O - - -
BRL (P) 5~8 - - -
D O O O O O O - O O - O - - -
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

COMMAND
BRL S D n1 n2

COMMAND
BRLP P S D n1 n2

means BRL

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data type
S Head address to execute operation BYTE
D Head address to save operation result BYTE
n1 The number of byte to rotate left WORD
n2 The number of left rotation WORD

1) BRL (Byte Rotate Left)

(1) rotates data of S[0]~S[n1-1] byte n2 times with byte unit left and save result in D[0]~D[n1-1].
(2) In case n1 is 0, operation is not executed.

2) Program example
If input signal P00000 is Off -> On, rotates 4 byte data starting from P10000 3 times with byte unit left and save
result in P11000.

4-131
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.19 Exchange Instruction

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.19.1 XCHG, XCHGP, DXCHG, DXCHGP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
XCHG(P) D1 O - O O O - O - - - O O O O
2~4 - - -
DXCHG(P) D2 O - O O O - O - - - O O O O

(D)XCHG D1 D2

(D)XCHGP P D1 D2

means (D)XCHG
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
D1 Device Number of data to exchange WORD/DWORD
D2 Device Number of data to exchange WORD/DWORD

1) XCHG (Exchange)
(1) It exchanges word data of specified D1 and D2.

2) DXCHG (Double Exchange)

(1) It exchanges word data of specified D1+1,D1 and D2+1,D2.

3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=’h1234’ and P1100=’5678’, Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On status,
‘5678’ is saved in P10000 and then ‘h1234’ is saved in P1100.

P00000
XCHG P1000 P1100

4-132
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.19.2 GXCHG, GXCHGP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
D1 O - O O O - O - - - O O O O
GXCHG(P) D2 O - O O O - O - - - O O O O 4~6 O - -
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

GXCHG D1 D2 N

GXCHGP P D1 D2 N

means GXCHG
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
D1 Start address of area to exchange data with D2 in word unit WORD
D2 Start address of area to exchange data with D1 in word unit WORD
N Number of data to exchange in word unit WORD
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If N value exceeds applicable device’s area. F110

1) GXCHG
(1) It exchanges N word data starting from D1 and D2.

D1 h0001 D10 h0100

h0002 h0101
h0003 h0102
N
h0004 h0103
h0005 h0104
h0006 h0105

(2) It exchanges N data while increasing based on the value of D1 and D2. If D1 and D2 are overlapped, unintentional
result will be caused.

2) Program Example
(1) Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On status, it exchanges 3-word data of P0010~P0012 and
P0020~P0022.

P10 h0001 P20 h0100 After exchange P10 h0100 P20 h0001
h0002 h0101 h0101 h0002
h0003 h0102
h0102 h0003

P00000
GXCHG P0010 P0020 3

4-133
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
4.19.3 SWAP, SWAPP ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
SWAP(P) D O - O - - - - - - - O O O O 2 - - -

Command
SWAP D
Command
SWAPP P D

means SWAP

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
D Word address of data to exchange byte upper and lower WORD

1) SWAP
(1) It exchanges byte upper and lower in a word.

2) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On, 1-word data in D00100’s upper byte and lower byte is
exchanged and then saved in P00100 again.

Upper byte Lower byte

D100 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0

D100 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1

P00000
SWAP D00100

4-134
-

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.19.4 GSWAP, GSWAPP ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
D O - O - - - - - - - O O O O
GSWAP(P) 2~4 O - -
N O - O - - - O - - O O O O O

GSWAP D N

GSWAPP P D N

means GSWAP

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
D First Device Number of data to exchange byte upper and lower WORD
N Number of word data to exchange byte upper and lower WORD
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If N’s range exceeds the specified area. F110

1) GSWAP (Group SWAP)

(1) It exchanges byte upper and lower in N words.

1byte 1byte

1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1

1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1

1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1

Byte exchanged

2) Program Example
(1) If Input signal P00000 is changed from Off too On, 3-word data of P1000~P1002’s upper byte and lower byte is
exchanged.

P00000
GSWAP P1000 3

4-135
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.19.5 SWAP2, SWAP2P ○ X

Area Available Flag

Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
SWAP2(P) 2~4 - - -
D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O

COMMAND
SWAP2 S D

SWAP2P P S D

means SWAP2

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data type
S Device Number of data or data to exchange byte upper and lower WORD
D Address to save result of SWAP2 operation WORD

1) SWAP2
(1) Exchanes byte upper and lower for device set by S and saves it in D

2) Program example
If P00000 is Off -> On, upper byte and lower byte of 1 word data saved in D00100 are exchanged and result is
saved in D00110.

4-136
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.19.6 GSWAP2, GSWAP2P ○ X

Area Available Flag

Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
GSWAP2(P) D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O 5~7 O O -
N O O O O O - O - - O O O O O

COMMAND
GSWAP2 S D N

COMMAND
GSWAP2P S D N

means GSWAP2

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data type
S First Device Number of data to exchange byte upper and lower WORD
D Address to save result of GSWAP2 operation WORD
N Number of group to transmit ( 0 ~ 65536 ) WORD
[Flag setting]
Device
Flag Description
number
Error When N exceeds the range, flag is set. Instruction is not executed. F110

1) GSWAP2 ( Group SWAP )

(1) Exchanges upper and lower byte of N word data.

S h0002 D h0200
S+1 h0007 D+1 h0702
. h007F Group SWAP . h7F00
N N
. .
. .
S+N-1 h005A D+N -1 h5A00

Word

2) Program example
If input signal P00000 is Off -> On, exchanges upper byte and lower byte of 3 word data and saves result in
P0004~P0006.

S(Source) D(Destination)
GSWAP2
D00000 h0002 h0200 P00004
Execution
N D00001 h0007 h0702 P00005
D00002 h007F h7F00 P00006
(Before) (After)

4-137
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.20 BIN Operation Instruction

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.20.1 ADD, ADDP, DADD, DADDP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
ADD(P)
S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O 4~6 - - -
DADD(P)
D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O

(D)ADD S1 S2 D

(D)ADDP P S1 S2 D

means ADD/DADD

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data to be added to S2 INT/DINT
S2 Data to be added to S1 INT/DINT
D Address to save operation result in INT/DINT

1) ADD (Signed Binary Add)

(1) It saves the result of word data S1 and S2 added up in D.
(2) At this moment, it performs Signed Operation. If operation result is over 32,767(h7FFF) or below - 32,768
(hFFFF), Carry Flag will not be set.

D S D
b15 b0 b15 b0 b15 b0
5678 (BIN) + 1234 (BIN) 6912 (BIN)

2) DADD (Signed Binary Double Add)

(1) It saves the result of word data S1 and S2 added up in D.
(2) At this moment, it performs Signed Operation.
(3) If operation result is over 2,147,483,647 (h7FFFFFFF) or below -2,147,483,648(hFFFFFFFF), Carry
Flag will not be set.

D+1 D S+1 S D+1 D

b31 b16 b15 b0 b31 b16 b15 b0 b31 b16 b15 b0
567890 (BIN) + 123456 (BIN) 691346 (BIN)

3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=‘1234’ , P1100=‘1111’, Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On status, the
added result of ‘2345’ is saved In P1200.

P00000
ADD P1000 P1100 P1200

4-138
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.20.2 SUB, SUBP, DSUB, DSUBP ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
SUB(P)
S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O 4~6 - - -
DSUB(P)
D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O

(D)SUB S1 S2 D

(D)SUBP P S1 S2 D

means SUB/DSUB

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data to be subtracted from S2 INT/DINT
S2 Data to be subtracted from S1 INT/DINT
D Address to save operation result in INT/DINT

1) SUBU (Signed Binary Subtract)

(1) It saves the result of word data S1 minus S2 in D (16-bit).
(2) At this moment, it performs Signed Operation.
(3) If operation result is over 32,767(h7FFF) or below -32,768(hFFFF), Carry Flag will not be set.

D S D
b15 b0 b15 b0 b15 b0
5678 (BIN) - 1234 (BIN) 4444 (BIN)

2) DSUBU (Signed Binary Double Subtract)

(1) It saves the result of word data S1 minus S2 in D.
(2) At this moment, it performs Signed Operation.
(3) If operation result is over 2,147,483,647 (h7FFFFFFF) or below -2,147,483,648(hFFFFFFFF), Carry
Flag will not be set.

D+1 D S+1 S D+1 D

b31 b16 b15 b0 b31 b16 b15 b0 b31 b16 b15 b0
567890 (BIN) - 123456 (BIN) 444434 (BIN)

3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=‘200’ and P1100=‘100’, Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On status, the result of
subtracted ‘100’ will be saved in P1200.

P00000
SUB P1000 P1100 P1200

4-139
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.20.3 MUL, MULP, DMUL, DMULP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
MUL(P)
S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O 4~6 - - -
DMUL(P)
D O - O O O - O - - O O O O

MUL,DMUL S1 S2 D

MULP, DMULP P S1 S2 D

means MUL/DMUL

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data to be multiplied by S2 INT/DINT
S2 Data to be multiplied by S1 INT/DINT
D Address to save operation result in DINT/LINT

1) MUL (Signed Binary Multiply)

(1) It saves the result of word data S1 multiplied by S2 in D+1,D (32-bit).
(2) At this moment, it performs Signed Operation.

S1 S2 D + 1 D

b15 b0 b15 b0 b31 b16 b15 b0

1234 x 2345 2893730

2) DMUL (Signed Binary Double Multiply)

(1) It saves the result of word data (S1+1,S1) multiplied by (S2+1,S2) in D+3,D+2,D+1,D(32-bit).
(2) If operation result is over 2,147,483,648 (h7FFFFFFF) or below -2,147,483,647(hFFFFFFFF), Carry
Flag will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=’100 and P1100=’20’, Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On status, the result of
multiplied ‘2000’ is saved in P1200~P1201.

P00000
MUL P1000 P1100 P1200

Remark

Among MKS Instructions, the names of instructions of MULS, DIV, etc. have been changed in XGK as shown
below.
However, their functions are the same as before.
MULS(P) Æ MUL(P) DMULS(P) Æ DMUL(P)
DIV(P) Æ DIVU(P) DDIV(P) Æ DDIVU(P)

4-140
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.20.4 DIV, DIVP, DDIV, DDIVP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
DIV(P)
S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O 4~6 O - -
DDIV(P)
D O - O O O - O - - O O O O

(D)DIVU S1 S2 D

(D)DIVUP P S1 S2 D

means DIV/DDIV

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data to be divided by S2 INT/DINT
S2 Data to be divided by S1 INT/DINT
D Address to save operation result in INT/DINT
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Error To be set if S2’s value is 0. F110

1) DIV (Signed Binary Divide)

(1) It saves the result of word data S1 divided by S2, the quotient in D (16-bit), the remainder in D+1.
(2) At this moment, it performs Signed Operation.

S1 S2 D quotient D+1 remainder

b15 b0 b15 b0 b15 b0 b15 b0

9876 / 1234 8 / 4

2) DDIV (Signed Binary Double Divide)

(1) It saves the result of word data (S1+1,S1) divided by (S2+1,S2), the quotient in (D+1,D), the remainder in
(D+3,D+2).
(2) If operation result is over 2,147,483,648 (h7FFFFFFF) or below -2,147,483,647(hFFFFFFFF), Carry Flag will be
set.

S1+1 S1 S2+1 S2 D+1 D D+3 D+2

b31 b16 b15 b0 b31 b16 b15 b0 b31 b16 b15 b0 b31 b16 b15 b0
.
567890 (BIN) . 123456 (BIN) 4 (BIN) 74066 (BIN)

3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=’5577’ and P1100=’5’, Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On, the quotient ‘1111’ is
saved in P1200 and then the remainder ‘2’ is saved in P1201.

P00000
DIV P1000 P1100 P1200

4-141
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.20.5 ADDU, ADDUP, DADDU, DADDUP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
ADDU(P)
4~6 - O O
DADDU(P) S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O

(D)ADDU S1 S2 D

(D)ADDUP P S1 S2 D

means ADDU/DADDU

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data to be added to S2 WORD/DWORD
S2 Data to be added to S1 WORD/DWORD
D Address to save operation result in WORD/DWORD
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Zero To be set if operation result is Zero. F111
Carry To be set if operation result is Overflow F112

1) ADDU (Unsigned Binary Add)

(1) It saves the result of word data S1 and S2 added up in D.
(2) At this moment, it performs Unsigned Operation.
(3) If operation result is over 65,535(hFFFF), Carry Flag will be set.

2) DADDU (Unsigned Binary Double Add)

(1) It saves the result of word data (S1+1,S1) and (S2+1,S2) added up in (D+1,D).
(2) At this moment, it performs Unsigned Operation.
(3) If operation result is over 4,294,967,295 (hFFFFFFFF), Carry Flag will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=’1234’ and P1100=’5’, Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On status, the Unsigned
addition result ‘1239’ is saved in P1200.

P00000
ADDU P1000 P1100 P1200

4-142
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.20.6 SUBU, SUBUP, DSUBU, DSUBUP ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
SUBU(P)
4~6 - O O
DSUBU(P) S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O

(D)SUBU S1 S2 D

(D)SUBUP P S1 S2 D

means SUBU/DSUBU
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data to be subtracted from S2 WORD/DWORD
S2 Data to be subtracted from S1 WORD/DWORD
D Address to save operation result in WORD/DWORD
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Zero To be set if operation result is Zero. F111
Carry To be set if operation result is Overflow F112

1) SUBU (Unsigned Binary Subtract)

(1) It saves the result of word data S1 minus S2 in D (16-bit).
(2) At this moment, it performs Unsigned Operation.
(3) If operation result is below 0, Carry Flag will be set.

2) DSUBU (Unsigned Binary Double Subtract)

(1) It saves the result of word data (S1+1,S1) minus (S2+1,S2) in (D+1,D).
(2) At this moment, it performs Unsigned Operation.
(3) If operation result is below 0, Carry Flag will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=’1234’ and P1100=’5’, Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On status, the result of
subtraction ‘1229’ is saved in P1200.

P00000
(D)SUBU P1000 P1100 P1200

4-143
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.20.7 MULU, MULUP, DMULU, DMULUP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
MULU(P)
4~6 - O -
DMULU(P) S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O

(D)MULU S1 S2 D

(D)MULUP P S1 S2 D

means MULU/DMULU

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data to be multiplied by S2 WORD/DWORD
S2 Data to be multiplied by S1 WORD/DWORD
D Address to save operation result in DWORD/LWORD
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Zero To be set if operation result is Zero. F111

1) MULU (Unsigned Binary Multiply)

(1) It saves the result of word data S1 multiplied by S2 in D+1,D (16-bit).
(2) At this moment, it performs Unsigned Operation.

2) DMULU (Unsigned Binary Double Multiply)

(1) It saves the result of word data (S1+1,S1) multiplied by (S2+1,S2) in D+3,D+2,D+1,D (32-bit).
(2) At this moment, it performs Unsigned Operation.

3) Program Example
(1) in case of P1000=’1234’ and P1100=’2’, Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On status, the result of
Unsigned addition ‘2468’ is saved in P1200.

P00000
MULU P1000 P1100 P1200

4-144
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.20.8 DIVU, DIVUP, DDIVU, DDIVUP ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
DIVU(P)
S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O 4~6 O O -
DDIVU(P)
D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O

(D)DIVU S1 S2 D

(D)DIVUP P S1 S2 D

means DIVU/DDIVU

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data to be divided by S2 WORD/DWORD
S2 Data to be divided by S1 WORD/DWORD
D Address to save operation result in WORD/DWORD
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Error To be set if S2’s value is 0. F110
Zero To be set if operation result is Zero. F111

1) DIVU (Unsigned Binary Divide)

(1) It saves the result of word data S1 divided by S2, the quotient in D (16-bit), the remainder in D+1.
(2) At this moment, it performs Unsigned Operation.

2) DDIVU (Unsigned Binary Double Divide)

(1) It saves the result of word data (S1+1,S1) divided by (S2+1,S2), the quotient in (D+1,D), the remainder in
(D+3,D+2).
(2) At this moment, it performs Unsigned Operation.

3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=’5559’ and P1100=’5’, Input Signal is changed from Off to On status, the quotient of Unsigned
division ‘1111’ is saved in P1200 and the remainder ‘4’ is saved in P1201.
P00000
DIVU P1000 P1100 P1200

4-145
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.20.9 RADD, RADDP, LADD, LADDP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
RADD(P)
S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O 4~8 O - -
LADD(P)
D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O

RADD, LADD S1 S2 D

RADDP, LADDP P S1 S2 D

means RADD/LADD

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data to be added to S2 REAL/LREAL
S2 Data to be added to S1 REAL/LREAL
D Address to save operation result in REAL/LREAL
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Error To be set if FPU operation error flag of F0057E, F0057C, F0057B or F0057A is set. F110

1) RADD (Real Add)

(1) It saves the result of specified real number S1 and S2 added up in D area in real number. (real number is
occupied in 2-word)
(2) The range of operand’s value is as follows;

± 2-126 ≤ | Operand | < ± 2128

※ If the result of operand’s value exceeds the range, operation error will occur. However, specific
value may be assigned thereto to keep continuous operation.

P00001
RADD M0000 M0004 M0008

2) LADD (Long Real Add)

(1) It saves the result of specified Long Real number S1 and S2 added up in D area in Long Real number. (Long
Real number is occupied in 4-word)
(2) The range of operand’s value is as follows.

± 2-1022 ≤ | Operand | < ± 21024

※ If the result of operand’s value exceeds the range, operation error will occur. However, specific value
may be assigned thereto to keep continuous operation.

P00001
LADD M0000 M0004 M0008

4-146
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.20.10 RSUB, RSUBP, LSUB, LSUBP ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
RSUB(P)
S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O 4~8 O - -
LSUB(P)
D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O

RSUB, LSUB S1 S2 D

RSUBP, LSUBP P S1 S2 D

means RSUB/LSUB
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data to be subtracted from S2 REAL/LREAL
S2 Data to be subtracted from S1 REAL/LREAL
D Address to save operation result in REAL/LREAL
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Error To be set if FPU operation error flag of F0057E, F0057C, F0057B or F0057A is set. F110

1) RSUB (Real Subtract)

(1) It saves the result of specified real number S1 minus S2 in D area in real number. (real number is occupied in 2-
word)
(2) The range of operand’s value is as follows.

± 2-126 ≤ | Operand | < ± 2128

※ If the result of operand’s value exceeds the range, operation error will occur. However, specific
value may be assigned thereto to keep continuous operation.

P00001
RSUB M0000 M0004 M0008

2) LSUB (Long Real Subtract)

(1) It saves the result of specified Long Real number S1 minus S2 in D area in Long Real number. (Long Real
number is occupied in 4-word)
(2) The range of operand’s value is as follows;

± 2-1022 ≤ | Operand | < ± 21024

※ If the result of operand’s value exceeds the range, operation error will occur. However, specific value
may be assigned thereto to keep continuous operation.

P00001
LSUB M0000 M0004 M0008

4-147
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
4.20.11 RMUL, RMULP, LMUL, LMULP ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
RMUL(P)
S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O 4~8 O - -
LMOV(P)
D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O

RMUL S1 S2 D

RMULP P S1 S2 D

means RMUL/LMUL

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data to be multiplied by S2 REAL/LREAL
S2 Data to be multiplied by S1 REAL/LREAL
D Address to save operation result in REAL/LREAL
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Error To be set if FPU operation error flag of F0057E, F0057C, F0057B or F0057A is set. F110

1) RMUL (Real Multiply)

(1) It saves the result of specified real number S1 multiplied by S2 in D area in real number. (real number is
occupied in 2-word)
(2) The range of operand’s value is as follows;

± 2-126 ≤ | Operand | < ± 2128

※ If the result of operand’s value exceeds the range, operation error will occur. However, specific
value may be assigned thereto to keep continuous operation.
P00001
RMUL M0000 M0004 M0008

2) LMUL (Long Real Multiply)

(1) It saves the result of specified Long Real number S1 multiplied by S2 in D area in Long Real number. (Long Real
number is occupied in 4-word)
(2) The range of operand’s value is as follows;

± 2-1022 ≤ | Operand | < ± 21024

※ If the result of operand’s value exceeds the range, operation error will occur. However, specific value
may be assigned thereto to keep continuous operation

P00000
LMUL P1000 P1100 P1200

4-148
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.20.12 RDIV, RDIVP, LDIV, LDIVP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
RDIV(P)
S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O 4~8 O - -
LDIV(P)
D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O

RDIV, LDIV S1 S2 D

RDIVP, LDIVP P S1 S2 D

means RDIV/LDIV

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data to be divided by S2 REAL/LREAL
S2 Data to be divided by S1 REAL/LREAL
D Address to save operation result in REAL/LREAL
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Error To be set if FPU operation error flag of F0057E, F0057C, F0057B or F0057A is set. F110

1) RDIV (Real Divide)

(1) It saves the result of specified real number S1 divided by S2 in D area in real number. (Single Real number is
occupied in 2-word)
(2) The range of operand’s value is as follows:

± 2-126 ≤ | Operand | < ± 2128

※ If the result of operand’s value exceeds the range, operation error will occur. However, specific value
may be assigned thereto to keep continuous operation.

P00001
RDIV M0000 M0004 M0008

2) LDIV (Long Real Divide)

(1) It saves the result of specified Long Real number S1 divided by S2 in D area in Long Real number. (Long Real
number is occupied in 4-word)
(2) The range of operand’s value is as follows;

± 2-1022 ≤ | Operand | < ± 21024

※ If the result of operand’s value exceeds the range, operation error will occur. However, specific value
may be assigned thereto to keep continuous operation.

P00001
LDIV M0000 M0004 M0008

4-149
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.20.13 $ADD, $ADDP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O - O - - - - - - O O O O O
$ADD(P) S2 O - O - - - - - - O O O O O 4~18 - - -
D O - O - - - - - - - O O O O

$ADD S1 S2 D

$ADDP P S1 S2 D

means $ADD

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 String or Device Number String data is saved in STRING
S2 String or Device Number String data is saved in STRING
D Address to save operation result in STRING

1) $ADD (String add)

(1) It saves specified string data S1 as connected with S2 in D. At this moment, the string to be saved in D area will
not exceed 31 letters in English which is the size of string data.

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0

S1 h53(S) h4C(L) S2 h4C(L) h50(P) D h53(S) h5C(L)
h53(S) h49(I) h53(S) h43(C) h53(S) h49(I)
h00 h00 h00 h00 h4C(L) h50(P)
. . . . h00 h43(C)
. . . . h00 h00

S1+15 h00 h00 S2+15 h00 h00 D+15 h00 h00

"LSIS" "PLC" "LSIS PLC"

(2) Even if the length of S1 string plus S2 string exceeds the size of string data, error will not occur. In this case, the
value to be saved in D will be as big as the size of string data starting from S1 value.

Remark

(1) String data will be processed in 16-word data regardless of the string length. Thus, string-related instruction if
used shall designate a device which is allowed to use 16-word space.

4-150
-

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.20.14 GADD, GADDP, GSUB, GSUBP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O
GADD(P) S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O 4~7 O - -
GSUB(P) D O - O O O - O - - O O O O
N O - O O O - - - - O O O O O

GADD, GSUB S1 S2 D N

GADDP, GSUBP P S1 S2 D N

means GADD/GSUB
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data address to be added to S2 INT
S2 Data address to be added to S1 INT
D Address to save operation result in INT
N Number of words to add WORD
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Error To be set when N’s value exceeds specified area. F110

1) GADD (Group Add)

(1) It saves the result of N word data from specified device S1 and N word data from S2 respectively added up in N
word data from specified device D.

b15 b0 b15 b0 b15 b0

S1 1234 S2 1111 D 2345
S1+1 5555 S2+1 2222 D+1 7777
. . .
+ =
. . .
. . .
S1+(N-1) 1000 S2+(N-1) -1000 D+(N-1) 0

(2) A constant can be used for S2.

b15 b0 b15 b0
S1 1234 D 1334
S1+1 5555 b15 b0 D+1 5655
. .
+ S2 100 =
. .
. .
S1+(N-1) 1000 D+(N-1) 1100

(3) If specified device’s area is exceeded due to N value, error will occur.

4-151
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

2) GSUB (Group Subtract)

(1) It saves the result of N word data from specified device S1 minus N word data from S2 respectively in N word
data from specified device D.

b15 b0 b15 b0 b15 b0

S1 1234 S2 1111 D 123
S1+1 5555 S2+1 2222 D+1 3333
. . .
- =
. . .
. . .
S1+(N-1) 1000 S2+(N-1) -1000 D+(N-1) 2000

(2) A constant can be used for S2.

b15 b0 b15 b0
S1 1234 D 1134
S1+1 5555 b15 b0 D+1 5455
. .
- S2 100 =
. .
. .
S1+(N-1) 1000 D+(N-1) 900

(3) If specified device’s area is exceeded due to N value, error will occur.

4-152
-

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.21 BCD Operation Instruction

XGK XGB
4.21.1 ADDB, ADDBP, DADDB, DADDBP ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
ADDB(P)
4~6 O O O
DADDB(P) S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O

ADDB, DADDB S1 S2 D

ADDBP, DADDBP P S1 S2 D

means ADDB

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 BCD data to be added to S2 WORD/DWORD
S2 BCD data to be added to S1 WORD/DWORD
D Address to save operation result in WORD/DWORD
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If the value of S1 and S2 is not of BCD format. F110
Zero To be set if operation result is Zero. F111
Carry To be set if operation result is Overflow. F112

1) ADDB (BCD ADD)

(1) It saves the result of BCD data S1 and S2 added up in D.
(2) Based on operation result, Error(F110), Zero(F111) or Carry(F112) Flag will be set.

D S D

5 6 7 8 + 1 2 3 4 6 9 1 2

2) DADDB (BCD Double ADD)

(1) It saves the result of BCD data (S1 ,S1+1) and (S2, S1+1) added up in (D, D+1).
(2) 0~99,999,999 (BCD 8-digit) is available for S1 and S2.
(3) If 99,999,999 is exceeded, rounding off will be disregarded. In this case, Carry Flag will not be Set.
D+1 D S+1 S D+1 D
Upper 4- digit Lower 4-digit Upper 4- digit Lower 4-digit Upper 4- digit Lower 4-digit
0 9 8 7 1 0 6 8 + 0 0 3 2 3 4 5 6 1 0 1 9 4 5 2 4

Other places than specified will be regarded as 0

3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=’100’ and P1100=’200’, If Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On, BCD data ‘300’ is
saved in P1200.

P00000
ADDB P1000 P1100 P1200

4-153
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.21.2 SUBB, SUBBP, DSUBB, DSUBBP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
SUBB(P)
S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O 4~6 O O O
DSUBB(P)
D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O

SUBB,DSUBB S1 S2 S3

SUBBP, DSUBBP P S1 S2 S3

means SUBB/DSUBB
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 BCD data to be subtracted from S2 WORD/DWORD
S2 BCD data to be subtracted from S1 WORD/DWORD
D Address to save operation result in WORD/DWORD
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If the value of S1 and S2 is not of BCD format. F110
Zero To be set if operation result is Set. F111
Carry To be set if operation result is Set. F112

1) SUBB (BCD Subtract)

(1) It saves the result of BCD data S1 minus S2 in D.
(2) Based on operation result, Error(F110), Zero(F111) or Carry(F112) Flag will be set.
(3) If its result is Underflow, 9999 will be set and Carry Flag will not be ON.

2) DSUBB (BCD Double Subtract)

(1) It saves the result of BCD data (S1 ,S1+1) minus (S2, S1+1) in (D, D+1).
(2) 0~99,999,999 (BCD 8-digit) is available for S1 and S2.
(3) If its result is Underflow, 99999999 will be set and Carry Flag will not be ON.

3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=’200’ and P1100=’100’, Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On, BCD data ‘100’ is saved
in P1200.

P00000
SUBB P1000 P1100 P1200

4-154
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.21.3 MULB, MULBP, DMULB, DMULBP ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
MULB (P)
4~6 O O -
DMULB(P) S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O

MULB, DMULB S1 S2 D

MULBP, DMULBP P S1 S2 D

means MULB/DMULB

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 BCD data to be multiplied by S2 WORD/DWORD
S2 BCD data to be multiplied by S1 WORD/DWORD
D Address to save operation result in DWORD/LWORD
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If the value of S1 and S2 is not of BCD format. F110
Zero To be set if operation result is Zero. F111

1) MULB (BCD Multiply)

(1) It saves the result of BCD data S1 multiplied by S2 in (D, D+1).
(2) Based on operation result, Error (F110) or Zero (F111) Flag will be set.

2) DMULB (BCD Double Multiply)

(1) It saves the result of BCD data (S1, S1+1) multiplied by (S2, S2+1) in (D, D+1, D+2, D+4).
(2) Based on operation result, Error(F110) or Zero(F111) Flag will be set.

S1 +1 S1 S2 +1 S2

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

D +3 D +2 D +1 D

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=‘100’ and P1100=‘10’, If Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On status, BCD data ‘1000’
is saved in P1200 and P1201, 2-word area.

P00000
MULB P1000 P1100 P1200

4-155
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
4.21.4 DIVB, DIVBP, DDIVB, DDIVBP ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
DIVB(P)
S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O 4~6 O O -
DDIVB(P)
D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O

DIVB, DDIVB S1 S2 D

DIVBP, DDIVBP P S1 S2 D

means DIVB/DDIVB

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 BCD data to be divided by S2 WORD/DWORD
S2 BCD data to be divided by S1 WORD/DWORD
D Address to save operation result in WORD/DWORD
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If the value of S1 and S2 is not of BCD format, if the value of S2 is 0 F110
Zero To be set if operation result is Zero F111

1) DIVB (BCD Divide)

(1) It saves the result of BCD data S1 divided by S2, The quotient in D, the remainder in D+1.
(2) Based on operation result, Error(F110) or Zero(F111) Flag will be set.

2) DDIVB (BCD Double Divide) Quotient in D, the Remainder

(1) It saves the result of BCD data (S1, S1+1) divided by (S2, S2+1), the quotient in (D, D+1), the remainder in (D+2,
D+3).
(2) Based on operation result, Error(F110) or Zero(F111) Flag will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=’105’ and P1100=’10’, If Input Signal is chaged from Off to On, P1000 is divided by P1100. In
BCD division result, the quotient ‘10’ is saved in P1200 and the remainder ‘5’ is saved in P1201.

P00000
DIVB P1000 P1100 P1200

4-156
-

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.22 Logic Operation Instruction

XGK XGB
4.22.1 WAND, WANDP, DWAND, DWANDP ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
WAND(P)
S2 O O O O O - O - - - O O O O 4~6 - O -
DWAND(P)
D O - O O O - O - - - O O O

(D)WAND S1 S2 D

(D)WANDP P S1 S2 D

means WAND/DWAND

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data to execute WAND operation with S2 BIN 16/32
S2 Data to execute WAND operation with S1 BIN 16/32
D Address to save WAND operation result in BIN 32
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Zero To be set if operation result is Zero. F111

1) WAND( Word AND)

(1) It saves the result of word data (16-bit) S1 and S2 operated in Logic AND for each bit in D.

b15 b8 b7 b0
S1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1

WAND
b15 b8 b7 b0
S2 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1

b15 b8 b7 b0
D 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1

2) DWAND( Double Word AND)

(1) It saves the result of double word data (32-bit) (S1+1,S1) and (S2+1,S2) operated in Logic AND for each bit in
(D+1, D).

4-157
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

S1+1 S1

b31 b16 b15 b0

S1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0

DWAND
S2+1 S2

b31 b16 b15 b0

S2 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1

D+1 D

b31 b16 b15 b0

D 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0

3) Logic Operation Table

Example
Classification Processing Details Operation Formula
A B Y
0 0 0
It will be 1 only if input A & B are 0 1 0
Logic AND Y=A B
all 1 (other than that, it will be 0). 1 0 0
1 1 1
0 0 0
It will be 0 only if input A & B are 0 1 1
Logic OR Y=A+B
all 0 (other than that, it will be 1) 1 0 1
1 1 1
0 0 0
Exclusive 0 1 1
It will be 0 if input A and B are
Logic OR Y=A B+A B
identical (if not, it will be 1). 1 0 1
(XOR)
1 1 0
0 0 1
Exclusive
Negative It will be 1 if input A and B are 0 1 0
Y=(A+B)(A+B)
Logic OR identical (if not, it will be 0). 1 0 0
(XNR)
1 1 1

4) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=‘h1111’, P1100=‘h3333’, If Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On, the result
WAND executed ‘h3333’ is saved in P1200.

P00000
WAND P1000 P1100 P1200

4-158
-

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.22.2 WOR, WORP, DWOR, DWORP ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
WOR(P)
S2 O O O O O - O - - - O O O O 4~6 - O -
DWOR(P)
D O - O O O - O - - - O - O O

(D)WOR S1 S2 D

(D)WORP P S1 S2 D

means WOR/DWOR

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data to execute WOR operation with S2 BIN 16/32
S2 Data to execute WOR operation with S1 BIN 16/32
D Address to save WOR operation result in BIN 16/32
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Zero To be set if operation result is Zero. F111

1) WOR( Word OR)

(1) It saves the result of word data (16-bit) S1 and S2 operated in Logic OR for each bit in D.

b15 b8 b7 b0
S1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

WOR
b15 b8 b7 b0
S2 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0

b15 b8 b7 b0
D 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0

2) DWOR( Double Word OR)

(1) It saves the result of double word data (32-bit) (S1+1,S1) and (S2+1,S2) operated in Logic OR for each bit in (D+1,
D).

4-159
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

S1+1 S1

b31 b16 b15 b0

S1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1

DWOR
S2+1 S2

b31 b16 b15 b0

S2 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1

D+1 D

b31 b16 b15 b0

D 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1

3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=‘h1111’ and P1100=‘h2222’ , If Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On, the result WOR
operation ‘h3333’ is saved in P1200.

P00000
WOR P1000 P1100 P1200

4-160
-

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.22.3 WXOR, WXORP, DWXOR, DWXORP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
WXOR(P)
S2 O O O O O - O - - - O O O O 4~6 - O -
DWXOR(P)
D O - O O O - O - - - O - O O

(D)WXOR S1 S2 D

(D)WXORP P S1 S2 D

means WXOR/DWXOR

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data to execute WXOR operation with S2 WORD/DWORD
S2 Data to execute WXOR operation with S1 WORD/DWORD
D Address to save WXOR operation result in WORD/DWORD
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Zero To be set if operation result is Zero. F111

1) WXOR( Word Exclusive OR)

(1) It saves the result of word data S1 and S2 operated in Exclusive OR for each bit in D.

b15 b8 b7 b0
S1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0

WXOR
b15 b8 b7 b0
S2 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

b15 b8 b7 b0
D 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1

(2) Exclusive OR: If one bit is 0 and the other bit is 1, the corresponding result bit is set to 1. Otherwise, the
corresponding result bit is set to 0.

2) DWXOR( Double Word Exclusive OR)

(1) It saves the result of double word data S1+1,S1 and S2+1,S2 operated in Exclusive OR for each bit in D+1, D.

4-161
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

S1+1 S1

b31 b16 b15 b0

S1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1

DWXOR
S2+1 S2

b31 b16 b15 b0

S2 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0

D+1 D

b31 b16 b15 b0

D 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1

3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=‘h1111’ and P1100=‘h2222’, Input Signal is changed from Off to On, the WOR operation result of
‘h3333’ is saved in P1200.

P00000
WXOR P1000 P1100 P1200

4-162
-

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.22.4 WXNR, WXNRP, DWXNR, DWXNRP ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
WXNR(P)
S2 O O O O O - O - - - O O O O 4~6 - O -
DWXNR(P)
D O - O O O - O - - - O - O O

(D)WXNR S1 S2 D

(D)WXNRP P S1 S2 D

means WXNR
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data to execute WXNR operation with S2 BIN 16/32
S2 Data to execute WXNR operation with S1 BIN 16/32
D Address to save WXNR operation result in BIN 16/32
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Zero To be set if operation result is Zero. F111

1) WXNR( Word Exclusive NOR)

(1) It saves the result of word data S1 and S2 with Exclusive NOR for each bit in D.

b15 b8 b7 b0
S1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0

WXNR
b15 b8 b7 b0
S2 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0

b15 b8 b7 b0
D 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

(2) Exclusive NOR: If S1 and S2 bit is different from each ather, the operated result is 0. If S1 and S2 bit is
same, the operated result is 1. The operated result is saved in applicable bit.

2) DWXNR( Double Word Exclusive NOR)

(1) It saves the result of Double word data (S1+1,S1) and (S2+1,S2) operated in Exclusive NOR for each bit in
Double word area of (D+1, D).

4-163
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

S1+1 S1

b31 b16 b15 b0

S1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0

DWXNR
S2+1 S2

b31 b16 b15 b0

S2 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0

D+1 D

b31 b16 b15 b0

D 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1

3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=‘h1111’ and P1100=‘h2222’, If Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On, the Exclusive
NOR (WXNR) result ‘hCCCC’ is saved in P1200.

P00000
WXNR P1000 P1100 P1200

4-164
-

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.22.5 GWAND, GWANDP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
S2 O O O O O - O - - - O O O O
GWAND(P) 4~7 O - -
D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

GWAND S1 S2 D N

GWANDP P S1 S2 D N

means GWAND

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Address of data to start GWAND operation with S2 BIN 16
S2 Address of data to start GWAND operation with S1 BIN 16
D Address to save GWAND operation result in BIN 16
N Number of data to execute WAND operation between words BIN 16
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If N value exceeds applicable device’s area. F110

1) GWAND( Group Word AND)

(1) It saves the results of word data from S1 and S2 operated in Logic WAND for N times in word unit in D in regular
order.
b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 S2 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1

S1+1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 S2+1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0

S1+2 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 S2+2 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1

n AND n

S1+(N-2) 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 S2+(N-2) 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1

S1+(N-1) 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 S2+(N-1) 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1

b15 b8 b7 b0
D 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0

D+1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0

D+2 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1

D+(N-2) 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

D+(N-1) 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

4-165
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

(2) -32,768~32,767(BIN 16-bit) of integer is available for S2.

b15 b8 b7 b0
S1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0

S1+1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0

S1+2 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1
b15 b8 b7 b0
n AND S2 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1

S1+(N-2) 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0

S1+(N-1) 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1

b15 b8 b7 b0
D 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0

D+1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

D+2 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1

D+(N-2) 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0

D+(N-1) 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1

2) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to ON status, It saves the result of GWAND operation 5-word data from
P1000~P1004 with 5-word data from P1100~P1104 in 5-word of P1200~1204 respectively.

P00000
GWAND P1000 P1100 P1200 5

4-166
-

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.22.6 GWOR, GWORP ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
S2 O O O O O - O - - - O O O O
GWOR(P) 4~7 O - -
D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

GWOR S1 S2 D N

GWORP P S1 S2 D N

means GWOR

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Address of data to start GWOR operation with S2 WORD
S2 Address of data to start GWOR operation with S1 WORD
D Address to save GWOR operation result in WORD
N Number of data to execute WOR operation WORD
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If N value exceeds applicable device’s area. F110

1) GWAOR( Group Word OR)

(1) It saves the results of word data from S1 and S2 operated in Logic WOR for N times in word unit in D
in regular order.
b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 S2 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1

S1+1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 S2+1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1

S1+2 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 S2+2 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1

n OR n

S1+(N-2) 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 S2+(N-2) 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1

S1+(N-1) 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 S2+(N-1) 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

b15 b8 b7 b0
D 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1

D+1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1

D+2 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1

D+(N-2) 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1

D+(N-1) 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1

4-167
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

(2) -32,768~32,767 (WORD) of integer is available for S2.

b15 b8 b7 b0
S1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1

S1+1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1

S1+2 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
b15 b8 b7 b0
n OR S2 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1

S1+(N-2) 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0

S1+(N-1) 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1

b15 b8 b7 b0
D 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1

D+1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1

D+2 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1

D+(N-2) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

D+(N-1) 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1

2) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On, It saves the result of GWOR operation 5-word data from
P1000~P1004 with 5-word data from P1100~P1104 in 5-word data of P1200~P1204 respectively.

P00000
GWOR P1000 P1100 P1200 5

4-168
-

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.22.7 GWXOR, GWXORP ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
S2 O O O O O - O - - - O O O O
GWXOR(P) 4~7 O - -
D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

GWXOR S1 S2 D N

GWXORP P S1 S2 D N

means GWXOR

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Address of data to start GWXOR operation with S2 WORD
S2 Address of data to start GWXOR operation with S1 WORD
D Address to save GWXOR operation result in WORD
N Number of data to execute WXOR operation WORD
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If N value exceeds applicable device’s area. F110

1) GWXOR( Group Word XOR)

(1) It saves the results of word data from S1 and S2 operated in Logic WXOR for N times in word unit in D in regular
order.
b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 S2 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1

S1+1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 S2+1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

S1+2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 S2+2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0

n XOR n

S1+(N-2) 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 S2+(N-2) 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1

S1+(N-1) 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 S2+(N-1) 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1

b15 b8 b7 b0
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0

D+1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

D+2 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0

D+(N-2) 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1

D+(N-1) 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1

4-169
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

(2) -32,768~32,767(WORD) of integer is available for S2.

b15 b8 b7 b0
S1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0

S1+1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0

S1+2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
b15 b8 b7 b0
n XOR S2 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1

S1+(N-2) 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1

S1+(N-1) 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1

b15 b8 b7 b0
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0

D+1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0

D+2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1

D+(N-2) 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

D+(N-1) 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

2) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On status, It saves the result of GWXOR operation 5-word data from
P1000~P1004 with 5-word data from P1100~P1104 in 5-word data of P1200~P1204 respectively.

P00000
GWXOR P1000 P1100 P1200 5

4-170
-

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.22.8 GWXNR, GWXNRP ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
S2 O O O O O - O - - - O O O O
GWXNR(P) 4~7 O - -
D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

GWXNR S1 S2 D N

GWXNRP P S1 S2 D N

means GWXNR
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Address of data to start GWXNR operation with S2 WORD
S2 Address of data to start GWXNR operation with S1 WORD
D Address to save GWXNR operation result in WORD
N Number of data to execute WXNR operation WORD
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If N value exceeds applicable device’s area. F110

1) GWXNR( Group Word XNR)

(1) It saves the results of word data from S1 and S2 operated in Logic WXNR for N times in word unit in D in regular
order.
b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 S2 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1

S1+1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 S2+1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1

S1+2 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 S2+2 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1

n XNR n

S1+(N-2) 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 S2+(N-2) 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

S1+(N-1) 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 S2+(N-1) 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1

b15 b8 b7 b0
D 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1

D+1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1

D+2 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

D+(N-2) 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1

D+(N-1) 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0

4-171
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

(2) -32,768~32,767(BIN 16-bit) of integer is available for S2.

b15 b8 b7 b0
S1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1

S1+1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1

S1+2 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
b15 b8 b7 b0
n XNR S2 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1

S1+(N-2) 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1

S1+(N-1) 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0

b15 b8 b7 b0
D 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1

D+1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1

D+2 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0

D+(N-2) 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1

D+(N-1) 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0

2) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal is changed from Off to On status, It saves the result of GWXNOR operation 5-word data from
P1000~P1004 with 5-word data from P1100~P1104 in 5-word data of P1200~P1204 respectively.

P00000
GWXNR P1000 P1100 P1200 5

4-172
-

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.22.9 BAND, BANDP XGK XGB
○ X
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O - O - - - - O O - O - - -
S2 O - O - - - - O O O O - - -
BAND(P) 6~8 O - -
D O - O - - - - O O - O - - -
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

COMMAND
BAND S1 S2 D N

COMMAND
BANDP P S1 S2 D N

means BAND

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data type
S1 Address of data to start BAND operation with S2 BYTE
S2 Address of data to start BAND operation with S1 BYTE
D Address to save BAND operation result in BYTE
N Number of byte data to execute AND operation WORD
[Flag set]
Device
Flag Description
number
Error If N value exceeds applicable device’s area. F110

1) BAND( Group Byte AND )

(1) Executes AND operation for S1 and S2 N times with byte unit and save result in D in order.

4-173
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

(2) -128~127 (BIN 8 bit) integer can be set in S2

2) Program example
If input signal P00000 is Off -> On, executes AND operation for 5 byte data of P1000~P1004 and 5 byte data of
P1100~P1104 and saves result in 5 byte data area of P1200~P1204.

4-174
-

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.22.10 BOR, BORP ○ X
Area Available Flag
Insturction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O - O - - - - O O - O - - -
S2 O - O - - - - O O O O - - -
BOR(P) 6~8 O - -
D O - O - - - - O O - O - - -
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

COMMAND
BORD S1 S2 D N

COMMAND
BORP P S1 S2 D N

Means BORD

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data type
S1 Address of data to start BOR operation with S2 BYTE
S2 Address of data to start BOR operation with S1 BYTE
D Address to save BOR operation result BYTE
N Number of byte data to execute OR operation WORD
[Flag Set]
Device
Flag Description
number
Error If N value exceeds applicable device’s area. Insturction is not executed. F110

1) BOR( Group Byte OR )

(1) Executes OR operation for S1 and S2 N times with byte unit and save result in D in order.
b7 b0 b7 b0
S1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 S2 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
S1+1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 S2+1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0
S1+2 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 S2+2 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1
n n

S1+(N-2) 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 S2+(N-2) 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1
S1+(N-1) 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 S2+(N-1) 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1

b
b7
0
D 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1
D+1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0

D+2 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1
n

D+(N-2) 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1
D+(N-1) 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1

4-175
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

(2) -128~127 (BIN 8 bit) integer can be set in S2.

2) Program example
If input signal P00000 is Off -> On, executes OR operation for 5 byte data of P1000~P1004 and 5 byte data of
P1100~P1104 and saves result in 5 byte data area of P1200~P1204.

4-176
-

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.22.11 BXOR, BXORP ○ X
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O - O - - - - O O - O - - -
S2 O - O - - - - O O O O - - -
BXOR(P) 6~8 O - -
D O - O - - - - O O - O - - -
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

COMMAND
BXOR S1 S2 D N

COMMAND
BXORP P S1 S2 D N

means BXOR

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Address of data to start BXOR operation with S2 BYTE
S2 Address of data to start BXOR operation with S1 BYTE
D Address to save BXOR operation result in BYTE
N Number of data to execute AND operation WORD
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If N value exceeds applicable device’s area. F110

1) BXOR( Group Byte XOR )

(1) Executes XOR operation for S1 and S2 N times with byte unit and save result in D in order.
b7 b0 b7 b0
S1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 S2 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
S1+1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 S2+1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0
S1+2 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 S2+2 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1
n n

S1+(N-2) 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 S2+(N-2) 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1
S1+(N-1) 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 S2+(N-1) 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1

b
b7
0
D 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1
D+1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0

D+2 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0
n

D+(N-2) 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1
D+(N-1) 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0

4-177
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

(2) -128~127 (BIN 8 bit) integer can be set in S2.

2) Program example
If input signal P00000 is Off -> On, executes XOR operation for 5 byte data of P1000~P1004 and 5 byte data of
P1100~P1104 and saves result in 5 byte data area of P1200~P1204.

4-178
-

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.22.12 BXNR, BXNRP ○ X
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O - O - - - - O O - O - - -
S2 O - O - - - - O O O O - - -
BXNR (P) 6~8 O - -
D O - O - - - - O O - O - - -
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

COMMAND
BXNR S1 S2 D N

COMMAND
BXNRP P S1 S2 D N

means BXNR

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data type
S1 Address of data to start BXNR operation with S2 BYTE
S2 Address of data to start BXNR operation with S1 BYTE
D Address to save BXNR operation result in BYTE
N Number of byte data to execute XNR operation WORD
[Flag set]
Device
Flag Description
number
Error If N value exceeds applicable device’s area. Instruction is not executed. F110

1) BXNR( Group Byte XNR )

(1) Executes XNR operation for S1 and S2 N times with byte unit and save result in D in order..
b7 b0 b7 b0
S1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 S2 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
S1+1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 S2+1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0
S1+2 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 S2+2 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1
n n

S1+(N-2) 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 S2+(N-2) 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1
S1+(N-1) 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 S2+(N-1) 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1

b
b7
0
D 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0
D+1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1

D+2 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1
n

D+(N-2) 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
D+(N-1) 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1

4-179
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

(2) -128~127 (BIN 8 bit) integer can be set in S2.

2) Program example
If input signal P00000 is Off -> On, executes XNR operation for 5 byte data of P1000~P1004 and 5 byte data of
P1100~P1104 and saves result in 5 byte data area of P1200~P1204.

4-180
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.22.13 ABAND, ABANDP ○ X

Area Available Flag

Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O - O - - - - O O - O - - -
ABAND(P) D O - O - - - - O O - O - - - 5~7 O O -
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

COMMAND
BAND S D N

COMMAND
BANDP P S D N

means BAND

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data type
S Address of data to start ABAND operation BYTE
D Address to save ABAND operation result in BYTE
N Number of byte data to execute ABAND WORD
[flag set]
Device
Flag Description
number
Error If N value exceeds applicable device’s area. F110
Zero If operation result is zero. F111

1) ABAND( Array Byte AND )

(1) Executes AND for S[0]~ S[n-1] byte data (8 bit) each other and save result in D.
(2) When N is 1, data of S[0] is copied and saved in D. Though data of S[0] is 0, zero flag is not set.
(3) When N is 0, operation is not executed.

b7 b0
S1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0
S1+1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0
S1+2 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 b7 b0
n D 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

S1+(N-2) 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0

S1+(N-1) 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1

2) Program example
If input signal P00000 is Off -> On, executes AND operation for 5 byte data starting from P10000 and saves
result in P11000.

4-181
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.22.14 ABOR, ABORP ○ X
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O - O - - - - O O - O - - -
ABOR(P) D O - O - - - - O O - O - - - 5~7 O O -
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

COMMAND
ABOR S D N

COMMAND
ABORP P S D N

means ABOR

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data type
S Address of data to start ABOR operation BYTE
D Address to save ABOR operation result in BYTE
N Number of byte data to execute OR WORD
[Flag set]
Flag Description Device number
Error If N value exceeds applicable device’s area. F110
Zero If operation result is zero. F111

1) ABOR( Array Byte OR )

(1) Executes OR for S[0]~ S[n-1] byte data (8 bit) each other and save result in D.
(2) When N is 1, data of S[0] is copied and saved in D. Though data of S[0] is 0, zero flag is not set.
(3) When N is 0, operation is not executed.

b7 b0
S1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0
S1+1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0
S1+2 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 b
b7
0
n D 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1

S1+(N-2) 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0

S1+(N-1) 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1

2) Program example
If input signal P00000 is Off -> On, executes OR operation for 5 byte data starting from P10000 and saves result
in P11000.

4-182
 -

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.22.15 ABXOR, ABXORP ○ X
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O - O - - - - O O - O - - -
ABXOR(P) D O - O - - - - O O - O - - - 5~7 O O -
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

COMMAND
ABXOR S D N

COMMAND
ABXORP P S D N

means ABXOR

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data type
S Address of data to start ABXOR operation BYTE
D Address to save ABXOR operation result in BYTE
N Number of byte data to execute XOR WORD
[Flag set]
Device
Flag Description
number
Error If N value exceeds applicable device’s area. F110
Zero If operation result is zero. F111

1) ABXOR(Array Byte XOR )

(1) Executes XOR for S[0]~ S[n-1] byte data (8 bit) each other and save result in D.
(2) When N is 1, data of S[0] is copied and saved in D. Though data of S[0] is 0, zero flag is not set.
(3) When N is 0, operation is not executed.

b7 b0
S1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0
S1+1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0
S1+2 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 b
b7
0
n D 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

S1+(N-2) 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0

S1+(N-1) 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1

2) Program example
If input signal P00000 is Off -> On, executes XOR operation for 5 byte data starting from P10000 and saves
result in P11000.

4-183
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.22.16 ABXNR, ABXNRP ○ X
Area Available Flag
Insturction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O - O - - - - O O - O - - -
ABXNR(P) D O - O - - - - O O - O - - - 5~7 O O -
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

COMMAND
ABXNR S D N
COMMAND
ABXNRP P S D N

means ABXNR

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data type
S Address of data to start ABXNR operation BYTE
D Address to save ABXNR operation result in BYTE
N Number of byte data to execute ABXNR WORD
[Flag set]
Flag Description Device number
Error If N value exceeds applicable device’s area. F110
Zero If operation result is zero. F111

1) ABXNR(Array Byte XNR)

(1) Executes XNR for S[0]~ S[n-1] byte data (8 bit) each other and save result in D.
(2) When N is 1, data of S[0] is copied and saved in D. Though data of S[0] is 0, zero flag is not set.
(3) When N is 0, operation is not executed.

b7 b0
S1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0
S1+1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0
S1+2 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 b
b7
0
n D 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

S1+(N-2) 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0

S1+(N-1) 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1

2) Program example
If input signal P00000 is Off -> On, executes XNR operation for 5 byte data starting from P10000 and saves
result in P11000.

4-184
-

Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.23 Display Instruction

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.23.1 SEG, SEGP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O O - O O - O - - O O O O O
SEG(P) D O - - O O - O - - - O O O O 4 O - -
Z O - - - - - O - - O O O O O

SEG S D Z

SEGP P S D Z

means SEG

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Address where data to decode in 7 segments is saved. BIN 32
D Address to save data decoded. BIN 32
Z Format to display BIN 16
[Flag Set]
Flag Description Device Number
Error To be set if Z’s format regulation is incorrect. F110

1) SEG( 7 Segments)
(1) It saves 7 segments of N digits decoded from S by Z’s specified format in D.

Z’s format (Hexadecimal)

(2) Where n means the number of digits to be converted in 4-bit unit.

(3) If n is 0, there will be no conversion.

b15 b0
S 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1

n = 1
n = 2

D 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1
b15 b0

4-185
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

2) Formation of Segments
S1 Formation of Data
Hexadecimal Bit 7 Segments b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 displayed
0 0000 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
1 0001 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
2 0010 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 2
3 0011 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 3
4 0100 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 4
5 0101 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 5
b0
6 0110 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 6
b5 b6 b1
7 0111 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 7
8 1000 b4 b2 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8
9 1001 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 9
b3
A 1010 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 A
B 1011 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 B
C 1100 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 C
D 1101 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 D
E 1110 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 E
F 1111 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 F

3) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On status, It displays for 4 digits that it is decoded from No.0 bit of
P1000 to No.0 of P1100 to 4 digits by 7 segments decoding format ‘h0004’ is saved in 2-word area of
P1100~P1101.

P00000
SEG P1000 P1100 h0004

4-186
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.24 Data Process Instruction

XGK XGB
4.24.1 BSUM, BSUMP, DBSUM, DBSUMP ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
BSUM(P) S O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
2~4 - O -
DBSUM(P) D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O

(D)BSUM S D

(D)BSUMP P S D

means BSUM
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Address of word data to count the number of 1s WORD/DWORD
D Address to save the counting result WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Zero To be set if operation result is Zero F111

1) BSUM (Bit Summary)

(1) It saves the result of the counted bit number of 1s among specified word data S1 in D in Hexadecimal.
(2)When operation result is 0, Zero Flag will be set.

2) DBSUM (Double Bit Summary)

(1)It saves the result of the counted bit number of 1s among specified double word data S1 in D in Hexadecimal.
(2) When operation result is 0, Zero Flag will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) In case of D1000=h3333, If Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On status, It saves 8 in D1100.

4-187
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.24.2 BRST, BRSTP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
D O - O - - - - O - - O - - -
BRST(P) 4~6 O - -
N O - O - - - O - - O O - O -

BRST D N

BRSTP P D N

means BRST
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
D Device Number to display Reset Start Position BIT
N Number of bits to Reset WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If N’s value is set to exceed specified D device’s maximum area. F110

1) BRST (Bit Reset)

(1) It turns N bits Off from specified D bit position.
(2) If N’s value is set to exceed specified bit contact point , the Error Flag will be On.
(3) If BRST instruction is used with Chapter 4.18.8 SR instruction, it can easily Reset the area of SR instruction
used.

2) Program Example
(1) If Input signal P00000 becomes On, It is Reset to 0 from 10-bit in P00103.

P00000
BRST P00103 10

4-188
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.24.3 ENCO, ENCOP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
ENCO(P) D O - O O O - O - - O O O O O 4~6 O O -
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

ENCO S D N

ENCOP P S D N

means ENCO
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Data or address to perform ENCO operation WORD
D Address to save operation result in WORD
N Available multipliers of bits to encode are 1 ~ 8 WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
If effective number of bits N is other than 0 ~ 8
Error F110
If effective number of bits starting from S exceeds device area
Zero If effective 2N data is Zero. F111

1) ENCO (Encode)
(1) It saves the result of the highest position of 1 made Hexadecimal among effective 2N data saved in S Device, in
specified device D.
(2) S if input with constant will be encoded in the input variable area although N’s value exceeds 4 (Searched
number of bits is 16).
(3) If N is 0, D will not be changed in details.
(4) It saves the result of the highest contact point position of 1 made Hexadecimal in 2N area, in D.

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
P0002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 P0001

25 bits

5 bits
b15 b8 b7 b0
P0012 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0

2) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=h4321 and P1200=h0004, If Input Signal is changed from Off to On status, h000E is saved in
P1100.

P00000
ENCOP P1000 P1100 P1200

4-189
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.24.4 DECO, DECOP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
DECO(P) D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O 4~6 O - -
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

DECO S D N

DECOP P S D N

means DECO
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Data address to perform DECO operation WORD
D Address to save operation result in WORD
N Available multipliers of bits to decode WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
If effective number of bits N is other than 0 ~ 8
Error N F110
Number of effective 2 which is started D is exceeds the device area

1) DECO (Decode)
(1) It decodes the lower N bits among saved data in specified S, and then the result saved in specified D device for 2N
bits. (8 bit is decoded to 256 bit)
(2) 1~8 is available for N.
(3) If N is 0, D will not be changed in details.

b15 b8 b7 b0
P0001 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0

N (5) bits

24th bit set

2 bits
5

P0013 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 P0012
b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0

2) Program Example
(1) In case of D1000=h1234 and D1200=h0005, If Input Signal is changed from Off to On status, It saves
D1101=h0010 and D1100=h0000.

4-190
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.24.5 DIS, DISP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O O O O O - O - - - O O O O
DIS(P) D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O 4~6 O - -
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

DIS S D N

DISP P S D N

means DIS
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Data address to perform DIS operation WORD
D Address to save operation result in WORD
N Number of 4-bit data to be saved in starting D WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
To be set if N exceeds 4.
Error F110
If number of N’s range from D exceeds specified device area

1) DIS (Distribute)
(1) It saves the result of specified S device’s data divided into N nibbles (4-bit) in specified device D starting, in
regular order for the number of N.
(2) If N=0, the instruction will not be executed.
(3) Starting from device D, D+1, … , the lower 1 nibble will be filled with divided data, and the upper bits left with 0s.
(4) If N exceeds 4, Error Flag will be set.

b15 b8 b7 b0
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
9
D+1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1
B
D+2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0
E
D+3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
8
8 E B 9
S 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1
b15 b8 b7 b0

2) Program Example
(1) In case of D1000=h1234 and D1200=h0003, If Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On status, It saves
D1100=h0004, D1101=h0003 and D1102=h0002.

4-191
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.24.6 UNI, UNIP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O O O O O - O - - - O O O O
UNI(P) D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O 4~6 O - -
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

UNI S D N

UNIP P S D N

means UNI
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Data address to perform UNI operation WORD
D Address to save operation result in WORD
N Number of 4-bit data to be united from S WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
If number of N’s range starting from S exceeds acceptable range of specified device, it
Error will be set. F110
To be set if N exceeds 4.

1) UNI (Unite)
(1) It saves the result of the united lower 4 bits in the N words starting from S, in word data D. At this moment the
upper 12 bit ignored.
(2) Each 4-bit data will be united from the lower in regular order and saved in word data D.
(3) Except the lower N 4-bit data in word data D, all will be 0.
(4) If N exceeds 4, Error Flag will be set.

b15 b8 b7 b0
S 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1

S+1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1

S+2 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1

S+3 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

D 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
b15 b8 b7 b0

2) Program Example
(1) In case of D1000=h0004, D1001=h003 ,D1002=h0002 and D1200=h0003, In Input Signal P00000 is changed
from Off to On status, It saves D1100=h0234.

4-192
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.24.7 WTOB, WTOBP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
WTOB(P) D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O 2~4 O - -
N O - - - - - O - - - O O O O

WTOB S D N

WTOBP P S D N

means WTOB
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S WORD data or Area Number where WORD data is saved WORD
D Start Number of area to save data converted to Byte WORD
N Number of converted Byte WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If S or D is exceeds specified device’s acceptable range. F110

1) WTOB
(1) It saves N bytes resulted from each word data divided into 2 bytes starting from S, in starting D. At this
time, the upper byte will be filled with 0s, and the lower byte with byte value divided.
(2) In case N=0, instruction is not executed
b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S Upper byte Lower byte D h00 Lower byte data
S+1 Upper byte Lower byte D+1 h00 Upper byte data
D+2 h00 Lower byte data
Upper byte Lower byte D+3 h00 Upper byte data N
byte

D+(N-2) h00 Lower byte data

D+(N-1) h00 Upper byte data

(2) If N=0, the instruction will not be executed.

2) Program Example
(1) In case of D01000=h1234, D01001=h5678,D01200=h0003, If Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On,
It saves D01100=h0034, D01101=h0012 and D01102=h0078.

P00000
WTOBP D01000 D01100 D01200

4-193
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.24.8 BTOW, BTOWP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O O O O O - - - - O O O O O
BTOW(P) D O - O O O - - - - - O O O O 2~4 O - -
N O - O O O - - - - - O O O O

BTOW S D N

BTOWP P S D N

means BTOW
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Byte data or Area Number where Byte data is saved WORD
D Area to save data converted to WORD WORD
N Number of bytes to unite. WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If S or D is exceeded specified device’s acceptable range F110

1) BTOW
(1) It saves the result of the lower N byte data united with word data starting from S, in starting D. At this time,
if N is an odd number, the upper of device saved last will be filled with 0s.
(2) If N=0, the instruction will not be executed.

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
st nd st
S 1 byte data D 2 byte data 1 byte data
nd th rd
S+1 2 byte data D+1 4 byte data 3 byte data
rd
S+2 3 byte data
N bytes th
S+3 4 byte data Nth byte data n-1th byte data

S+(N-1) Nth byte data

Upper byte will be disregarded.

2) Program Example
(1) In case of D1000=h0012, D1001=h0034 and D1200=h0003, In Input Signal is changed from Off to On status, It
saves D1100=h3412 and D1101=h0045.

4-194
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.24.9 IORF, IORFP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
IORF(P) S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O 4~6 O - -
S3 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O

IORF IORF S1 S3 S3

IORFP IORFP S1 S2 S3

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Position (base + slot) I/O module to process immediately. WORD
S2 Upper 32-bit data or Device Number to mask DWORD
S3 Lower 32-bit data or Device Number to mask DWORD

1) IORF (I/O Refresh)

(1) It performs AND process between specified S1’s I/O module value and mask value input in S2/S3 immediately to
process the data.
(2) It performs mask process as based on I/O points positioned in S1 specified. For example, if the module to refresh
I/O is 16 points, mask data of lower 16 bits only needs to be input.
(3) IORF will be used when the newest input information is needed during PLC operation, or operation result is at
once to be output.
(4) If I/O module is not installed at specified module position, or different module is installed, there will be no
operation.

2) Program Example
(1) ‘01’ means No.1 slot of No.0 base. If I/O Fixed allocation is specified, applicable module address is
P00040~P0007F in 64 points Input module.
(2) In case of D1000=h00FF and D1100=hFF00, if Input signal is changed from Off to On,
P0004 is not refresh the input data since D1100’s the lower 8 bits is h00.
P0005 is refresh the input data since D1100’s the upper 8 bits is hFF.
P0006 is refresh the input data since D1000’s the lower 8 bits is hFF.
P0007 is not refresh the input data since D1000’s the upper 8 bits is h00.

Remark

(1) In case of using hybrid module, S2 value is the output mask data, S3 value is the input mask data. If it refreshes
hybrid module with 16 points input and 16 points output, S3's data becomes the mask data of the input part, S2's
data becomes the mask data of the output part.

4-195
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.24.10 SCH, SCHP, DSCH, DSCHP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
SCH(P) S2 O - O O O - O - - - O O O O
4~7 O O -
DSCH(P) D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

(D)SCH S1 S2 D N

(D)SCHP P S1 S2 D N

means (D)SCH
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data or address to searches for WORD/DWORD
S2 Start address of the area to searches for WORD/DWORD
D Address to save the position and number identical WORD
N Searching range of SCH operation WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error To be set if N exceeds applicable S1 device’s range F110
Zero To be set if no data is found identical. F111

1) SCH (Word Search)

(1) It searches N word data in S2 for the value identical to word data S1 in regular order.
(2) It saves the first value’s address in D, the total of the value identical to S1 in D + 1.
(3) If there is no value found, Zero Flag will be set.
(4) If N=0, the instruction will not be executed.

Data to search Head No. of object to search

S1 123 123
S2 10
S2+1 500 Identical data Searching progress
S2+2 123 D Position identical
Searching range(N)
-123 D+1 Number identical
S2+(N-2) 20
S2+(N-1) 123
123

(5) As its result, specified D, D+1 device will be “0” if no identical data is found.

4-196
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

2) DSCH (Double Word Search)

(1) It searches specified S2 device for N points (WORD 2N points) in 32-bit unit with specified S1+1,S1 device’s 32-
bit data used as a key word.
(2) It saves the number identical to the key word in D+1, the position of the first identical data in specified device D.

Data to search Head No. of object to search

S1+1,S 5678901 123
S2+1,S2 10
S2+3,S2+2 500 Data identical Searching progress
S2+5,S2+4 123 Searching range D Position identical
(N) D+1 Number identical
-123
S2+(N-3),S2+(N-4) 20
S2+(N-1),S2+(N-2) 123
123

(3) If N is 0, there will be no search and no change in result data.

(4) As its result, specified D, D+1 device will be “0” if no identical data is found.

3) Program Example
(1) It searches in number of D01300 word data in D01100 for the value identical to word data D01000 in regular order.
(2) It saves the firest vlaue’s address in D, the total of the value identical to D01000 in D01201.
(3) In case of D01000=h1234, D01100=h1111, D01101=h2222, D01102=h1234, D01103=h1234, D01104=h3333, If
D01300=h0006, D01200=h0003 is for the position D01102 first united data. And D01202=h0002 is saved for 2
united number.

P00000
SCHP D01000 D01100 D01200 D01300

4-197
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.24.11 MAX, MAXP, DMAX, DMAXP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O O O O O - O - - - O O O O
MAX(P)
D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O 4~6 O O -
DMAX(P)
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

(D)MAX S D N

(D)MAXP P S D N

means (D)MAX
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Data address to start MAX operation INT/DINT
D Address to save operation result. INT/DINT
N Number of words to execute MAX operation starting from S WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error To be set if N exceeds applicable device’s range. F110
Zero To be set if operation result is 0. F111

1) MAX (Maximum)
(1) It searches from word data S up to N range for the maximum value to save in D.
(2) Comparison in size will be performed by signed operation.
(3) If operation result is Zero, Zero Flag will be set.
(4) If N=0, the instruction will not be executed.

Head No. of object to search

S 123
S+1 10
S+2 500 Maximum value
S+3 123 Searching range D 500
(n )
S + (n-4) -123
S + (n-3) 20
S + (n-2) 123
S + (n-1) 123

4-198
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

2) DMAX (Double Maximum)

(1) It searches from double word data S up to N range for the maximum value to save in D.
(2) Comparison in size will be performed by signed operation.
(3) If operation result is Zero, Zero Flag will be set.
(4) If N=0, the instruction will not be executed.

Head No. of object to search

S -12345
S+2 25894
S+4 256 Maximum value
S+6 588479 Searching range D 26594823
(n )
S + (2n-8) 26594823
S + (2n-6) 145
S + (2n-4) -258
S + (2n-2) -365412

3) Program Example
(1) In case of D01000=1111, D01001=3333, D01002=2222, If Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On
status, It saves D01100=3333.

P00000
MAXP D01000 D01100 D01200

4-199
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.24.12 MIN, MINP, DMIN, DMINP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O O O O O - O - - - O O O O
MIN(P)
D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O 4~6 O O -
DMIN(P)
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

(D)MIN S D N

(D)MINP P S D N

means (D)MIN
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Data address to start MIN operation INT/DINT
D Address to save operation result. INT/DINT
N Number of words to execute MIN operation starting from S WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error To be set if N exceeds applicable device’s range F110
Zero To be set if operation result is 0 F111

1) MIN (Minimum)
(1) It searches from word data S up to N range for the minimum value to save in D.
(2) Comparison in size will be performed by signed operation.
(3) If operation result is Zero, Zero Flag will be set.
(4) If N=0, the instruction will not be executed.

Head No. of object to search

S 123
S+1 10
S+2 500 Minimum value
S+3 123 Searching range D -123
(n )
S + (n-4) -123
S + (n-3) 20
S + (n-2) 123
S + (n-1) 123

4-200
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

2) DMIN (Double Minimum)

(1) It searches from double word data S up to N range for the minimum value to save in D.
(2) Comparison in size will be performed by signed operation.
(3) If operation result is Zero, Zero Flag will be set.
(4) If N=0, the instruction will not be executed.

Head No. of object to search

S -12345
S+2 25894
S+4 256 Minimum value
S+6 588479 Searching range D -365412
(n )
S + (2n-8) 26594823
S + (2n-6) 145
S + (2n-4) -258
S + (2n-2) -365412

3) Program Example
(1) In case of D01000=1111, D01001=3333, D01002=2222, D01200=h0003, If Input Signal P00000 is changed from
Off to On status, It saves D01100=1111.

P00000
MINP D01000 D01100 D01200

4-201
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.24.13 SUM, SUMP, DSUM, DSUMP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O O O O O - O - - - O O O O
SUM(P)
D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O 4~6 O O O
DSUM(P)
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

(D)SUM S D N

(D)SUMP P S D N

means (D)SUM
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Data address to start SUM operation INT/DINT
D Address to save operation result. INT/DINT
N Number of words to execute SUM operation starting from S WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error To be set if N exceeds applicable device’s range, or overflow occurs during operation. F110
Zero To be set if operation result is 0. F111
Carry To be set if overflow occurs during operation. F112

1) SUM (Word Summary)

(1) It saves the result of the sum up to N data starting from word data S in D.
(2) Sum will be performed by Signed operation.
(3) If operation result is Zero, Zero Flag will be set.
(4) If overflow occurs during operation, Carry Flag and Error Flag will be set.
(5) The operated value will be saved in result despite the overflow. Thus, Carry Flag should be checked since
unintentional value could be saved in result.
(6) If N=0, the instruction will not be executed.

Address to start operation

S 123
S+1 10
S+2 500 Sum
S+3 123 D 899
n
S + (n-4) -123
S + (n-3) 20
S + (n-2) 123
S + (n-1) 123

4-202
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

2) DSUM (Double Word Summary)

(1) It saves the result of the sum up to N data starting from double word data S in D.
(2) Sum will be performed by signed operation.
(3) If operation result is Zero, Zero Flag will be set.
(4) If overflow occurs during operation, Carry Flag and Error Flag will be set.
(5) The operated value will be saved in result despite the overflow. Thus, Carry Flag should be checked since
unintentional value could be saved in result.
(6) If N=0, the instruction will not be executed.

Address to start operation

S -12345
S+2 25894
S+4 256 Sum
S+6 588479 D 26831591
n
S + (2n-8) 26594823
S + (2n-6) 145
S + (2n-4) -258
S + (2n-2) -365412

3) Program Example
(1) In case of Dp1000=h1111, D01001=h3333, D01002=h2222, D01200=h0003, If Input Signal P00000 is changed
from Off to On status, it saves D01100=h6666.

P00000
SUMP D01000 D01100 D01200

4-203
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.24.14 AVE, AVEP, DAVE, DAVEP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O O O O O - O - - - O O O O
AVE(P)
D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O 4~6 O O -
DAVE(P)
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

(D)AVE S D N

(D)AVEP P S D N

means AVE
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Data address to start AVE operation INT/DINT
D Address to save AVE operation result INT/DINT
N Number of words to execute AVE operation starting from S INT/DINT
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error To be set if N exceeds applicable device’s range F110
Zero To be set if operation result is 0 F111

1) AVE (Word Average)

(1) It saves the average resulted from the sum up to N word data starting from S divided by N in D.
(2) Value to be saved in word data D is of INT.
(3) If operation result is Zero, Zero Flag will be set.
(4) The decimals will be omitted if the sum of N data is not exactly divided by N.

Address to start operation

S 123
S+1 10
S+2 500 Average
S+3 123 D 112
n
S + (n-4) -123
S + (n-3) 20
S + (n-2) 123
S + (n-1) 123

4-204
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

2) DAVE (Double Word Average)

(1) It saves the average resulted from the sum up to N double word data starting from S divided by N in D.
(2) Value to be saved in double word data D is of DINT.
(3) If operation result is Zero, Zero Flag will be set.
(4) The decimals will be omitted if the sum of N data is not exactly divided by N.

Address to start operation

S -12345
S+2 25894
S+4 256 Average
S+6 588479 D 3353948
n
S + (2n-8) 26594823
S + (2n-6) 145
S + (2n-4) -258
S + (2n-2) -365412

3) Program Example
(1) In case of D01000=1111, D01001=3333, D01002=2222, D01200=h0003, If Input Signal is changed from Off to
On status, it saves D01100=2222.

P00000
AVEP D01000 D01100 D01200

4-205
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.24.15 MUX, MUXP, DMUX, DMUXP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - - O O O O
MUX(P) S2 O O O O O - O - - - O O O O
4~7 O - -
DMUX(P) D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

(D)MUX S1 S2 D N

(D)MUXP P S1 S2 D N

means (D)MUX
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Position to select (0~N-1) WORD/DWORD
S2 Head position of data to select WORD/DWORD
D Area where selected value will be saved WORD/DWORD
N Range of data to select WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
If N exceeds applicable device’s range
Error F110
Position to select data exceeds searching range.

1) MUX
(1) It transfers data applicable to S1st among N word data from S2 to D.
Position to select
S1 4 S2 70
S2+1 35
S2+2 5
S2+3
357
D 357
10
S2+(N-2) 53
S2+(N-1) 20
77

2) DMUX
(1) It transfers data applicable to No.S1 among N double word data from S2 to D.

3) Program Example
(1) In case of D01100=h1111, D01101=h3333, D01102=h2222, D01000=h0001, D01300=h0003, If Input Signal
P00000 is changed from Off to On, it saves D01200=h3333.

P00000
MUXP D01000 D01100 D01200 D01300

4-206
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.24.16 DETECT, DETECTP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O O O O O - O - - - O O O O
S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
DETECT(P) 4~6 O O -
D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

DETECT S1 S2 D N

DETECTP P S1 S2 D N

means DETECT
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Start position of data to detect WORD
S2 Allowance WORD
D 1st changed position & the number searched WORD
N Range WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If N exceeds applicable device’s range F110
Zero To be set if no data exceeds the allowance specified in searching result S2. F111

1) DETECT
(1) It saves the position of the 1st value out of allowance in D if the value is larger than allowance (S1) among N data
from S1 (signed operation, searching unavailable if identical to allowance), and the sum of the number of the data
larger than S1 in D+1.
(2) If N=0, the instruction will not be executed.

Data to search Head No. of object to search

S2 357 35
S1 70
Data searched
S1+1 500 Searching progress
S1+2 356 D Position exceeded (3)
Searching range (N)
Number of data
-357 D+1 searched (3)
S1+(N-2) 358
S1+(N-1) 357
487

2) Program Example
(1) In case of D01000=h1111, D01001=h3333,D01002=h2222, D01100=h3000, D01300=h0003, If Input Signal is
P00000 is changed from Off to On status, it saves D01200=h3333, D01201=h0001.

P00000
DETECTP D01000 D01100 D01200 D01300

4-207
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.24.17 RAMP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
N1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
N2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
RAMP D1 O - O - - - - - - - - O O O 4~7 - - -
N3 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
D2 O - O - - - - - - - - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
N1 Initial value WORD
N2 Final value WORD
D1 Present value WORD
N3 Number of execution (the number of scan) WORD
D2 Instruction completed address (1: complete, 0: in progress or in Off state) WORD

1) RAMP
(1) It saves the value changed from the initial to the final value in the straight line during specified N3
number of scans in D1, and the number of times of scans executed presently in D1+1.
(2) If the instruction is completed, D2 value is made 1. (D2’s No.0 bit device set)
(3) It saves the value changed from specified N1 value to N2 value in the straight line during specified N3 number of
scans executed in D1. And the value saved in D1 should be operated per scan as follows;

{(Specified N2 value) - (Specified N1 value)}

X (Times executed)
(Times executed)

Value changed per scan

(4) The case that section of 0 ~ 350 is changed for 7 scans is as shown below;

350
300
Value saved in D1 250
200
Specified N1 value (0) 150 Specified
100 N2 value (350)
50

Times executed (7)

(5) If the changed value operated per scan is not divided by an integer, let it corrected be specified N2
value from specified N3 number of times executed, which may make straight slope unavailable.
(6) It specifies the number of times of scans in N3 till executed from N1 to N2. If N3=0, there will be no operation.
(7) D1+1 used by system saves the times of executed instruction. Thus, an undesirable result may be caused if it is
modified arbitrarily by user.
(8) If the instruction is completed up to the final value, specified D2 device completed is 1.
(9) Though the instruction is Off while the instruction is executed, details of D1 (present value) are not changed. If
the instruction is back On, RAMP instruction restarts the work.
(10) Set 1 to completed device to cancel the RAMP instruction in the middle.
(11) Turn the instruction Off Æ On to restart completed RAMP instruction after initialized.
(12) Do not change specified N1 and N2 value before specified D2+0 device completed is On. Since value to be
saved in D1+1 is operated with the identical formula per scan, the change of N1 or N2 will cause sudden effect.

4-208
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

2) Program Example
(1) In case of D01000=1000, D01100=2000, D01300=100, If Input Signal is changed from Off to On status,
D01200 is increased by 10 per 1 scan and number of times of scans is saved in D01201.
(2) If the 100 scans is completed, D01400’s No.0 bit will be set.

P00000
RAMP D01000 D01100 D01200 D01300 D01400

Caution

(1) Be careful of using indirect designation (#) or index ([Z]) because the RAMP instruction has internal
processing parts without contact point ON.
For example, an error occurs without contact point ON if you use M100[Z10] for one of the RAMP instruction
operands and if Z10’s value exceeds 1947 that can be outside the M area.

4-209
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.24.18 SORT, DSORT
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O O O O O - O - - - O O O O
N1 O - O O O - O - - O O O O O
(D)SORT N2 O - O O O - O - - O O O O O 4~7 O - -
D1 O - O - - - O - - - O O O O
D2 O - O - - - O - - - - O O O

(D)SORT S N1 N2 D1 D2

means (D)SORT
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Start position of data to align WORD/DWORD
N1 Aligning range & order (in ascending/descending order) WORD
N2 Execution range per time (< Aligning range) WORD
D1 Instruction completed address (1: complete, 0: in progress or in Off state) WORD
D2 Auxiliary area WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
If N1’s value exceeds applicable area
Error F110
If specified N1+1 aligning order is other than 0 or 1

1) SORT

(1) It sorts (aligns) N1-point Binary 16-bit data from S1 in ascending(0)/descending(1) order based on N1+1 value.

-124
Data before sorted
-10
35 0 Sorted in ascending order
35
-10 500
500
-124 500
1
35
Sorted in descending order
-10
N1
-124
4 N1+0
0 N1+1

(2) Sorting by SORT instruction needs several scans. Scan times till instruction completed is the value divided by the
number of data compared with the maxiumum execution times in specified N2’s 1 time execution (decimals will be
omitted). The larger N2’s value is, the fewer the number of scans is and the longer scanning time is.
(3) If N2=0, the instruction will not be executed.
(4) Maximum execution times till sorting is completed shall be operated as follow;
Maximum execution times till completed = (N1) * (N1 -1) ÷ 2 ÷ N2 [times] For example, if N1=10 and N2=1, 10 *
(10-1) ÷ 2 ÷ 1=45(times). At this moment, if N2=2, 45 ÷ 2 = 22.5 → 23 [scans] will be taken to complete sorting.
(5) Specified D1 device (completed device) saves 1 if SORT Instruction completed. After sorted, turn input contact
point (Instruction) OFF to make specified D1 device’s value 0.
(6) In specified D2 device, 2-point (SORT)/4-point (DSORT) is used by system when the instruction is executed. User
shall not change 2-point (SORT)/4-point (DSORT) in specified D2 device.
(7) If N has been changed while being sorted, let it sorted with the number of sorted data after changed.

4-210
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

2) Program Example

P00000
SORT P1000 P1100 P1200 P1300 P1400

Caution

(1) Be careful of using indirect designation (#) or index ([Z]) because the SORT/DSORT instruction has internal
processing parts without contact point ON.
For example, an error occurs without contact point ON if you use M100[Z10] for one of the SORT instruction
operands and if Z10’s value exceeds 1947 that can be outside the M area.

4-211
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.25 Data Table Process Instruction

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.25.1 FIWR, FIWRP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
FIWR(P) 2~4 O - -
D O - O - - - - - - - - O O O

FIWR S D

FIWRP P S D

means FIWR
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Data to input WORD
D Start position of table WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If data table’s range after data is added exceeds applicable device’s range F110

1) Structure of File Table

Table process instruction will be normally executed with the following table format.

Number of data(N) Specified device No.

st
1 data
2nd data
.....

Nth data
0

(1) Table size depends on how to operate. In data table process related instructions, data table size is decided
through the number of data saved in the device designated as start position of table. Thus, the table needs to be
initialized before used. If table size exceeds applicable device’s range, error will occur. All the table process
instructions attach ‘0’ to the end of the table. However, how to identify the end of the table depends on the
number of data only specified in table start address.
(2) All the data in the table will be identified in WORD format. If you want to save INT or BYTE type of data in the
table, device’s data type shall be changed through MOVE Instruction, etc. In addition, Insert and Delete operation
shall be repeatedly used to save DWORD data. Data table size is unlimited. However, since the table can’t
exceed device area, its maximum size is the value resulted from device’s size (where table is located) minus
table start address .
(3) All the table related instructions can change the number of data, whose error can not be detected, though. That is
to say, even if user has changed the number of data abitrarily, table process instruction not knowing this takes it
for normal. Consequently, the user is recommended previously to secure table area and table size and inspect
the area before using the table instruction.

4-212
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

2) FIWR( File Write)

(1) It saves specified data S in specified data table D. At this moment, the data is saved in present number of data + 1
word position from the specified position D.

3) Program Example
(1) In case P1000=3333, P1100=2, P1101=1111, P1102=2222, if input signal P00000 is off->on, 3333 is
added at the end of table and the no. of table increase as 1, P1100=3, P1103=3333 is saved.

P00000
FIWRP P1000 P1100

4-213
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.25.2 FIFRD, FIFRDP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
FIFRD(P) 2~4 O 0 -
D O - O - - - - - - - - O O O

FIFRD S D

FIFRDP P S D

means FIFRD
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Start position of data table WORD
D Position to save in the value read from data table WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If data table’s range exceeds applicable device’s range F110
Zero If no data is available in data table F111

1) FIFRD (First File Read)

(1) It reads the 1st data from specified data table S to D. The number of data in table decreases by 1, and the other
data is all moved to the device position with a decrease of 1.
(2) The specified S is number of effective data in data table.
(3) If number of data is decreased by 1, the value is filled by 0 in data table size +1.
(4) If the number of data is 0, 0 is saved at D, zero flag is set

Executed S 2
S 3
S+1 1234 S+1 2345
S+2 2345 S+2 3456
S+3 . 3456 S+3 0
.
. 0 .
0
. .
. .
0
D 1234

2) Program Example

(1) In case P1000=3, P1001=1111, P1002=2222, P1003=3333, if input signal P00000 is Off ->On, 1111, first data of
data table, is saved P1100, and data table decrease as 1, P1000=2, P1001=2222, P1002=3333, P1003=0 is
saved.

P00000
FIFRDP P1000 P1100

4-214
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.25.3 FILRD, FILRDP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
FILRD(P) 2~4 O O -
D O - O - - - - - - - - O O O

FILRD S D

FILRDP P S D

means FILRD
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Start position of data table WORD
D Position to save in the value read from data table WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If data table’s range exceeds applicable device’s range F110
Zero If no data is available in data table F111

1) FILRD (Last File Read)

(1) It reads the last data from specified data table S to D. The number of data in table decreases by 1, and the other
data is the same as before.
(2) The specified S is number of effective data in data table.
(3) If number of data is decreased by 1, the value is filled by 0 in data table size +1.

2) Program Example
(1) In case P1000=3, P1001=1111, P1002=2222, P1003=3333, if input signal P00000 is Off->On, 3333, the last
data of data table, is saved at P1100, data table is decreased as 1, P1000=2, P1003=0 is saved.

P00000
FILRDP P1000 P1100

4-215
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.25.4 FIINS, FIINSP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
FIINS(P) D O - O - - - - - - - - O O O 4~6 O - -
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

FIINS S D N

FIINSP P S D N

means FIINS
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Data value to input WORD
D Start position of data table WORD
N Position to save the input value in WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
If data table’s range exceeds applicable device’s range.
Error F110
If N value is larger than the present data size (speicified D) + 1

1) FIINS (File Insert)

(1) It inserts specified value S in the Nth position of specified data table D. The data from the original Nth will be
pushed out to the next device number.
(2) The value of specified D is number of effective data in data table.
(3) If N=0, the instruction will not be executed.
(4) If data is inserted in data table, the value in data table+1 is removed.

D 3 Executed D 4
D+1 1111 D+1 1111
D+2 2222 D+2 -1111
D+3 3333 D+3 2222
.
. 0 D+4 3333
.
. .
. 0 . 0

If N=2, the value S is inserted in D+2.

S -1111

2) Program Example
(1) In case P1000=1234, P1100=3, P1101=1111, P1102=2222, P1103=3333, P1200=3, if input signal P00000 is
Off->On, 1234 is inserted at the third position of data table, P1103=1234, P1104=3333 is saved and P1100,
effective number within data table, is increased as1 and become 4.

P00000
FIINSP P1000 P1100 P1200

4-216
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.25.5 FIDEL, FIDELP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
FIDEL(P) D O - O - - - - - - - - O O O 4~6 O - -
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

FIDEL S D N

FIDELP P S D N

means FIDEL
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Start position of data table WORD
D Data value deleted WORD
N Position of data to delete WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
If data table’s range exceeds applicable device’s range.
Error F110
If position of data to delete exceeds table data size.

1) FIDEL( File Delete)

(1) It moves the Nth data of specified data table S to D. The data from the Nth will be pulled to the position where 1 is
decreased from the original position.
(2) The value of specified D is number of effective data in data table.
(3) If N=0, the instruction will not be executed.
(4) If data is removed in table, the value is filled by 0 in data table size +1

S 4 Executed S 3
S+1 1111 S+1 1111
S+2 -1111 S+2 -1111
S+3 2222 S+3 3333
S+4 3333 . 0
.
. 0
.
. 0
.
. 0
D 2222

If N=3, the value of S+3 position is moved to D.

2) Program Example
(1) In case P1000=4, P1001=1111, P1002=2222, P1003=3333, P1004=4444, P1200=1, if input signal P00000 is
Off -> On, 1111, the first data of data table, is saved at P1100, and P1000, effective number in the data table, is
decreased as 1, and become 3, and P1001=2222, P1002=3333, P1003=4444, P1004=0.

P00000
FIDELP P1000 P1100 P1200

4-217
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.26 String Process Instruction

XGK XGB
4.26.1 BINDA, BINDAP, DBINDA, DBINDAP ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
BINDA(P) S O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
2~4 O - -
DBINDA(P) D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O

(D)BINDA S D

(D)BINDAP P S D

means BINDA
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Data or address to convert to ASCII INT/DINT
D Address to save operation result in STRING

1) BINDA (Binary to Decimal ASCII)

(1) It converts each digit to ASCII from the upper in regular order when input Binary 16-bit data is made in Decimal.
(2) The value converted to ASCII will be saved in starting D by 2 digits per word in regular order.
(3) If S is a negative number, sign value of –(h2D) will be first output to the first byte of D.
(4) Data S will be regarded as signed.
(5) In BINDA, its operation range is –32768(hFFFF) ~ 32767(h7FFF).

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S 0 D 10,000-digit ASCII code Sign
D+1 100-digit ASCII code 1,000-digit ASCII code
16-bit Binary data D+2 1-digit ASCII code 10-digit ASCII code
D+3 0

(6) For example, if –12345 is specified in S, the result after D will be saved as below;

b15 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S - 1 2 3 4 5 D h31 (1) h2D (-)
D+1 h33 (3) h32 (2)
D+2 h35 (5) h34 (4)
D+3 h00

b15 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S 2 3 4 5 D h33 (3) h32 (2)
D+1 h35 (5) h34 (4)
D+2 h00

4-218
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

2) DBINDA (Binary to Decimal ASCII)

(1) It converts each digit to ASCII from the upper in regular order when input binary 32-bit data is made in decimal.
(2) The value converted to ASCII will be saved in starting D by 2 digits per word in regular order.
(3) If S is a negative number, sign value of “–“ will be first output to the first byte of D. Data S will be regarded as
signed.
(4) In DBINDA, its operation range is –2147483648(hFFFFFFFF) ~ 2147483647(h7FFFFFFF).

b15 b8 b7 b0
D 1000000000-digit ASCII code Sign data

S+1 S D+1 10000000-digit ASCII code 100000000-digit ASCII code

Upper 16-bit Lower 16-bit 100000-digit ASCII code 1000000-digit ASCII code
D+2
D+3 1000-digit ASCII code 10000-digit ASCII code
32-bit Binary data
D+4 10-digit ASCII code 100-digit ASCII code

D+5 0 1-digit ASCII code

3) Program Example

P00000
BINDAP P1000 P1100

4-219
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.26.2 BINHA, BINHAP, DBINHA, DBINHAP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
BINHA(P) S O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
2~4 O - -
DBINHA(P) D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O

(D)BINHA S D

(D)BINHAP P S D

means BINHA
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Data or address to convert to ASCII WORD/DWORD
D Address to save operation result in BIN 32
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error To be set if specified area #D is exceeded F110

1) BINHA (Binary to Hex ASCII)

(1) It converts each digit to ASCII from the upper in regular order when input binary 16-bit data is made in
Hexadecimal.
(2) The value converted to ASCII will be saved in starting D by 2 digits per word in regular order.
(3) In BINHA, its operation range is h0000 ~ hFFFF.

b15 b8 b7
b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
rd th
S D 3 -digit ASCII code 4 -digit ASCII code
st nd
D+1 1 -digit ASCII code 2 digit ASCII code
16-bit Binary data D+2 0

(4) For example, if 02A6H is specified in S, the result after will be saved as below;

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S 02A6H D h32 (2) h30 (0)
D+1 h36 (6) h41 (A)
D+2 h00

4-220
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

2) DBINHA (Binary to Hex ASCII)

(1) It converts each digit to ASCII from the upper in regular order when input binary 32-bit data is made in
Hexadecimal.
(2) The value converted to ASCII will be saved in starting D by 2 digits per word in regular order.
(3) In DBINHA, its operation range is h00000000 ~ hFFFFFFFF.

b15 b8 b7 b0
th th
D 7 -digit ASCII code 8 -digit ASCII code
th th
D+1 5 -digit ASCII code 6 -digit ASCII code
rd th
S+1 S D+2 3 -digit ASCII code 4 -digit ASCII code
Upper 16-bit Lower 16-bit D+3
st
1 -digit ASCII code
nd
2 digit ASCII code
D+4 00H
32-bit BIN data

3) Program Example

P00000
BINHAP P1000 P1100

4-221
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.26.3 BCDDA, BCDDAP, DBCDDA, DBCDDAP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
BCDDA(P) S O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
2~4 O - -
DBCDDA(P) D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O

(D)BCDDA S D

(D)BCDDAP P S D

means BCDDA
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S BCD data or address to convert to ASCII BCD
D Address to save operation result in STRING
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If input BCD data exceeds operation range F110

1) BCDDA (BCD to Decimal ASCII)

(1) It converts each digit to ASCII from the upper in regular order when input binary data is made in decimal.
(2) The value converted to ASCII will be saved in starting D by 2 digits per word in regular order.
(3) In BCDDA, its operation range is h0000 ~ h9999. Error shall be set if any value exceeds BCD data range.

b15 b12b11 b 8b 7 b 4b 3 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0

S D 100-digit ASCII code 1000-digit ASCII code
D+1 1-digit ASCII code 10-digit ASCII code
1000-digit 100-digit 10-digit 1-digit D+2 0
Only if Off

(4) For example, h9105 is specified in S, the result after D will be saved as below.

b15 b12 b11 b8b7 b4b3 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0

S 9 1 0 5 D h31 (1) h39 (9)
D+1 h35 (5) h30 (0)
D+2 h00

4-222
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

2) DBCDDA (BCD to Decimal ASCII)

(1) It converts each digit to ASCII from the upper in regular order when input binary data is made in decimal.
(2) The value converted to ASCII will be saved in starting D by 2 digits per word in regular order.
(3) In DBCDDA, its operation range is h00000000 ~ h99999999.

b15 b8 b7 b0
D 1000000-digit ASCII code 10000000-digit ASCII code
S+1 S
b31
D+1 10000-digit ASCII code 100000-digit ASCII code
b16 b15 b0
D+2 100-digit ASCII code 1000-digit ASCII code
D+3 1-digit ASCII code 10-digit ASCII code
10,000 digits 1 digit 0
100,000 digits 10 digits
1,000,000 digits 100 digits
10,000,000 digits 1,000 digit

3) Program Example

P00000
BCDDAP P1000 P1100

4-223
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.26.4 DABIN, DABINP, DDABIN, DDABINP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
DABIN(P) S O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
2~4 O - -
DDABIN(P) D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O

(D)DABIN S D

(D)DABINP P S D

means DABIN
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Address where decimal ASCII data to convert to binary is saved STRING
D Address to save operation result in INT/DINT
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
To be set if input ASCII data exceeds operation range
Error To be set if input ASCII string length exceeds the maximum string length(31) F110
To be set if other string than sign and 0~9 is in input ASCII string

1) DABIN (Decimal ASCII to Binary)

(1) It converts decimal value saved in ASCII to binary and saves in D.
(2) NULL is surely at the end of ASCII string.
(3) The lower byte of the 1st word in input ASCII value decides the sign of binary value.
(4) Sign will be of –(h2D) or +(h2B).
(5) Sign +(h2B) can be omitted.
(6) Data D will be saved as signed.
(7) In DABIN, its operation range is –32768(h8000) ~ 32767(h7FFF).
(8) ASCII string available to input is the value in ASCII applicable to Sign and 0~9. If any other value than
those is input, Error will be set.

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b0
S 10000-digit ASCII code Sign data D
S+1 100-digit ASCII code 1000-digit ASCII code
1-digit ASCII code 10-digit ASCII code Binary16-bit data
End of string (Null)

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b0
S h32 (2) h2D (D) D - 2 5 1 0 8
S+1 h31 (1) h35 (5)
S+2 h38 (8) h30 (0)
h00 (NULL)

4-224
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

2) DDABIN (Double Decimal ASCII to Binary)

(1) It converts decimal value saved in ASCII to binary and saves in D.
(2) NULL is surely at the end of ASCII string.
(3) The lower byte of the 1st word in input ASCII value decides the sign of binary value.
(4) Sign will be of –(h2D) or +(h2B).
(5) Sign +(h2B) can be omitted.
(6) Data D will be saved as signed.
(7) In DDABIN, its operation range is –2147483648(h80000000) ~ 2147483647(h7FFFFFFF).
ASCII string available to input is the value in ASCII applicable to Sign and 0~9. If any other value than
those is input, Error will be set.

b15 b8 b7 b0
S 1000000000-digit ASCII code Sign data

S+1 10000000-digit ASCII code 100000000-digit ASCII code D+1 D

1000000-digit ASCII code b31 b16 b15 b0
S+2 100000-digit ASCII code
Upper 16-bit Lower 16-bit
S+3 1000-digit ASCII code 10000-digit ASCII code

S+4 10-digit ASCII code 100-digit ASCII code 32-bit BIN data
S+5 End of string 1-digit ASCII code

3) Program Example

P00000
DABINP P1000 P1100

4-225
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.26.5 HABIN, HABINP, DHABIN, DHABINP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
HABIN(P) S O O O O - O - - O O O O O O
2~4 O - -
DHABIN(P) D O - O O - O - - - O O O O O

(D)HABIN S D

(D)HABINP P S D

means HABIN
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Address where Hexadecimal ASCII data to convert to binary is saved STRING
D Address to save operation result in WORD/DWORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
To be set if string length exceeds the maximum string length.
Error To be set if input data exceeds operation range F110
To be set if other string than 0~F is in string

1) HABIN (Hex ASCII to Binary)

(1) It converts Hexadecimal value saved in ASCII to binary and saves in D.
(2) The end of ASCII string can be identified with NULL.
(3) In HABIN, its operation range is h0000 ~ hFFFF.
(4) ASCII string available is the value applicable to 0~F. If any other value than those is input, Error will be
Set.
(5) As the first character displaying Hex,‘h’or H’is allowed.

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S 3rd-digit ASCII code 4th-digit ASCII code D
S+1 1st-digit ASCII code 2nd-digit ASCII code

S+2 End of string (Null) Binary16-bit data

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S h41 (A) h35 (5) D 5A8DH
S+1 h44 (D) h38 (8)
S+2 h00 (NULL)

2) DHABIN (Hex ASCII to Binary)

(1) It converts Hexadecimal value saved in ASCII to binary and saves in D.
(2) The end of ASCII string can be identified with NULL.
(3) ASCII string available is the value applicable to 0~F. If any other value than those is input, Error will be
set.
(4) In DHABIN, its operation range is h00000000 ~ hFFFFFFFF.
(5) As the first character displaying Hex,‘h’or H’is allowed.

4-226
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

b15 b8 b7 b0
th th
S 7 -digit ASCII code 8 -digit ASCII code
S+1 5th-digit ASCII code 6th-digit ASCII code D+1 D
rd th b31 b16 b15 b0
S+2 3 -digit ASCII code 4 -digit ASCII code
Upper 16-bit Lower 16-bit
st nd
S+3 1 -digit ASCII code 2 -digit ASCII code
32-bit Binary data

3) Program Example

P00000
HABINP P1000 P1100

4-227
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
4.26.6 DABCD, DABCDP, DDABCD, DDABCDP ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
DABCD(P) S O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
2~4 O - -
DDABCD(P) D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O

(D)DABCD S D

(D)DABCDP P S D

means DABCD
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Address where decimal ASCII data to convert to BCD is saved STRING
D Address to save operation result in BCD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
If ASCII string exceeds BCD range(0~9, h30 ~ h39 in ASCII)
Error F110
If ASCII string length exceeds 4(DABCD)/8(DDABCD)

1) DABCD (Decimal ASCII to BCD)

(1) It converts decimal value saved in ASCII to BCD and saves in D.
(2) Data D will be saved as unsigned.
(3) In DABCD, its operation range is h0000 ~ h9999.

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b12b11 b 8b 7 b 4b 3 b0

S 100-digit ASCII code 1000-digit ASCII code D
S+1 1-digit ASCII code 10-digit ASCII code
S+2 End of string (Null) 1000-digit 100-digit 10-digit 1-digit

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b12 b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0

S h37 (7) h38 (8) S 8 7 6 5
S+1 h35 (5) h36 (6)
S+2 h00 (NULL)

2) DDABCD (Double Decimal ASCII to BCD)

(1) It converts decimal value saved in ASCII to BCD and saves in D.
(2) Data D will be saved as unsigned.
(3) In DDABCD, its operation range is h00000000 ~ h99999999.

D+1 D
b15 b8 b7 b0 b31 b16 b15 b0
S 1000000-digit ASCII code 10000000-digit ASCII code
S+1 10000-digit ASCII code 100000-digit ASCII code
10,000 digits 1 digit
S+2 100-digit ASCII code 1000-digit ASCII code
100,000 digits 10 digits
S+3 1-digit ASCII code 10-digit ASCII code
S+4 0 1,000,000 digits 100 digits
10,000,000 digits 1,000 digit

4-228
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

3) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal P00000 is changed to On, It converts ASCII code saved in D00000~D00001 to BCD value and
saved ‘1284’ in D00010.

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b12 b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0

D0 h32 h31 D10 1 2 8 4
D1 h34 h38
D2 h00 (NULL)

P00000
DABCDP D00000 D00010

4-229
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.26.7 LEN, LENP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O - O O - - O - - - O O O O
LEN(P) 2~4 - - -
D O - O - - - O - - - O O O O

LEN S D

LENP P S D

means LEN
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Start position of string STRING
D Position to save string length WORD

1) LEN( Length)
(1) It calculates the string length saved in ASCII starting from S to save in D by 2 digits per word.
(2) Even if specified string S exceeds 31 characters with no NULL code, it will return 31 characters without any error.

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S h33 (3) h32 (2) D 4
S+1 h35 (5) h34 (4)
S+2 h00

2) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal P00000 is changed to On, the string size of ‘124’ saved in D00000~D00001 is operated and ‘3’
saved in D10.

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
D0 h31 (1) h32 (2) D10 3
D1 h00 h34 (4)
D2 h36

P00000
LEN D0000 D00010

4-230
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.26.8 STR, STRP, DSTR, DSTRP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O - O - - - O - - - O O O O
STR(P)
S2 O - O O O - O - - O O O O O 4~6 O - -
DSTR(P)
D O - O - - - O - - - O O O O

(D)STR S1 S2 D

(D)STRP P S1 S2 D

means STR
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data address (0~28) where S2’ decimal places are saved WORD
S2 Binary data to convert INT/DINT
D Address to save converted string in STRING
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error To be set if specified decimal places are other than 0~28 F110

1) STR (String)
(1) It converts specified Binary 16-bit data S2 with decimal places added to specified position S1, to string to save
in the next number to specified device D.

S1 Decimal places 1st string ASCII code

D
ASCII code of Sign
D+1 3rd string 2nd string
ASCII code ASCII code
. D+2 5th string 4th string
ASCII code ASCII code
7th string 6th string
Sign D+3 ASCII code ASCII code

D+4 NULL (End of string)

S2 Binary16 data

(2) S1 stands for decimal places.

(3) In STR, if S1 range is other than 0~28, Error Flag will be set.
(4) If decimal places more than Binary16 data are specified, the insufficient part will be filled with 0s.
(5) If input Binary 16-bit data is a negative number, attach h2D(-) to the front of the string.

S1 3
D h33 (3) h2D (-)

. D+1 h2E (.) h32 (2)

Sign D+2 h36 (6) h37 (7)

D+3 h00 (NULL) h35 (5)

S2 -32765

4-231
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

2) DSTR (String)
(1) It converts specified Binary 32-bit data S2 with decimal places added to specified position S1, to string to save in
the next number to specified device D.
b15 b8 b7 b0
S1 Decimal places th
(Specified total places-1) ASCII code of Sign
D ASCII code

D+1 (Specified total places-3)th (Specified total places-2)th

ASCII code ASCII code

Sign D+2 (Specified total places-5)th (Specified total places-4)th

S2+1 S2 ASCII code ASCII code
b31 b16 b15 b0
Upper 16-bit Lower 16-bit D+3 (Specified total places-7)th (Specified total places-6)th
ASCII code ASCII code

32-bit Binary data D+4 (Specified total places-9)th (Specified total places-8)
th

ASCII code ASCII code

D+5 (Specified total places-10)th

00H ASCII code

Saved automatically at the end of string

(3) S1 stands for decimal places.

(4) If S1 range is other than 0~28, Error Flag will be set.

b15 b8 b7 b0
S1 5
D h32 (2) h2D (-)

. D+1 h34 (4) h31 (1)

Sign
D+2 h34 (4) h37 (7)
S2+1 S2
b31 b16 b15 b0
-2147483645 D+3 h38 (8) h2E (.)

32-bit Binary data

D+4 h36 (6) h33 (3)

D+5 h35 (5) h34 (4)

0 h00 (NULL)

Saved automatically at the end of string

3) Program Example

P00000
STR P1000 P1100 P1200

4-232
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.26.9 VAL, VALP, DVAL, DVALP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O - O - - - O - - - O O O O
VAL(P)
D1 O - O - - - O - - - O O O O 4~6 O - -
DVAL(P)
D2 O - O - - - O - - - O O O O

(D)VAL S D1 D2

(D)VALP P S D1 D2

means VAL
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Start address of string to convert to Binary data STRING
D1 Position to save Binary data’s places after converted WORD
D2 Position to save Binary data after converted INT/DINT
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
If ASCII string value is other than 0x30~0x39, Sign( -, +) or decimal point
Error F110
If ASCII string length exceeds the maximum string length

1) VAL (Value)
(1) It saves specified string S converted to Binary data in D1, and saves converted 16-bit Binary data in D2 omitting
decimals.
(2) ASCII string range is h30 ~ h39, and Error Flag will be set for others than sign and decimal point. In VAL,
convertible range of S is –32768 ~ 32767.

b15 b8 b7 b0
st
S 1 string ASCII code ASCII code of Sign Decimal places
D1
rd
S+1 3 string ASCII code nd
2 string ASCII code
th th
S+2 5 string ASCII code 4 string ASCII code D2 Integer disregarding
decimal point
th th
S+3 7 string ASCII code 6 string ASCII code
2 text
Sign
1 text

7 text

S+4 00H BIN 16-bit

nd
st

th

It is the end of string

3 D1
S h33 (3) h2D (-)

S+1 h2E (.) h32 (2) - 3 2. 7 6 5

S+2 h36 (6) h37 (7) Sign

S+3 h00 (NULL) h35 (5)

-32765 D2

4-233
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

2) DVAL (Value)
(1) It saves specified string S converted to Binary data in D1, and saves converted data in D2.
(2) ASCII string range is h30 ~ h39, and Error Flag will be set for others than sign and decimal point. In DVAL,
convertible range of S is –2147483648 ~ 2147483647.

b15 b8 b7 b0

S 1st string ASCII code ASCII code of Sign

S +1 3rd string ASCII code 2nd string ASCII code D1 Decimal places
th th
S +2 5 string ASCII code 4 string ASCII code
D2+1 D2
S +3
th
7 string ASCII code 6th string ASCII code Integer disregarding decimal point

S +4 9th string ASCII code 8th string ASCII code

BIN 32-bit

2 text
Sign
1 text

12 text
11th string ASCII code 10th string ASCII code

nd
st

th
00H 12th string ASCII code

It is the end of string

3) Program Example

P00000
VAL P1000 P1100 P1200

4-234
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4.26.10 RSTR, RSTRP, LSTR, LSTRP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O - O - - - O - - O O O O O
RSTR(P)
S2 O - O - - - O - - - O O O O 4~6 O - -
LSTR(P)
D O - O - - - O - - - O O O O

(D)RSTR S1 S2 D

(D)RSTRP P S1 S2 D

means RSTR
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Floating point data to convert REAL/LONG
S2 Effective decimal places (0~25) WORD
D Address to save string converted STRING
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
If converted value exceeds specified area D
Error F110
If specified value S2 exceeds 0~25 range

1) RSTR (Real to String)

(1) It converts floating point real data S1 to exponential ASCII string adjusting to decimal places specified in S2 to
save in starting D by 2 per word in regular order.
(2) RSTR’s operation range is -3.40282347e+038 ~ -1.17549435e-038 or 1.17549435e-038 ~ 3.40282347e +038.
S2’s range is 0 ~ 25.

S2 3 b15 b8 b7 b0
D2 h31 (1) h2D (-)
D2+1 h32 (2) h2E (.)
D2+2 h35 (5) h33 (3)
- 1 . 2 3 5 E + 0 D2+3 h2B (+) h45 (E)
D2+4 h00 (NULL) h30 (0)
Sign

S1+1 S1 Saved automatically at the end of string

-1.235E+0

Floating point real data

4-235
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

2) LSTR (Double real to String)

(1) It converts floating point real data S1 to ASCII string based on saved format in S2 to save in starting D by 2 per
word in regular order.
(2) STRL’s operation range is -1.7976931348623157e+290 ~ -2.2250738585072014e-290 or 2.2250738585
072014e-290 ~ 1.7976931348623157e+290.
Note) If input value exceeds operation range, 1.#INF000e+0 or -1.#QNAN0E+0 or 0 may appear with no
error output.
(3) Range of effective decimal places specified in S2 is 0~25.

b15 b8 b7 b0
th
(Specified total places-1)
D ASCII code of Sign
ASCII code
S2 Decimal places
D+1 ASCII code of decimal (Specified total places-2)th
point(.)(2EH) ASCII code
th th
D+2 (Specified total places-5) (Specified total places-4)
. E
ASCII code (decimal) ASCII code (decimal)

Sign (integral) Sign (exponential) (Specified total places-7)

th th
(Specified total places-6)
D+3
ASCII code ASCII code
S1+1 S1 th
D+4 (Specified total places-9)
ASCII code (exponential) 45e (E)

Floating point real Added automatically th

D+5 (Specified total places-11) (Specified total places-10)th
ASCII code (exponential) ASCII code(exponential)
D+6
00H

Saved automatically at the end of string

3) Program Example

4-236
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4.26.11 STRR, STRRP, STRL, STRLP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
STRR(P) S O - O - - - O - - - O O O O
2~4 O - -
STRL(P) D O - O - - - O - - - O O O O

STRR S D

STRRP P S D

means STRR
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Address string to convert is saved in STRING
D Address to save in converted floating point data REAL/LREAL
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
1.If there is no NULL at the end of string, or ASCII data is other than 0x30~0x39, Sign,
decimal, ‘e’ or ‘E’
Error 2. If string length exceeds the maximum size F110
3. If input string is not floating point data format
4. If input string data exceeds operation range (STRR, STRRP)

1) STRR (String to Real)

(1) It converts ASCII string S to real data to save in D.
(2) Specified string can be converted to decimal or exponential.

b15 b8 b7 b0
S 1st string ASCII code ASCII code of Sign
S+1 D+1 D
3rd string ASCII code 2nd string ASCII code
S+2
5th string ASCII code 4th string ASCII code
S+3
7th string ASCII code 8th string ASCII code
S+4 Floating point Real
h00

It is the end of string

(3) Allowable string is as follows;

"-1.23e+25" Normal
"-123e+25" Normal
"12345678" Normal
"12.345" Normal
"+12.345e-62" Normal
"-1.23e25" Abnormal
" 1.23e+25" Abnormal

4-237
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

b15 b8 b7 b0
S 34H (4) 20H (-)

S +1 2EH (.) 31H (1)

S +2 32H (2) 33H (3)

D+1 D
S +3 31H (1) 30H (0) -4.1320 1E+11

S +4 20H (+) 45H (E)

Floating point Real
S +5 30H (0) 31H (1)
S +6 00H

(4) Error will be set if ASCII value in string is other than 0x30~0x39, sign, decimal, ‘e’or E’.
(5) STRR’s operation range is -3.40282347e+038 ~ -1.17549435e-038 or 1.17549435e-038 ~ 3.402823
47e+038.
(6) In STRR(P), if input data exceeds operation range, Error will be set
If the number of effective places of input data exceeds 17, succeeding input value will be ignored.

2) STRL (String to Double real)

(1) It converts ASCII string S to double real data to save in D.

(2) STRL’s operation range is -1.7976931348623157e+290 ~ -2.2250738585072014e-290
or 2.2250738585072014e-290 ~ 1.7976931348623157e+290.
(3) If input value exceeds operation range, 1.#INF000e+0 or -1.#QNAN0E+0 or 0 may appear with no error output.
(4) Allowable string of STRL(P) is as specified in STRR(P).
(5) If the number of effective places of input data exceeds 17, succeeding input value will be ignored

3) Program Example

P00000
STRR P1000 P1100

4-238
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.26.12 ASC, ASCP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O - O - - - O - - O O O O O
ASC(P) D O - O - - - O - - - O O O O 4~6 O - -
cw O - O - - - O - - O O O O O

Instruction
ASC S D cw

Instruction
ASCP P S D cw

means ASC
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Hexadecimal Binary WORD
D Position to save converted string in. STRING
N Number of characters to convert. WORD
[Flag Setting]
Device
Flag Description
Number
Error If format regulation of cw is incorrect. F110

1) ASC( ASCII)
(1) It converts data in specified area S to ASCII value based on CW format to save in starting D specified.

CW’s format
S D 0 N
Number to be converted (0~8)

Don't Care
D ‘s start bit
S’s start bit

(2) It converts Binary 16-bit data as hexadecimal saved in position after specified device number S, to ASCII
to save in the range of the specified characters number n after specified device number D.

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S 4th place 3rd place 2nd place 1st place D 2nd character’s ASCII code 1st letter’s ASCII code

S+1 4th place 3rd place 2nd place 1st place D+1 4th letter’s ASCII code 3rd letter’s ASCII code
nd
D+2 2 letter’s ASCII code 1st letter’s ASCII code
Specified number
D+3 4th letter’s ASCII code 3rd letter’s ASCII code
n of characters
th rd nd st
4 place 3 place 2 place 1 place

Binary data 2nd letter’s ASCII code 1st letter’s ASCII code

4-239
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

b15 b8b7 b0 b15 b8b7 b0

S 1 2 E F D h45 (E) h46 (F)

S+1 A B 7 8 D+1 h31 (1) h32 (2) Specified number

n of letters
0 0 0 0 D+2 h37 (7) h38 (8)

D+3 h41 (A) h42 (B)

Binary data 0 0

(3) Setting the number of characters N will automatically set specified Binary data S’s range and specified device
D’s range to save string in.
(4) Even if the device range where Binary data to convert is saved and the device range where converted
ASCII data will be saved are duplicated, its process will be normal.
(5) If specified number of characters N is odd, “00H” will be saved automatically in the upper 8 bits of the last
device number in the device range to save string in.
(6) If specified number of characters N is“0,” no conversion will be executed.

2) Program Example

P00000
ASC P1000 P1100 P1200

4-240
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.26.13 HEX, HEXP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O - O - - - O - - - O O O O
HEX(P) D O - O - - - O - - - O O O O 4~6 O - -
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

HEX S D N

HEXP P S D N

means HEX
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S String to convert to Binary data STRING
D Device address to save Binary data converted WORD
N Number of characters to convert WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error The string value specified S exceeds Hexadecimal displaying range F110

1) HEX
(1) It converts N characters from specified character S to HEX format to save in starting D.
(2) It converts Hexadecimal ASCII data saved in specified characters number N after specified device number
S to save in position after specified device number D.

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b12 b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0

S2 2nd letter’s ASCII code 1st letter’s ASCII code D 4th place 3rd place 2nd place 1st place
S2+1 4th letter’s ASCII code 3rd letter’s ASCII code D+1 4th place 3rd place 2nd place 1st place
S2+2 2nd letter’s ASCII code 1st letter’s ASCII code
S2+3 4th letter’s ASCII code 3rd letter’s ASCII code

Specified number
n of letters

Binary data

b15 b8 b7 b0
b15 b8 b7 b0
S h45 (E) h66 (f)
D 1 2 E F
Specified
S+1 h31 (1) h32 (2) number N D+1 A B 7 8
of letters
S+2 h37 (7) h38 (8)
0 0 0 0
S+3 h61 (a) h42 (B)

0 0 Binary data

4-241
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

(3) The specified number of characters N, specified string S’s range and specified device D’s range to save Binary
data in will be automatically set.
(4) Even if the device range where ASCII data to convert is saved and the device range where converted Binary data
will be saved are duplicated, its process will be normal.
(5) If specified number of characters N is not the multiple of 4, “0” will be saved automatically in the place after specified
number of characters of the last device number in the device range to save converted Binary data in.
(6) If specified number of characters N is“0,” no conversion will be executed.

2) Program Example

P00000
HEX P1000 P1100 P1200

4-242
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.26.14 RIGHT, RIGHTP, LEFT, LEFTP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O - O - - - O - - - O O O O
RIGHT(P)
D O - O - - - O - - - O O O O 4~6 O - -
LEFT(P)
N O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

RIGHT, LEFT S D N

RIGHTP, LEFTP P S D N

means RIGHT/LEFT
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S String STRING
D Position to save string extracted in STRING
N Number of characters to extract WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If specified string length S exceeds the maximum string size F110

1) RIGHT
(1) It saves the data of the number of characters n starting from the right (end of the string) of the string data
saved in the place after specified device number S, in the place after specified device number D.
(2) If specified number of characters N is“0,” NULL code (h00) will be saved in D.
(3) If specified N value is larger than specified S’s string, all S string will be saved in D, with no error this time.

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S h42 (B) h41 (H) D h32 (2) h31 (1)
S+1 h44 (D) h43 (C) D+1 h34 (4) h33 (3)
S+2 h46 (F) h45 (E) D+2 h00 h35 (5)
S+3 h32 (2) h31 (1) "12345"
S+4 h34 (4) h33 (3) 5th character’s ASCII code
S+5 h00 h35 (5)
"ABCDEF12345"

2) LEFT
(1) It saves the data of the number of characters n starting from the left (start of the string) of the string data saved
in the place after specified device number S, in the place after specified device number D.
(2) If specified number of characters N is“0,” NULL code (h00) will be saved in D.
(3) If specified N value is larger than specified S’s string, all S string will be saved in D, with no error this time.

4-243
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S h42 (B) h41 (H) D h42 (B) h41 (A)
S+1 h44 (D) h43 (C) D+1 h44 (D) h43 (C)
S+2 h46 (F) h45 (E) D+2 h46 (F) h45 (E)
S+3 h32 (2) h31 (1) D+3 h00 h31 (1)
S+4 h34 (4) h33 (3) "ABCDEF1"
S+5 h00 h35 (5)
"ABCDEF12345" 7th character’s ASCII code

3) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal P00000 is changed to On, It saves the data 5 strings starting from the right (end of the string) of
the string among D00000~D00005 in the D00100~D00102.

P00000
RIGHT D00000 D00100 5

4-244
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.26.15 MID, MIDP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O - O - - - O - - - O O O O
MID(P) D O - O - - - O - - - O O O O 4~6 O - -
S2 O - O - - - O - - - O O O O

MID S1 D S2

MIDP P S1 D S2

means MID
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Start address of string STRING
D Address to save operation result of string STRING
Position of head character at S2+0
S2 WORD
Number of characters to bring in S2+1
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
1. If converted value exceeds specified area D
2. If S1 ‘s string length exceeds the maximum string size
Error F110
3. If position of head character specified in S2+0 exceeds the maximum string size
4. If the number of characters specified in S2+1 exceeds the maximum string size

1) MID (Middle)
(1) It saves the data of the number of characters specified in S2+1 starting from S2, from the left of the string data
saved in the place after specified device number S1, in the place after specified device number D.
(2) If specified S2+1’s length of string is“0”, NULL STRING( “”) will be saved in D.

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S h42 (B) h41 (H) D h46 (F) h45 (E)
S+1 h44 (D) h43 (C) D+1 h48 (H) h47 (G)
S+2 h46 (F) h45 (E) D+2 h00 h49 (I)
S+3 h48 (H) h47 (G)
5th character’s position "EFGHI"
S+4 h4A (J) h49 (I)
th
S+5 h00 h4b (K) 5 character’s ASCII code
"ABCDEFGHIJK"

S2 5
S2+1 5

2) Program Example

P00000
MID P1000 P1100 P1200

4-245
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.26.16 REPLACE, REPLACEP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O - O - - - O - - - O O O O
REPLACE(P) D O - O - - - O - - - O O O O 4~6 O - -
S2 O - O - - - O - - - O O O O

REPLACE S1 D S2

REPLACEP P S1 D S2

means REPLACE
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Start address of string to replace STRING
D Start address of string STRING
S2 Position (S2+0) and replaced size (S2+1) of the string to be replaced in D WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
1. If S2+1’s value exceeds D’s string length
Error F110
2. If S2’s value exceeds D’s string length

1) REPLACE
(1) It replaces string data (from the left) saved in the position from device number D including specified S2 and
S2+1’s number of characters data, with specified S1’s string.
(2) If S2+1 is 0, S1 will be inserted in specified S2 position of string specified in D.
(3) If S1’s string length is different from S2+1’s string size, D’s string may keep increasing or deceasing, which
needs user’s precaution.
Before
b15 b8 b7 b0
D h42 (B) h41 (A)
b15 b8 b7 b0
D+1 h44 (D) h43 (C)
S h31 (I) h30 (0)
D+2 h46 (F) h45 (E)
S+1 h33 (3) h32 (2)
D+3 h48 (H) h47 (G)
S+2 h35 (5) h34 (4)
D+4 h00 h49 (I)
h00 h36 (6)
"ABCDEFGHI"
"0123456"
After
b15 b8 b7 b0
D h42 (B) h41 (A)
D+1 h31 (I) h30 (0)
D+2 h33 (3) h32 (2)
S2 3 Position from the left of D’s string data D+3 h35 (5) h34 (4)
S2+1 2 The number of characters to be replaced D+4 h45 (E) h36 (6)
from S2
D+5 h47 (G) h46 (F)
D+6 h49 (I) h48 (H)
D+7 h00 h00
"AB0123456EFGHI"

2) Program Example

P00000
REPLACE P1000 P1100 P1200

4-246
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.26.17 FIND, FINDP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O - O - - - O - - - O O O O
S2 O - O - - - O - - - O O O O
FIND(P) 4~7 O - -
D O - O - - - O - - - O O O O
N O O O O O - O - - O O O O O

FIND S1 S2 D N

FINDP P S1 S2 D N

means FIND
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Start address of string to be searched for STRING
S2 Start address of string to search for STRING
D Address to save result WORD
N Start position to search for string WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
1.If S1, S2’s string length exceeds the maximum string size
Error 2.If start position to search specified in N is larger than string’s length to be searched F110
for, specified in S1

1) FIND
It searches starting Nth character of specified string S1 for the string with starting S2 to save the first identical
string’s start position in D.

b15 b8 b7 b0

S1 S2 C (0x43) T (0x54)
S1+1 S2+1 NULL (0x00) P (0x50)
S1+2 T (0x54)
N S1+3 P (0x50) C (0x33)
Distance from the S1’s start position saved.
S1+4
.... D 6

2) Program Example

P00000
FIND P1000 P1100 P1200 P1300

4-247
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4.26.18 RBCD, RBCDP, LBCD, LBCDP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O - O - - - O - - - O O O O
RBCD(P)
S2 O - O - - - O - - - O O O O 4~6 O - -
LBCD(P)
D O - O - - - O - - - O O O O

RBCD, LBCD S1 S2 D

RBCDP, LBCDP P S1 S2 D

means RBCD/LBCD
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Floating point Data REAL/LREAL
S2 Decimal places (0~7) WORD
D Position to save in data decomposed to BCD WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
1.If converted BCD data exceeds specified area D
Error 2.If the range of decimal places exceeds 0~7 F110
3.If S1’ value exceeds operation range

1) RBCD (Real to BCD)

(1) It decomposes floating point Real data saved in specified device S to BCD floating point format, to save in the
place after specified device number D.
(2) The range of BCD format decimal places is 0 ~ 7. And if this area is exceeded, error will be set, with D
unchanged.
(3) RBCD’s operation range is -3.40282347e+038 ~ -1.17549435e-038 or 1.17549435e-038 ~ 3.40282347e +038.
If this area is exceeded, error will be set.

S1+1 S1
If plus:0
D Sign If minus:1

Floating point real D+1

BCD7places
D+2 BCD floating point
If plus:0 format
D+3 Sign specified
If minus:1
S2 3 BCD exponential
D+4 (0~38)
BCD decimal places

S1+1 S1
-3.578 216E+2 D 1
D+1
H3578216
S2 6 D+2
D+3 0
D+4 2

4-248
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

2) LBCD (Double real to BCD)

(1) It decomposes floating pointdouble real data saved in specified device S to BCD floating point format, to save in
the place after specified device number D.
(2) BCD format is as specified in RBCD.
(3) STRL’s operation range is -1.7976931348623157e+290 ~ -2.2250738585072014e-290 or 2.225073858
5072014e-290 ~ 1.7976931348623157e+290. If input value exceeds operation range, error will be output.

3) Program Example

P00000
RBCD P1000 P1100 P1200

4-249
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4.26.19 BCDR, BCDRP, BCDL, BCDLP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O - O - - - O - - - O O O O
BCDR(P)
S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O 4 O - -
BCDL(P)
D O - O - - - O - - - O O O O

BCDR S1 S2 D

BCDRP P S1 S2 D

means BCDR
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S1 Data with BCD floating point format WORD
S2 Decimal places of BCD floating point format WORD
D Device to save result in REAL/LREAL
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
1.If specified area S1’s data format is not correct
Error 2.If the range of decimal places specified in S2 exceeds 0~7 F110
3.If BCD exponential exceeds allowable range( BCDR(P) : 38, BCDL(P) : 290)

1) BCDR (BCD to Real)

(1) It converts BCD floating point data saved in specified device S1 to floating point real data, to save in the place
after specified device number D
(2) The range of BCD exponential specified in S1+4 is 0~38. If BCD floating point format’s exponential area
exceeds the allowable range, error will be set.
(3) The range of BCD floating point format’s decimal places specified in S2 is 0~7.

Sign If plus:0
S1 D+1 D
If minus:1
S1+1
BCD floating decimal BCD7places
S1+2
point format If plus:0
S1+3 Sign specified Floating point real
If minus:1
S1+4 BCD exponential (0~38)

S2 BCD decimal places

S1 1
S1+1 S1
S1+1
H3578216 -3.578 216E+2
S1+2
S1+3 Sign specified
S1+4 BCD exponential

S2 6

4-250
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

2) BCDL (BCD to Double real)

(1) It converts BCD floating point data saved in specified device S1 to floating point double real data based on
decimal places saved in specified device S2, to save in the place after specified device number D
(2) The range of BCD long floating point format’s exponential area specified in S1+4 is 0~290. If BCD floating point
format’s exponential area exceeds the allowable range, error will be set.
(3) The range of BCD floating point format’s decimal places specified in S2 is 0~7.

3) Program Example

P00000
BCDR P1000 P1100 P1200

4-251
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.27 Special Functional Instruction

XGK XGB
4.27.1 SIN, SINP ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O - O O O - - - - O O O O O
SIN(P) 2~4 - - -
D O - O - - - - - - - - O O O

SIN SIN S D

SINP SINP S D

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
S Input angle value (Radian) of Sine operation LREAL
D Device number to save operation result in LREAL

1) SIN (Sine)
(1) It performs SIN operation of data value in specified area S to save in D. At this moment, data type of S and D is
of Double real, and internal operation will be processed after converted to Double real data.
(2) Input value is of radian. Refer to RAD for details on Conversion of angle to radian.
(3) If S’s value is 1.047…(π/3 rad = 600), operation result is 0.8660… ( 3 2 ).

2) Program Example

P00000
RAD M0008 M0000
P00001
SIN M0000 M0004

It converts the degree inputted at M0008, M0009 into radian value and save them at M0000, M0001. And
it executes SIN operation and save them at M0004, M0005 by conversion value.

4-252
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.27.2 COS, COSP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O - O O O - - - - O O O O O
COS(P) 2~4 - - -
D O - O - - - - - - - - O O O

COS COS S D

COSP COSP S D

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
S Input angle value (Radian) of Cosine operation LREAL
D Device number to save operation result in LREAL

1) COS (Cosine)
(1) It performs COS operation of data value in specified area S to save in D. At this moment, data type of S and D is
of double real.
(2) Input value is of radian. Refer to RAD for details on Conversion of angle to radian.
(3) If S’s value is 0.5235…(π/6 rad = 300), operation result is 0.8660… ( 3 2 ).

2) Program Example

P00000
RAD M0008 M0000
P00001
COS M0000 M0004

4-253
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.27.3 TAN, TANP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O - O O O - - - - O O O O O
TAN(P) 2~4 - - -
D O - O - - - - - - - - O O O

TAN TAN S D

TANP TANP S D

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
S Input angle value (Radian) of Tangent operation LREAL
D Device number to save operation result in LREAL

1) TAN (Tangent)
(1) It performs Tangent operation of data value in specified area S to save in D. At this moment, data type of S and D
is of double real.
(2) Input value is of radian. Refer to RAD for details on Conversion of angle to radian.
(3) If S’s value is 0.5235…(π/6 rad = 300), operation result is 0.5773...

2) Program Example

P00000
RAD M0008 M0000
P00001
TAN M0000 M0004

4-254
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.27.4 RAD, RADP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O - O O O - - - - O O O O O
RAD(P) 2~4 - - -
D O - O - - - - - - - - O O O

RAD RAD S D

RADP RADP S D

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
S Angle data LREAL
D Device number to save in the operation result of converted RADIAN value LREAL

1) RAD (Radian)
(1) It converts angle (0) of data in specified area S to radian to save in D. At this moment, data type of S and D is of
double real.
(2) In degree unit, conversion to radian is as follows;
(3) Radian = Degree x π/180

2) Program Example

P00003
RAD M0000 M0002
P00004
DEG M0002 M0004

4-255
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.27.5 DEG, DEGP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O - O O O - - - - O O O O O
DEG(P) 2~4 - - -
D O - O - - - - - - - - O O O

DEG DEG S D

DEGP DEGP S D

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
S Radian value LREAL
D Device number to save operation result in. LREAL

1) DEG (Degree)
(1) It converts radian of data in specified area S to angle (degree) to save in D. At this moment, data type of S and D
is of double real.
(2) In radian unit, conversion to degree is as follows;
(3) Degree = Radian x 180 / π

2) Program Example

P00003
RAD M0000 M0002
P00004
DEG M0002 M0004

4-256
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.27.6 SQRT, SQRTP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O - O O O - - - - O O O O O
SQRT(P) 2~4 O - -
D O - O - - - - - - - - O O O

SQRT SQRT S D

SQRTP SQRTP S D

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
S Input value to perform SQRT operation LREAL
D Device number to save operation result in LREAL
[Flag Setting]
Device
Flag Description
Number
Error To be set if value in specified area S is negative F110

1) SQRT (Square Root)

(1) It performs Square Root operation of data in specified area S to save in D. At this moment, data type of S and
D is of double real.
(2) If S is negative, operation error occurs.

2) Program Example

P00001
SQRT M0000 M0004

4-257
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.28 Data Control Instruction

XGK XGB
4.28.1 LIMIT, LIMITP, DLIMIT, DLIMITP ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O - O - - - O O O O O
LIMIT(P) S2 O - O O O - O O O O O O
4~7 O - -
DLIMIT(P) S3 O - O O O - O O O O O O
D O - O - - - O O O O O

LIMIT,DLIMIT S1 S2 S3 D

LIMITP, DLIMITP P S1 S2 S3 D

means LIMIT/DLIMIT
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
S1 Device number where input value to control is saved INT/DINT
S2 Maximum output value INT/DINT
S3 Minimum output value INT/DINT
D Device number to save output value in INT/DINT
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If the maximum output is smaller than the minimum output F110

1) LIMIT
(1) Function
(1) It saves controlled output value in D, based on the value available in the range designated as the
maximum/minimum of the input value specified in S1.
(2) Output Condition

S1 < S3 , D = S3

S3 < S1 < S2 , D = S1

S2 < S1 , D = S2

Output Output D

S2

Input Input S1

S3

4-258
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

2) Program Example

If D00010 is -500, D00040 = -400

If D00010 is -400, D00040 = -400
If D00010 is -300, D00040 = -300
If D00010 is -200, D00040 = -200
If D00010 is 0, D00040 = 0
If D00010 is 200, D00040 = 200
If D00010 is 300, D00040 = 300
If D00010 is 400, D00040 = 300
If D00010 is 500, D00040 = 300

4-259
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.28.2 DZONE, DZONEP, DDZONE, DDZONEP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O - O - - - O - - - O O O O
DZONE(P) S2 O - O O O - O - - O O O O O
4~7 O - -
DDZONE(P) S3 O - O O O - O - - O O O O O
D O - O - - - O - - - O O O O

DZONE, DDZONE S1 S2 S3 D

DZONEP, DDZONEP P S1 S2 S3 D

means DZONE/DDZONE
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
S1 Device number where input value to control is saved INT/DINT
S2 Horizontal radius of dead zone INT
S3 Inclination [%] in dead zone, (0%=0, 100%=1) INT
D Device number to save output value in INT/DINT
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If inclination exceeds 0~100[%] F110

1) DZONE
(1) It saves output value converted from input value specified in S1 based on dead zone’s horizontal radius and
inclination in D.
(2) Output Condition
S3
S1 < − S2 , D = S1 − × S2 + S2
100
S3
− S2 < S1 < S2 , D = × S1
100
S3
S2 < S1 , D = S1 + × S2 − S2
100

Output D

Output

Inclination S3

-S2
S2
Input Input S1

4-260
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

2) Program Example

P00011

DZONE D00011 300 50 D00021

If D00010 is -500, D00040 = -350

If D00010 is -400, D00040 = -250
If D00010 is -300, D00040 = -150
If D00010 is -200, D00040 = -100
If D00010 is 0, D00040 = 0
If D00010 is 200, D00040 = 100
If D00010 is 300, D00040 = 150
If D00010 is 400, D00040 = 250
If D00010 is 500, D00040 = 350

4-261
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.28.3 VZONE, VZONEP, DVZONE, DVZONEP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O - O - - - O - - O O O O
VZONE(P) S2 O - O O O - O - - O O O O O
4~7 O - -
DVZONE(P) S3 O - O O O - O - - O O O O O
D O - O - - - O - - - O O O O

VZONE, DVZONE S1 S2 S3 D

VZONEP, DVZONEP P S1 S2 S3 D

means ZONE/DZONE
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
S1 Device number where input value to control is saved INT/DINT
S2 Vertical radius of vertical zone INT
S3 Reciprocal of inclination [%] in vertical zone, (0%=inf, 100%=1) INT
D Device number to save output value in INT/DINT
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If reciprocal of inclination exceeds 0~100[%] F110

1) VZONE
(1) It saves output value converted from input value specified in S1 based on vertical zone’s horizontal radius and
inclination in D.
(2) Output Condition
S3 S3
S1 < − × S2 , D = S1 + × S2 − S2
100 100
S3 S3 100
− × S2 < S1 < × S2 , D = × S1
100 100 S3
S3 S3
× S2 < S1 , D = S1 − × S2 + S2
100 100

Output D

Output

Reciprocal of S2
inclination S3

Input Input S1

-S2

4-262
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

2) Program Example

P00011
VZONE D00011 300 50 D00021

If D00010 is -500, D00040 = -650

If D00010 is -400, D00040 = -550
If D00010 is -200, D00040 = -350
If D00010 is -100, D00040 = -200
If D00010 is 0 , D00040 = 0
If D00010 is 100, D00040 = 200
If D00010 is 200, D00040 = 350
If D00010 is 400, D00040 = 550
If D00010 is 500, D00040 = 650

4-263
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.28.4 PIDRUN
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
PIDRUN S - - - - - - - - - O - - - - 2 - - -

PIDRUN PIDRUN S

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
S Loop Number to perform PID operation (0~31) Const

1) PIDRUN (PID RUN)

(1) User should operate K area(K1000 ~ K2047 in word, XGB is K1200 ~ K1850)’s PID Loop (S:Loop Number)
saved as adjusted to PID format.
(2) K device PID parameter area How to assign PID parameter positions in K device is as shown in the table
below;
(3) PID common area shows all the loops’ simple setting and state. The bit position in double word (in XGB case,
the bit position in word) is just the loop number.
(4) Input value by user and PID output value for the user to use are saved together in PID loop’s individual
parameter.
User setting value: SV, dPV_max, MV_man, Ts, Kp, Ti, Td, MV_max, MV_min, dMV_max
PID output value: PV, ETC, MV, MV_rvs, ERR, MVp, MVi, MVd, PV1, PV2, ALARM

2) Quick Start
(1) For simple application, PV and MV are respectively used as controller’s input and output. The value user
should input is SV, MV_man, Kp, Ti and Td.
PV : Controller’s input (sensor output to be controlled), AD module mainly used.
MV : Controller’s Output (input signal to be controlled), DA module mainly used.
SV : Controlling target, where sensor’s output is input as desired to reach through the control.
MV_max : Maximum controlled output, where maximum range of controlled output is input. Usually
10000 is input (usually 4000 is input in XGB case). And if this value is 0, more than 0 will not
be output.
Kp, Ti, Td : Where proportional, integral and differential coefficients are respectively input and tuned.

Remark
Ti value is the denominator of integral term. Thus, reduce Ti to increase integral effect, or enlarge Ti to
decrease integral effect. In case PIDRUN Block is to be deleted for modification during run, let it deleted in the
state that contact point is off. If modified during run with contact point on, the output value will be kept as
before, which causes error that control is successively performed when the identical loop is later added with
contact point always on.
Refer to additional PID Instructions List for detailed functions.
Be well informed of PIDRUN, PIDPRMT, PIDPAUSE and PIDINIT instructions to keep from any accident
caused by abnormal operation.

3) Program Example

P0
PIDRUN 0

4-264
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
In case of XGK
Loop K area Symbol Data type Operation in 0 Function
K0000 --
None Previous model changing and User using area
K0999
K10000~
_PIDxx_MAN BIT Auto PID Output specified (0:Automatic, 1:Manual)
K1001F
K10020~
_PIDxx_PAUSE BIT Disable PID PAUSE
K1003F
K10040~
_PIDxx_NEG BIT Positive PID (0:forward,1:reverse) Control of operation
K1005F
K10060~
_PIDxx_AW_DIS BIT Disable PID Anti Wind-up (0:operation,1:prohibition)
K1007F
K10080~ PID external operation instruction
_PIDxx_EX_RUN BIT Disable
K1009F (when operates by HMI)
K10100~
_PIDxx_STAT BIT Stop PID operation indicated (0:Stop, 1:Run)
K1011F
Common
K10120~ PID Auto-tuning setting
_PIDxx_AT_EN BIT Stop
K1013F (0:Prohibition 1:Operation)
K10140~ Controll setting after PID Auto-tuning
_PID00_AT_ONLY BIT 0
K1015F (0:Control after tuning,1:Only operates tuning)
K10140~ PID Auto tuning Hysteresis setting automatically
_PID00_AT_HYS BIT Manual
K1015F (0:Manual, 1:Auto-detect)
K10140~ PID Display of Auto-tuning operation status (0:Stop,
_PID00_AT_STAT BIT Stop
K1015F 1:Run)
K10140~ PID Self-tuning setting
_PID00_ST_EN BIT Disable
K1015F (0:Prohibition, 1:Operation)
K10140~ PID Internal memory 0
_PID00_INT0 BIT -
K1015F (Prohibition of user setting)
K1024 _PID00_SV INT 0 PID target value (SV) – Loop 00
K1025 _PID00_T_s WORD Every scan PID calcualtion cycle (T_s)[0.1msec] - Loop 00
K1026 _PID00_K_p REAL 0 PID P - constant (K_p) – Loop 00
K1028 _PID00_T_i REAL Disable PID I - constant (T_i)[sec] –Loop 00
K1030 _PID00_T_d REAL 0 PID D - constant (T_d)[sec] –Loop 00
K1032 _PID00_d_PV_max INT Disable PID PV variation limitation - Loop00
K1033 _PID00_d_MV_max INT Disable PID MV variation limitation - Loop 00
K1034 _PID00_MV_max INT If both are PID MV maximum value limitation – Loop 00
K1035 _PID00_MV_min INT Disable PID MV minimum value limitation – Loop 00
K1036 _PID00_MV_man INT 0 PID manual output (MV_man) – Loop 00
K1037 _PID00_ALARM WORD 0 PID alarm (latch) – Loop 00
K1038 _PID00_PV INT 0 PID present value (PV) – Loop 00
0 K1039 _PID00_PV_old INT 0 PID previous value (PV_old) – Loop 00
K1040 _PID00_MV INT 0 PID output value (MV) – Loop 00
K1041 _PID00_AT_HYS_val INT 0 PID Hysteresis setting value – Loop 00
K1042 _PID00_ERR DINT 0 PID control error value – Loop 00
K1044 _PID00_MV_p REAL 0 PID output value P – Loop 00
K1046 _PID00_MV_i REAL 0 PID output value I – Loop 00
K1048 _PID00_MV_d REAL 0 PID output value D – Loop 00
K1050 _PID00_AT_STEP WORD - PID display of Auto-tuning status - Loop 00
K1051 _PID00_ST_STEP WORD - PID display of self-tuning status - Loop 00
K1052 _PID00_AT_prd1 WORD - PID internal memory 1 (Prohibition of user setting) - Loop 00
K1053 _PID00_AT_prd2 WORD - PID internal memory 2 (Prohibition of user setting) - Loop 00
K1054 _PID00_AT_max WORD - PID internal memory 3 (Prohibition of user setting) - Loop 00
L1055 _PID00_AT_min WORD - PID internal memory 4 (Prohibition of user setting) - Loop 00
1 K1056 _PID01_SV INT 0 PID target value (SV) – Loop 01
30 K2015 Reserved Memory
K2016
_PID31_SV INT 0 PID target value (SV) – Loop 31
(1024+32N)
31
K2047
- Reserved Memory
(1055+32N)
* xx : Loop number of PID
Remark
If PID related instructions are not used, it can be used just like a normal K device.
Controlled Input of PV lets it connected to sensor output to control with MOV instruction, etc.
Controlled Output of MV lets it connected to driver to control with MOV instruction, etc.
PV, MV and the value to monitor can be all inspected in graphs or table format at a glance through XG5000’s trend monitor or
data trace to check the operation of the control system.
4-265
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
In case of XGB
Device Type Name Function

K1200 16bit _PID_MAN PID output select (0: Auto, 1: Manual)

K1201 16bit _PID_PAUSE PID pause (0: STOP/RUN, 1: PAUSE)
K1202 16bit _PID_REV PID operation selection (0: Forward, 1: Reverse)

K1203 16bit _PID_AW2D PID Anti Wind-up2 prohibition (0: Operate 1: Prohibit)

K1204 16bit _PID_REM_RUN PID remote run bit for HMI (0: STOP, 1: RUN)
K1205 - - NO USE
PID common K1206 16bit _PID_D_on_ERR PID derivative term (0: on PV, 1: on ERR)
K1207 - - NO USE
K1208 16bit _PID_PWM_EM PID PWM operation permission (0: Prohibit, 1: Permit)
K1209 16bit _PID_STD PID operation indicated (0: STOP, 1: RUN)

K1210 16bit _PID_ALARM PID display of warning status (0: Normal, 1: Warning)

K1211 16bit _PID_ERROR PID display of error status (0: Normal, 1: Error)
K1212~1215 - Reserved NO USE

K1216+40*S INT _PID00_SV PID set value (SV)

K1217+40*S WORD _PID00_T_s PID sampling time (T_s)
K1218+40*S REAL _PID00_K_p PID P – constant (K_p)
K1220+40*S REAL _PID00_T_i PID I – constant (T_i)
K1222+40*S REAL _PID00_T_d PID D – constant (T_d)

K1224+40*S WORD _PID00_d_PV_max PID the maximum delta_PV limit

K1225+40*S WORD _PID00_d_MV_max PID the maximum delta_MV limit

K1226+40*S INT _PID00_MV_max PID the maximum MV
K1227+40*S INT _PID00_MV_min PID the minimum MV
K1228+40*S INT _PID00_MV_man PID manual output (MV_man)
K1229+40*S INT _PID00_PV PID process value (PV)
K1230+40*S INT _PID00_PV_old PID one step previous PV (PV_old)
K1231+40*S INT _PID00_MV PID manipulated value (MV)

K1232+40*S DINT _PID00_ERR PID control error value

Loop
K1234+40*S REAL _PID00_MV_p PID P component of the MV
K1236+40*S REAL _PID00_MV_i PID I component of the MV
K1238+40*S REAL _PID00_MV_d PID D component of the MV
K1240+40*S WORD _PID00_DB_W PID deadband value of PV (operate after stabilization)
K1241+40*S WORD _PID00_Td_lag PID Lag value of derivative term
K1242+40*S WORD _PID00_PWM PID PWM contact point setting up value

K1243+40*S WORD _PID00_PWM_Prd PID PWM product time

K1244+40*S WORD _PID00_SV_RAMP PID SV ramping

K1245+40*S WORD _PID00_PV_Track PID PV Tracking
K1246+40*S INT _PID00_PV_MIN PID PV minimum limit
K1247+40*S INT _PID00_PV_MAX PID PV maximum limit
K1248+40*S WORD _PID_ALM_CODE PID alarm code
K1249+40*S WORD _PID_ERR_CODE PID error code

K1250~1255 - Reserved NO USE

4-266
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4.28.5 PIDPRMT
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O - O - - - O - - - O O O O
PIDPRMT 2 - - -
D - - - - - - - - - O - - - -

PIDPRMT PIDPRMT S D

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
S Device number where PID operation information to change is saved INT
D Loop number to change PID operation information (0~31) Const

1) PIDPRMT (PID Parameter)

(1) It changes partial PID parameter the moment contact point is ON.
(2) Operand S designates the first word address of place of parameter to change, Operand D is constant (0~31)
and means loop number.
(3) It always operates to make much faster tuning available regardless of PID Loop UN/STOP/PAUSE state.
(4) While this instruction can directly access K device to change parameters during PID-RUN or PID-STOP state
basically, it is used easily to change some parameters frequently changed among those.
(5) Changeable parameters by PIDPRMT are SV, Ts, Kp, Ti and Td with applicable format as follows;
(6) Pay attention to observe the 5 data setting value of data type respectively.

2) Program Example

P00000
PIDPRMT P1000 0

Device Parameter Data type Example Real unit

System
S+0 SV [WORD] 5000
Config.
S+1 Ts [WORD] 10000 0.1 msec
S+2 Kp [REAL] 3.32 sec
S+4 Ti [REAL] 9.3 sec
S+6 Td [REAL] 0.001 sec

4-267
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4.28.6 PIDPAUSE
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
PIDPAUSE S - - - - - - - - - O - - - - 2 - - -

PIDPAUSE PIDPAUSE S

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
S Loop number to convert PID operation to PAUSE(temporary stop) state (0~31) Const

1) PIDPAUSE (PID PAUSE)

(1) It operates only when contact point is ON, in order to convert RUN to PAUSE (temporary stop) state of PID loop.
(2) To the contrary, if PID loop is in PAUSE (temporary stop) state, it will convert it to RUN state.
(3) This instruction operates the moment PULSE is input, in other words, contact point input starts to rise.
(4) Since PID loop’s output at temporary stop keeps the final value before stopped with integral information kept, it
will keep operation with the previous state not initialized when returning to RUN state.
(5) PAUSE is available only in RUN state, and not available in STOP state.

2) Status of PID loop

(1) PID loop has 3 types of operation status as shown below and it can conversion of operation status only indication
of below arrows.

PIDRUN

PIDSTOP PIDPAUSE

3) Program Example
P0
PIDPAUSE 0

Remark

Before PID loop is stabilized, any system easily unstable or with external hindrance or noise highly expected
shall not be used if not surely necessary since it may cause divergence due to PIDPAUSE. In addition, its user
should monitor the system to be able to stop the system urgently anytime at PAUSE, and should not leave it in
PAUSE state for long.

4-268
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4.28.7 PIDINIT
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
PIDINIT S - - - - - - - - - O - - - - 2 - - -

PIDINIT PIDINIT S

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Loop number (0~31) to exchange in PAUSE of PID operation status Const.

1) PIDINIT (PID Initial)

(1) It initializes setting and status of applicable PID loop.
(2) At this moment, initializing area is all setting and status of applicalble loop(n). It initializes all of the each No.n bit
of PID_MAN, PID_PAU, PID_NEO, PID_AWD, PID_EEC, PID_STD, also it initializes the area of K[1024+32n] ~
k[1055+32n] into 0.

2) Program Example

P0
PIDINIT 0

4-269
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4.28.8 PIDAT
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
PIDAT S - - - - - - - - - O - - - - 2 - - -

PIDAT PIDAT S

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
S Loop number to perform AT operation (0~15) Const

1) PIDAT (PID AutoTune)

(1) User should operate parameter or K area(K1856 ~ K2176 in word)’s PID Loop (S:Loop Number) auto-tuning
saved as adjusted to AT format.
(2) K device AT parameter area
How to assign AT parameter positions in K device is as shown in the table below;
(3) AT common area shows all the loops’ simple setting and state. The bit position in double word is just the loop
number.
(4) Input value by user and AT output value for the user to use are saved together in AT loop’s individual parameter.
User setting value: SV, Ts, MV_max, MV_min, PWM, Hys_Val
PID output value: PV, MV, STATUS, ERR_Code, K_p, T_i, T_d

2) Quick Start
(1) For simple application, PV and MV are respectively used as controller’s input and output. The value user
should input is SV, Ts.
PV : Controller’s input (sensor output to be controlled), AD module mainly used.
MV : Controller’s Output (input signal to be controlled), DA module mainly used.
SV : Controlling target, where sensor’s output is input as desired to reach through the control.

3) Program Example

4-270
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

Device Type Name Function

K1856 16bit _AT_REV AT operation selection (0: Forware, 1: Reverse)

K1857 16bit _AT_PWM_EN AT PWM operation permission (0: Prohibit, 1: Permit)

AT common
K1858 16bit _AT_ERROR AT display of error status (0: Normal, 1: Error)
K1859 - Reserved NO USE

K1860+20*S INT _AT00_SV AT target value (SV)

K1861+20*S WORD _AT00_T_s AT calculation cycle (T_s)

K1862+20*S INT _AT00_MV_max AT MV maximum value limit
K1863+20*S INT _AT00_MV_min AT MV minimum value limit
K1864+20*S WORD _AT00_PWM AT PWM contact point setting up value
K1865+20*S WORD _AT00_PWM_Prd AT PWM output cycle
K1866+20*S WORD _AT00_HYS_val AT hysteresis set up – loop 00
Loop K1867+20*S WORD _AT00_STATUS AT display of auto-tuning status

K1868+20*S WORD _AT00_ERR_CODE AT error code

K1870+20*S REAL _AT00_K_p AT result P – constant (K_p)
K1872+20*S REAL _AT00_T_i AT result I – constant (T_i)
K1874+20*S REAL _AT00_T_d AT result D – constant (T_d)
K1875+20*S INT _AT00_PV AT present value
K1876+20*S INT _AT00_MV AT output value

K1877~1879 WORD Reserved NO USE

4-271
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
4.28.9 PIDHBD X ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
F - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
PIDHBD 2 - - -
D - - - - - - - - - O - - - -

PIDPRMT PIDHBD F R

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
F Loop number to operate forward PID operation (0~15) Const
R Loop number to operate reverse PID operation (0~15) Const

1) PIDHBD (PID Hybrid)

(1) User should operate forward/reverse mixing operation connecting to forward/reverse parameter or K
area(K1200 ~ K1850 in word)’s PID Loop saved as adjusted to PID format.
(2) K device PID parameter area
Refer to PIDRUN instruction to assign parameter positions in K device of each loop

2) Quick Start
(1) When you use PIDHBD instruction, you should assign the forward operation loop number and reverse
operation loop number correctly.
(2) If you use the loop on other instruction like PIDRUN after using in PIDHBD instruction, control operation can
operate abnormally.

3) Program Example

4-272
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.28.10 PIDCAS X ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
M - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
PIDCAS 2 - - -
S - - - - - - - - - O - - - -

PIDCAS PIDCAS M S

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
M CASCADE external loop number (0~15) Const
S CASCADE internal loop number (0~15) Const

1) PIDCAS (PID Cascade)

(1) User should operate cascade operation connecting to external/internal parameter or K area(K1200 ~ K1850 in
word)’s PID Loop saved as adjusted to PID format.
(2) K device PID parameter area
Refer to PIDRUN instruction to assign parameter positions in K device of each loop

2) Quick Start
(1) You should assign an external loop and an internal loop correctly.
(2) If you use the loop on other instruction like PIDCAS after using in PIDRUN instruction, control operation can
operate abnormally.

3) Program Example

4-273
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.28.11 SCAL, SCALP, DSCAL, DSCALP, RSCAL, RSCALP

Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O - O O O - O - - O O O O O
SCAL(P) /
S2 O - O - - - O - - - O O O O
DSCAL(P) / 4~7 O - -
S3 O - O - - - O - - - O O O O
RSCAL(P)
D O - O - - - O - - - O O O O

SCAL COMMAND
DSCAL S1 S2 S3 D
RSCAL
COMMAND
SCALP P S1 S2 S3 D
DSCALP
RSCALP means SCAL

[Area setting]
Operand Desciprtion Data size
S1 Device number of input data to input INT / DINT / REAL
S2 Scale upper limit of input data INT / DINT / REAL
S2+1 Scale lower limit of input data INT / DINT / REAL
S3 Scale upper limit of output data INT / DINT / REAL
S3+1 Scale lower limit of output data INT / DINT / REAL
D Device number to save output data INT / DINT / REAL
[Flag Set]
Device
Flag Content
number
Error In case of error in lower limit and upper limit of input data F110
Error In case scale upper limit of input data is same with lower limit F110

1) SCL, DSCAL, RSCAL

(1) S1, input value raged in S2+1≤S1≤S2 convert scaling to output value ranged S3+1≤D≤S3.
(2) In case S1 is out of range [S2+1~S2], each is replaced into S2+1, S2.
(3) In case S3 < S3+1, scaling conversion is available.
(4) In case it is set as scale upper limit and lower limit change, if error flag is On, output changes as 0.
(5) In case scale upper limit and lower limit of input data is same,in the following output condition, since
some denominator become 0, error flag is On, output changes to 0.
(6) Output condition

4-274
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

(7) The result of the operation of INT/DINT type is represented rounded off the number to one decimal
place.
(8) Be cautious when using more than ±1.000e+010 at a numerator or less than ±1.000e-010 at a
denominator, because, out of the range of expressable Max/Min value in the operation of REAL type,
it is represented as ±1.INF00000e+000
(9) In case operation result exceeds the max./min. value that is expression available in the REAL type
operation process, it is expressed as ±1.INF00000e+000, so when using more than ±1.000e+010 at
nominator or less than ±1.000e-010 at denominator, be careful.
(10) In case of operating DINT type, if setting value is more than 10 million, error may occurs.

4-275
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

2) Program example
(1) SCAL program scales value between 0 and 16000 to value between 100 and 200.

D100 = 16000
D101 = 0
D200 = 200
D201 = 100
subsitution

(2) RSCAL program scales value between 0 and 1000 to value between 2000 and 1000.

D100 = 1000
D102 = 0
D200 = 1000
D202 = 2000
substitution

4-276
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.28.12 SCAL2, SCAL2P, DSCAL2, DSCAL2P, RSCAL2, RSCAL2P

Area Available Flag
Instruction Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x 상수 U N D R
(F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O - O O O - O - - O O O O O
SCAL2(P) / S2 O - O O O - O - - O O O O O
DSCAL2(P)/ S3 O - O O O - O - - O O O O O 4~7 O - -
RSCAL2(P) S4 O - O O O - O - - O O O O O
D O - O O O - O - - - O O O O

SCAL2 COMMAND
DSCAL2 S1 S2 S3 S4 D
RSCAL2
COMMAND
SCAL2P P S1 S2 S3 S4 D
DSCAL2P
RSCAL2P Means SCAL2

[Area setting]
Operand Description Data size
S1 Device number of input device to change INT / DINT / REAL
S2 Standard deviation of input data INT / DINT / REAL
S3 Standard deviation of otput data INT / DINT / REAL
S4 Offset of outut data INT / DINT / REAL
D Device number to save output data INT / DINT / REAL
[Flag Set]
Device
Flag Content
number
Error In case input data standard deviation is 0 F110

1) SCL2, DSCAL2, RSCAL2

(1) It scales input S1 to output D through first order function determined by S2, S3, S4.
(2) If operation result exceeds the upper/lower limit of each data, it is expressed as max./min. value of
data size.
(3) In case S3/S2 is negative number, negative saling is available.
(4) In case scale upper/lower limit of input data is same, in the following output condition, since dominator
is 0, error flag is On, output changes to 0.
(5) Output condition

4-277
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

(7) The result of the operation of INT/DINT type is represented rounded off the number to one decimal
place.
(8) Be cautious when using more than ±1.000e+010 at a numerator or less than ±1.000e-010 at a
denominator, because, out of the range of expressable Max/Min value in the operation of REAL type,
it is represented as ±1.INF00000e+000

(9) In case operation result exceeds the max./min. value that is expression available in the REAL type
operation process, it is expressed as ±1.INF00000e+000, so when using more than ±1.000e+010 at
nominator or less than ±1.000e-010 at denominator, be careful.
(10) In case of operating DINT type, if setting value is more than 10 million, error may occurs.

2) Program example
(1) Program that scales input value to 1/16 and outputs it.

D100 = 16
D200 = 1
D300 = 0
substitution

(2) Program that scales input value to double and adds 10

D100 = 1
D200 = 2
D300 = 2000
substitution.

4-278
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.29 Time related Instruction

XGK XGB
○ X
4.29.1 DATERD, DATERDP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
DATERD(P) D O - O - - - - - - - O O O O 2 - - -

DATERD D

DATERDP P D

means DATERD
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
D Device number to save transferred data WORD

1) DATERD (Date Read)

(1) It reads date and time data of PLC to saves in D.
b15 b8 b7 b0
Month Year D
Time data Hour Date D+1
Sec Min D+2
100 years Day D+3

(2) All the time data value is provided in BCD format.

(3) ‘100 years’ above stands for the unit of 1000 and 100.
For example, if present PLC time is 14:59:40, Oct. 15, 2004 Friday, its result to be saved will be as
follows.
b15 b8 b7 b0
H10 H04 D
H14 H15 D+1
H40 H59 D+2
H20 H04 D+3

(4) Details of days: 0-Sunday, 1-Monday, 2-Tuesday, 3-Wednesday, 4-Thursday, 5-Friday, 6-Saturday.

2) Program Example

P00000
DATERD P1000

4-279
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4.29.2 DATEWR, DATEWRP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
DATEWR(P) D O - O - - - - - - - O O O O 2 O - -

DATEWR S

DATEWRP P S

means DATERD/DATEWR

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
S Device number time data is saved in WORD * 4
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If time data size specified in S exceeds its applicable range F110

1) DATEWR (Date Write)

(1) It sets PLC clock to time data value of the area specified in S, S+1, S+2, S+3.
(2) All the time data value is provided in BCD format.
(3) Details of days: 0-Sunday, 1-Monday, 2-Tuesday, 3-Wednesday, 4-Thursday, 5-Friday, 6-Saturday.

b15 b8 b7 b0
Month Year S
Hour Date S+1 Time data
Sec Min S+2
100 years Day S+3

2) Program Example

P00000
DATEWR P1000

4-280
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4.29.3 ADDCLK, ADDCLKP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O - O - - - O - - - O O O O
ADDCLK(P) S2 O - O - - - O - - O O O O O 4~6 O - -
D O - O - - - O - - - O O O O

ADDCLK S1 S2 D

ADDCLKP P S1 S2 D

means ADDCLK/SUBCLK
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
S1 Device number time data is saved in DWORD
S2 Device number time data is saved in DWORD
D Device number to save result in DWORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If S1, S2’s data exceeds time data size F110

1) ADDCLK (Add Clock)

(1) It saves the result of the time data value in specified area S1 plus the time data value in specified area S2, to
save in D, D+1.

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0

S1 Hour 16#00 S2 Hour 16#00 Hour 16#00 D
S1+1 Sec Min S2+1 Sec Min Sec Min D+1

(2) Time data value shall be input in BCD format. For example, if time data is in D00010, to which 1 hour
20 minimum 30 sec. is added to be in D20, its input will be as follows;
P00010

ADDCLK D00010 h30200100 D00020

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0

D00010 16#10 16#05 16#01 16#00 D00020 16#12 16#05
D00011 16#24 16#50 16#30 16#20 D00021 16#54 16#10

(3) If specified device S2’s lowest byte value exists, the value in that position will be not operated.

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0

S1 Hour 16#20 S2 Hour 16#12 Hour 16#20 D
S1+1 Sec Min S2+1 Sec Min Sec Min D+1

2) Program Example

P00000
ADDCLK P1000 P1100 P1200

4-281
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4.29.4 SUBCLK, SUBCLKP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O - O - - - O - - - O O O O
SUBCLK(P) S2 O - O - - - O - - - O O O O 4~6 O - -
D O - O - - - O - - - O O O O

SUBCLK S1 S2 D

SUBCLKP P S1 S2 D

means ADDCLK/SUBCLK
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
S1 Device number time data is saved in DWORD
S2 Device number time data is saved in DWORD
D Device number to save result in DWORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If S1, S2’ data exceeds time data size F110

1) SUBCLK (Sub Clock)

(1) It saves the result of the time data value in specified area S1 minus the time data value in specified area S2, to
save in D, D+1.

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0

S1 Hour 16#00 S2 Hour 16#00 Hour 16#00 D
S1+1 Sec Min S2+1 Sec Min Sec Min D+1

(2) Time data value shall be input in BCD format. For example, if time data is in D00010, from which 20 minimum 30
sec. is subtracted to be in D20, its input will be as follows;
P00010

SUBCLK D00010 h30200100 D00020

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0

D00010 16#10 16#05 16#01 16#00 D00020 16#09 16#05
D00011 16#24 16#50 16#30 16#20 D00021 16#54 16#29

(3) If specified device S2’s lowest byte value exists, the value in that position will be not operated.

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0

S1 Hour 16#20 S2 Hour 16#12 Hour 16#20 D
S1+1 Sec Min S2+1 Sec Min Sec Min D+1

2) Program Example

P00000
SUBCLK P1000 P1100 P1200

4-282
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4.29.5 SECOND, SECONDP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O - O - - - O - - O O O O O
SECOND(P) 2~4 O - -
D O - O - - - O - - - O O O O

SECOND SECOND S D

SECONDP SECONDP S D

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
S Data to transfer, or device number data is saved in DWORD
D Device number to save transferred data in DWORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If S, S+1, S+2’s data exceeds time data size respectively F110

1) SECOND (Second)
(1) It converts time data value in specified area S to second data to save D+1,D.

b15 b8 b7 b0 D+1 D
S Hour (h00~h23) 16#00
Sec. (0 ~ 86399)
S+1 Sec. (h00~h59) Min. (h00~h59)

(2) Time data shall be input in BCD format. And if applicable data range is exceeded, error (F110) may occur
respectively.

2) Program Example

P00000
SECOND P1000 P1100

4-283
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4.29.6 HOUR, HOURP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O - O - - - O - - O O O O O
HOUR(P) 2~4 O - -
D O - O - - - O - - - O O O O

HOUR D

HOURP P D

means SECOND/HOUR
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
S Data to transfer, or device number data is saved in DWORD
D Device number to save transferred data in DWORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If the second in specified S is larger than 86399 F110

1) HOUR (Hour)
(1) It converts second data in specified area S+1, S to time data to save in D+2, D+1, D.

b15 b8 b7 b0
S+1 S Hour (h00~h23)
D 16#00
Sec (0 ~ 86399) D+1 Sec (h00~h23) Min (h00~h23)

(2) Time data will be saved in BCD format.

2) Program Example

P00000
HOUR P1000

4-284
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.30 Divergence Instruction

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.30.1 JMP, LABEL
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
JMP n - - - - - - - - - O - - - - 1 - - -
LABEL n - - - - - - - - - O - - - - 5 - - -

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
n Position label to jump on (English : up to 16) STRING

1) JMP
(1) If JMP (label) instruction’s input contact point is On, it will jump on the place after specified label (LABEL), and
all the instructions between JMP and label will not be operated.
(2) Labels duplicated can not be used. However, JMP can be duplicated.
(3) It is recommended to insert the program which shall not be operated in emergency, between JMP and label.

2) Program Example
(1) When turning on input signal P00020, program between JMP SKIP_RING and label SKIP_RING is not executed.

4-285
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.30.2 CALL, CALLP, SBRT, RET
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
CALL(P) n - - - - - - - - - O - - - - 1 - - -
SBRT n - - - - - - - - - O - - - - 5 - - -

CALL(P) P n

END

SBRT SBRT n

RET RET

means CALL

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
n Function’s label to call (English : up to 16, Korean : up to 8 characters) STRING

1) CALL
(1) If input condition is allowed while program executed, the program between SBRT n ~ RET instructions will be
executed according to CALL n instruction.
(2) CALL No. can be duplicated, and the program between SBRT n ~ RET instructions shall be at the back of
END instruction.
(3) Error processing condition
. In case the total SBRT number exceeds 512: Program downloading unavailable.
. In case CALL n exists but SBRT n dose not.
(4) Calling other SBRT is available in SBRT for 16 times.
(5) In SBRT, CALL can be located next to END.

2) Program Example

P00020 P00050
( )
P00021 P00022 P00051
( )
P0002F
CALL INC_D0

END

SBRT INC_D0
F0092
INCP D00000
F0010
MOV D00000 P0006

RET

4-286
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.31 Loop Instruction

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.31.1 FOR, NEXT
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
FOR n O - O O O - O - - O O O O O 2
O - -
NEXT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1

FOR FOR n

NEXT NEXT

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
n Number of times to execute FOR~NEXT WORD

1) FOR~NEXT
(1) PLC meeting FOR in RUN mode will execute the process between FOR~NEXT instructions for n times and
then the next step of NEXT instruction.
(2) 1 ~ 65535 is available for n.
(3) Up to 16 is available for NESTING of FOR~NEXT. If this is exceeded, program downloading will be unavailable.
(4) As another method to escape from FOR~NEXT loop, BREAK instruction can be used.
(5) Since scan time may be longer than expected, use WDT instruction not to exceed WDT setting limit.

2) Program Example
Where PLC executes FOR~NEXT for 2 times in RUN mode.

FOR 2

NEXT

4-287
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.31.2 BREAK
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
BREAK - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 - - -

BREAK BREAK

1) BREAK
(1) It is used to escape from FOR~NEXT section.
(2) BREAK instruction can not be used solely. It shall be surely used only between FOR~NEXT.
If not used between FOR~NEXT, it will cause program error to make program downloading unavailable.

2) Program Example
(1) Where M0000 if On ignores 5 times of FOR~NEXT loop inside, escapes to ‘Loop End’ position and continue to
execute the operation.

4-288
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.32 Flag Instruction

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.32.1 STC, CLC
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
STC / CLC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 - - O

STC STC

CLC CLC

[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
To be set if execution condition of STC is On
Carry To be reset if execution condition of CLC is On F112
No change if STC or CLC execution condition is Off

1) STC (Set Carry Flag)

(1) If input condition is On, Carry Flag(F112) will be set(On).

2) CLC (Clear Carry Flag)

(1) If input condition is On, Carry Flag(F112) will be cleared (Off).

3) Program Example
(1) Where Carry Flag(F112) will be set if input M00000 is On.

M00000 Executed
STC Carry Flag(F112) contact point set

It clears the set Carry Flag(F112) if input M00001 is On.

M00001 Executed
STC Carry Flag(F112) contact point cleared

4-289
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.32.2 CLE
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
CLE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 - - -

CLE CLE

1) CLE (Clear Latch Error Flag)

(1) If input condition M0001 is On, Error Latch Flag (F115) will be cleared.

M00001
CLE

4-290
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.33 System Instruction

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.33.1 FALS
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
FALS N O O O O O - O - - O O - O O 2 - - -

FALS N

means FALS
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
N Number to be saved in F area (F0014) WORD

1) FALS
(1) It saves N in specified address of F area.
(2) h0000 ~ hFFFF is available for N, and the first produced N will be saved till it is cancelled.
(3) Use FALS 0000 to cancel FALS.

2) Program Example

P00000
FALS P1000
-

When turning on input signal, P00000, it saves data saved in D01000 at F0014.

4-291
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.33.2 DUTY
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
D - O - - - - - - - - - - - -
DUTY N1 - - - - - - - - - O - - - - 4 - - -
N2 - - - - - - - - - O - - - -

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
D F100 ~ F107 BIT-
N1 Number of scans to be ON WORD
N2 Number of scans to be OFF WORD

1) DUTY
(1) It generates the pulse to make user’s timing pulse F area (F100~F107) specified in D, On for N1 scan and Off
for N2 scan.
(2) If input condition is Off, the timing pulse (F100~F107) will be Off.
(3) If N1 = 0, the timing pulse will be always Off.
(4) If N1 > 0, N2 = 0 , the timing pulse will be always On.
(5) If DUTY instruction operates to start to generate the timing pulse with input condition once ON, the timing
pulse will be continuously produced even if duty’s input condition is Off.

Input
condition
DUTY
Timing
N1 scanN2 scan

2) Program Example

P0
DUTY F01000 3 1

Remark

(1) Timing pulse will keep operating even if DUTY instruction applicable to specific timing pulse is cancelled through
modification during Run.

4-292
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.33.3 TFLK
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
D1 O - - - - - - O - - - - - -
S1 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
TFLK 4~7 O - -
S2 O O O O O - O - - O O O O O
D2 O - O O O - O - - - O O O O

TFLK TFLK D1 S1 S2 D2

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
D1 Bit number to be On/Off for setting time BIT
S1 Time to turn the bit On specified in D1 WORD
S2 Time to turn the bit Off specified in D1 WORD
(D2+0) : Present time being executed
D2 (D2+1) : Time unit to be used (0-1ms, 1-10ms, 2-100ms, 3-1s) WORD
(D2+2) ~ (D2+4): System area (word * 3)

1) TFLK
(1) It is used to turn the specified D1 bit On for S1 time and then Off for S2 time when input contact point is On.

(2) If contact point is Off, the present time being executed in D2 will be initialized, and the bit specified in D1 will
be Off. If contact point is back On, the instruction will be executed from the first.
(3) Time unit has set to be used in D2+1.
0 – 1ms, 1 – 10ms, 2 – 100ms, 3 – 1s. If time unit is morer than 4, error will not occurred. And all is to be set
a 1s.
(4) In order to execute this instruction, 3-word data area is necessary. D2+2, D2+3, D2+4 will be used inside the
instruction for this. Thus, when setting D2, be concerned about each device’s range.

2) Program Example

P00000
TFLK P07000 P1000 P1100 P1200

Caution

(1) Be careful of using indirect designation (#) or index ([Z]) because the TFLK instruction has internal
processing parts without contact point ON.
For example, an error occurs without contact point ON if you use M100[Z10] for one of the TFLK instruction
operands and if Z10’s value exceeds 1947 that can be outside the M area.

4-293
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.33.4 WDT, WDTP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
WDT(P) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 - - -

WDT

WDTP P

means WDT

1) WDT (Watch Dog Timer Clear)

(1) It resets Watch Dog Timer during program operation.
(2) WDT is used to stop the program operation if time from the step 0 to END exceeds the maximum Watch Dog
Setting range during program execution.

2) Program Example

P0
WDT

4-294
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.33.5 OUTOFF
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
OUTOFF - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 - - -

1) OUTOFF
(1) If input condition is allowed, the whole output will be Off, and internal operation will go on with F113 (whole
output Off) Flag to be set in F area.
(2) If input condition is cancelled, normal output will be followed.

2) Program Example

P0
OUTOFF

4-295
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.33.6 STOP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
STOP - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 - - -

STOP STOP

1) STOP
(1) It converts to program mode after the scan presently in progress is completed.
(2) This instruction is used to stop the operation at specific time desired.

2) Program Example

P0
STOP

4-296
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.33.7 ESTOP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
ESTOP - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 - - -

ESTOP ESTOP

1) ESTOP (Emergency Stop)

(1) ESTOP instruction will stop the operation of PLC the moment it is executed.
(2) This instruction can be used in emergency.

2) Program Example

P0
ESTOP

4-297
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.33.8 INIT_DONE
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
INIT_DONE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 - - -

1) INIT_DONE (Initial Task Done)

(1) It is used to finish the Initial Task.
(2) It is used to finish the initial task program without exception. If it is not used in initial task program, you can not
entered the Scan program
2) Program Example
(1) If contact point P00000 becomes On, the initial task is finished.

P00000
INIT_DONE

4-298
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.34 Interrupt related Instruction

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.34.1 EI, DI
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
EI / DI - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 - - -

EI EI

DI DI

1) EI
All the prepared task programs are executed.

2) DI
All the prepared task programs are not be executed.

3) Program Example
it executes all of the Time-driven and Internal Task program in project.

EI

4-299
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.34.2 EIN, DIN
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
EIN / DIN n - - - - - - - - - O - - - - 1 - - -

EIN EIN n

DIN DIN n

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
n Interrupt number to specify. WORD

1) EIN
(1) Specified n task program is executed.

∗ If interrupt 5 enabled

P00001
EIN 5

2) DIN
(1) Specified n task program is stopped.

∗ If interrupt 5 disenabled

P00001
DIN 5

Remark

Task numbering is as follows;

Cyclic cycle Task : 0~ 31
External Contact Point Task : 32 ~ 63 (It is not available to set at XGK series)
Internal Contact Point Task : 64 ~ 95

4-300
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.35 Sign Reverse Instruction

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.35.1 NEG, NEGP, DNEG, DNEGP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
NEG(P)
D O - O - - - O - - - O O O O 2 - - -
DNEG(P)

NEG, DNEG D

NEGP, DNEGP P D

means NEG / DNEG

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
D Area to convert signs WORD/DWORD

1) NEG (Negative)
(1) It converts the sign of the detail in specified area D to save in D area.
(2) View Monitoring Option is available for monitoring if signed, and the value converted to negative is
useful only in Signed Operation.

P00001
NEGP D00010

Classification Before executed After executed

Area D0010 D0010
Data -00030(hFFE2) 00030(h001E)

2) DNEG( Double Word Negative )

(1) It changes the sign of content saved in D, D+1 and save in D, D+1.
(2) When seeing Monitoring View Option as Sign, monitoring is available, the value conveted into negative
is effective only in Sign operation.

Classification Before executed After executed

Area D0010, D0011 D0010, D0011
Data -30 (hFFFFFFE2) 30 (h0000001E)

3) Program Example
(1) Where D0020 value converted to negative is operated as signed.

M00000
NEGP D00020

MULP D00020 2 D10000

4-301
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.35.2 RNEG, RNEGP, LNEG, LNEGP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
RNEG(P)
D O - O - - - O - - - O O O O 2 - - -
LNEG(P)

RNEG, LNEG D

LNEGP, LNEGP P D

means RNEG/LNEG
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
D Area to convert signs REAL/LREAL

1) RNEG (Real Negative)

(1) It converts the sign of the detail in specified area D to save in D area.
(2) RNEG is used to reverse the single real number sign.

Before executed After executed

-3.383240094 3. 383240094

P00003
RNEG M0000

2) LNEG (Double real Negative)

(1) It converts the sign of the detail in specified area D to save in D area.
(2) LNEG is used to reverse the double real number sign.

Before executed After executed

-3.3832400941234567 3. 3832400941234567

P00003
LNEG M0000

3) Program Example

P00000
RNEG P1000

4-302
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.35.3 ABS, ABSP, DABS, DABSP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
ABS(P)
D O - O - - - O - - - O O O O 2 - - -
DABS(P)

ABS, DABS D

ABSP, DABSP P D

means ABS/DABS

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
D Area to convert absolute value. WORD/DWORD

1) ABS (Absolute Value)

(1) It converts the absolute value in specified area D to save in D area.

P00003
ABSP D00010

classification Before executed After executed

Area D0010 D0010
Data -00030(hFFE2) 00030(h001E)

2) DABS (Double Absolute Value)

(1) It converts the absolute value in specified area D, D+1 to save in D, D+1 area.

3) Program Example

P00000
ABS P1000

4-303
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.36 File related Instruction

XGK XGB
○ X
4.36.1 RSET, RSETP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
RSET(P) S O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 2 O - -

RSET RSET S

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Type
S Block number to convert, or device number (0~1) where Block number to convert is saved WORD

1) RSET (R_No. set)

(1) It converts the set block number to the block number specified S. Presently specified block number can be
identified with F158.
(2) Converting STOP to RUN state will make the block number initialized to 0.
(3) If S value exceeds the maximum block number range, Error Flag(F110) will be set.

Remark

Convertible block number is as follows;

XGK-CPUH/XGK-CPUA : 0~1
XGK-CPUS/XGK-CPUE : 0

Thus, as for XGK-CPUS, no RSET instruction will be needed.

2) Program Example

P00000
RSET P1000

When turin on P00000, it changes set block number into block number set in P1000.

4-304
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4.36.2 EMOV, EMOVP, EDMOV, EDMOVP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
EMOV(P)
4~7 - - -
EDMOV(P) S2 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
D O - O - - - O - - - - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
S1 Block number of flash area WORD
S2 Device number where data desired in the specified block S1 is saved. WORD
D Device number to save WORD

1) EMOV (Transfer Flash Memory Word Data)

(1) It transfers S2’s word data in the specified block S1 to D.

FLASH MEMORY

0
Block 0
32767
0
Block 1
32767

D Internal device

0
Block 31
32767

2) EDMOV (Transfer Flash Memory Double Word Data)

(1) It transfers S2+1,S2’s double word data in the specified block S1 to D+1, D.

3) Program Example

P00000
EMOV P1000 P1100 P1200

4-305
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4.36.3 EBREAD
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
EBREAD 2~4 - - -
S2 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

EBREAD EBREAD S1 S2

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
S1 Block number of flash area (0 ~ 31) WORD
S2 R device’s block number to save (0 ~ 1) WORD

1) EBREAD (Read Flash Memory Block)

(1) It reads 1 block detail in specified flash S1 to the block inside the internal RAM applicable to S2.
(2) Check Read Flag applicable to the block number to ensure it is completed.

M00021
EBREAD 1 1

FLASH MEMORY
R device
0 0
. .
Block 0 Block 0
. .
32767 32767
0 0
. .
Block 1 Block 1
. .
32767 32767
. (S2)
.
.
0
.
Block 31
.
32767

(S1)

2) Program Example

P00000
EBREAD P1000 P1100

4-306
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4.36.4 EBWRITE
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
EBWRITE 2~4 - - -
S2 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

EBWRITE EBWRITE S1 S2

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
S1 Block number of R device (internal RAM) WORD
S2 Block number of flash area to save WORD

1) EBWRITE (Write Flash Memory Block)

(1) It writes 1 block detail in specified R device S1 to the block in specified flash area S2 when the rising edge
pulse is input. Check Write Flag applicable to the block number to ensure it is completed.

M00021
EBWRITE 0 14

FLASH MEMORY
R device
0 0
. .
Block 0 Block 0
. .
32767 32767
0 0
. .
Block 1 Block 1
. .
32767 32767
(S1) .
.
.
0
.
Block 31
.
32767

(S2)

2) Program Example

P00000
EBWRITE P1000 P1100

4-307
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4.36.5 EBCMP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
S1 O - O - - - O - - O O O O O
S2 O - O - - - O - - O O O O O
EBCMP 4~7 - - -
D1 O - O - - - O - - - O O O O
D2 O - O - - - O - - -- O O O O

EBCMP EBCMP S1 S2 D1 D2

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
S1 R device’s block number (CPUH : 0~1, CPUS : 0) WORD
S2 Flash memory’s block number (0~31) WORD
D1: Number not identical (0~20. If it is more than 20. no more Compare Operation
D1 will be executed) WORD
D1+1: Presently processed number of words
D2 Compare Operation completion status (0 or 1) WORD

1) EBCMP (Compare EEPRON Block)

(1) It compares the content of a block of R device (S1) with the content of a block of flash memory (S2) to check if
identical.
(2) If the device’s value specified in D2 is 1 and the value in D1 is 0, they are identified completely identical.
(3) If not identical, its number will be saved in D1. The position which is not identical will not be saved.

FLASH MEMORY
R devce
0 0
. .
Block 0 Compare Block 0
. .
32767 32767
0 0
. .
Block 1 Block 1
. .
32767 32767
(S1) .
.
Number of
discorded D1 .
Number of D1+1 0
processed .
Block 31
Completion .
D2 32767
whether or not

(S2)

2) Program Example

P00000
EBCMP P1000 P1100 P1200 P1300

4-308
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
4.36.6 EERRST ○ X
Area available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
EERRST - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 - - -

1) EERRST (EEPROM Error Reset)

(1) If input contact point becomes On, it is clear the Flash Block Status Flag (F0159, WORD) and the
Block Error Flag (F0164, DWORD).

Flag Type Description

BIT 0: Reading representative Flag
F0159 WORD BIT 1: Writing representative Flag
BIT 2: Error representative Flag
F0160 DWORD Block information of Reading executed
F0162 DWORD Block information of Writing executed
F0164 DWORD Block information of Error occurred

2) Program Example
When contact point M00001 becomes On, it is clear the Error bit of F0159 and F0164 (DWORD)

4-309
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.37 F area Control Instruction

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.37.1 FSET
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R Step (F110) (F111) (F112)
st
FSET D - - O - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

FSET FSET D

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
D Area of F10240 ~ F2047R in F area BIT

1) FSET
(1) It is to be set the bit between F10240~F2047F among the Special Relay Area F.
(2) It can be able to control the F area as shown below.

Flag Name Data Size Contact Point Function

_RTC_WR BIT F10240 Write the data in a RTC
_SCAN_WR BIT F10241 Initialize the Scan Value
_CHK_ANC_ERR BIT F10242 Request the Error of external device
_CHK_ANC_WAR BIT F10243 Request the Warning of external device
_INIT_DONE BIT F10250 Complete the Innitializing task execution
_ANC_ERR[n] WORD F1026 Information of the Error of external device
_ANC_WAR[n] WORD F1027 Information of the Warning of external device
_MON_YEAR_DT WORD F1034 Data of the clock information (Month/Year)
_TIME_DAY_DT WORD F1035 Data of the clock information (Time/Day)
_SEC_MIN_DT WORD F1036 Data of the clock information (Second/Minute)
_HUND_WK_DT WORD F1037 Data of the clock information (Hundred/Weekday)

2) Contact point function

(1) F10240: After moving the clock data which hits to each area in F1034~F1037 of clock information data area, If
F10240 bit is changed to On using the FSET instruction, RTC data of PLC is reflected in clock data of
F1034~F1037 area.
(2) F10241: It initializes the value of _SCAN_MAX, _SCAN_MIN, _SCAN_CUR.
(3) F10242: If this bit become Set and the value in F1026 area is not 0, the Error will occur. If Error is occurred, PLC
operation status is changed to Error status.
(4) F10243: If this bit become Set and the value in F1027 is not 0, the Warning will occur. If Warning is occurred,
P.S.LED of CPU module and CHK LED become On. If you want to the Warning to remove, Write ‘0’ in
F1027 and Set the F10242 bit then the Warning is removed. Refer to XGK-CPU User’s Manual Chapter 6,
7 About th F10242 and F10243 contact point more detail.

3) Program Example
(1) If contact point P00000 connected with external device is changed to On, Write ‘100’ in F1027(_ANC_WAR) and
Warning Falg become Set.

P00000
FWRITE 100 F1027

FSET F10243

4-310
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.37.2 FRST
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
FRST D - O - - - - - - - - - - - - 2 - - -

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
D F10240 ~ F2047F area in F area BIT

1) FRST
(1) It is used to instruction to reset the bit of F10240~F2047F in F area of Special Relay area.
(2) It is not need to use the FRST instruction because the bit of F10240 ~ F10243 area become to reset after 1 Scan
automatically even if the bit become Set.

Flag name Data size Contact point Reset Operation

_RTC_WR BIT F10240
_SCAN_WR BIT F10241
Area of Reset automatically
_CHK_ANC_ERR BIT F10242
_CHK_ANC_WAR BIT F10243

2) Program Example
(1) Reset the No.3 bit of external Warning information area(_ANC_WAR)
(2) If P00000 is changed to On, NO3. bit of _ANC_WAR(F1027) is changed to Reset.

P00000
FRST F10272

4-311
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.37.3 FWRITE
Area available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st. (F110) (F111) (F112)
S O O O O O - O - - O O - O O
FWRITE 2~3 - - -
D - O - - - - - - - - - - - -

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
S Number of Data or Device WORD
D F1024 ~ F2047 area in F area WORD

1) FWRITE
(1) It is used to instruction to save temporary value in word of F1024~F2047 in Special Rely in F area. The value
saved by FWRITE is removed Powerr OFF.
(2) It is used to saved the word data in area repectively when detect the external device Error or Warning.

2) Program Example
(1) If P00001 connected with external device is changed to On, data of ‘1234’ is witten in F1026(_ANC_ERR) and
the request of detection of external device Error flag become Set. So PLC operation status is changed to Error
status.

P00001
P FWRITE 1234 F1026

FSET F10242

4-312
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.38 Bit Control Instruction in Word Area

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.38.1 LOADB, LOADBN
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
LOADB S O O O O - O - - - O O O O
2 - - -
LOADBN n O O O O O - O - - O O O O O

LOADB(N)
S n

means B or BN

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
S Word area of the relevant device WORD
n nth bit in Word area WORD

1) LOADB
(1) This instruction takes nth bit of word data (S) as a present operation result.
(2) It takes only lower 4 bits of n value to decide bit position. Therefore, it doesn’t occur an error when n value
exceeds the Word’s range.

2) LOADBN
(1) This instruction reverses nth bit of word data (S) and takes it as a present operation result.
(2) It takes only lower 4 bits of n value to decide bit position. Therefore, it doesn’t occur an error when n value
exceeds the Word’s range.

3) Program Example
If bit 4 of D00001 becomes 1, P0001D is ON.

If bit 5 of D00001 becomes 0, P0001E is ON.

4-313
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.38.2 ANDB, ANDBN
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
ANDB S O O O O - O - - - O O O O
2 - - -
ANDBN n O O O O O - O - - O O O O O

ANDB(N) S n sl

means B or BN

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
S Word area of the relevant device WORD
n nth bit in Word area WORD

1) ANDB
(1) This instruction takes nth bit of word data (S) and do AND operation with a present operation result.
(2) It takes only lower 4 bits of n value to decide bit position. Therefore, it doesn’t occur an error when n value
exceeds the Word’s range.

2) ANDBN
(1) This instruction reverses nth bit of word data (S) and do AND operation with a present operation result.
(2) It takes only lower 4 bits of n value to decide bit position. Therefore, it doesn’t occur an error when n value
exceeds the Word’s range.

3) Program Example
If 15th bit (b15) of D00003 is 1, P0001A becomes ON when M0003 is ON.

Output P0001A, P0001B according to bit 1 and bit 8 values of D00003.

4-314
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.38.3 ORB, ORBN
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
ORB S O O O O - O - - - O O O O
2 - - -
ORBN n O O O O O - O - - O O O O O

ORB(N)

S n

means B or BN

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
S Word area of the relevant device WORD
n nth bit in Word area WORD

1) ORB
(1) This instruction takes nth bit of word data (S) and do OR operation with a present operation result.
(2) It takes only lower 4 bits of n value to decide bit position. Therefore, it doesn’t occur an error when n value
exceeds the Word’s range.

2) ORBN
(1) This instruction reverses nth bit of word data (S) and do OR operation with a present operation result.
(2) It takes only lower 4 bits of n value to decide bit position. Therefore, it doesn’t occur an error when n value
exceeds the Word’s range.

3) Program Example
If bit 6 of D00000 becomes 1 or M00001 becomes 1, M0003F is ON.

4-315
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.38.4 BOUT
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
D O O O O - O - - - O O O O
BOUT 2 - - -
n O O O O O - O - - O O O O O

BOUT BOUT D n

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
D Word area of the relevant device WORD
n nth bit in Word area WORD

1) BOUT
(1) This instruction outputs a present operation result to nth bit of specified D area.
(2) It takes only lower 4 bits of n value to decide bit position. Therefore, it doesn’t occur an error when n value
exceeds the Word’s range.

2) Program Example
When M00002 is ON, 7th bit (b17) of D00001 becomes ON.

4-316
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.38.5 BSET, BRESET
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
BSET D O O O O - O - - - O O O O
2 - - -
BRESET n O O O O O - O - - O O O O O

BSET BSET D n

BRESET
BRESET D n

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
S Word area of the relevant device WORD
n nth bit in Word area WORD

1) BSET
(1) In sufficient condition, set nth bit of specified D area.
(2) It takes only lower 4 bits of n value to decide bit position. Therefore, it doesn’t occur an error when n value
exceeds the Word’s range.

2) BRESET
(1) In sufficient condition, reset nth bit of specified D area.
(2) It takes only lower 4 bits of n value to decide bit position. Therefore, it doesn’t occur an error when n value
exceeds the Word’s range.

3) Program Example
If M00002 is ON, it sets the 2nd bit (b2) of D00001. And if M00003 is ON, it resets the 2nd bit (b2) of D00001

4-317
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.39 Special/Communication Module related Instruction

XGK XGB
○ ○
4.39.1 GET, GETP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
S - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
GET(P) 4~7 - - -
D O - O - - - - - - - O O O O
N O - O - - - - - - O O O O O

GET sl S D N

GETP P sl S D N

means GET
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number where special module is installed (Set to the Hexadecimal) WORD
S Start address of internal memory in special module WORD
D Start address of Device in CPU which is saving the data to read WORD
N Number of data to read WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
PUT/GET If there is no special module installed on specified slot
F0015 ~ F0022
Error If PUT/GET instruction is not completed correctly

1) GET
(1) This instruction is used to read the data of special module with memory.
(2) It saves N word data from special module’s memory (specified in S: address) specified in sl (special module’s
slot number) to internal device area specified in D.
(3) If there is no special module specified in sl (special module’s slot number), or GET instruction is not completed
correctly, applicable position bit of PUT/GET Error Flag, F0015~F0022(WORD) will be set.
(4) The setting method of sl (slot number of special module) is to set the 2 places of Hexadecimal. If sl ‘h10’ is same
as below program, first number ‘1’ is a base number and second ‘0’ means a slot number.

M00021
GET h10 100 D00100 4

4-318
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

2) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal P00001 is changed to On, it saves 4-word data from special module’s fixed area address 0
installed on the slot number 3 of the base number 0, in D0010 ~ 00013.

P00001
GET h03 0 D00010 4

D00010 100 100 0

D00011 120 120 1
D00012 130 130 2
D00013 190 190 3

Special module
D area of CPU Fixed area

4-319
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4.39.2 PUT, PUTP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
S - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
PUT(P) 4~7 O - -
D O - O - - - - - - - O O O O
N O - O - - - - - - O - - - -

PUT sl S1 S2 N

PUTP P sl S1 S2 N

means PUT
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number where special module is installed (Set to the Hexadecimal) WORD
S1 Address in internal memory of special module WORD
S2 Start number of Device or a Constant, saved data will be saved in special module. WORD
N Number of data to save WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
PUT/GET If there is no special module installed on specified slot
F0015 ~ F0022
Error If PUT/GET instruction is not completed correctly

1) PUT
(1) This instruction is used to write the data in special module with memory.
(2) It writes N word data from device specified in S2, in specified special module’s memory (specified in S) in sl
(special module’s slot number).
(3) If there is no special module specified in sl (special module’s slot number), or PUT instruction is not completed
correctly, applicable position bit of PUT/GET Error Flag, F0015~F0022(WORD) will be set.
(4) The setting method of sl (slot number of special module) is to set the 2 places of Hexadecimal. If sl ‘h14’ is same
as below program, first number ‘1’ is a base number and second ‘4’ means a slot number.

M00021
PUT h14 2 D00100 4

b15 b0
F0015

F0016 1
If there is no special module in .
the Slot 0 of No.1 Base, or PUT .
instruction is not completed
correctly.
.
F0022

4-320
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

2) Program Example
(1) Where the 40-word data of D1000 ~ D1039 is written in special module’s starting memory address 10 ~ 50
installed on the slot number 7 of No.0 base when M00000 is On.

M00000
PUT h07 10 D1000 40

(2)Where the 3-word data of word M00010 ~ M00012 is written in A/D module’s internal memory address 5 ~ 7
installed on the slot number 3 of No.0 base.

M00000
PUT h03 5 M00010 3

4-321
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.40 Communication Module related Instruction

XGK XGB
4.40.1 P2PSN ○ X
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
N1 O - O O O - O - - O O O O O
P2PSN N2 O - O O O - O - - O O O O O 4~6 O - -
N3 O - O O O - O - - O O O O O

P2PSN P2PSN N1 N2 N3

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
N1 P2P number (1 ~8) WORD
N2 Block number( 0 ~ 63) WORD
N3 Station number (0 ~ 63) WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If N1, N2, N3’s value exceeds the applicable range F110

1) P2PSN
(1) P2PSN instruction is used to change the other’s P2P service station No. during run.
(2) It changes N1 P2P’s N2 block remote station No. to N3.
(3) Applicable Communication module : FDEnet, Cnet.
2) Error
(1) If N1(1~8), N2(0~63), N3(0~63)’s value exceeds the applicable range, Error Flag(F110) will be set.

3) Program Example

P00000
P2PSN P1000 P1100 P1200

If input condition P00000 is On, it changes block remote station number set as P1100 among P2P number
set as P1000 into station number set as P1200.

4-322
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4.40.2 P2PWRD
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
N1 O - O O O - O - - O O O O O
N2 O - O O O - O - - O O O O O
P2PWRD N3 O - O O O - O - - O O O O O 4~6 O - -
N4 O - O O O - O - - O O O O O
N5 O - O O O - O - - - O O O O

P2PWRD P2PWRD N1 N2 N3 N4 N5

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
N1 P2P number (1 ~ 8) WORD
N2 Block number( 0 ~ 63) WORD
N3 Variable number (1 ~ 4) WORD
N4 Variable size [n byte] (0 ~ 1400) WORD
N5 Device WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If N1, N2, N3, N4’s value exceeds the applicable range F110

1) P2PWRD
(1) P2PWRD instruction is used to change applicable P2P parameter block’s variable size and WORD
READ device area.
(2) Use N1, N2 and N3 to specify applicable P2P parameter, block and variable and then change variable
size and device to N4 and N5 respectively.
(3) Applicable communication modules: FEnet, FDEnet, Cnet.

2) Error
(1) If N1 (1~8), N2 (0~63), N3 (1~4), N4 (0~1400)’s value exceeds the applicable range, Error Flag (F110) will be
set.

3) Program Example

P00000
P2PWRD P1000 P1100 P1200 P1300 P1400

Remark

(1) As for individual instruction, 1~4 is used for variable number (N3) with no variable size (N4) applied.
(2) As for continuous instruction, 1 is always used for variable number (N3) with variable size (N4) applied.
(3) Variable size (N4) is used in byte unit.

4-323
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4.40.3 P2PWWR
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
N1 O - O O O - O - - O O O O O
N2 O - O O O - O - - O O O O O
P2PWWR N3 O - O O O - O - - O O O O O 4~6 O - -
N4 O - O O O - O - - O O O O O
N5 O - O O O - O - - - O O O O

P2PWWR P2PWWR N1 N2 N3 N4 N5

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
N1 P2P number (1 ~ 8) WORD
N2 Block number( 0 ~ 63) WORD
N3 Variable number (1 ~ 4) WORD
N4 Variable size (0 ~ 1400) WORD
N5 Device WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If N1, N2, N3, N4’s value exceeds the applicable range F110

1) P2PWWR
(1) P2PWWR instruction is used to change applicable P2P parameter block’s variable size and WORD WRITE
device area.
(2) Use N1, N2 and N3 to specify applicable P2P parameter, block and variable and then change variable size and
device to N4 and N5 respectively.
(3) Applicable communication modules: FEnet, FDEnet, Cnet.

2) Error
(1) If N1 (1~8), N2 (0~63), N3 (1~4), N4 (0~1400)’s value exceeds the applicable range, Error Flag (F110) will be
set.

3) Program Example

P00000
P2PWWR P1000 P1100 P1200 P1300 P1400

Remark

(1) As for individual instruction, 1~4 is used for variable number (N3) with no variable size (N4) applied.
(2) As for continuous instruction, 1 is always used for variable number (N3) with variable size (N4) applied.
(3) Variable size (N4) is used in byte unit.

4-324
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4.40.4 P2PBRD
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
N1 O - O O O - O - - O O O O O
N2 O - O O O - O - - O O O O O
P2PBRD N3 O - O O O - O - - O O O O O 4~6 O - -
N4 O - O O O - O - - O O O O O
N5 O - O O O - - O O - O - - -

P2PBRD P2PBRD N1 N2 N3 N4 N5

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
N1 P2P Number (1 ~ 8) WORD
N2 Block Number( 0 ~ 63) WORD
N3 variable Number (1 ~ 4) WORD
N4 variable Size (0 ~ 2000) WORD
N5 Device WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If N1, N2, N3, N4’s value exceeds the applicable range F110

1) P2PBRD
(1) P2PBRD instruction is used to change applicable P2P parameter block’s variable size and BIT READ device
area.
(2) Use N1, N2 and N3 to specify applicable P2P parameter, block and variable and then change variable size and
device to N4 and N5 respectively.
(3) Applicable communication modules: FEnet, FDEnet, Cnet.

2) Error
(1) If N1 (1~8), N2 (0~63), N3 (1~4), N4 (0~1400)’s value exceeds the applicable range, Error Flag (F110) will be
set.

3) Program Example

P00000
P2PBRD P1000 P1100 P1200 P1300 P1400

Remark

(1) As for individual instruction, 1~4 is used for variable number (N3) with no variable size (N4) applied.
(2) As for continuous instruction, 1 is always used for variable number (N3) with variable size (N4) applied.
(3) Variable size (N4) is used in byte unit.

4-325
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4.40.5 P2PBWR
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
N1 O - O O O - O - - O O O O O
N2 O - O O O - O - - O O O O O
P2PBWR N3 O - O O O - O - - O O O O O 4~6 O - -
N4 O - O O O - O - - O O O O O
N5 O - O O O - - O O - O - - -

P2PBWR P2PBWR N1 N2 N3 N4 N5

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
N1 P2P number (1 ~ 8) WORD
N2 Block number (0 ~ 63) WORD
N3 Variable number (1 ~ 4) WORD
N4 Variable size (0 ~ 2000) WORD
N5 Device WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If N1, N2, N3, N4’s value exceeds the applicable range F110

1) P2PBWR
(1) P2PWR instruction is used to change applicable P2P parameter block’s variable size and BIT WRITE device
area.
(2) Use N1, N2 and N3 to specify applicable P2P parameter, block and variable and then change variable size and
device to N4 and N5 respectively.
(3) Applicable communication modules: FEnet, FDEnet, Cnet.

2) Error
(1) If N1 (1~8), N2 (0~63), N3 (1~4), N4 (0~1400)’s value exceeds the applicable range, Error Flag (F110) will be
set.

3) Program Example

P00000
P2PBWR P1000 P1100 P1200 P1300 P1400

Remark

(1) As for individual instruction, 1~4 is used for variable number (N3) with no variable size (N4) applied.
(2) As for continuous instruction, 1 is always used for variable number (N3) with variable size (N4) applied.
(3) Variable size (N4) is used in byte unit.

4-326
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.41 Position Control Instruction (APM)

XGK XGB
4. 41.1 ORG ○ ○
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ORG 4~7 O - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

ORG ORG sl ax

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) ORG
(1) Function
(1) It is used to the positioning module to return to Origin Point.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl (positioning module’s slot
number) to return to Origin Point.

(2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

2) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number 1 to
return to Origin Point.

M00000
P ORG 1 0

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed on the
slot number 3 to return to Origin Point.

M00000
P ORG 3 D00010

4-327
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4. 41.2 FLT
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
FLT 4~7 O - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

FLT FLT sl ax

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) FLT
(1) Function
A) It is used to instruction the positioning module to set the Floating point.
B) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl (positioning module’s slot
number) to set Floating Origin Point.
(2) Error
A) For XGK, if a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, for XGB, if a value more than 1 is
input Error Flag (F110) will be set.

2) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number
1 to set Floating Point.

M00000
P FLT 1 0

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to return to Origin Point.

4-328
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4. 41.3 DST
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
DST n2 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n3 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
n4 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
n5 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

DST DST sl ax n1 n2 n3 n4 n5

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Target position DWORD
n2 Target speed DWORD
n3 Dwell time WORD
n4 M code number WORD
n5 Control word WORD

1) DST
(1) It is used to instruction the positiong module to start directly.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl (positioning module’s slot
number) to start directly.
(3) The axis to perform the instruction outputs the pulse with Target Position (n1), Target Speed (n2), Dwell Time
(n3), M Code (n4).
(4) Control Word (n5) has meaning of as described below per bit.

15 ~ 7 6~5 4 3~1 0
Adjusting 0: Absolute coordinate 0:Position Control
- -
Time 1: Relative coordinate 1:Speed Control

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed module,
Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the properties of
the special module.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it outputs the pulse to instruction the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the
slot number 1 to start directly, with Target Speed 500, Absolute Position up to 1000, Adjusting Time 3, Dwell Time
10ms and M Code 20.

M00000
P DST 1 0 1000 500 10 20 hE0

4-329
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4. 41.4 IST
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
IST ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

IST IST sl ax n1

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Step number to start WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) IST
(1) It is used to instruction the positiong module to start indirectly.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl (positioning module’s slot
number) to start n1 step indirectly.

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

2) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number
1 to start No.3 step indirectly.

M00000
P IST 1 0 3

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘Y’ installed on the slot number
3 to start the step specified in D00010 indirectly.

M00000
P IST 3 1 D00010

4-330
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4. 41.5 LIN
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
LIN 4~7 O - -
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
n2 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

LIN LIN sl ax n1 n2

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Step number to execute linear Interpolation WORD
n2 Axis setting to execute linear Interpolation WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) LIN
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to set the Linear Interpolatioin.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl (positioning module’s slot
number) to let n2 axis operate n1 step by Linear Interpolation.
(3) In order to set the axis to perform Linear Interplotion to n2, the bit of the axis assigned per bit shall be set as
follows;

15 ~ 3 2 1 0
Z axis
Unused Y axis X axis
(Unused in XGB)

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number
1 to let No.4 step operate 2 axes of X & Y by Linear Interplotion.

M00000
P LIN 1 0 4 3

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘Y’ installed on the slot number
3 to let the step specified in D00010 operate 3 axes of X, Y & Z by Linear Interplotion.

4-331
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 41.6 CIN
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
CIN 4~7 O - -
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
n2 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

CIN CIN sl ax n1 n2

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Step number to execute Circular Interpolation WORD
n2 Ordinate axis setting to execute Circular Interpolation WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) CIN
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to set the Linear Interpolatioin.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl (positioning module’s slot
number) to let n2 axis (as servant) operate n1 step by Circular Interplotion.
(3) In order to set the axis of ordinates to perform Linear Interplotion to n2, the bit of the axis assigned per bit shall
be set as follows;

15 ~ 3 2 1 0
Z axis
Unused Y axis X axis
(Unused in XGB)

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number 1 to let
No.4 step operate 2 axes of X (main) & Y (slave) by Circular Interplotion.
M00000
P CIN 1 0 4 2

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘Y’ installed on the slot number 3 to let
the step specified in D00010 operate the axes of Y (main) & Z (slave) by Circular Interplotion.

M00000
P CIN 3 1 D00010 4

4-332
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4. 41.7 SST
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - O O
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
SST n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n2 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
n3 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
n4 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

SST SST sl ax n1 n2 n3 n4

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 X axis step number to execute Simultaneous Start WORD
n2 Y axis step number to execute Simultaneous Start WORD
n3 Z axis step number to execute Simultaneous Start WORD
n4 Axis setting to execute Simultaneous Start WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) SST
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to set the simultaneous Start.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl (positioning module’s slot
number) to let the axes simultaneously operate n1 (X), n2 (Y) and n3 (Z) steps (unused in XGB case) by
Simultaneous Start.
(3) In order to set the axis (n4) to perform Simultaneous Start, the bit of the axis assigned per bit shall be set as
follows.

15 ~ 3 2 1 0
Z axis
Unused Y axis X axis
(Unused in XGB)

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number 1 to let the
axes simultaneously operate n1(X), n2 (Y) and n3 (Z) steps by Simultaneous Start.

M00000
P SST 1 0 1 2 3 7

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘Y’ installed on the slot number
3 to let the axes simultaneously operate the step specified in D00010 (X) and n10 step (Y) by Simultaneous
Start.

M00000
P SST 3 1 D00010 10 6

4-333
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4. 41.8 VTP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
VTP 4~7 O - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

VTP
VTP sl ax

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) VTP
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to switch Speed/Position control.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl (positioning module’s slot
number) to switch Speed/Position Control.

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number
1 to switch Speed/Position Control

M00000
P VTP 1 0

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to switch Speed/Position Control.

M00000
P VTP 3 D00010

4-334
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4. 41.9 PTV
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
PTV 4~7 O - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

PTV PTV sl ax

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) PTV
(1) It is used to inatruction the positioning module to switch Position/Speed control.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl (positioning module’s slot
number) to switch Position/Speed Control.

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number
1 to switch Position/Speed Control

M00000
P PTV 1 0

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to switch Position/Speed Control.

M00000
P PTV 3 D00010

4-335
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4. 41.10 STP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
STP 4~7 O - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

STP STP sl ax

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) STP
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to stop as decelerated.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl (positioning module’s slot
number) to stop as decelerated.

2) Error
(1) For XGK, if a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, for XGB, if a value more than 1 is input
Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number
1 to stop as decelerated.

M00000
P STP 1 0

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to stop as decelerated.

M00000
P STP 3 D00010

4-336
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 41.11 SKP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
SKP 4~7 O - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

SKP SKP sl ax

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) SKP
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to Skip.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl (positioning module’s slot
number) to skip.

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed module,
Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the properties
of the special module.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number 1 to skip.

M00000
P SKP 1 0

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed on the slot
number 3 to skip.

M00000
P SKP 3 D00010

4-337
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4. 41.12 SSP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
SSP n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n2 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
n3 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

SSP SSP sl ax n1 n2 n3

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Main axis’s position value to execute Position Synchronization DWORD
n2 Step number of instruction axis to operate when Position Synchronization starts WORD
n3 Main axis Setting for Position Synchronization WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) SSP
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to synchronize the position.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl (positioning module’s slot
number) to execute synchoronizing the position to operate n2 step of the axis ‘ax’ when the main axis of n3 is to
with n1.
(3) The available setting value on n3 is as described below.

Axis
Setting Value
XGK XGB
0 X axis X axis
1 Y axis Y axis
2 Z axis
No support
3 Encoder

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number 1 to
execute synchronizing the position to operate n3 step of the axis X when the main axis of Y is to synchronize
the position with 1000.

M00000
P SSP 1 0 1000 3 1

4-338
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4. 41.13 SSS
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
SSS n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n2 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
n3 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

SSS SSS sl ax n1 n2 n3

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
XGK: Main axis ratio of Speed Synchronization; XGB: Speed Synchronization ratio
n1 WORD
(0 ~ 100.00%)
n2 XGK: Slave axis ratio of Speed Synchronization; XGB: delay time (1 ~ 10ms) WORD
n3 Setting main axis of Speed Synchronization WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) SSS
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to synchronize the speed.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl (positioning module’s slot
number) to execute synchronizing the speed to operate the main axis of n3 with main axis ratio of n1 and slave
axis ratio of n2.
(3) The available setting value on n3 is as described below.

Axis
Setting Value
XGK XGB
0 X axis X axis
1 Y axis Y axis
2 Z axis High-speed counter Ch0
3 Encoder High-speed counter Ch1
4 High-speed counter Ch2
No support
5 High-speed counter Ch3

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number 1 to
execute synchronizing the speed to operate the main axis of Y with a main and slave axis ratio of 4 : 3.

M00000
P SSS 1 0 4 3 1

4-339
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4. 41.14 POR
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - O - - - -
POR ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

POR POR sl ax n1

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Target position to change DWORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) POR
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to override position.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl( positioning module’s slot
number) to override position to change the target position to n1 during run.

2) Error
(1) For XGK, if a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, for XGB, if a value more than 1 is input
Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number
1 to override position to change its target position to 20000.

M00000
P POR 1 0 20000

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to override position to change its target position to the value specified in D00020.

M00000
P POR 3 D00010 D00020

4-340
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4. 41.15 SOR
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
SOR ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

SOR SOR sl ax n1

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Target Speed to change DWORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) SOR
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to override the speed.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to override speed to change the target speed to n1 during run.

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number
1 to override speed to change its target speed to 5000

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to override speed to change its target speed to the value specified in D00020.

4-341
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4. 41.16 PSO
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
PSO 4~7 O - -
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
n2 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

PSO PSO sl ax n1 n2

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Position to change speed DWORD
n2 Target speed to change DWORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) PSO
(1)It is used to instruction the positioning module to override position-specified.
(2)It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to override position-specified speed to change the target speed to n2 when the present position is n1
during run.

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number
1 to override position-specified speed to change its target speed to 2000 when the present position is
5000.

M00000
P PSO 1 0 5000 2000

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to override position-specified speed to change its target speed to the value
specified in D00030 when the present position is D00020.

M00000
P PSO 3 D00010 D00020 D00030

4-342
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 41.17 NMV
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
NMV 4~7 O - -
ax O - - O - - O - - O - O O O

NMV NMV sl ax

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) NMV
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to operate continuously.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to operate continuously during run. If the instructioned axis ‘ax’ is running n step, it will change position
and speed to target position and target speed specified in (n+1) as soon as instructioned.

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number
1 to operate continuously.

M00000
P NMV 1 0

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to operate continuously.

M00000
P NMV 3 D00010

4-343
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4. 41.18 INCH
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
INCH ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

INCH INCH sl ax n1

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Target Position DWORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) INCH
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to inch.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to inch by n1.

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number
1 to inch by 100.

M00000
P NMV 1 0

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to inch by 10 backward.

M00000
P NMV 3 D00010

4-344
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 41.19 RTP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
RTP 4~7 O - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

RTP RTP sl ax

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) RTP
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to return to position previous to manual operation.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to return to position previous to manual operation.

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number
1 to return to position previous to manual operation.

M00000
P RTP 1 0

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to return to position previous to manual operation.

M00000
P RTP 3 D00010

4-345
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4. 41.20 SNS
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
SNS ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

SNS SNS sl ax n1

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Setting step number of next operation WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) SNS
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to change operation step to the next step.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to change operation step to the next step n1.

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number
1 to change operation step to the next step number 10.

M00000
P SNS 1 0 10

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to change operation step to the next step value specified in D00020.

M00000
P SNS 3 D00010 D00020

4-346
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 41.21 SRS
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
SRS ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

SRS SRS sl ax n1

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Setting step of repeated operation WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110
1) SRS
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to chage pepeated operation step.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to change repeated operation step to n1.

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number
1 to change repeated operation step to step number 10.

M00000
P SNS 1 0 10

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to change repeated operation step to the value specified in D00020.

M00000
P SNS 3 D00010 D00020

4-347
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4. 41.22 MOF
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
MOF 4~7 O - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O O O O O

MOF MOF sl ax

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) MOF
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to make produced M code Off.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to make produced M code Off so to delete the value of M code.

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number
1 to make produced M code off so to delete the value of M code.

M00000
P MOF 1 0

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to make produced M code off so to delete the value of M code.

M00000
P MOF 3 D00010

4-348
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4. 41.23 PRS
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
PRS ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

PRS PRS sl ax n1

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Setting present position to change. DWORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) PRS
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to change present position.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to change present position to n1.

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number
1 to change present position to -100.

M00000
P PRS 1 0 -100

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to change present position to the value specified in D00020.

M00000
P PRS 3 D00010 D00020

4-349
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 41.24 ZOE
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ZOE 4~7 O - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

ZOE ZOE sl ax

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) ZOE
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to allw zone output.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to allow zone output.

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed module,
Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the properties
of the special module.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number
1 to allow zone output.

M00000
P ZOE 1 0

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to allow zone output.

M00000
P ZOE 3 D00010

4-350
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 41.25 ZOD
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMKL F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ZOD 4~7 O - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

ZOD ZOD sl ax

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) ZOD
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to prohibit zone output.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to prohibit zone output.

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number
1 to prohibit zone output

M00000
P ZOD 1 0

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to prohibit zone output.

M00000
P ZOD 3 D00010

4-351
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 41.26 EPRS
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
EPRS ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O -
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

ERPS ERPS sl ax n1

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Setting encoder value to change DWORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) EPRS
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to change present Encoder Value.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to change present Encoder Value to n1.

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number
1 to change present Encoder Value to -100.

M00000
P EPRS 1 0 -100

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to change present Encoder Value to the value specified in D00020.

M00000
P EPRS 3 D00010 D00020

4-352
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 41.27 TEA
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
TEA n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n2 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
n3 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
n4 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

TEA TEA sl ax n1 n2 n3 n4

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Teaching Data (target position or target speed) DWORD
n2 Setting step number to teach WORD
n3 Setting teaching method (0: RAM teaching or 1: ROM teaching) WORD
n4 Setting teaching item (0: Position teaching or 1: Speed teaching) WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) TEA
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to teaching.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to change target position or target speed to n1 value, according to n4 value among n2 step data of the
axis ‘ax’.
(3) It is available to RAM teaching or ROM teaching according to the setting value of n3.
Setting value available for n4 is as shown below

Setting Value Teaching Method

0 RAM Teaching
1 ROM Teaching

(4) Setting value available for n4 is as shown below;

Setting Value Teaching Item
0 Position Teaching
1 Speed Teaching

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number 1 to
change target position of step number 10 of the axis ‘X’ to 3000 with ROM Teaching.

M00000
P TEA 1 0 3000 10 1 0

4-353
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 41.28 TEAA
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
TEAA n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n2 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
n3 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
n4 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

TEAA TEAA sl ax n1 n2 n3 n4

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Setting head step number to teach WORD
n2 Setting teaching method (0: RAM teaching or 1: ROM teaching) WORD
n3 Setting teaching item (0: Position teaching or 1: Speed teaching) WORD
n4 Setting the number of teaching WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) TEAA
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to teaching array.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to change target position or target speed to the value saved in teaching data area, according to n2 as
many as the number specified in n1 ~ n4 steps of the axis ‘ax’ with teaching array. At this time, based on the
value specified in n3, RAM or ROM teaching will be available.

Setting value available for n2 is as shown below;

Setting Value Teaching Method

0 RAM Teaching
1 ROM Teaching

Setting value available for n3 is as shown below;

Setting Value Teaching Item

0 Position Teaching
1 Speed Teaching

(3) Teaching data value shall be specified in memory area inside an additional positioning module before teaching
array instruction is given.

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number 1 to
change target speed of 5 steps starting from step number 10 of the axis ‘X’ with RAM Teaching Array.

M00000
P TEAA 1 0 10 0 1 5

4-354
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4. 41.29 EMG
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
EMG 4~7 O - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

EMG EMG sl ax

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) EMG
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to perform Emergent Stop.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to perform Emergent Stop.

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number
1 to perform Emergent Stop.

M00000
P EMG 1 0

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to perform Emergent Stop.

M00000
P EMG 3 D00010

4-355
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4. 41.30 CLR
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
CLR ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

CLR CLR sl ax n1

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Setting prohibited output to clear WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) CLR
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning to reset generated Error.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to reset generated error to delete. Clearing the prohibited output state is available based on specified
n1.

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number
1 to reset generated error to delete, and to clear prohibited output state.

M00000
P CLR 1 0 1

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to reset generated error to delete.

M00000
P CLR 3 D00010 0

4-356
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 41.31 ECLR
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - -
ECLR 4~7 O - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

ECLR ECLR sl ax

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) ECLR
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to reset the Error history.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to reset saved error history to delete.

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number
1 to reset saved error history to delete.

M00000
P ECLR 1 0

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to reset saved error history to delete.

M00000
P ECLR 3 D00010

4-357
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 41.32 PST
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
PST ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

PST PST sl ax n1

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Number of Point Operation Data WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110
1) PST
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to perform Point Operation.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to perform Point Operation, based on step value saved in Point Operation Data area.

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number 1 to
perform Point Operation about the 5 data saved in Point Operation Data area of the axis ‘X’.

4-358
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
4. 41.33 TBP ○ X
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ax O - - O - - O - - O - O O O
TBP 4~7 O - -
n1 O - - O - - O - - O - O O O
n2 O - - O - - O - - O - O O O

TBP TBP sl ax n1 n2

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Teaching Data (changed value of the item to change among basic parameters) DWORD
n2 Item to change among basic parameters. WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) TBP
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module with basic parameters teaching.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to change n2 to n1 among basic parameters, with basic parameters teaching.

Setting Value Item

1 Speed Limit
2 Bias Speed
3 Adjusting Time 1
4 Adjusting Time 2
5 Adjusting Time 3
6 Adjusting Time 4
7 Pulses per rotation
8 Distance per rotation
9 Pulse output mode 0:CW/CCW 1:Pulse/Dir 2:Phase A/B
10 Unit 0:pulse 1:mm 2:inch 3:degree
11 Unit multiple 0:x1 1:x10 2:x100 3:x1000

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number
1 to change speed limit to 200000 among basic parameters of the axis ‘X’, with basic parameters
teaching.

M00000
P TBP 1 0 200000 1

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to change bias speed to the value specified in D00020 among basic parameters,
with basic parameters teaching.
M00000
P TBP 3 D00010 D00020 2

4-359
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 41.34 TEP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ax O - - O - - O - - O - O O O
TEP 4~7 O - -
n1 O - - O - - O - - O - O O O
n2 O - - O - - O - - O - O O O

TEP TEP sl ax n1 n2

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Teaching Data (changed value of the item to change among extended parameters) DWORD
n2 Item to change among extended parameters. WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) TEP
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning with extended parameters teaching.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to change n2 to n1 among extended parameters, with extended parameters teaching.

Setting
Value Item
1 Maximum of S/W
2 Minimum of S/W
3 Backlash Compensation
4 Output Time of Positioning Complete
5 S-Curve Rate
6 Select External Instruction 0:Start 1:JOG 2:Skip
7 Pulse Output Direction 0:Forward 1:Reverse
8 Adjusting Pattern 0:Trapezoid 1:S-Curve
9 M Code Mode 0:None 1:With 2:After
10 Display Position during Uniform Operation 0:not displayed 1:displayed
11 Detect Maximum/Minimum during Uniform 0:not detected 1:detected
Operation
12 External Speed/Position Control Switching 0:prohibited 1:allowed
Allowed
13 External Instruction Allowed 0:prohibited 1:allowed
14 External Stop Allowed 0:prohibited 1:allowed
15 Simultaneous External Start Allowed 0:prohibited 1:allowed
0:Dwell Time 1:In-Position Sign
16 Condition of Positioning Complete 2: Dwell Time AND In-Position Sign
3: Dwell Time OR In-Position Sign

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

4-360
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number
1 to change Backlash Compensation to 100 among extended parameters, with extended parameters
teaching.

M00000
P TEP 1 0 100 3

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to change External Stop Allowed to the value specified in D00020 among extended
parameters, with extended parameters teaching.

M00000
P TEP 3 D00010 D00020 14

4-361
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 41.35 THP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ax O - - O - - O - - O - O O O
THP 4~7 O - -
n1 O - - O - - O - - O - O O O
n2 O - - O - - O - - O - O O O

THP THP sl ax n1 n2

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Teaching Data (changed value of the item to change among returned parameters to origin) DWORD
n2 Item to change among returned parameters to origin WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) THP
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module with returned parameters teaching.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to change n2 to n1 among returned parameters to origin point, with returned parameters teaching.

Setting Item
Value
1 Address of Origin Point
2 Return to Origin Point, High Speed
3 Return to Origin Point, Low Speed
4 Return to Origin Point, Adjusting Time
5 Return to Origin Point, Dwell Time
6 Compensation of Origin Point
7 Return to Origin Point, Restart Time
0: DOG/Origin Point(OFF) 1: DOG/Origin Point(ON)
2: Maximum& Minimum/Origin Point 3:DOG
8 Returning Method to Origin Point
4: Return to Origin Point at High Speed
5: Maximum & Minimum
9 Returning Direction to Origin Point 0:Forward 1:Reverse

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

4-362
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number
1 to change Restart Time of Return to Origin Point to 100ms among returned parameters to origin
point, with returned parameters teaching.

M00000
P THP 1 0 100 7

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to change Address of Origin Point to the value specified in D00020 among
returned parameters to origin point, with returned parameters teaching.

M00000
P THP 3 D00010 D00020 1

4-363
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 41.36 TMP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ax O - - O - - O - - O - O O O
TMP 4~7 O - -
n1 O - - O - - O - - O - O O O
n2 O - - O - - O - - O - O O O

TMP TMP sl ax n1 n2

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Teaching Data (changed value of the item to change among manual parameters) DWORD
n2 Item to change among manual parameters WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) TMP
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module with manual parameters teaching.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to change n2 to n1 among manual parameters, with manual parameters teaching.
(3) Setting value of n2 is as shown below.

Setting Value Item

1 Jog High Speed
2 Jog Low Speed
3 Jog Adjusting Time
4 Inching Speed

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number
1 to change Jog High Speed to 5000 among manual parameters of the axis ‘X’, with manual
parameters teaching.

M00000
P TMP 1 0 500 1

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to change Jog Adjusting Time to the value specified in D00020 among manual
parameters, with manual parameters teaching.

M00000
P TMP 3 D00010 D00020 3

4-364
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 41.37 TSP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
TSP ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n1 O - O - - - O - - O -- O O O

TSP TSP sl ax n1

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Teaching Data(changed value of input signal parameter) WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) TSP
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module with Input Signal parameters teaching.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to change its input signal parameter to n1, with input signal parameters teaching.
(3) Each bit of n1 value is assigned to input signal. If the bit’s value is o, its applicable signal will be identified as A
contact point, and if the bit’s value is 1, its applicable signal will be identified as B contact point.

Bit Input signal Bit Input signal

0 Maximum Signal 6 Instruction Signal
1 Minimum Signal 7 Auxiliary Instruction Signal
2 Near Origin Point Signal 8 Speed/Position Control Switching Signal
3 Origin Point Signal 9 In-Position Signal
4 Emergent Stop Signal 10 External Simultaneous Start Signal
5 Decelerated Stop Signal 11 ~ 15 Unused

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number
1 to change Emergent Stop Signal to B contact point among input signal parameters of the axis ‘X’,
with input signal parameters teaching

M00000
P TSP 1 0 h0010

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to change input signal parameter to the value specified in D00020, with input
signal parameters teaching.

M00000
P TSP 3 D00010 D00020

4-365
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 41.38 TCP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
TCP 4~7 O - -
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
n2 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

TCP TCP sl ax n1 n2

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Teaching Data (changed value of the item to change among common parameters) DWORD
n2 Item to change among common parameters WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) TCP
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module with common parameters teaching.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to change n2 to n1 among common parameters, with common parameters teaching.
(3) Setting value available for n2 is as shown below;

Setting
Item
Value
1 Pulse Output Level 0:Low Active 1:High Active
2 Circular Interpolation Type 0:Middle point 1:Central point
0:CW/CCW(1-Phase 1-multiplier)
1:CW/CCW(1-Phase 2-multiplier)
2:Pulse/Dir(1-Phase 1-multiplier)
3 Encoder Pulse Input Mode 3:Pulse/Dir(1-Phase 2-multiplier)
4:PhaseA/B(2-Phase 1-multiplier)
5:PhaseA/B(2-Phase 2-multiplier)
6:PhaseA/B(2-Phase 4-multiplier)
4 Encoder’s Auto Reloaded Value
5 Zone Output Mode 0:Individual Output
1:Total Output
6 Zone1 Axis Setting
7 Zone2 Axis Setting 0:X axis 1:Y axis 2:Z axis 3:Encoder
8 Zone3 Axis Setting
9 Zone1 On Area
10 Zone1 Off Area
11 Zone2 On Area
12 Zone2 Off Area
13 Zone3 On Area
14 Zone3 Off Area

4-366
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number
1 to change Pulse Output Level to High Active among common parameters, with common parameters
teaching.

M00000
P TCP 1 0 1 1

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to change Encoder Pulse Input Mode to the value specified in D00020, with
common parameters teaching

M00000
P TCP 3 D00010 D00020 3

4-367
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ ○
4. 41.39 WRT
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - O O O
WRT ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

WRT WRT sl ax n1

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Axis to save parameter in WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) WRT
(1) It is used to the instruction moduel to save parameter.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to save presently run parameter of the axes n1, in Flash ROM.
(3) In order to set the axis to save parameter in n1, the bit of the axis assigned per bit shall be set as follows;

3~ 15 2 1 0
XGK
Unused Z axis Y axis X axis

n1 = 0 n1 = 1 n1 = 2
XGB High-speed counter
Positioning parameter PID parameter
parameter

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

3) Program Example

M00000
P WRT 0 P1100 P1200

4-368
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 41.40 SRD
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - O O O
SRD ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
D O - O - - - O - - - - O O O

SRD SRD sl ax D

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
D Device name & number in CPU WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) SRD
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to read its present status.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to read its present status so to save in CPU area specified in D.
(3) Value to be saved in CPU area specified in D is as shown below;

CPU Area Size Status Type

D WORD Operation Status Information 1
D+1 WORD Operation Status Information 2
D+2 WORD Axis Information
D+3 WORD External Input Signal Status
D+4 DWORD Present Position
D+6 DWORD Present Speed
D+8 WORD Step Number
D+9 WORD M Code Number
D+10 WORD Error Information
D+11 ~ D+20 WORD Error History 1 ~ 10
D21 DWORD Encoder Value

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

3) Program Example

P00000
SRD 0 P1100 P1200

4-369
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 41.41 PWR
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
PWR 4~7 O - -
S O - O - - - O - - - - O O O
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

PWR PWR sl ax S n1

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
S Head aderess of Device which is saved in point operation data WORD
n1 Number of point operation step WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) PWR
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to move the value of point operation step to be used to the axis ‘ax’ of the positioning module as many
as n1 from CPU area specified in S.
(2) Number of point operation steps to be specified in n1 is 1 ~ 20.
(3) Value to read from CPU area specified in S is as below;

CPU Area Size Point Operation Step

S WORD Point Operation Step 1
~ ~ ~
S+19 WORD Point Operation Step 20

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F0110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

3) Program Example

P00000
PWR 0 P1200 P1300 P1400

4-370
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 41.42 TWR
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
TWR 4~7 O - -
S O - O - - - O - - - - O O O
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

TWR TWR sl ax S n1

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
S Head address of Device which is saved data of plural teaching DWORD
n1 Number to plural teaching WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) TWR
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module the teaching data value to be used for plural teaching.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to move the teaching data value to be used for plural teaching, to the axis ‘ax’ of the positioning
module as many as n1 from CPU area specified in S.
(3) Number of point operation steps to be specified in n1 is 1 ~ 16.
(4) Value to read from CPU area specified in S is as below.

CPU Area Size Teaching Data

S DWORD Teaching Data 1
~ ~
S+19 DWORD Teaching Data 16

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F0110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

3) Program Example

P00000
TWR 0 P1200 P1300 P1400

4-371
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 41.43 TMD
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
TMD n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n2 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
n3 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

TMD TMD sl ax n1 n2 n3

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction (0: X-axis, 1: Y-axis, 2: Z-axis) WORD
n1 Operation data value to convert DINT
n2 Operation data Item to convert (1~11) WORD
n3 Operation data Step number to convert WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) TMD
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to convert the operation data value.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to convert n2 items to n1 value among the n3 steps of operation data.
(3) You can set n2 values up as below.

Setting
Item Data range Data type
Value
1 Target Position -2147483648 ~ 2147483647 DINT
Circular Interpolation Asistant
2 -2147483648 ~ 2147483647 DINT
Position
3 Operation Speed 0 ~ Maximum speed DWORD
4 Dwell Time 0 ~ 50000 WORD
5 M Code Number 0 ~ 65535 WORD
6 Control Method 0: Position control, 1: Speed control WORD
7 Operation Method 0: Single, 1: Repeat WORD
8 Operation Pattern 0: End, 1: Repeat, 2: Continue WORD
0: Absolute coordinates,
9 Coordinates WORD
1: Relative coordinates
10 Adjusting Number 1~4 WORD
Circular Interpolation
11 0: CW, 1: CCW WORD
Direction

2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F0110) will be set.

3) Program Example
If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s X-axis installed on the slot number 0 to
change the target position value is specified in D00020 among the position data of X-axis to 10000, with
common parameters teaching

4-372
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.42 Position Control Instruction (XPM)

XGK XGB
○ X
4. 42.1 XORG
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
XORG 4~7 O - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to the positioning module to return to Origin Point.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl (positioning module’s slot
number) to return to Origin Point.

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘1’ installed on the slot number 1 to
return to Origin Point.

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed on the
slot number 3 to return to Origin Point.

4-373
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 42.2 XFLT
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
XFLT 4~7 O - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to set the Floating point.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl (positioning module’s slot
number) to set Floating Origin Point.
2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘1’ installed on the slot number
1 to set Floating Origin Point.

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to set Floating Origin Point.

4-374
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
4. 42.3 XDST ○ X

Area Available Flag

Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
XDST n2 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n3 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
n4 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
n5 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Target position DWORD
n2 Target speed DWORD
n3 Dwell time WORD
n4 M code number WORD
n5 Control word WORD

[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positiong module to start directly.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl (positioning module’s slot
number) to start directly.
(3) The axis to perform the instruction outputs the pulse with Target Position (n1), Target Speed (n2), Dwell Time
(n3), M Code (n4).
(4) Control Word (n5) has meaning of as described below per bit.

15 ~ 12 11 ~ 10 9~8 7~5 4 3~2 1

0:Position Control
0: Absolute coordinate
- DEC. time ACC. time - - 1:Speed Contro
1: Incremental coordinate
2: Feed Control

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it outputs the pulse to instruction the positioning module’s axis ‘1’ installed on the
slot number 1 to start directly, with Target Speed 500, Absolute Position up to 1000, ACC/DEC Time 3, Dwell Time
10ms and M Code 20.

4-375
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4. 42.4 XIST ○ X

Area Available Flag

Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
XIST ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Step number to start WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positiong module to start indirectly.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl (positioning module’s slot
number) to start n1 step.

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘1’ installed on the slot number
1 to start No.3 step.

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘1’ installed on the slot number
3 to start the step specified in D00010 indirectly.

4-376
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 42.5 XSST
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
XSST ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Axis to operate WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to set the simultaneous Start.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl (positioning module’s slot
number) to let the axes set in n1 simultaneously operate
(3) In order to set the axis to perform Simultaneous Start, the bit of the axis assigned per bit shall be set as follows.

15 ~ 4 3 2 1 0

Unused Axis 4 Axis 3 Axis 2 Axis 1

Namely, if n1 is set as h000B, axis 1, 2, 4 will operate

Enven though you don’t include axis set in ax in n1, ax will be included basically.
(4) In order to set step number of axis to operate, use XSWR or PUT/PUTP insturtion and set step number to
execute simultaneous start at simulatanous start step memory address per axis. This should be finished before
executing simultaneous start.

2) Error
(1) If o or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning moduleinstalled on the slot number 1 to let the axes
simultaneously operate axis 1, axis 2 and axis 4 by Simultaneous Start.

4-377
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 42.6 XVTP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
XVTP 4~7 O - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to switch Speed/Position control.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl (positioning module’s slot
number) to switch Speed/Position Control.

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘1’ installed on the slot number
1 to switch Speed/Position Control

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis designated in D00010 installed on the slot
number 3 to switch Speed/Position Control

4-378
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
4. 42.7 XPTV ○ X
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
XPTV 4~7 O - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to inatruction the positioning module to switch Position/Speed control.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl (positioning module’s slot
number) to switch Position/Speed Control.

2) Error
(1) If 0 more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘X’ installed on the slot number
1 to switch Position/Speed Control

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to switch Position/Speed Control.

4-379
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4. 42.8 XSTP ○ X

Area Available Flag

Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
XSTP 4~7 O - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Decelerating Time (0~ 2,147,483,647) WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to stop as decelerated.

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘1’ installed on the slot number
1 to stop as decelerated.

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to stop as decelerated.

4-380
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 41.9 XSKP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
XSKP 4~7 O - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to Skip.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl (positioning module’s slot
number) to skip.

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘1’ installed on the slot number 1 to skip.

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed on the slot
number 3 to skip.

4-381
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 42.10 XSSP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
SSP n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n2 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
n3 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

COMMAND
XSSP XSSP sl ax n1 n2 n3

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Main axis’s position value to execute Position Synchronization DWORD
n2 Step number of instruction axis to operate when Position Synchronization starts WORD
n3 Main axis Setting for Position Synchronization WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to synchronize the position.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl (positioning module’s slot
number) to execute synchoronizing the position to operate n2 step of the axis ‘ax’ when the main axis of n3 is to
with n1.
(3) The available setting value on n3 is as described below.
1 ~ 4 : axis 1 ~ axis 4
9 : encoder

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘1’ installed on the slot number 1 to
execute synchronizing the position to operate n3 step of the axis 1 when the main axis of Y is to synchronize the
position with 1000.

4-382
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 42.11 XSSS
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
XSSS n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n2 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
n3 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Main axis ratio of Speed Synchronization WORD
n2 Slave axis ratio of Speed Synchronization WORD
n3 Setting main axis of Speed Synchronization WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to synchronize the speed.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl (positioning module’s slot
number) to execute synchronizing the speed to operate the main axis of n3 with main axis ratio of n1 and slave
axis ratio of n2.
(3) The available setting value on n3 is as described below.
1 ~ 4 : axis 1 ~ axis 4
9 : encoder

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘1’ installed on the slot number 1 to
execute synchronizing the speed to operate the main axis of 2 with a main and slave axis ratio of 4 : 3.

4-383
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 42.12 XPOR
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
XPOR ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Target position to change DWORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to override position.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl ( positioning module’s slot
number) to override position to change the target position to n1 during run.

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘1’ installed on the slot number 1 to
override position to change its target position to 20000.

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to override position to change its target position to the value specified in D00020.

4-384
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 42.13 XSOR
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
XSOR ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Target Speed to change DWORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to override the speed.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to override speed to change the target speed to n1 during run.

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘1’ installed on the slot number
1 to override speed to change its target speed to 5000

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to override speed to change its target speed to the value specified in D00020.

4-385
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
4. 42.14 XPSO ○ X
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
XPSO 4~7 O - -
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
n2 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Position to change speed DWORD
n2 Target speed to change DWORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1)It is used to instruction the positioning module to override position-specified.
(2)It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to override position-specified speed to change the target speed to n2 when the present position is n1
during run.

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘1’ installed on the slot number
1 to override position-specified speed to change its target speed to 2000 when the present position is
5000.

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to override position-specified speed to change its target speed to the value
specified in D00030 when the present position is D00020.

4-386
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 42.15 XNMV
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
XNMV 4~7 O - -
ax O - - O - - O - - O - O O O

COMMAND
XNMV XNMV sl ax

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to operate continuously.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to operate continuously during run. If the instructioned axis ‘ax’ is running n step, it will change position
and speed to target position and target speed specified in (n+1) as soon as instructioned.

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘1’ installed on the slot number
1 to operate continuously.

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to operate continuously.

4-387
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 42.16 XINCH
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - O - - O - - - -
XINCH ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Target Position DWORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to inch.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to inch by n1.

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘1’ installed on the slot number
1 to inch by 100.

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to inch by 10 backward.

4-388
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 42.17 XRTP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
XRTP 4~7 O - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

COMMAND
XRTP XRTP sl ax

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to return to position previous to manual operation.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to return to position previous to manual operation.

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘1’ installed on the slot number
1 to return to position previous to manual operation.

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to return to position previous to manual operation.

4-389
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 42.18 XSNS
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
XSNS ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Setting step number of next operation WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) SNS
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to change operation step to the next step.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to change operation step to the next step n1.

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘1’ installed on the slot number
1 to change operation step to the next step number 10.

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to change operation step to the next step value specified in D00020.

4-390
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 42.19 XSRS
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
XSRS ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Setting step of repeated operation WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to chage pepeated operation step.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to change repeated operation step to n1.

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘1’ installed on the slot number
1 to change repeated operation step to step number 10.

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to change repeated operation step to the value specified in D00020.

4-391
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 42.20 XMOF
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
XMOF 4~7 O - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O O O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to make produced M code Off.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to make produced M code Off so to delete the value of M code.

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘1’ installed on the slot number
1 to make produced M code off so to delete the value of M code.

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to make produced M code off so to delete the value of M code.

4-392
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 42.21 XPRS
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
XPRS ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Setting present position to change. DWORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) PRS
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to change present position.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to change present position to n1.

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘1’ installed on the slot number
1 to change present position to -100.

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to change present position to the value specified in D00020.

4-393
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 42.22 XEPRS
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
XEPRS 4~7 O -
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
N2 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Setting encoder value to change DINT
N2 Selecting encoder to change WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to change present Encoder Value.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to change present Encoder Value to n1.

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘1’ installed on the slot number
1 to change present Encoder 1 Value to -100.

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to change present Encoder 2 Value to the value specified in D00020.

4-394
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 42.23 XTEAA
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
XTEAA n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n2 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
n3 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
n4 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Setting head step number to teach WORD
n2 Setting teaching method (0: RAM teaching or 1: ROM teaching) WORD
n3 Setting teaching item (0: Position teaching or 1: Speed teaching) WORD
n4 Setting the number of teaching WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to teaching array.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to change target position or target speed to the value saved in teaching data area, according to n2 as
many as the number specified in n1 ~ n4 steps of the axis ‘ax’ with teaching array. At this time, based on the
value specified in n3, RAM or ROM teaching will be available.

(3) Setting value available for n2 is as shown below;

Setting Value Teaching Method

0 RAM Teaching
1 ROM Teaching

(4) Setting value available for n3 is as shown below;

Setting Value Teaching Item

0 Position Teaching
1 Speed Teaching

(5) Teaching data value shall be specified in memory area inside an additional positioning module before teaching
array instruction is given.

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘1’ installed on the slot number 1 to
change target speed of 5 steps starting from step number 10 of the axis ‘X’ with RAM Teaching Array.

4-395
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 42.24 XEMG
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
XEMG 4~7 O - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to perform Emergent Stop.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to perform Emergent Stop.

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘1’ installed on the slot number
1 to perform Emergent Stop.

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to perform Emergent Stop.

4-396
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 42.25 XCLR
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
XCLR ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Setting prohibited output to clear (Ignored in XPM) WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning to reset generated Error.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to reset generated error to delete.
(3) N1 doesn’t affect the operation in XPM.

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘1’ installed on the slot number
1 to reset generated error to delete, and to clear prohibited output state.

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to reset generated error to delete.

4-397
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 42.26 XECLR
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - -
XECLR 4~7 O - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to reset the Error history.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to reset saved error history to delete.

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘1’ installed on the slot number
1 to reset saved error history to delete.

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to reset saved error history to delete.

4-398
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 42.27 XPST
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
XPST ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Number of Point Operation Data WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to perform Point Operation.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to perform Point Operation, based on step value saved in Point Operation Data area.

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘1’ installed on the slot number 1 to
perform Point Operation about the 5 data saved in Point Operation Data area of the axis ‘X’.

4-399
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
4. 42.28 XSBP ○ X
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
Sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
Ax O - - O - - O - - O - O O O
XSBP n1 O - - O - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n2 O - - O - - O - - O - O O O
n3 O - - O - - O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Teaching Data (changed value of the item to change among basic parameters) DWORD
n2 Item to change among basic parameters. WORD
n3 Selecting teaching method (RAM teaching or ROM teaching) WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module with basic parameters teaching.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to change n2 to n1 among basic parameters, with basic parameters teaching.
(3) n2 can be set as follows.

Setting Value XGF-PDxH/POxH

1 Speed limit
2 ACC. time 1
3 ACC. time 2
4 ACC. time 3
5 ACC. time 4
6 DEC. time 1
7 DEC. time 2
8 DEC. time 3
9 DEC. time 4
10 DEC. time for EMG top
11 Pulses per revolution
12 Travel per revolution
13 Unit 0:pulse 1:mm 3: degree
14 Unit multiplier 0:x1 1:x10 3:x1000
15 Speed command unit 0: unit/time 1: rpm
16 Bias speed
17 Pulse output mode 0: cw/ccw 1: pulse/dir 2:phase A/B
(4) n3 can be set as follows.
Setting value Teaching method
0 RAM teaching
1 ROM teaching

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

4-400
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘1’ installed on the slot number
1 to change speed limit to 200000 among basic parameters of the axis ‘1’ and save them in RAM, with basic
parameters teaching.

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to change bias speed to the value specified in D00020 among basic parameters and save
them in ROM, with basic parameters teaching.

4-401
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 42.29 XSEP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ax O - - O - - O - - O - O O O
XSEP n1 O - - O - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n2 O - - O - - O - - O - O O O
n3 O - - O - - O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Teaching Data (changed value of the item to change among extended parameters) DWORD
n2 Item to change among extended parameters. WORD
n3 Selecting teaching method (RAM teaching or ROM teaching)
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning with extended parameters teaching.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to change n2 to n1 among extended parameters, with extended parameters teaching.
(3) n2 can set as follows.
Setting
Item
Value
1 S/W upper limit
2 S/W lower limit
3 Backlash compensation
4 S-curv ratio
5 Pulse output direction
6 Acc./Dec. pattern 0: Trapezoid 1: S-curve
7 M code mode 0: None 1: With 2: After
8 Software limit detect 0: Don’t’ detect 1: Detect
9 External VTP 0: Disable 1: Enable
10 External stop selection 0: EMG stop 1: DEC stop
11 Position complete condition 0: Dwell 1: In-Position
2: Dwell AND In-Pos.
3: Dwell OR In-Pos.
12 Int. continuous opr. Type 0: Pass target pos.
1: Pass near pos.
13 Arc insertion position
14 Arc insertion 0: Don’t insert
1: Insert arc cont.
15 Spd. Override with pos. coordi. 0: ABS 1: INC
16 Position completion time 0: CW 1: CCW

(4) n3 can be set as follows.

Setting value Teaching method
0 RAM teaching
1 ROM teaching

4-402
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘1’ installed on the slot number
1 to change Backlash Compensation to 100 among extended parameters and save RAM, with extended
parameters
teaching.

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to change External Stop Allowed to the value specified in D00020 among extended
parameters and save in ROM, with extended parameters teaching.

4-403
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 42.30 XSHP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ax O - - O - - O - - O - O O O
4~7 O - -
XSHP n1 O - - O - - O - - O - O O O
n2 O - - O - - O - - O - O O O
n3 O - - O O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
Sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
Ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Teaching Data (changed value of the item to change among returned parameters to origin) DWORD
n2 Item to change among Home parameters WORD
n3 Teaching method setting (RAM teaching or ROM teaching)
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module with returned parameters teaching.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to change n2 to n1 among returned parameters to origin point, with returned parameters teaching.
(3) n2 can be set as follows.
Setting
XGF-PDxH/POxH
Value
1 Home position
2 Home high speed
3 Home low speed
4 Home acc. time
5 Home dec. time
6 Home dwell time
7 Home compensation
8 Home restart time
9 0: DOG/Home (Off) 1: DOG/Home (ON)
Home method 2: U.L.Limit/Home 3: DOG
4: High speed 5: Upper/Lower Limit 6: home
10 Home direction 0: CW 1: CCW

(4) n3 can be set as follows.

Setting value Teaching method
0 RAM teaching
1 ROM teaching

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

4-404
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘1’ installed on the slot number
1 to change Restart Time of Return to Origin Point to 100ms among returned parameters to origin
Point and save in RAM with returned parameters teaching.

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to change Address of Origin Point to the value specified in D00020 among
returned parameters to origin point and save in ROM with returned parameters teaching.

4-405
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 41.31 XSMP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ax O - - O - - O - - O - O O O
4~7 O - -
XSMP n1 O - - O - - O - - O - O O O
n2 O - - O - - O - - O - O O O
n3 O - - O - - O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Teaching Data (changed value of the item to change among manual parameters) DWORD
n2 Item to change among manual parameters WORD
n3 Teaching method setting (RAM teaching or ROM teaching) WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module with manual parameters teaching.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to change n2 to n1 among manual parameters, with manual parameters teaching.
(3) Setting value of n2 is as shown below.

Setting Value XGF-PDxH/pOxH

1 Jog High Speed
2 Jog Low Speed
3 Jog Acc. time
4 Jog Dec. time
5 Inching Speed

(4) n3 can be set as follows.

Setting value Teaching method
0 RAM teaching
1 ROM teaching
2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘1’ installed on the slot number
1 to change Jog High Speed to 5000 among manual parameters of the axis ‘1’ save in RAM, with manual
parameters teaching.

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to change Jog Adjusting Time to the value specified in D00020 among manual
parameters save in ROM, with manual parameters teaching.

4-406
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 42.32 XSES
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
XSES
n1 O - O - - - O - - O -- O O O
n2 O -- O -- -- -- O -- -- O -- O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Teaching Data(changed value of input signal parameter) WORD
n2 Teaching method setting (RAM teaching or ROM teaching)
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module with Input Signal parameters teaching.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to change its input signal parameter to n1, with input signal parameters teaching.
(3) Each bit of n1 value is assigned to input signal. If the bit’s value is o, its applicable signal will be identified as A
contact point, and if the bit’s value is 1, its applicable signal will be identified as B contact point.

Bit XGF-PDxH/POxH
0 Upper limit signal
1 Lowr limi signal
2 DOG signal
3 Home signal
4 EMG signal
5 VTP signal
6 Driver ready signal
7 Inposition signal
8 Deviation cnt. clear output
(4) n3 can be set as follows.
Setting value Teaching method
0 RAM teaching
1 ROM teaching
2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘1’ installed on the slot number
1 to change Emergent Stop Signal to B contact point among input signal parameters of the axis ‘1’ and save in
RAM, with input signal parameters teaching

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to change input signal parameter to the value specified in D00020 and save in ROM, with
input signal parameters teaching.

4-407
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 42.33 XSCP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
4~7 O - -
XSCP n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
n2 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
n3 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Teaching Data (changed value of the item to change among common parameters) DWORD
n2 Item to change among common parameters WORD
n3 Teaching method setting (RAM teaching or ROM teaching) WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module with common parameters teaching.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to change n2 to n1 among common parameters, with common parameters teaching.
(3) Setting value available for n2 is as shown below;

Setting
Item
Value
1 Speed override 0: Specify % 1: Specify speed
0: CW/CCW (x1)
1: PULSE/DIR (x1)
2: PULSE/DIR (x2)
2 Enc pulse input
3: PHASE A/B (x1)
4: PHASE A/B (x2)
5: PHASE A/B (x4)
3 Enc max. value
4 Enc min. value
5 Pulse output level 0: Low Active 1: High Active

(4) n3 can be set as follows.

Setting value Teaching method
0 RAM teaching
1 ROM teaching

4-408
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘1’ installed on the slot number
1 to change “Speed override” to “Specify speed” among common parameters and save in RAM, with common
parameters teaching.

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to change Encoder Pulse Input Mode to the value specified in D00020 and save in ROM,
with common parameters teaching

4-409
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.42.34 XSMD
○ X
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
XSMD n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n2 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
n3 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
n4 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction (1:axis 1,2: axis 2,3: axis 3,4: axis4) WORD
n1 Teaching Data (changed value of the item to change among operation data) DINT
n2 Item to change among operation data (1~11) WORD
n3 Step number to change WORD
n4 Teaching method setting (RAM teaching or ROM teaching) WORD
[Flag Setting]
Device
Flag Description
Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module with operation data teaching.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to change n2 to n1 among n3 operation data, with operation data teaching.
(3) Setting value available for n2 is as shown below;

Setting
XGF-PDxH/POxH
value
1 Target position
2 Cir. int. auxiliary point
3 Operation speed
4 Dwell time
5 M code
6 Sub. Axis setting Setting axis 1~4 with 0~3 bit
7 Helical int. 0 ~ 4 (In case of 0, general circular interpolation)
8 Circular int. turns
9 Coordinate 0 : Absolute, 1: incremental
0: Single axis Position control, 1: Single axis Ppeed control
10 Control method 2: Single axis Feed control, 3: Linear interpolation
4: Circular interpolation
11 Operation method 0 : Single, 1 : Repeat
12 Operation pattern 0 : END, 1 : KEEP, 2 : CONT
13 Arc size 0 : Arc < 180, 1 : Arc >= 180
14 Acc. no. 0~3
15 Dec. no. 0~3
16 Circular int. mode 0 : Middle, 1: Center, 2 : Radius
17 Circular int. direction 0 : CW, 1 : CCW

(4) n4 can be set as follows

Setting value Teaching method
0 RAM teaching
1 ROM teaching

4-410
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis ‘1’ installed on the slot number
0 to change “Target position” to “10000” among step number of operation data set in D00020 save in RAM, with
common parameters teaching.

4-411
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 42.35 XWRT
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
XWRT ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

XWRT XWRT

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Axis to save parameter in WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to the instruction moduel to save parameter.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to save presently run parameter of the axes n1, in Flash ROM.
(3) In order to set the axis to save parameter in n1, the bit of the axis assigned per bit shall be set as follows;

5~ 15 4 3 2 1 0
XGK
Unused 4-axis 3-axis 2-axis 1-axis Unused

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis set in P1100 installed on the slot number
0 to save current parameter and operation data of axis set in P1200 in FRAM.

4-412
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4. 42.36 XSRD
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
XSRD ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
D O - O - - - O - - - - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
D Device name & number in CPU WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to read its present status.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to read its present status so to save in CPU area specified in D.
(3) Value to be saved in CPU area specified in D is as shown below;

CPU Area Size Status Type

D WORD Operation Status Information 1
D+1 WORD Operation Status Information 2
D+2 WORD Axis Information
D+3 WORD External Input Signal Status
D+4 DWORD Present Position
D+6 DWORD Present Speed
D+8 WORD Step Number
D+9 WORD M Code Number
D+10 WORD Error Information
D+11 ~ D+20 WORD Error History 1 ~ 10
D21 DWORD Encoder Value

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal P00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis set in P1100 installed on the slot number
0 to read current state data of axis set in P1100 to D1000.

4-413
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.42.37 XCAM ○ X
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
XCAM 4~7 O - -
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
n2 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 CAM operation main axis setting WORD
n2 CAM data block number WORD
[Flag Setting ]
Device
Flag Description
Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruct the positioning module of CAM operation.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) fo CAM operation with CAM data of n2

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the axis 1 on slot 1 to execute CAM operation with CAM data block
number 1.

4-414
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
4.42.38 XELIN ○ X

Area Available Flag

Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
XELIN n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n2 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
n3 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Step number to operate WORD
n2 Ellipse rate (%) WORD
n3 Operation angle WORD
[Flag Setting]
Device
Flag Description
Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module of ellipse interplocation operation
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to execute ellipse interpolation with n2 rate and n3 anlge for n1 operation data step.

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.

3) Program example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis 1 installed on the slot number 1 to execute
eliipse interpolation with ellipse rate 50% and angle 180 about operation step number 3.

(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis 1 installed on the slot number 1 to execute
eliipse interpolation with ellipse rate set in D00012 and angle set in D00013 about operation step number set in
D00010.

4-415
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

XGK XGB
4.42.39 XSSSP ○ X
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
XSSSP n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O 4~7 O - -
n2 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
n3 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
n4 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
n1 Speed synchronization main axis rate WORD
n2 Speed synchronization sub axis rate WORD
n3 Speed synchronization main axis setting WORD
n4 Speed synchronization target position DWORD
[Flag setting]
Device
Flag Description
number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module of speed synchronization operation
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to execute speed synchronization with rate of main axis rate n1 and sub axis rate n2. If ax reaches position
set in n4, ax goes out speed sychonization mode and stops.
(3) n3 can be set as follows.
Setting value Axis
1~4 1 axis ~ 4 axis
9 Encoder1

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
3) Program example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis 1 installed on the slot number 0 to execute
speed synchronization with main axis rate: sub axis rate 200:100 where main axis is axis 2. And if it reaches target
position 2000, it stops.

4-416
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4. 42.40 XPWR XGK XGB

○ X
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
XPWR 4~7 O - -
S O - O - - - O - - - - O O O
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
S Head aderess of Device which is saved in point operation data WORD
n1 Number of point operation step WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to move the value of point operation step to be used to the axis ‘ax’ of the positioning module as many
as n1 from CPU area specified in S.
(2) Number of point operation steps to be specified in n1 is 1 ~ 20.
(3) Value to read from CPU area specified in S is as below;

CPU Area Size Point Operation Step

S WORD Point Operation Step 1
~ ~ ~
S+19 WORD Point Operation Step 20

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F0110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal P00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis 1 installed on the slot number 0 to
save data as many as D1400 from D1300 as point operation step.

4-417
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
4. 42.41 XTWR ○ X
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
XTWR 4~7 O - -
S O - O - - - O - - - - O O O
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to instruction WORD
S Head address of Device which is saved data of plural teaching DWORD
n1 Number to plural teaching WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module the teaching data value to be used for plural teaching.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to move the teaching data value to be used for plural teaching, to the axis ‘ax’ of the positioning
module as many as n1 from CPU area specified in S. If you use XTEAA insturcion after this insturcion, data
teaching will be complete
(3) Number of point operation steps to be specified in n1 is 1 ~ 16.
(4) Value to read from CPU area specified in S is as below.

CPU Area Size Teaching Data

S DWORD Teaching Data 1
~ ~
S+15 DWORD Teaching Data 16

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F0110) will be set.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal P00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis 2 installed on the slot number 0 to save
data as many as D1400 from D1300 as plural teaching data.

4-418
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
4.42.42 XSWR ○ X

Area Available Flag

Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
ax O - O - - - O - - O - O O O
XSWR 4~7 O - -
S O - O - - - O - - - - O O O
n1 O - O - - - O - - O - O O O

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data size
sl Slot number positioning module is installed on. WORD
ax Axis to insturction WORD
S Head address of Device which simultanest start operatio setp is saved WORD
n1 Number to plural teaching WORD

[Flag setting]
Device
Flag Description
Number
Error If ‘ax’ value exceeds the range F110

1) Function
(1) It is used to set step data necessary for simultaneous start
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning module’s specified axis ‘ax’ installed on sl(positioning module’s slot
number) to move the operation step value from CPU area set as S as many as n1 to positioning module. If you
exeute XSST instruction after this instruction, you can execute simultaneous start.
(3) The number of point operatio step set in n1 is 1 ~ 4.
(4) Value to read from CPU area specified in S is as below.
CPU area Size Teaching data
S WORD Axis 1 simultaneous operation step
~ ~
S+3 WORD Axis 4 simultaneous operation step

2) Error
(1) If 0 or more than 5 is input in specified instruction axis ‘ax’, Error Flag (F0110) will be set.

3) Program example
(1) If input signal P00000 is On, it instructions the positioning module’s axis 2 installed on the slot number 0 to save
data as many as D1400 from D1300 as simultaneous start step number.

4-419
Chapter 4 Details of Instructions

4.43 Motion Control Instruction

XGK XGB
4.43.1 GETM, GETMP ○ X
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
S - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
GETM(P) 4~7 O - -
D O - O - - - - - - - O O O O
N O - O - - - - - - O - - - -

GETM sl S D N

GETMP P sl S D N

means GETM

[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number motion module is installed on. WORD
S Motion module’s fixed area head address WORD
D Device name & number in CPU DWORD
N Number of data to read. DWORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
1. If there is no module on the specified slot.
Error F110
2. If no address specified in S is available in the installed module on the specified slot.

1) GETM, GETMP
(1) This instruction is used to read the data of motion module.
(2) It reads N double word data from the memory of the motion module specified in sl(special module’s slot
number) to save in CPU area specified in sl.

2) Error
(1) If the area from specified address S to N exceeds the applicable block, error may occur. This error is blocked,
not to be input in Present XG5000.
(2) If there is no motion module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

3) Program Example
(1) It reads 4-word data from motion module’s fixed area address 0 to address 3 installed on the slot number 3 of
the base number 0, to save in D0010 ~ D00013.

P00001
GETM 03 0 D00010 2

4-420
 Chapter 4 Details of Instructions
XGK XGB
○ X
4.43.2 PUTM, PUTMP
Area Available Flag
Instruction Con Step Error Zero Carry
PMK F L T C S Z D.x R.x U N D R
st (F110) (F111) (F112)
sl - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
S1 - - - - - - - - - O - - - -
PUTM(P) 4~7 O - -
S2 O - O - - - - - - - O O O O
N O - O - - - - - - O - - - -

Instruction
PUTM sl S1 S2 N

Instruction
PUTMP P sl S1 S2 N

means PUTM
[Area Setting]
Operand Description Data Size
sl Slot number motion module is installed on. WORD
S1 Motion module’s fixed area head address WORD
S2 Device name & number where data to save in motion module is saved. DWORD
N Number of data to save. WORD
[Flag Setting]
Flag Description Device Number
1. If there is no module on the specified slot.
Error F110
2. If no address specified in S is available in the installed module on the specified slot.

1) PUTM, PUTMP
(1) This instruction is used to write the data in motion module.
(2) It writes N double word data from the specified device S2 in the memory (S1) of the motion module specified in
sl (special module’s slot number).

2) Error
(1) If the area from specified address S1 to N exceeds the applicable block, error may occur. This error is blocked,
not to be input in Present XG5000.
(2) If there is no motion module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.

3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it writes the 40-word of D1000 ~D1049 in motion module’s memory address 10 ~
47 installed on the slot number 7.

M00000
PUTM 7 10 D1000 20

4-421
Chapter 5 SFC (Sequential Function Chart)

Chapter 5 SFC (Sequential Function Chart)

5.1 Introduction
▷ SFC is a structured language that extends an application program in the form of flow chart
according to the processing sequence, using a PLC language.
▷ SFC splits an application program into step and transition, and provides how to connect them each
other. Each step is related to action and each transition is related to transition condition.
▷ As SFC should contain the state information, only program and function block among program
types are available to apply this SFC.
Type

5-1
Chapter 5 SFC (Sequential Function Chart)

5.2 SFC Structure

5.2.1 Step
▷ Step indicates a sequence control unit by connecting the action.
▷ When step is in an active state, the attached content of action will be executed.
▷ The initial step is one to be activated first.

▷ If a next transition condition of activated initial step (S1) is established, step 1 (S1) that is currently
activated becomes deactivated and Step 2 (S2) connected to S1 becomes activated.

5.2.2 Transition
▷ Transition indicates the execution condition between steps.
▷ A transition condition should be described as a PLC language such as ST or LD.
▷ The result of a transition condition should always be a BOOL type and the variable name should
be TRANS for any transition.
▷ In case that the result of transition condition is 1, the current step is deactivated and the next step
is activated.
▷ There must be a transition between step and step.

S1

T1
TRAN1
S2

T2

5-2
Chapter 5 SFC (Sequential Function Chart)

The content of TRAN1

When TRANS is on, S1 will be deactivated and S2 will be activated.

TRANS is the internally declared variable.
A transition condition of all transition should be output in TRANS variable.

5.2.3 Action
▷ Each step is able to connect up to two actions.
▷ The step without action is regarded as a waiting action and it is required to wait until the next
transition condition will be 1.
▷ Action is composed of PLC language such as LD/SFC/ST and the action will be executed while the
step is activated.
▷ Action qualifier will be used to control action.
▷ When action becomes deactivated state after activating, the contact output in action will be 0.
However, S, R, function and function block output retain their state before they become non-
activating.

S1 N ACTION1
S ACTION2
T1

The content of ACTION1

5-3
Chapter 5 SFC (Sequential Function Chart)

The content of ACTION2

- ACTION1 will be executed only when S1 is activated.

- ACTION2 will be executed until activated S1 meets R qualifier.
- It goes on executing even if S1 is deactivated.
- When action is deactivated, this action is Post Scanned and then passes to the next step.

Reference
Post Scan
When action is deactivated, this action is scanned again.
As it is scanned as if there were a contact (contact with the value of 0) in the beginning part of an action
program, the program output, which is composed of contacts, will be 0.
Function, function block, S, R output etc., are not included.

5.2.4 Action Qualifier

▷ Whenever action is used, action qualifier will be followed.
▷ The action of step defines an executing point and time according to the assigned qualifier.
▷ Types of action qualifier are as follows.

1) N (Non-Stored)
Action is executed only when the step is activated.

5-4
Chapter 5 SFC (Sequential Function Chart)

2) S (Set)
It continues the action after the step is activated (until the action is reset by R qualifier).

3) R (Overriding Reset)
It terminates the execution of an action previously started with the S, SD, SL or DS qualifier.

4) L (Time Limited)
It starts the action when the step becomes active and continues until the step goes inactive or a set
time elapses.

Step connected by L

Action T

5) D (Time Delayed)
Start a delay timer when the step becomes active - after the time delay the action starts (if step still
active) and continues until deactivated.

6) P (Pulse)
It starts the action when the step becomes active and executes the action only once.

5-5
Chapter 5 SFC (Sequential Function Chart)

7) SD (Stored & Time Delayed)

It starts a delay timer when the step becomes active - after the time delay, the action starts and
continues until reset (regardless of step activation/deactivation). If the reset is activated during the
time delay, the action doesn’t start.

8) DS (Delayed & Stored)

It starts a delay timer when the step becomes active - after the time delay the action starts (if step
still active) and continues until reset by R qualifier. If the step is deactivated or the reset is activated
during the time delay, the action doesn’t start.

Step connected by DS T

Action

Step connected by R

9) SL (Stored & Timed Limited)

It starts the action when the step becomes active and continues for a set time or until the action is
reset (regardless of step activation/deactivation).

5-6
Chapter 5 SFC (Sequential Function Chart)

5.3 Extension Regulation

5.3.1 Serial Connection

▷ 2 steps are always divided by transitions without connecting directly.
▷ Step always divides 2 transitions without connecting directly.

▷ For the transition between steps connected by serial, the lower step will be activated if the upper
step is active and the transition condition connected to the next is 1.

5.3.2 Selection Branch

▷ When a processor executes a selection branch, the processor finds the first path with a true
transition in the order of the program scan and executes the steps and transitions in that path. If
more than one path in a selection branch goes true at the same time, the processor chooses the
left-most path. The following example shows a typical scan sequence.
Example

S1

T1 T4 T5
S2 S4 S5
T2 T6 T7

S3

T3

* In case that the transition condition of T1 is 1, the order of activation will be S1 -> S2 -> S3.
* In case that the transition condition of T4 is 1, the order of activation will be S1 -> S4 -> S3.
* In case that the transition condition of T5 is 1, the order of activation will be S1 -> S5 -> S3.

5-7
Chapter 5 SFC (Sequential Function Chart)

If the transition conditions are 1 at the same time, the processor chooses the left-most path.
* In case that the transition condition of T1 and T4 is 1 at the same time, the order of activation will be
S1 -> S2 -> S3..
* In case that the transition condition of T4 and T5 is 1 at the same time, the order of activation will be
S1 -> S4 -> S3.

5.3.3 Parallel Branch (simultaneous branch)

▷ In case of connecting by parallel branch, if the transition condition connected to the next is 1, all
steps tied to this transition will be activated. The extension of each branch will be the same as
serial connection. At this time, the steps in the state of activation are as many as the number of
branches.
▷ In case of combining in parallel branch, if the transition condition is 1 when the state of all the last
steps of each branch is activated, the step connected to the next will be activated.

Example

S1

T1
S2 S6 S8
T2 T6
S3 S7
T3
S4

T4
S5

T5

- If the transition condition of T1 is 1 when S1 is active, S2, S6 and S8 will be activated and S1 will be
deactivated.
- If the transition condition of T4 is 1 when S4, S7 and S8 are activated, S5 will be activated and S4,
S7 and S8 will be deactivated.

* The order of activation

S1-+->S2--->S3--->S4-+->S5
+->S6--->S7-------+
+->S8-------------+

5-8
Chapter 5 SFC (Sequential Function Chart)

5.3.4 Jump
▷ If the transition condition connected to the next is 1 after the last step of SFC is activated, the initial
step of SFC will be activated.

Example

S1

T1
S2
T2
S3
T3

z The order of activation

S1 S2 S3

▷ It is possible to extend to the place using a jump.

▷ Jump can only be placed at the end of SFC program or the end of a selection branch.
It is not allowed to jump to the inside or outside of a parallel branch; it is allowed to jump within a
parallel branch.

Example

1) Jump at the end of selection branch

S1
T1
ABC

S2
T2

S3 S5
T3 T5
ABC

S4
T4

- S2 will be activated after S5.

5-9
Chapter 5 SFC (Sequential Function Chart)

2) Jump within parallel branch

S1
T1

LABEL1 S7
S2
T8

T2 T6 S8
S3 S6
T9
T3 T7
LABLE1
S9
S4
T4
S5

T5

3) Not available to jump into the inside of parallel branch.

S1
T1

LABEL1 S5
S2
T5
T2 S6
S3

T3
S4
T4

LABEL1

5-10
Chapter 6 ST (Structured Text)

Chapter 6 ST (Structured Text)

6.1 Introduction
▷ ST program can be made by all text editors.
▷ Able to express complicate expression and algorithm
▷ Can be used easily by some one familiar with computer language

6.2 Comments
▷ There are two types in comments, one line comment and block comment.
▷ One line comment uses “//”, that line is used as comment line.
▷ Block comment considers text between “*” and “*”.
Ex.)

6-1
Chapter 6 ST (Structured Text)

6.3 Expression

▷ Expression consists of operator and operand. Operand may be constant, character, character
string, time character, defined variable (named variable, direct variable), defined function (function,
function block). Operator of ST is described in <Table 1>.
▷ Expression is calculated according to order of operator in <Table 1>. Operator having highest
priority is calculated first and then operator having second highest priority is calculated. This is
repeated until end of calculation.
Ex.) A+B*C: first, multiplies B by C and adds the result to A.
Number Operation Symbol Order
1 Parenthesis (Expression) High
2 Function Function name (Parameter list)
Ex.) ADD(X, Y)
3 not -
Complement NOT
4 Exponent **
5 Multiplication *
Division /
Remain MOD
6 Add +
Subtract -
7 Compare <, >, <=, >=
8 same =
Not same <>
9 Bool logical AND &
AND
10 Bool logical Exclusive OR XOR
Low
11 Bool logical OR OR

<Table 1> Operator of ST language

▷ Among same operations which have same order, operation in left of expression has higher order.
Ex.) A+B-C: first adds A to B and subtracts C from the result
▷ If operator has two operands, left operand is executed firstly.
Ex.) (A+B)*(C-D): first (A+B) is executed first then (C-D) is executed
▷ When executing operation, the following condition is dealt with error.
- Division by 0
Ex.) A/(B*C): in case result of B*C is 0, operation error occurs.
- Operand is not applicable data type for operation.
Ex.) ADD(1,2,3): since PLC can’t decide data type of number, error occurs at compile

6-2
Chapter 6 ST (Structured Text)

- Result of arithmetic operation exceeds range of data type.

Ex.) B*C: in case B, C is UINT type, if operation result is over 65,535, operation error occurs.

Characteristic
Number Example
Method Variable Variable
of ADD(S1, S2, D);
assignment sequence
variable
Application instruction
Not fixed type Impossible Fixed Fixed
Ex.) ADD(1, B, A);
- Sequence of parameter used in application instruction is fixed.
<Table 2> how to use parameter of application instruction

Remark

- Expression of bit device is added.

(Ex, P00003 => P0000.3, M0001A => M0001.A, …)
- Bit device of timer and counter is expressed as follows.
(Ex, T000 => T000.Q, C010 => C010.Q, …)
- In case word and bit device are all available, default device is set as word device.
- When calculating expression, temporary variable is created. Initialization of temporary variable
is not conducted.
(Ex, For A:=B+C;, result of B+C is saved in temporary variable and value of temporary
variable is assigned to variable A.)
- Temporary variable is set at auto-allocation area. So in case all device auto-allocation area is
used by user, error occurs. You can avoid this problem by making device auto-allocation area
large.
- If operation error occurs, result is not saved in allocation variable.
(Ex, For A:=B/C;, if C is 0, operation error occurs and A keeps previous value.)
- Expression can’t be used as parameter of application instruction.
(Ex, ADD(B+C/D, 10, F); => error (B+C/D can’t be used)
ADD(A, 10, F); => normal

6-3
Chapter 6 ST (Structured Text)

6.3.1 + operator
▷ + Operator is used to add two operands.
▷ Expression
result := expression1 + expression2

Items Description
Result Named variable or direct variable
expression1 ANY_NUM type
expression2 ANY_NUM type

Example Description
Val1 := 20; Adds Val1(20) to Val2(4) and inputs result
Val2 := 4; Value of Result becomes 24.
Result := Val1 + Val2; Constant and variable can be used as operands (Val1, Val2).

Note
- ANY_NUM includes ANY_REAL type and ANY_INT.
For more detail, refer to data type layer of ch.3.2.2
- Operation of LWORD, LINT, ULINT type is not supported.

6.3.2 - Operator
▷ Subtracts right value from left value.
▷ Expression
result := expression1 - expression2

Items Description
result Named variable or direct variable
expression1 ANY_NUM
expression2 ANY_NUM

Example Description
Val1 := 20; Subtracts right value(Val2) from left value(Val1) and inputs result.
Val2 := 4; Value of result becomes 16
Result := Val1 - Val2; Constant and variable can be used as operands (Val1, Val2).

6-4
 Chapter 6 ST (Structured Text)

Note
Operation of LWORD, LINT, ULINT type is not supported

6.3.3 * Operator
▷ Multiplies two operands
▷ Expression
result := expression1 * expression2

Items Description
result Named variable or direct variable
expression1 ANY_NUM type
expression2 ANY_NUM type

Example Description
In1 := 2 ; Multiplies 20 by In1(2) and inputs result.
Result := 20 * In1 ; Value of result becomes 40.
Constant and variable can be used as operands (Val1, Val2).

Note
Operation of LWORD, LINT, ULINT type is not supported

6.3.4 / Operator
▷ Divides left value by right value.
▷ Data type of result is different according to data type of operand. If operand is REAL type, result is
also REAL type. If operand is integer, result is also integer. If 5 (int) is divided by 3 (int), result is
real but number less than decimal point is removed.

6-5
Chapter 6 ST (Structured Text)

▷ Expression
result := expression1 / expression2
Item Description
result Named variable or direct variable
expression1 ANY_NUM type
expression2 ANY_NUM type

Example Description
In1 := 2 ; Divides 20 by 2(ln1) and inputs Result.
Result := 20 / In1 ; Result becomes 10.
Constant and variable can be used as operands.

Notes
- If some value is divided by 0, operation error flag (_ERR) is On. In case of this, CPU
keeps RUN mode.
- Operation of LWORD, LINT, ULINT type is not supported

6.3.5 MOD operation

▷ Finds remain when dividing left value by right value
▷ Expression
result := expression1 MOD expression2
Item Description
result Named variable or direct variable
expression1 ANY_NUM type
expression2 ANY_NUM type

Example Description
In1 := 10 ; Divides 12 by 10(ln1) and inputs remain into Result
Result := 12 MOD In1 ; Constant and variable can be used as operands.

Notes
If some value is divided by 0, operation error flag (_ERR) is On. In case of this, CPU keeps
RUN mode.
Operation of LWORD, LINT, ULINT, REAL, LREAL type is not supported

6-6
 Chapter 6 ST (Structured Text)

6.3.6 ** Operator
▷ Exponential operator is used to multiply left number as many as right number times
▷ Expression
result := expression1 ** expression2
Items Description
result Named variable or direct variable
expression1 ANY_REAL type
expression2 ANY_REAL type

Example Description
In1 := 3 ; Multiplies 10 as many as 3 times and inputs it to Result.
Result := 10 ** In1 ; Result becomes 1000.
Constant and variable can be used as operands.

Notes
Only LREAL type operation is available.

6.3.7 AND or & Operator

▷ Executes logical bit AND operation.
▷ Expression
result := expression1 AND expression2 or result := expression1 & expression2

Item Description
result Named variable or direct variable
expression1 ANY_BIT type
expression2 ANY_BIT type

Result of logical bit AND operation is as follows.

expression1 expression2 result
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1

Example Description
th
Result := h93 AND h3D ; Since first bit and 5 bit of two operands are both 1,
result is “h11”.
Constant and variable can be used as operands.

6-7
Chapter 6 ST (Structured Text)

Notes
Operation of LWORD, LINT, ULINT type is not supported.

6.3.8 OR operator
▷ Executes logical bit OR operation.
▷ Expression
result := expression1 OR expression2
Items Description
result Named variable or direct variable
expression1 ANY_BIT type
expression2 ANY_BIT type

Result of logical bit OR operation is as follows.

expression1 expression2 result
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1

Example Description
Result := h93 OR h3D; Since there are 1 except 7th bit in two operands, Result
is “hBF”.

6.3.9 XOR operator

▷ If bits of two operands are different, result bit is 1.
▷ Expression
result := expression1 XOR expression2
Item Description
result Named variable or direct variable
expression1 ANY_BIT type
expression2 ANY_BIT type

Result of logical bit XOR operation is as follows.

expression1 expression2 result
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0

6-8
 Chapter 6 ST (Structured Text)

Example Description
Result := h93 XOR h3D; Since first bits of two operands are 1, first bit of result is
0.
Result is “hAE”

6.3.10 = operator
▷ Compares two operands if they are same.
▷ Expression
result := expression1 = expression2
Item Description
result Named variable or direct variable
expression1 ANY type
expression2 ANY type

Result of logical bit = operation is as follows.

expression1 expression2 result
0 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1

Example Description
Val1 := 20; Compares Val1 and Val2 and output result.
Val2 := 20 ; Result is 1.
Result := Val1 = Val2 ;

6.3.11 <> operator

▷ Compares two operands if they are not same.
▷ Expression
result := expression1 <> expression2
Item Description
result Named variable or direct variable
expression1 ANY type
expression2 ANY type

6-9
Chapter 6 ST (Structured Text)

Result of logical bit <> operation is as follows.

expression1 expression2 result
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0

Example Description
Val1 := 20; Compares Val1 and Val2 and output result.
Val2 := 20 ; Result is 0.
Result := Val1 <> Val2 ;

Note
Operation of LWORD, LINT, ULINT type is not supported.

6.3.12 > operator

▷ Compares two operands if left one is larger than right one.
▷ Expression
result := expression1 > expression2
Item Description
result Named variable or direct variable
expression1 ANY type
expression2 ANY type

Result of logical bit > operation is as follows.

expression1 expression2 result
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 1
1 1 0

Example Description
Val1 := 20; Compares two operands if left one is larger than right one.
Val2 := 10 ; Result is 1.
Result := Val1 > Val2 ;

Note
Operation of LWORD, LINT, ULINT type is not supported.

6-10
 Chapter 6 ST (Structured Text)

6.3.13 < operator

▷ Compares two operands if left one is smaller than right one.
▷ Expression
result := expression1 < expression2
Item Description
result Named variable or direct variable
expression1 ANY type
expression2 ANY type

Result of logical bit < operation is as follows.

expression1 expression2 result
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 1 0

Example Description
Val1 := 20; Compares two operands if left one is smaller than right
Val2 := 10 ; one.
Result := Val1 < Val2 ; Result is 0.

Note
Operation of LWORD, LINT, ULINT is not supported.

6.3.14 >= operator

▷ Compares two operands if left one is larger than right one or same.
▷ Expression
result := expression1 >= expression2
Item Description
result Named variable or direct variable
expression1 ANY type
expression2 ANY type

6-11
Chapter 6 ST (Structured Text)

Result of logical bit >= operation is as follows.

expression1 expression2 result
0 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 1
1 1 1

Example Description
Val1 := 20; Compares two operands if left one is larger than right one or
Val2 := 20 ; same.
Result := Val1 >= Val2 ; Result is 1.

Note
Operation of LWORD, LINT, ULINT type is not supported.

6.3.15 <= operator

▷ Compares two operands if left one is smaller than right one or same.
▷ Expression
result := expression1 <= expression2
Item Description
result Named variable or direct variable
expression1 ANY type
expression2 ANY type

Result of logical bit <= operation is as follows.

expression1 expression2 result
0 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 1
1 1 1

6-12
 Chapter 6 ST (Structured Text)

Example Description
Val1 := 2; Compares two operands if left one is smaller than right one or
Val2 := 20 ; same.
Result := Val1 <= Val2 ; Result is1.

Note
Operation of LWORD, LINT, ULINT type is not supported.

6.3.16 NOT operator

▷ Changes bit value from 1 to 0 or from 0 to 1.
▷ Expression
result := NOT expression
Item Description
result Named variable or direct variable
expression ANY_BIT type

Example Description
Val1 = h000C; Changes Val1 and output Result.
Result:= NOT Val1 ; Result is “hFFF3”

Note
Operation of LWORD, LINT, ULINT, REAL, LREAL is not supported.

6.3.17 - operator
▷ Adds negative sign into value.
▷ Expression
result := - expression
item Description
result Named variable or direct variable
expression ANY_NUM type

Example Description
Val1 = 10; Adds negative sign into value and output Result.
Result:= - Val1 ; Result is -10.

6-13
Chapter 6 ST (Structured Text)

Note
Operation of LWORD, LINT, ULINT type is not supported.

6.4 Statement

▷ Statements of ST language are summarized in <Table 3>.

▷ Statement is ended by semi colon(;).

6.4.1 Assignment statements

▷ Assignment statement consists of Variable, operator(:=) and expression.
▷ Ex.) A := B + C ;

6.4.2 Application instruction statements

1) How to input application instruction is as follows.
- Parameter should be arrayed in order. Omitting parameter is not allowed. You can’t assign
value to input parameter.
Ex) ADD(B, 10, DST);
2) There is no return type in application instruction so that can’t be used in expression.

Note

1. Application instruction supported in ST is indicated in application instruction dialog box

of ST edition window.
2. Ladder dedicated application instruction is not supported (BREAK, CALL, END, FOR,
INIT_DONE, JMP, NEXT, RET, SBRT, instruction having special symbol such as <, >, ..)
3. Application instruction related with character string is changed from “$***” to “***_S”.
4. Application instruction related with pulse is changed from “***P” to “***_EN”.
5. Application instruction whose name is same as device name is changed from“***” to
“***_I”. (L2D => L2D_I)
6. Application instruction can’t be used for condition expression of selection statement (IF,
CASE) and repeat statement (FOR, WHILE, REPEAT).

6-14
 Chapter 6 ST (Structured Text)

6.4.3 Selection statements

▷ There are two types, IF and CASE.
▷ According to specific condition, Selection statement executes one statement or one group of
statements among diverse statements.
1. IF
(1) If condition of Bool expression is 1, it executes a group of statements.
(2) If condition is not 1, it doesn’t execute group of statements. But there is ELSE, it executes
a group of statements following ELSE. If condition of ELSEIF is 1, a group of statements
following ELEIF is executed.
2. CASE
(1) It consists of list of groups of statements and expression that calculates variable of INT type.
(2) Each group can be set as integer and range of integer.
(3) A group of statements in range of Selector is executed and if any value is not in range of
Selector, a group of statements following ELSE is executed. If there is no ELSE, no group of
statements is not executed.

6.4.4 Repeat statements

▷ There are three types, FOR, WHILE and REPEAT.
▷ Some group is executed repeatedly by repeat statement.
1. FOR
(1) It is used when number of repetition is already determined.
(2) In FOR statement, a group of statements is executed repeatedly until END_FOR and status
of repetition is saved in control variable of FOR loop.
(3) Control variable, initial value and final value is expressed as integer type (SINT, INT, DINT)
and doesn’t change by repeated statement. Checking the condition for the end is executed at
the start of each repetition. If initial value exceeds the final value, a group of statements is not
executed any more.
2. WHILE and REPEAT
(1) WHILE statement (ended by END_WHILE) is executed repeatedly until Bool expression is
0.
(2) REPEAT statement (ended by UNTIL) is executed repeatedly until Bool expression is 1.
(A group of statements is executed at least one time)
(3) WHILE and REPEAT is not used to synchronize process like “wait loop” which has the end
condition determined exteriorly.
(4) EXIT statement is used to end repeat statements before meeting the end condition.
(5) EXIT statement is used to stop repetition before meeting the condition. When EXIT
statement is used in overlapped repetition statements, relevant EXIT is applied to the loop
in which EXIT exists. So, statements after first loop terminator (END_FOR, END_WHILE,

6-15
Chapter 6 ST (Structured Text)

END_REPEAT) are executed.

(6) IF WHILE and REPEAT are executed in unlimited loop, error occurs.

Number Command Example

1 Assignment A:=B; CV:= CV+1;
2 Application instruction ADD(SRC1, SRC2, DST);
3 RETURN RETURN;
4 IF D:=B*B -4*A*C;
IF D<1.0 THEN NROOTS :=0;
ELSIF D= 0.0 THEN
NROOTS := 1;
X1:= -B/(2.0*A);
ELSE
X1:= (-B+ D)/(2.0*A);
X2:= (-B- D)/(2.0*A);
END_IF;
5 CASE TW := THUMBWHEEL;
TW_ERROR := 0;
CASE TW OF
1,5: DISPLAY := OVEN_TEMP;
2: DISPLAY := MOTOR_SPEED;
3: DISPLAY := GROSS - TARE;
4, 6..10: DISPLAY := 100;
ELSE DISPLAY := 0 ;
TW_ERROR := 1;
END_CASE;
M100 := DISPLAY;
6 FOR J := 101;
FOR I := 1 TO 100 BY 2 DO
IF WORDS = 10 THEN
J := I;
EXIT;
END_IF;
END_FOR ;

6-16
 Chapter 6 ST (Structured Text)

Number Command Example

7 WHILE J := 1;
SUM := 0;
WHILE J <= 100 DO
J := J+2;
SUM := SUM + 1;
END_WHILE;
8 REPEAT J := 1;
REPEAT
J := J+2;
UNTIL J >= 101
END_REPEAT ;
9 EXIT EXIT;
10 Null/Space command text ;
EXIT is used for all repeat statement (FOR, WHILE, REPEAT).
<Table 3> Command for ST
6.4.5 IF
▷ It is used for program to select more than one
▷ Expression
IF condition THEN statements [ELSE elsestatements ] END_IF

Or

IF condition THEN
statements
[ELSIF condition-n THEN
elseifstatements] . . .
[ELSE
elsestatements]
END_IF

Item Description
condition If condition is TRUE, a statement following THEN is executed.
In case of FLASE, ELSIF or ELSE is executed.
statements If condition is TRUE, a statement more than one is executed.
condition-n N conditions can be used.
elseifstatements If condition-n is TRUE, a statement more than one is executed.
elsestatements If condition or condition-n is false, a statement more than one is
executed.

6-17
Chapter 6 ST (Structured Text)

Example Description
IF Val1 <= 10 THEN If condition (Val1 <= 10) is TRUE, 10 is assigned into Result.
Result := 10;
END_IF;
IF Val1 <= 10 THEN If condition (Val1 <= 10) is TRUE, 10 is assigned into Result.
Result := 10; If condition is FALSE, 20 is assigned into Result.
ELSE
Result := 20;
END_IF;
IF Val1 <= 10 THEN If condition (Val1 <= 10) is TRUE, 10 is assigned into Result.
Result := 10; If condition is FALSE, ELSEIF is executed. If second condition (Val
ELSIF Val1 <= 20 THEN <= 20) is TRUE, 20 is assigned into Result. If second is FALSE, a
Result := 20; statement under ELSE is executed. Namely, 30 is assigned into
ELSE Result.
Result := 30;
END_IF;
6.4.6 CASE
▷ Diverges according to value of expression following CASE. Expression should be integer. When
value of expression is not included in case list, a statement after ELSE is executed. If there is no
ELSE, no statement list is executed.
▷ Expression
CASE expression OF
case_list : statement_list
{ case_list : statement_list}
[ELSE
statement_list]
END_CASE

Item Description
expression Only INT type is available.
case_list case_list_element {',' case_list_element}
There are diverse statement like above.
case_list_element Subrange or signed_integer are available
subrange signed_integer .. signed_integer type
statement_list Executes statements more than one

6-18
Chapter 6 ST (Structured Text)

Example Description
CASE Val1 OF If value of Val1 is 1, 10 is assigned into Result.
1 : Result := 10 ; If value of Val1 is 2~5, 20 is assigned into Result.
2..5 : Result := 20 ; If value of Val1 is 7 or 10, 30 is assigned into Result.
7, 10 : Result := 30 ; In case of other values, 40 is assigned into Result.
ELSE
Result := 40 ;
END_CASE ;
6.4.7 FOR
▷ It is used to deal with repetition and uses three control statements. First, statement for initialization
is necessary. If To expression is TRUE (present counter value is less than end value), loop is
executed one time. Then counter values increases as many as BY value and condition is checked
again. In FOR statement, condition is checked first and loop is executed later. So no loop may be
executed.
▷ Expression
FOR counter := start TO end [BY step] DO
statements
END_FOR

Item Description
counter Integer (SINT, INT, DINT) s
start, end, step should be same type.
start Initial value of counter
end Last value of counter
step Indicates increment of count variable whenever loop is executed. If this is not
used, increment is 1.
statements It is executed according to three control texts.

6-19
Chapter 6 ST (Structured Text)

Example Description
SUM := 0; Counter variable increases from 0 to 10 as many as 1. 1 is
FOR counter := 0 TO 10 DO added into SUM variable repeatedly. Final value of SUM is
SUM := SUM + 1; 11.
END_FOR ;
SUM := 0; Counter variable increases from 0 to 10 as many as 2. 1 is
FOR counter = 0 TO 10 BY 2 DO added into SUM variable repeatedly. Final value of SUM is
SUM := SUM + 1; 6.
END_FOR ;

Note

1. Because of long scan time, watch - dog may be on.

2. BY part can be skipped. In case of skip, it increases as many as 1.
3. If start is larger than end, FOR statement is not executed.

6.4.8 WHILE
▷ It is executed repeatedly until condition is 0. In WHILE statement, condition is checked first and
loop is executed later. So no loop may be executed.
▷ Expression
WHILE condition DO
statements
END_ WHILE

Item Description
condition If condition is TRUE, statements after DO are executed.
In case of FLASE, it goes out from loop.
statements If condition is TRUE, statements more than one are executed.

Example Description
Counter := 0 If condition that Counter is less than 20 is TRUE, a statement is
WHILE Counter < 20 DO executed.
Counter := Counter + 1; If condition is FALSE, it goes out from loop.
END_WHILE ;

6-20
 Chapter 6 ST (Structured Text)

Note
In WHILE statement, in case condition doesn’t become 0, it can’t go out from loop. In this
case, due to long scan time, watch-dog is on. So be careful so that condition is not always
TRUE.

6.4.9 REPEAT statement

▷ Statement is executed repeatedly until condition is TRUE. In REPEAT statement, loop is executed
first and condition is checked later. So loop is executed at least one time.
▷ Expression
REPEAT
statements

UNTIL condition

END_REPEAT

Item Description
condition If condition is FALSE, it is executed repeatedly and if TRUE, goes
out from loop.
statements Loop is executed repeatedly until condition is TRUE.

Example Description
Counter := 0; First, Counter variable is set to 1. If the condition that Counter
REPEAT DO variable is larger than 2 is met, it goes out from loop or it executes
Counter := Counter + 1; loop.
UNTIL Counter > 20 If Counter variable is 21, condition is TRUE and it goes out from
END_REPEAT ; loop.

Note
In REPEAT statement, in case condition doesn’t become 1, it can’t go out from loop. In this
case, due to long scan time, watch-dog is on. So be careful so that condition is not always
FALSE.

6-21
Chapter 6 ST (Structured Text)

6.4.10 EXIT
▷ It is used to go out from repeat statements (WHILE, FOR, REPEAT).
▷ If it is used outside repeat statements, error occurs.
▷ Expression
EXIT

Example Description
SUM := 0; Counter variable increases from 0 to 10 as many as1. But because
FOR Counter := 0 TO 10 DO of EXT, loop ends. Counter variable becomes 0 and SUM becomes
SUM := SUM + 1; 1.
EXIT;
END_FOR ;
Counter := 0; Text is executed repeatedly when Counter is less than 20 and if
WHILE Counter < 20 DO Counter is larger than 20, loop ends. But because of IF statement
Counter := Counter + 1 ; and EXIT statement, loop ends when Counter is 10.
IF Counter = 10 THEN
EXIT;
END_IF;
END_WHILE ;

Counter := 0; Counter variable increase as many as 1. If Counter is larger than 20,

REPEAT DO loop ends otherwise loop is executed repeatedly. But because of IF
Counter := Counter + 1 ; statement and EXIT statement, loop ends when Counter is 10.
IF Counter = 10 THEN
EXIT;
END_IF;
UNTIL Counter > 20
END_REPEAT ;

6-22
 Appendix 1. Numeric System & Data Structure

Appendix 1. Numeric System & Data Structure

1) Expression of number (data)

In PLC CPU, all information is saved and processed in the states of On & Off, or “1” & “0”. Accordingly numeric

operation is also processed in 1 and 0, so called, Binary number (BIN).

However, since decimal is easy and most widely used in daily life, numeric information to write or read through

PLC needs to be converted from decimal to hexadecimal, or hexadecimal to decimal. In this chapter, how to

express or how to relate decimal, binary, hexadecimal and binary coded decimal (BCD) will be described.

(1) Decimal

Decimal is “number of signs 0 ~ 9 used to express order and size (quantity)”.

After 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, …..9, “10” will be continued with 2 figures increased.

For example, decimal 153 will be expressed as shown below in the aspect of row and “value weighted of row”

135=100+50+3

=1*100+5*10+3*1
2 1 0
=1*10 +5*10 +3*10

10진수의 기호(0~9)
Signs decimal (0~9)

Value
행의 weighted of row
가중치

(2) Binary (Bin)

Binary is “number of two signs 0 and 1 used to express order and size”.

After 0 and 1, “10” will be continued with 2 figures increased.

The number of a figure of 0 and 1 is called Bit.

Appendix 1-1
Appendix 1. Numeric System & Data Structure

Binary Decimal
0 0
1 1
10 2
11 3
100 4
101 5
110 6
111 7
1000 8
…… ……

For example, the binary below can be converted to decimal as follows;

“10011101”

As the row number and the value weighted of row have been considered in decimal, bit number and bit value

weighted will be added from the right.

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

Let’s think about the sum of the multiplication of each bit’s code value weighted as in decimal.

= 1×128+0×64+0×32+1×16+1×8+1×4+0×2+1×1
= 128+16+8+4+1

= 157

In other words, binary is the result of “code of 1 plus bit value weighted”

Generally, 8 bits is 1 byte, and 16 bits (2 bytes) is 1 word.

Appendix 1-2
 Appendix 1. Numeric System & Data Structure

(3) Hexadecimal (HEX)

Hexadecimal as similarly as above is “number of signs 0 ~ 9 and A ~ F” used to express order and size ”.

After 0, 1, 2, ‚‚‚‚‚‚D,E,F, “10” will be continued with 2 figures increased.

Decimal Hexadecimal Binary

0 0 0
1 1 1
2 2 10
3 3 11
4 4 100
5 5 101
6 6 110
7 7 111
8 8 1000
9 9 1001
10 A 1010
11 B 1011
12 C 1100
13 D 1101
14 E 1110
15 F 1111
16 10 10000
17 11 10001
18 12 10010
‚‚‚

‚‚‚

‚‚‚

1 9 1 0 1 4 A 9 D 0100 1010 1001 1101

= (4) × 163 + (A) × 162 + (9) × 161 + (D) × 160

= 4 × 4096 + 10 × 2568 + 9 × 16 + 13 × 1

= 19101

A figure of hexadecimal is equivalent to 4 bits binary.

Appendix 1-3
Appendix 1. Numeric System & Data Structure

(4) Binary Coded Decimal (BCD)

Binary coded decimal is “Decimal number of each row displayed in binary”.

For example, decimal 157 can be expressed as below;

Thus, binary coded decimal displays decimal 0 ~ 9999 (max. of 4 rows) in 16 bits.

Each bit’s value weighted is as follows;

Appendix 1-4
 Appendix 1. Numeric System & Data Structure

(5) Numeric System Table

Binary coded Decimal (BCD) Binary (BIN) Decimal Hexadecimal (H)

00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 0 0000

00000000 00000001 00000000 00000001 1 0001
00000000 00000010 00000000 00000010 2 0002
00000000 00000011 00000000 00000011 3 0003
00000000 00000100 00000000 00000100 4 0004
00000000 00000101 00000000 00000101 5 0005
00000000 00000100 00000000 00000100 6 0006
00000000 00000111 00000000 00000111 7 0007
00000000 00001000 00000000 00001000 8 0008
00000000 00001001 00000000 00001001 9 0009

00000000 00010000 00000000 00001010 10 000A

00000000 00010001 00000000 00001011 11 000B
00000000 00010010 00000000 00001100 12 000C
00000000 00010011 00000000 00001101 13 000D
00000000 00010100 00000000 00001110 14 000E
00000000 00010101 00000000 00001111 15 000F

00000000 00000110 00000000 00010000 16 0010

00000000 00000111 00000000 00010001 17 0011
00000000 00001000 00000000 00010010 18 0012
00000000 00001001 00000000 00010011 19 0013
00000000 00100000 00000000 00010100 20 0014
00000000 00100001 00000000 00010101 21 0015
00000000 00100010 00000000 00010110 22 0016
00000000 00100011 00000000 00010111 23 0017

00000001 00000000 00000000 01100100 100 0064

00000001 00100111 00000000 01111111 127 007F
00000010 01010101 00000000 11111111 255 00FF
00010000 00000000 00000000 11100000 1000 03E8
00100000 01000111 00000000 11111111 2047 07FF
01000000 10010101 00000000 11111111 4095 0FFF
10011001 10011001 00000111 00001111 9999 270F
00100111 00010000 10000 2710
01111111 11111111 32767 7FFF

Appendix 1-5
Appendix 1. Numeric System & Data Structure

2) Expression of integral number

XGK instructions are based on negative operation system (Signed).

As for integral number expressed, if the highest bit (MSB) is 0, it stands for positive number, and if it is 1, it
stands for negative number.

The highest bit expressing negative or positive number is called Sign bit.
Since the position of MSB is different in 16 bits and 32 bits, pay attention to the position of Sign bit.

’ In case of 16 bits

b16 b0

0: displays 0 and
Sign bit positive number
1: displays
negative number
Displayed range:-32768~32767

’ In case of 32 bits

b31 b16 b15 b0

0: displays 0 and
Sign bit positive number
1: displays
negative number

Displayed range: -2147483648 ~ 2147483647

3) Expression of negative number

Ex.) How to mark – 0001

(1) Take out the negative sign and mark 0001. (b15=1)

b15 b0

1 0 ~ 0 1

(2) Reverse the result of (1). (b15 = excepted)

b15 b0
1 1 ~ 1 0

(3) Add +1 to the result of (2).

b15 b0

1 1 ~ 0 1

-0001 = hFFFF

Appendix 1-6
 Appendix 2. Measurement and Precision of Timer

Appendix 2. Measurement and Precision of Timer

The timer makes its internal coil On/Off if Timer instruction is executed and reset the present value
after End instruction is executed to make contact point On/Off. In addition, if input condition is Off,
timer’s internal coil will be Off and timer’s present value will be 0 with contact point Off after End Inst is
executed.

The precision of 100ms timer is also identical to 10ms timer.

Appendix 2-1
Appendix 2. Measurement and Precision of Timer

First scan start END END END

TON TON TON

P00
Timer’s
internal coil
+1
Scan
0 Scan +1
-1 Scan
+1
Scan
-1

Appendix 2-2
Appendix 3. List of Special Relays (F)

Appendix 3. List of Special Relays (F)

Device 1 Device 2 Type Variable Function Description

F0000 DWORD _SYS_STATE Mode & Status PLC mode & run status displayed.
F00000 BIT _RUN RUN RUN status.
F00001 BIT _STOP STOP STOP status.
F00002 BIT _ERROR ERROR ERROR status.
F00003 BIT _DEBUG DEBUG DEBUG status.
F00004 BIT _LOCAL_CON Local control Local control mode.
F00005 BIT _MODBUS_CON Mode bus mode Mode bus control mode.
F00006 BIT _REMOTE_CON Remote mode Remote control mode.
Program being downloaded
F00008 BIT _RUN_EDIT_ST Modification during run
during run.
Modification in progress during
F00009 BIT _RUN_EDIT_CHK Modification during run
run.
Modification complete
F0000A BIT _RUN_EDIT_DONE Modification complete during run.
during run
Modification complete
F0000B BIT _RUN_EDIT_END Modification complete during run.
during run
F0000C BIT _CMOD_KEY Run mode Run mode changed by key.
Run mode changed by local
F0000D BIT _CMOD_LPADT Run mode
PADT.
Run mode changed by remote
F0000E BIT _CMOD_RPADT Run mode
PADT.
Run mode changed by remote
F0000F BIT _CMOD_RLINK Run mode
communication module.
F00010 BIT _FORCE_IN Compulsory input Compulsory input status.
F00011 BIT _FORCE_OUT Compulsory output Compulsory output status.
F00012 BIT _SKIP_ON I/O SKIP I/O SKIP being executed.
F00013 BIT _EMASK_ON Error mask Error mask being executed.
F00014 BIT _MON_ON Monitor Monitor being executed.
F00015 BIT _USTOP_ON STOP Stopped by STOP function
F00016 BIT _ESTOP_ON ESTOP Stopped by ESTOP function.
F00017 BIT _CONPILE_MODE compiling Compile being performed.
Initialization task being
F00018 BIT _INIT_RUN Initializing
performed.
F0001C BIT _PB1 Program code 1 Program code 1 selected.
F0001D BIT _PB2 Program code 2 Program code 2 selected.
F0001E BIT _CB1 Compile code 1 Compile code 1 selected.
F0001F BIT _CB2 Compile code 2 Compile code 2 selected.

Appendix 3-1
Appendix 3. List of Special Relays (F)

Device 1 Device 2 Type Variable Function Description

F0002 DWORD _CNF_ER System error Serious error in system reported.

F00020 BIT _CPU_ER CPU error CPU configuration error found.
F00021 BIT _IO_TYER Module type error Module type not identical.
Module
F00022 BIT _IO_DEER Module displaced.
installation error
F00023 BIT _FUSE_ER Fuse error Fuse blown.
F00024 BIT _IO_RWER Module I/O error Module I/O error found.
Module interface Error found in Special/communication
F00025 BIT _IP_IFER
error module interface.
External Serious error detected in external
F00026 BIT _ANNUM_ER
equipment Error equipment.
F00028 BIT _BPRM_ER Basic parameter Basic parameter abnormal.
F00029 BIT _IOPRM_ER IO parameter IO configuration parameter abnormal.
Special module
F0002A BIT _SPPRM_ER Special module parameter abnormal.
parameter
Communication
Communication module parameter
F0002B BIT _CPPRM_ER module
abnormal.
parameter
F0002C BIT _PGM_ER Program error Program error found.
F0002D BIT _CODE_ER Code error Program code error found.
System watch-
F0002E BIT _SWDT_ER System watch-dog active.
dog
F0002F BIT _BASE_POWER_ER Power error Base power abnormal.
F00030 BIT _WDT_ER Scan watch-dog Scan watch-dog active.
F0004 DWORD _CNF_WAR System warning Slight error in system reported.
F00040 BIT _RTC_ER RTC error RTC data abnormal.
F00041 BIT _DBCK_ER Back-up error Data back-up error found.
F00042 BIT _HBCK_ER Restart error Hot restart unavailable.
F00043 BIT _ABSD_ER Run error stop Stopped due to abnormal run.
F00044 BIT _TASK_ER Task impact Task being impacted.
F00045 BIT _BAT_ER Battery error Battery status abnormal.
External Slight error detected in external
F00046 BIT _ANNUM_WAR
equipment error equipment.
F00047 BIT _LOG_FULL Memory full Log memory full
F00048 BIT _HS_WAR1 HS link 1 HS link – parameter 1 error
F00049 BIT _HS_WAR2 HS link 2 HS link – parameter 2 error
F0004A BIT _HS_WAR3 HS link 3 HS link – parameter 3 error
F0004B BIT _HS_WAR4 HS link 4 HS link – parameter 4 error
F0004C BIT _HS_WAR5 HS link 5 HS link – parameter 5 error
F0004D BIT _HS_WAR6 HS link 6 HS link – parameter 6 error
F0004E BIT _HS_WAR7 HS link 7 HS link – parameter 7 error
F0004F BIT _HS_WAR8 HS link 8 HS link – parameter 8 error
F00050 BIT _HS_WAR9 HS link 9 HS link – parameter 9 error
F00051 BIT _HS_WAR10 HS link 10 HS link – parameter 10 error

Appendix 3-2
Appendix 3. List of Special Relays (F)

Device 1 Device 2 Type Variable Function Description

F00052 BIT _HS_WAR11 HS link 11 HS link - parameter11 error

F00053 BIT _HS_WAR12 HS link 12 HS link - parameter12 error
F00054 BIT _P2P_WAR1 P2P parameter 1 P2P - parameter1 error
F00055 BIT _P2P_WAR2 P2P parameter 2 P2P – parameter2 error
F00056 BIT _P2P_WAR3 P2P parameter 3 P2P – parameter3 error
F00057 BIT _P2P_WAR4 P2P parameter 4 P2P – parameter4 error
F00058 BIT _P2P_WAR5 P2P parameter 5 P2P – parameter5 error
F00059 BIT _P2P_WAR6 P2P parameter 6 P2P – parameter6 error
F0005A BIT _P2P_WAR7 P2P parameter 7 P2P – parameter7 error
F0005B BIT _P2P_WAR8 P2P parameter 8 P2P – parameter8 error
F0005C BIT _CONSTANT_ER Fixed cycle error Fixed cycle error
F0009 WORD _USER_F User contact point Timer available for user.
F00090 BIT _T20MS 20ms CLOCK of 20ms cycle.
F00091 BIT _T100MS 100ms CLOCK of 100ms cycle.
F00092 BIT _T200MS 200ms CLOCK of 200ms cycle.
F00093 BIT _T1S 1s CLOCK of 1s cycle.
F00094 BIT _T2S 2s CLOCK of 2s cycle.
F00095 BIT _T10S 10s CLOCK of 10s cycle.
F00096 BIT _T20S 20s CLOCK of 20s cycle.
F00097 BIT _T60S 60s CLOCK of 60s cycle.
F00099 BIT _ON Always ON Bit always ON.
F0009A BIT _OFF Always OFF Bit always OFF
F0009B BIT _1ON 1 scan ON Bit only ON for the first scan.
F0009C BIT _1OFF 1 scan OFF Bit only OFF for the first scan.
F0009D BIT _STOG Reverse Every scan reversed.
F0010 WORD _USER_CLK User CLOCK CLOCK available to set by user.
Repeat specific
F00100 BIT _USR_CLK0 ON/OFF CLOCK 0 for specific scan
scan
Repeat specific
F00101 BIT _USR_CLK1 ON/OFF CLOCK 1 for specific scan
scan
Repeat specific
F00102 BIT _USR_CLK2 ON/OFF CLOCK 2 for specific scan
scan
Repeat specific
F00103 BIT _USR_CLK3 ON/OFF CLOCK 3 for specific scan
scan
Repeat specific
F00104 BIT _USR_CLK4 ON/OFF CLOCK 4 for specific scan
scan
Repeat specific
F00105 BIT _USR_CLK5 ON/OFF CLOCK 5 for specific scan
scan
Repeat specific
F00106 BIT _USR_CLK6 ON/OFF CLOCK 6 for specific scan
scan
Repeat specific
F00107 BIT _USR_CLK7 ON/OFF CLOCK 7 for specific scan
scan

Appendix 3-3
Appendix 3. List of Special Relays (F)

Device 1 Device 2 Type Variable Function Description

F0011 WORD _LOGIC_RESULT Logic result Logic result displayed.

F00110 BIT _LER Calculation error ON for 1 scan if operation in error.
F00111 BIT _ZERO Zero flag ON if operation result is 0.
F00112 BIT _CARRY Carry flag ON if Carry found during operation.
Whole output
F00113 BIT _ALL_OFF ON if all output OFF
OFF
F00115 BIT _LER_LATCH Calculation error latch ON kept if operation in error.
F0012 WORD _CMP_RESULT Compared result Compared result displayed.
F00120 BIT _LT LT flag ON if “less than”
F00121 BIT _LTE LTE flag ON if “less than or equal”
F00122 BIT _EQU EQU flag ON if “equal”
F00123 BIT _GT GT flag ON if “greater than”
F00124 BIT _GTE GTE flag ON if “greater than or equal”
F00125 BIT _NEQ NEQ flag ON if “not equal”
Number of inspected power-cuts
F0013 WORD _AC_F_CNT Inspected power cut
displayed.
F0014 WORD _FALS_NUM FALS number FALS number displayed.
F0015 WORD _PUTGET_ERR0 PUT/GET error 0 Main base PUT / GET error
F0016 WORD _PUTGET_ERR1 PUT/GET error 1 Added base step 1 PUT / GET error
F0017 WORD _PUTGET_ERR2 PUT/GET error 2 Added base step 2 PUT / GET error
F0018 WORD _PUTGET_ERR3 PUT/GET error 3 Added base step 3 PUT / GET error
F0019 WORD _PUTGET_ERR4 PUT/GET error 4 Added base step 4 PUT / GET error
F0020 WORD _PUTGET_ERR5 PUT/GET error 5 Added base step 5 PUT / GET error
F0021 WORD _PUTGET_ERR6 PUT/GET error 6 Added base step 6 PUT / GET error
F0022 WORD _PUTGET_ERR7 PUT/GET error 7 Added base step 7 PUT / GET error
F0023 WORD _PUTGET_NDR0 PUT/GET complete 0 Main base PUT / GET complete
Added base step 1
F0024 WORD _PUTGET_NDR1 PUT/GET complete 1
PUT / GET complete
Added base step 2
F0025 WORD _PUTGET_NDR2 PUT/GET complete 2
PUT / GET complete
Added base step 3
F0026 WORD _PUTGET_NDR3 PUT/GET complete 3
PUT / GETcomplete
Added base step 4
F0027 WORD _PUTGET_NDR4 PUT/GET complete 4
PUT / GETcomplete
Added base step 5
F0028 WORD _PUTGET_NDR5 PUT/GET complete 5
PUT / GETcomplete
Added base step 6
F0029 WORD _PUTGET_NDR6 PUT/GET complete 6
PUT / GETcomplete
Added base step 7
F0030 WORD _PUTGET_NDR7 PUT/GET complete 7
PUT / GETcomplete
F0044 WORD _CPU_TYPE CPU type Information on CPU type displayed.
F0045 WORD _CPU_VER CPU version CPU version displayed.
F0046 DWORD _OS_VER OS version OS version displayed.
F0048 DWORD _OS_DATE OS date OS released date displayed.

Appendix 3-4
Appendix 3. List of Special Relays (F)

Device 1 Device 2 Type Variable Function Description

F0050 WORD _SCAN_MAX Max. scan time Max. scan time since run displayed
F0051 WORD _SCAN_MIN Min. scan time Min. scan time since run displayed
F0052 WORD _SCAN_CUR Present scan time Present scan time displayed.
F0053 WORD _MON_YEAR Month / Year PLC’s time information (Month/Year)
F0054 WORD _TIME_DAY Hour / Date PLC’s time information (Hour/Date)
F0055 WORD _SEC_MIN Second / Minute PLC’s time information (Second/Minute)
F0056 WORD _HUND_WK 100 years / Day PLC’s time information (100 years/Day)
FPU operation Floating decimal operation result
F0057 WORD _FPU_INFO
result displayed.
Incorrect error
F00570 BIT _FPU_LFLAG_I Latched if in incorrect error.
latch
F00571 BIT _FPU_LFLAG_U Underflow latch Latched if underflow found.
F00572 BIT _FPU_LFLAG_O Overflow latch Latched if overflow found.
F00573 BIT _FPU_LFLAG_Z Latch divided by 0 Latched if divided by 0.
Invalid operation
F00574 BIT _FPU_LFLAG_V Latched if invalid operation.
latch
F0057A BIT _FPU_FLAG_I Incorrect error Reported if incorrect error found.
F0057B BIT _FPU_FLAG_U Underflow Reported if underflow found.
F0057C BIT _FPU_FLAG_O Overflow Reported if overflow found.
F0057D BIT _FPU_FLAG_Z Division by 0 Reported if divided by 0.
F0057E BIT _FPU_FLAG_V Invalid operation Reported if operation invalid.
Irregular value
F0057F BIT _FPU_FLAG_E Reported if irregular value input.
input
F0058 DWORD _ERR_STEP Error step Error step saved.
Increased when module refresh
F0060 DWORD _REF_COUNT Refresh
executed.
F0062 DWORD _REF_OK_CNT Refresh OK Increased if module refresh normal
F0064 DWORD _REF_NG_CNT Refresh NG Increased if module refresh abnormal.
Increased if module refresh abnormal
F0066 DWORD _REF_LIM_CNT Refresh LIMIT
(TIME OUT).
F0068 DWORD _REF_ERR_CNT Refresh ERROR Increased if module refresh abnormal.
_MOD_RD_ERR_ Module READ Increased if module reads 1 word
F0070 DWORD
CNT ERROR abnormally.
_MOD_WR_ERR Module WRITE Increased if module writes 1 word
F0072 DWORD
_CNT ERROR abnormally.
Increased if module’s block data
F0074 DWORD _CA_CNT Block service
serviced
Block service Increased if module’s block data
F0076 DWORD _CA_LIM_CNT
LIMIT service abnormal.
Block service Increased if module’s block data
F0078 DWORD _CA_ERR_CNT
ERROR service abnormal.
Increased if CPU’s internal buffer is
F0080 DWORD _BUF_FULL_CNT Buffer FULL
FULL.
F0082 DWORD _PUT_CNT PUT count Increased if PUT executed.
F0084 DWORD _GET_CNT GET count Increased if GET executed.
F0086 DWORD _KEY Present key Local key’s present status displayed.
F0088 DWORD _KEY_PREV Previous key Local key’s previous status displayed.

Appendix 3-5
Appendix 3. List of Special Relays (F)

Device 1 Device 2 Type Variable Function Description

Slot number with discordant module type
F0090 WORD _IO_TYER_N Discordant slot
displayed.
Slot number with displaced module
F0091 WORD _IO_DEER_N Displaced slot
displayed.
F0092 WORD _FUSE_ER_N Fuse blown slot Slot number with fuse blown displayed.
Slot number with module Read/Write
F0093 WORD _IO_RWER_N RW error slot
error displayed.
Slot number with module interface error
F0094 WORD _IP_IFER_N IF error slot
displayed.
F0096 WORD _IO_TYER0 Module type 0 error Main base module type error.
F0097 WORD _IO_TYER1 Module type 1 error Added base step 1 module type error.
F0098 WORD _IO_TYER2 Module type 2 error Added base step 2 module type error.
F0099 WORD _IO_TYER3 Module type 3 error Added base step 3 module type error.
F0100 WORD _IO_TYER4 Module type 4 error Added base step 4 module type error.
F0101 WORD _IO_TYER5 Module type 5 error Added base step 5 module type error
F0102 WORD _IO_TYER6 Module type 6 error Added base step 6 module type error
F0103 WORD _IO_TYER7 Module type 7 error Added base step 7 module type error
F0104 WORD _IO_DEER0 Module installation 0 error Main base module installation error
F0105 WORD _IO_DEER1 Module installation 1 error Added base step 1 module installation error
F0106 WORD _IO_DEER2 Module installation 2 error Added base step 2 module installation error
F0107 WORD _IO_DEER3 Module installation 3 error Added base step 3 module installation error
F0108 WORD _IO_DEER4 Module installation 4 error Added base step 4 module installation error
F0109 WORD _IO_DEER5 Module installation 5 error Added base step 5 module installation error
F0110 WORD _IO_DEER6 Module installation 6 error Added base step 6 module installation error
F0111 WORD _IO_DEER7 Module installation 7 error Added base step 7 module installation error
F0112 WORD _FUSE_ER0 Fuse blown 0 error Main base Fuse blown error
F0113 WORD _FUSE_ER1 Fuse blown 1 error Added base step 1 Fuse blown error
F0114 WORD _FUSE_ER2 Fuse blown 2 error Added base step 2 Fuse blown error
F0115 WORD _FUSE_ER3 Fuse blown 3 error Added base step 3 Fuse blown error
F0116 WORD _FUSE_ER4 Fuse blown 4 error Added base step 4 Fuse blown error
F0117 WORD _FUSE_ER5 Fuse blown 5 error Added base step 5 Fuse blown error
F0118 WORD _FUSE_ER6 Fuse blown 6 error Added base step 6 Fuse blown error
F0119 WORD _FUSE_ER7 Fuse blown 7 error Added base step 7 Fuse blown error
F0120 WORD _IO_RWER0 Module RW 0 error Main base module Read/Write error
F0121 WORD _IO_RWER1 Module RW 1 error Added base step 1 module Read/Write error
F0122 WORD _IO_RWER2 Module RW 2 error Added base step 2 module Read/Write error
F0123 WORD _IO_RWER3 Module RW 3 error Added base step 3 module Read/Write error
F0124 WORD _IO_RWER4 Module RW 4 error Added base step 4 module Read/Write error
F0125 WORD _IO_RWER5 Module RW 5 error Added base step 5 module Read/Write error
F0126 WORD _IO_RWER6 Module RW 6 error Added base step 6 module Read/Write error
F0127 WORD _IO_RWER7 Module RW 7 error Added base step 7 module Read/Write error

Appendix 3-6
Appendix 3. List of Special Relays (F)

Device 1 Device 2 Type Variable Function Description

F0128 WORD _IO_IFER_0 Module IF 0 error Main base module interface error
Added base step 1 module interface
F0129 WORD _IO_IFER_1 Module IF 1 error
error
Added base step 2 module interface
F0130 WORD _IO_IFER_2 Module IF 2 error
error
Added base step 3 module interface
F0131 WORD _IO_IFER_3 Module IF 3 error
error
Added base step 4 module interface
F0132 WORD _IO_IFER_4 Module IF 4 error
error
Added base step 5 module interface
F0133 WORD _IO_IFER_5 Module IF 5 error
error
Added base step 6 module interface
F0134 WORD _IO_IFER_6 Module IF 6 error
error
Added base step 7 module interface
F0135 WORD _IO_IFER_7 Module IF 7 error
error
F0136 WORD _RTC_DATE RTC date RTC’s present date
F0137 WORD _RTC_WEEK RTC day RTC’s present day of the week
F0138 DWORD _RTC_TOD RTC time RTC’s present time (ms unit)
F0140 DWORD _AC_FAIL_CNT Power-cut times Power-cut times saved.
F0142 DWORD _ERR_HIS_CNT Errors found Number of found errors saved.
Mode conversion
F0144 DWORD _MOD_HIS_CNT Mode conversion times saved.
times
F0146 DWORD _SYS_HIS_CNT History updated System’s updated history saved.
F0148 DWORD _LOG_ROTATE Log rotate Log rotate information saved.
F0150 WORD _BASE_INFO0 Slot information 0 Main base slot information
F0151 WORD _BASE_INFO1 Slot information 1 Added base step 1 slot information
F0152 WORD _BASE_INFO2 Slot information 2 Added base step 2 slot information
F0153 WORD _BASE_INFO3 Slot information 3 Added base step 3 slot information
F0154 WORD _BASE_INFO4 Slot information 4 Added base step 4 slot information
F0155 WORD _BASE_INFO5 Slot information 5 Added base step 5 slot information
F0156 WORD _BASE_INFO6 Slot information 6 Added base step 6 slot information
F0157 WORD _BASE_INFO7 Slot information 7 Added base step 7 slot information
Used block
F0158 WORD _RBANK_NUM Presently used block number
number
F0159 WORD _RBLOCK_STATE Flash status Flash block status
F0160 DWORD _RBLOCK_RD_FLAG Flash Read ON when reading Flash N block data.
F0162 DWORD _RBLOCK_WR_FLAG Flash Write ON when writing Flash N block data.
Error found during Flash N block
F0164 DWORD _RBLOCK_ER_FLAG Flash error
service.
Setting in case of
F09320 BIT _FUSE_ER_PMT Ignores fuse error
fuse error
Setting in case of
F09321 BIT _IO_ER_PMT Ignores I/O module error
I/O error
Setting in case of
F09322 BIT _SP_ER_PMT Ignores special module error
special erro
Setting in case of
F09323 BIT _CP_ER_PMT Ignores comm. module error
comm. Error
F0934 DWORD _BASE_EMASK_INFO Base default mask Base default mask information

Appendix 3-7
Appendix 3. List of Special Relays (F)

Device 1 Device 2 Type Variable Function Description

F0936 DWORD _BASE_SKIP_INFO Base skip Base skip information

F0938 WORD _SLOT_EMASK_INFO_0 Slot default mask Slot default mask information (BASE 0)
F0939 WORD _SLOT_EMASK_INFO_1 Slot default mask Slot default mask information (BASE 1)

F0940 WORD _SLOT_EMASK_INFO_2 Slot default mask Slot default mask information (BASE 2)

F0941 WORD _SLOT_EMASK_INFO_3 Slot default mask Slot default mask information (BASE 3)

F0942 WORD _SLOT_EMASK_INFO_4 Slot default mask Slot default mask information (BASE 4)

F0943 WORD _SLOT_EMASK_INFO_5 Slot default mask Slot default mask information (BASE 5)

F0944 WORD _SLOT_EMASK_INFO_6 Slot default mask Slot default mask information (BASE 6)

F0945 WORD _SLOT_EMASK_INFO_7 Slot default mask Slot default mask information (BASE 7)

F0946 WORD _SLOT_SKIP_INFO_0 Slot skip Slot skip information (BASE 0)

F0947 WORD _SLOT_SKIP_INFO_1 Slot skip Slot skip information (BASE 1)

F0948 WORD _SLOT_SKIP_INFO_2 Slot skip Slot skip information (BASE 2)

F0949 WORD _SLOT_SKIP_INFO_3 Slot skip Slot skip information (BASE 3)

F0950 WORD _SLOT_SKIP_INFO_4 Slot skip Slot skip information (BASE 4)

F0951 WORD _SLOT_SKIP_INFO_5 Slot skip Slot skip information (BASE 5)

F0952 WORD _SLOT_SKIP_INFO_6 Slot skip Slot skip information (BASE 6)

F0953 WORD _SLOT_SKIP_INFO_7 Slot skip Slot skip information (BASE 7)

Initialization
F10250 BIT _INIT_DONE Initialization complete displayed.
complete
External serious Serious error information in external
F1026 WORD _ANC_ERR
error information equipment displayed.
External slight Slight error information in external
F1027 WORD _ANC_WAR
error information equipment displayed.
F1034 WORD _MON_YEAR_DT Month / Year Time information data (Month/Year)
F1035 WORD _TIME_DAY_DT Hour / Date Time information data (Hour/Date)
F1036 WORD _SEC_MIN_DT Second / Minute Time information data (Second/Minute)

F1037 WORD _HUND_WK_DT 100 years / Day Time information data (100 years/Day)

Appendix 3-8
 Appendix 4 Execution Speed of Instruction

Appendix 4 Execution Speed of Instruction

Unit: ns
XGK-CPUS/E XGK-CPUH/A
Section Instruction Non- Executed Executed Non- Executed Executed
executed N=1 N=8 or X executed N=1 N=8 or X
LOAD 84 84 - 28 28 -
LOAD NOT 84 84 - 28 28 -
LOADP 252 252 - 84 84 -
LOADN 252 252 - 84 84 -
AND 84 84 - 28 28 -
Contact AND NOT 84 84 - 28 28 -
Instruction ANDP 252 252 - 84 84 -
ANDN 252 252 - 84 84 -
OR 84 84 - 28 28 -
OR NOT 84 84 - 28 28 -
ORP 252 252 - 84 84 -
ORN 252 252 - 84 84 -
AND LOAD 84 84 - 28 28 -
OR LOAD 84 84 - 28 28 -
Union
MPUSH 84 84 - 28 28 -
Instruction
MLOAD 84 84 - 28 28 -
MPOP 84 84 - 28 28 -
Reverse NOT 84 84 - 28 28 -
Master MCS 84 84 - 28 28 -
Control MCSCLR 84 84 - 28 28 -
OUT 168 168 - 56 56 -
OUT NOT 168 168 - 56 56 -
SET 168 168 - 56 56 -
Output
RST 168 168 - 56 56 -
Instruction
OUTP 336 336 - 112 112 -
OUTN 420 420 - 140 140 -
FF 336 336 - 112 112 -
LOAD
252 2100 - 700 700 -
Sxx.yy
AND Sxx.yy 252 1932 - 644 644 -
Subsequent OR Sxx.yy 252 2352 - 784 784 -
/Last-input LOAD NOT
252 2100 - 700 700 -
preferred S
insturtion AND NOT S 252 1932 - 644 644 -
OR NOT S 252 2352 - 784 784 -
SET S 252 1260 - 420 420 -
OUT S 252 1932 - 644 644 -
End END 9000 90001) - 3000 30001) -
Non-
process NOP 84 84 - 28 28 -
Operation
TON 6468 10626 - 2156 3542 -
TOFF 5040 7896 - 1680 2632 -
Timer
TMR 3192 10626 - 1064 3542 -
Instruction
TMON 5712 8568 - 1904 2856 -
TRTG 6048 8568 - 2016 2856 -
CTD 1722 4872 - 574 1624 -
Counter CTU 1722 8148 - 574 2716 -
Instruction CTUD 3696 9240 - 1232 3080 -
CTR 1722 8610 - 574 2870 -

1)
If using the timer, the execution time of timer is as added as number of timer.
Appendix 4-1
Appendix 4. Execution Speed of Instruction
Unit: ns
XGK-CPUS/E XGK-CPUH/A
Section Instruction Non- Executed Executed Non- Executed Executed
executed N=1 N=8 or X executed N=1 N=8 or X
MOV 252 252 - 84 84 -
MOVP 420 420 - 140 140 -
DMOV 252 252 - 84 84 -
DMOVP 420 420 - 140 140 -
RMOV 252 252 - 84 84 -
RMOVP 420 420 - 140 140 -
LMOV 420 1596 - 140 532 -
LMOVP 588 1764 - 196 588 -
MOV4 504 6426 - 168 2142 -
MOV4P 672 6594 - 224 2198 -
MOV8 504 6426 - 168 2142 -
MOV8P 672 6594 - 224 2198 -
Data CMOV 252 336 - 84 112 -
Transfer CMOVP 420 504 - 140 168 -
Instruction
DCMOV 252 336 - 84 112 -
DCMOVP 420 504 - 140 168 -
GMOV 420 8358 11592 140 2786 3864
GMOVP 588 8526 11760 196 2842 3920
FMOV 420 4662 7308 140 1554 2436
FMOVP 588 4830 7476 196 1610 2492
BMOV 420 3108 - 140 1036 -
BMOVP 588 3276 - 196 1092 -
GBMOV 504 9618 17556 168 3206 5852
GBMOVP 672 9786 17724 224 3262 5908
$MOV 336 16674 - 112 5558 -
$MOVP 504 16842 - 168 5614 -
BCD 336 1722 - 112 574 -
BCDP 504 1890 - 168 630 -
DBCD 336 1806 - 112 602 -
DBCDP 504 1974 - 168 658 -
BIN 336 1680 - 112 560 -
BINP 504 1848 - 168 616 -
DBIN 336 1764 - 112 588 -
DBINP 504 1932 - 168 644 -
GBCD 420 9408 20580 140 3136 6860
GBCDP 588 9576 20748 196 3192 6916
GBIN 420 9324 19908 140 3108 6636
GBINP 588 9492 20076 196 3164 6692
I2R 336 1638 - 112 546 -
I2RP 504 1806 - 168 602 -
Conversion I2L 336 4830 - 112 1610 -
Instruction
I2LP 504 4998 - 168 1666 -
D2R 336 1554 - 112 518 -
D2RP 504 1722 - 168 574 -
D2L 336 4662 - 112 1554 -
D2LP 504 4830 - 168 1610 -
R2I 336 3150 - 112 1050 -
R2IP 504 3318 - 168 1106 -
R2D 336 3150 - 112 1050 -
R2DP 504 3318 - 168 1106 -
L2I 420 3234 - 140 1078 -
L2IP 588 3402 - 196 1134 -
L2D 420 3234 - 140 1078 -
L2DP 588 3402 - 196 1134 -

Appendix 4-2
 Appendix 4 Execution Speed of Instruction
Unit: ns
XGK-CPUS/E XGK-CPUH/A
Section Instruction Non- Executed Executed Non- Executed Executed
executed N=1 N=8 or X executed N=1 N=8 or X
CMP 336 1764 - 112 588 -
CMPP 504 1932 - 168 644 -
DCMP 336 1764 - 112 588 -
DCMPP 504 1932 - 168 644 -
CMP4 504 6552 - 168 2184 -
CMP4P 672 6720 - 224 2240 -
CMP8 504 6552 - 168 2184 -
CMP8P 672 6720 - 224 2240 -
TCMP 420 17724 - 140 5908 -
TCMPP 588 17892 - 196 5964 -
DTCMP 420 20664 - 140 6888 -
Compare DTCMPP 588 20832 - 196 6944 -
Instruction GEQ 504 9198 15372 168 3066 5124
GEQP 672 9366 15540 224 3122 5180
GGT 504 9198 15372 168 3066 5124
GGTP 672 9366 15540 224 3122 5180
GLT 504 9198 15372 168 3066 5124
GLTP 672 9366 15540 224 3122 5180
GGE 504 9198 15372 168 3066 5124
GGEP 672 9366 15540 224 3122 5180
GLE 504 9198 15372 168 3066 5124
GLEP 672 9366 15540 224 3122 5180
GNE 504 9198 15372 168 3066 5124
GNEP 672 9366 15540 224 3122 5180
LOAD= - 336 - - 112 -
LOAD> - 336 - - 112 -
LOAD< - 336 - - 112 -
LOAD>= - 336 - - 112 -
LOAD<= - 336 - - 112 -
LOAD<> - 336 - - 112 -
AND= 336 336 - 112 112 -
Compare AND> 336 336 - 112 112 -
Instruction AND< 336 336 - 112 112 -
(16 Bit AND>= 336 336 - 112 112 -
Integer) AND<= 336 336 - 112 112 -
AND<> 336 336 - 112 112 -
OR= 336 336 - 112 112 -
OR> 336 336 - 112 112 -
OR< 336 336 - 112 112 -
OR>= 336 336 - 112 112 -
OR<= 336 336 - 112 112 -
OR<> 336 336 - 112 112 -

Appendix 4-3
Appendix 4. Execution Speed of Instruction

Unit: ns
XGK-CPUS/E XGK-CPUH/A
Section Instruction Non- Executed Executed Non- Executed Executed
executed N=1 N=8 or X executed N=1 N=8 or X
LOADD= - 504 - - 168 -
LOADD> - 504 - - 168 -
LOADD< - 504 - - 168 -
LOADD<= - 504 - - 168 -
LOADD>= - 504 - - 168 -
LOADD<> - 504 - - 168 -
ANDD= 420 420 - 140 140 -
Compare ANDD> 420 420 - 140 140 -
Instructioin ANDD< 420 420 - 140 140 -
(32 bit ANDD>= 420 420 - 140 140 -
Integer) ANDD<= 420 420 - 140 140 -
ANDD<> 420 420 - 140 140 -
ORD= 420 420 - 140 140 -
ORD> 420 420 - 140 140 -
ORD< 420 420 - 140 140 -
ORD　　 420 420 - 140 140 -
ORD　= 420 420 - 140 140 -
ORD　 　 420 420 - 140 140 -
LOAD4= - 6132 - - 2044 -
LOAD4> - 6132 - - 2044 -
LOAD4< - 6132 - - 2044 -
LOAD4>= - 6132 - - 2044 -
LOAD4<= - 6132 - - 2044 -
LOAD4<> - 6132 - - 2044 -
AND4= 504 5964 - 168 1988 -
Compare AND4> 504 5964 - 168 1988 -
Instructioin AND4< 504 5964 - 168 1988 -
(4 bit AND4>= 504 5964 - 168 1988 -
Integer) AND4<= 504 5964 - 168 1988 -
AND4<> 504 5964 - 168 1988 -
OR4= 504 6468 - 168 2156 -
OR4> 504 6468 - 168 2156 -
OR4< 504 6468 - 168 2156 -
OR4>= 504 6468 - 168 2156 -
OR4<= 504 6468 - 168 2156 -
OR4<> 504 6468 - 168 2156 -
LOAD8= - 6132 - - 2044 -
LOAD8> - 6132 - - 2044 -
LOAD8< - 6132 - - 2044 -
LOAD8>= - 6132 - - 2044 -
LOAD8<= - 6132 - - 2044 -
LOAD8<> - 6132 - - 2044 -
AND8= 504 5964 - 168 1988 -
Compare AND8> 504 5964 - 168 1988 -
Instructioin AND8< 504 5964 - 168 1988 -
(8 bit AND8>= 504 5964 - 168 1988 -
Integer) AND8<= 504 5964 - 168 1988 -
AND8<> 504 5964 - 168 1988 -
OR8= 504 6468 - 168 2156 -
OR8> 504 6468 - 168 2156 -
OR8< 504 6468 - 168 2156 -
OR8>= 504 6468 - 168 2156 -
OR8<= 504 6468 - 168 2156 -
OR8<> 504 6468 - 168 2156 -

Appendix 4-4
 Appendix 4 Execution Speed of Instruction

Unit: ns
XGK-CPUS/E XGK-CPUH/A
Section Instruction
Non- Executed Executed Non- Executed Executed
executed N=1 N=8 or X executed N=1 N=8 or X
LOADG= 1848 8274 12684 616 2758 4228
LOADG> 1848 8274 12684 616 2758 4228
LOADG< 1848 8274 12684 616 2758 4228
LOADG>= 1848 8274 12684 616 2758 4228
LOADG<= 1848 8274 12684 616 2758 4228
LOADG<> 1848 8274 12684 616 2758 4228
ANDG　 420 8106 12516 140 2702 4172
Compare ANDG> 420 8106 12516 140 2702 4172
Instructioin ANDG< 420 8106 12516 140 2702 4172
(16 bit ANDG>= 420 8106 12516 140 2702 4172
group) ANDG<= 420 8106 12516 140 2702 4172
ANDG<> 420 8106 12516 140 2702 4172
ORG　 420 8610 13020 140 2870 4340
ORG> 420 8610 13020 140 2870 4340
ORG< 420 8610 13020 140 2870 4340
ORG>= 420 8610 13020 140 2870 4340
ORG<= 420 8610 13020 140 2870 4340
ORG<> 420 8610 13020 140 2870 4340
LOADR= - 1596 - - 532 -
LOADR> - 1596 - - 532 -
LOADR< - 1596 - - 532 -
LOADR>= - 1596 - - 532 -
LOADR<= - 1596 - - 532 -
LOADR<> - 1596 - - 532 -
ANDR= 336 1428 - 112 476 -
Real ANDR> 336 1428 - 112 476 -
Compare
ANDR< 336 1428 - 112 476 -
Instruction
(Single Real ANDR>= 336 1428 - 112 476 -
Number) ANDR<= 336 1428 - 112 476 -
ANDR<> 336 1428 - 112 476 -
ORR= 336 1932 - 112 644 -
ORR> 336 1932 - 112 644 -
ORR< 336 1932 - 112 644 -
ORR>= 336 1932 - 112 644 -
ORR<= 336 1932 - 112 644 -
ORR<> 336 1932 - 112 644 -
LOADL= - 1764 - - 588 -
LOADL> - 1764 - - 588 -
LOADL< - 1764 - - 588 -
LOADL>= - 1764 - - 588 -
LOADL<= - 1764 - - 588 -
LOADL<> - 1764 - - 588 -
ANDL= 504 1596 - 168 532 -
Real ANDL> 504 1596 - 168 532 -
Compare ANDL< 504 1596 - 168 532 -
Instruction
ANDL>= 504 1596 - 168 532 -
(Double Real
Number) ANDL<= 504 1596 - 168 532 -
ANDL<> 504 1596 - 168 532 -
ORL= 504 2100 - 168 700 -
ORL> 504 2100 - 168 700 -
ORL< 504 2100 - 168 700 -
ORL>= 504 2100 - 168 700 -
ORL<= 504 2100 - 168 700 -
ORL<> 504 2100 - 168 700 -

Appendix 4-5
Appendix 4. Execution Speed of Instruction

Unit: ns
XGK-CPUS/E XGK-CPUH/A
Section Instruction
Non- Executed Executed Non- Executed Executed
executed N=1 N=8 or X executed N=1 N=8 or X
LOAD$= - 8526 - - 2842 -
LOAD$> - 8526 - - 2842 -
LOAD$< - 8526 - - 2842 -
LOAD$>= - 8526 - - 2842 -
LOAD$<= - 8526 - - 2842 -
LOAD$<> - 8526 - - 2842 -
AND$= 336 8358 - 112 2786 -
AND$> 336 8358 - 112 2786 -
String AND$< 336 8358 - 112 2786 -
Compare
AND$>= 336 8358 - 112 2786 -
Instruction
AND$<= 336 8358 - 112 2786 -
AND$<> 336 8358 - 112 2786 -
OR$= 336 8862 - 112 2954 -
OR$> 336 8862 - 112 2954 -
OR$< 336 8862 - 112 2954 -
OR$>= 336 8862 - 112 2954 -
OR$<= 336 8862 - 112 2954 -
OR$<> 336 8862 - 112 2954 -
LOAD=3 - 2268 - - 756 -
LOAD>3 - 2268 - - 756 -
LOAD<3 - 2268 - - 756 -
LOAD>=3 - 2268 - - 756 -
LOAD<=3 - 2268 - - 756 -
LOAD<>3 - 2268 - - 756 -
AND=3 420 2100 - 140 700 -
Operand AND>3 420 2100 - 140 700 -
Compare
AND<3 420 2100 - 140 700 -
Instruction
(16 bit AND>=3 420 2100 - 140 700 -
integer) AND<=3 420 2100 - 140 700 -
AND<>3 420 2100 - 140 700 -
OR=3 420 2604 - 140 868 -
OR>3 420 2604 - 140 868 -
OR<3 420 2604 - 140 868 -
OR>=3 420 2604 - 140 868 -
OR<=3 420 2604 - 140 868 -
OR<>3 420 2604 - 140 868 -
LOADD=3 - 2268 - - 756 -
LOADD>3 - 2268 - - 756 -
LOADD<3 - 2268 - - 756 -
LOADD>=3 - 2268 - - 756 -
LOADD<=3 - 2268 - - 756 -
LOADD<>3 - 2268 - - 756 -
ANDD=3 420 2100 - 140 700 -
Operand ANDD>3 420 2100 - 140 700 -
Compare ANDD<3 420 2100 - 140 700 -
Instrucion
ANDD>=3 420 2100 - 140 700 -
(32 bit
Integer) ANDD<=3 420 2100 - 140 700 -
ANDD<>3 420 2100 - 140 700 -
ORD=3 420 2604 - 140 868 -
ORD>3 420 2604 - 140 868 -
ORD<3 420 2604 - 140 868 -
ORD>=3 420 2604 - 140 868 -
ORD<=3 420 2604 - 140 868 -
ORD<>3 420 2604 - 140 868 -

Appendix 4-6
 Appendix 4 Execution Speed of Instruction

Unit: ns
XGK-CPUS/E XGK-CPUH/A
Section Instruction Non- Executed Executed Non- Executed Executed
executed N=1 N=8 or X executed N=1 N=8 or X
INC 252 336 252 84 112 -
INCP 420 504 420 140 168 -
DINC 252 420 252 84 140 -
DINCP 420 588 420 140 196 -
INC4 336 6426 336 112 2142 -
INC4P 504 6594 504 168 2198 -
INC8 336 6426 336 112 2142 -
INC8P 504 6594 504 168 2198 -
DEC 252 336 252 84 112 -
DECP 420 504 420 140 168 -
DDEC 252 420 252 84 140 -
Increase/ DDECP 420 588 420 140 196 -
Decrease
DEC4 336 6426 336 112 2142 -
Instruction
DEC4P 504 6594 504 168 2198 -
DEC8 336 6426 336 112 2142 -
DEC8P 504 6594 504 168 2198 -
INCU 252 672 252 84 224 -
INCUP 420 840 420 140 280 -
DINCU 252 714 252 84 238 -
DINCUP 420 918 420 140 306 -
DECU 252 672 252 84 224 -
DECUP 420 840 420 140 280 -
DDECU 252 714 252 84 238 -
DDECUP 420 918 420 140 306 -
ROL 252 588 252 84 196 -
ROLP 420 756 420 140 252 -
DROL 336 3444 336 112 1148 -
DROLP 504 3612 504 168 1204 -
ROL4 420 7014 420 140 2338 -
ROL4P 588 7182 588 196 2394 -
ROL8 420 6762 420 140 2254 -
ROL8P 588 6930 588 196 2310 -
ROR 252 588 252 84 196 -
RORP 420 756 420 140 252 -
DROR 336 3444 336 112 1148 -
DRORP 504 3612 504 168 1204 -
ROR4 420 7014 420 140 2338 -
Rotation ROR4P 588 7182 588 196 2394 -
Instruction ROR8 420 6762 420 140 2254 -
ROR8P 588 6930 588 196 2310 -
RCL 336 4200 336 112 1400 -
RCLP 504 4368 504 168 1456 -
DRCL 336 6216 336 112 2072 -
DRCLP 504 6384 504 168 2128 -
RCL4 420 9198 420 140 3066 -
RCL4P 588 9366 588 196 3122 -
RCL8 420 9114 420 140 3038 -
RCL8P 588 9282 588 196 3094 -
RCR 336 4116 336 112 1372 -
RCRP 504 4284 504 168 1428 -
DRCR 336 6216 336 112 2072 -
DRCRP 504 6384 504 168 2128 -

Appendix 4-7
Appendix 4. Execution Speed of Instruction

Unit: ns
XGK-CPUS/E XGK-CPUH/A
Section Instruction Non- Executed Executed Non- Executed Executed
executed N=1 N=8 or X executed N=1 N=8 or X
RCR4 420 9030 - 140 3010 -
Rotation RCR4P 588 9198 - 196 3066 -
Instruction RCR8 420 8946 - 140 2982 -
RCR8P 588 9114 - 196 3038 -

Appendix 4-8
 Appendix 4 Execution Speed of Instruction

Unit: ns
XGK-CPUS/E XGK-CPUH/A
Section Instruction Non- Executed Executed Non- Executed Executed
executed N=1 N=8 or X executed N=1 N=8 or X
BSFT 504 3864 - 168 1288 -
BSFTP 672 4032 - 224 1344 -
BSFL 336 3108 - 112 1036 -
BSFLP 504 3306 - 168 1102 -
DBSFL 336 3444 - 112 1148 -
DBSFLP 504 3612 - 168 1204 -
BSFL4 420 7014 - 140 2338 -
BSFL4P 588 7182 - 196 2394 -
BSFL8 420 6762 - 140 2254 -
BSFL8P 588 6930 - 196 2310 -
BSFR 252 588 - 84 196 -
BSFRP 420 756 - 140 252 -
Move
DBSFR 336 3444 - 112 1148 -
Instruction
DBSFRP 504 3612 - 168 1204 -
BSFR4 420 6762 - 140 2254 -
BSFR4P 588 6930 - 196 2310 -
BSFR8 420 6762 - 140 2254 -
BSFR8P 588 6930 - 196 2310 -
WSFT 336 12138 - 112 4046 -
WSFTP 504 12306 - 168 4102 -
WSFL 420 21798 21420 140 7266 7140
WSFLP 588 21966 21588 196 7322 7196
WSFR 420 21714 21126 140 7238 7042
WSFRP 588 21882 21294 196 7294 7098
SR 0 0 - - - -
XCHG 336 1512 - 112 504 -
XCHGP 504 1680 - 168 560 -
DXCHG 336 1848 - 112 616 -
DXCHGP 504 2016 - 168 672 -
Exchange GXCHG 420 7854 12264 140 2618 4088
Instruction GXCHGP 588 8022 12432 196 2674 4144
SWAP 252 1344 - 84 448 -
SWAPP 420 1512 - 140 504 -
GSWAP 336 4662 8484 112 1554 2828
GSWAPP 420 4830 8652 140 1610 2884
ADD 252 420 - 84 140 -
ADDP 420 588 - 140 196 -
DADD 252 462 - 84 154 -
DADDP 420 630 - 140 210 -
SUB 252 420 - 84 140 -
SUBP 420 588 - 140 196 -
DSUB 252 462 - 84 154 -
BIN DSUBP 420 630 - 140 210 -
Operation
Instruction MUL 252 1722 - 84 574 -
MULP 420 1890 - 140 630 -
DMUL 252 3150 - 84 1050 -
DMULP 420 3318 - 140 1106 -
DIV 252 2436 - 84 812 -
DIVP 420 2604 - 140 868 -
DDIV 252 3864 - 84 1288 -
DDIVP 420 4032 - 140 1344 -

Appendix 4-9
Appendix 4. Execution Speed of Instruction
Unit: ns
XGK-CPUS/E XGK-CPUH/A
Section Instruction Non- Executed Executed Non- Executed Executed
executed N=1 N=8 or X executed N=1 N=8 or X
ADDU 252 756 - 84 252 -
ADDUP 420 924 - 140 308 -
DADDU 252 798 - 84 266 -
DADDUP 420 966 - 140 322 -
SUBU 252 756 - 84 252 -
SUBUP 420 924 - 140 308 -
DSUBU 252 798 - 84 266 -
DSUBUP 420 966 - 140 322 -
MULU 252 1890 - 84 630 -
MULUP 420 2058 - 140 686 -
DMULU 252 3318 - 84 1106 -
DMULUP 420 3486 - 140 1162 -
DIVU 252 2604 - 84 868 -
DIVUP 420 2772 - 140 924 -
DDIVU 252 4032 - 84 1344 -
DDIVUP 420 4200 - 140 1400 -
RADD 252 1442 - 84 602 -
RADDP 420 1498 - 140 658 -
BIN LADD 588 2870 - 196 1078 -
Operation
Instruction LADDP 756 2926 - 252 1134 -
RSUB 252 1442 - 84 602 -
RSUBP 420 1498 - 140 658 -
LSUB 588 2870 - 196 1078 -
LSUBP 756 2926 - 252 1134 -
RMUL 252 1948 - 84 1106 -
RMULP 420 2004 - 140 1162 -
LMUL 588 4186 - 196 2394 -
LMULP 756 4242 - 252 2450 -
RDIV 252 1974 - 84 1134 -
RDIVP 420 2030 - 140 1200 -
LDIV 588 4200 - 196 2660 -
LDIVP 756 4256 - 252 2716 -
$ADD 420 12768 35490 140 4256 11830
$ADDP 588 12936 35658 196 4312 11886
GADD 504 11046 15456 168 3682 5152
GADDP 672 11214 15624 224 3738 5208
GSUB 504 11046 15456 168 3682 5152
GSUBP 672 11214 15624 224 3738 5208
ADDB 420 2730 - 140 910 -
ADDBP 588 2898 - 196 966 -
DADDB 420 2856 - 140 952 -
DADDBP 588 3324 - 196 1108 -
SUBB 420 2730 - 140 910 -
SUBBP 588 2898 - 196 966 -
DSUBB 420 2856 - 140 952 -
BCD
Operation DSUBBP 588 3324 - 196 1108 -
Instruction MULB 420 8316 - 140 2772 -
MULBP 588 8394 - 196 2798 -
DMULB 420 18648 - 140 6216 -
DMULBP 588 18816 - 196 6272 -
DIVB 420 7224 - 140 2408 -
DIVBP 588 7392 - 196 2464 -
DDIVB 420 8736 - 140 2912 -
DDIVBP 588 8904 - 196 2968 -
Appendix 4-10
 Appendix 4 Execution Speed of Instruction

Unit: ns
XGK-CPUS/E XGK-CPUH/A
Section Instruction
Non- Executed Executed Non- Executed Executed
executed N=1 N=8 or X executed N=1 N=8 or X
WAND 252 588 - 84 196 -
WANDP 420 756 - 140 252 -
DWAND 252 588 - 84 196 -
DWANDP 420 756 - 140 252 -
WOR 252 588 - 84 196 -
WORP 420 756 - 140 252 -
DWOR 252 588 - 84 196 -
DWORP 420 756 - 140 252 -
WXOR 252 588 - 84 196 -
WXORP 420 756 - 140 252 -
DWXOR 252 588 - 84 196 -
Logic DWXORP 420 756 - 140 252 -
Operation WXNR 252 672 - 84 224 -
WXNRP 420 840 - 140 280 -
DWXNR 252 672 - 84 224 -
DWXNRP 420 840 - 140 280 -
GWAND 504 11046 15456 168 3682 5152
GWANDP 672 11214 15624 224 3738 5208
GWOR 504 11046 15456 168 3682 5152
GWORP 672 11214 15624 224 3738 5208
GWXOR 504 11046 15456 168 3682 5152
GWXORP 672 11214 15624 224 3738 5208
GWXNR 504 11130 16128 168 3710 5376
GWXNRP 672 11298 16296 224 3766 5432
FALS 252 1344 - 84 448 -
DUTY - - - - - -
System WDT - - - - - -
Instruction WDTP - - - - - -
OUTOFF - - - - - -
STOP - - - - - -
BSUM 336 10836 - 112 3612 -
BSUMP 504 11004 - 168 3668 -
DBSUM 336 20496 - 112 6832 -
DBSUMP 504 20664 - 168 6888 -
BRST 420 6552 - 140 2184 -
BRSTP 588 6720 - 196 2240 -
ENCO 420 4284 15456 140 1428 5152
ENCOP 588 4452 15624 196 1484 5208
DECO 420 3444 10248 140 1148 3416
DECOP 588 3612 10416 196 1204 3472
Data DIS 420 5754 7896 140 1918 2632
Process DISP 588 5922 8064 196 1974 2688
Instruction UNI 420 6006 8148 140 2002 2716
UNIP 588 6174 8316 196 2058 2772
WTOB 420 8484 11676 140 2828 3892
WTOBP 588 8652 11844 196 2884 3948
BTOW 420 8400 12180 140 2800 4060
BTOWP 588 8568 12348 196 2856 4116
IORF - - - - - -
IORFP - - - - - -
SCH 504 6594 15120 168 2198 5040
SCHP 672 6762 15288 224 2254 5096
DSCH 504 6846 16548 168 2282 5516
DSHP 672 7014 16716 224 2338 5572
Appendix 4-11
Appendix 4. Execution Speed of Instruction

Unit: ns
XGK-CPUS/E XGK-CPUH/A
Section Instruction Non- Executed Executed Non- Executed Executed
executed N=1 N=8 or X executed N=1 N=8 or X
MAX 420 5208 9282 140 1736 3094
MAXP 588 5376 9450 196 1792 3150
DMAX 420 5628 10878 140 1876 3626
DMAXP 588 5796 11046 196 1932 3682
MIN 420 5292 9618 140 1764 3206
MINP 588 5460 9786 196 1820 3262
DMIN 420 5712 11214 140 1904 3738
DMINP 588 5880 11382 196 1960 3794
SUM 420 6006 9828 140 2002 3276
SUMP 588 6174 9996 196 2058 3332
DSUM 420 6468 11760 140 2156 3920
Data DSUMP 588 6636 11934 196 2212 3978
Process AVE 420 8736 14028 140 2912 4676
Instruction AVEP 588 8874 14196 196 2958 4732
DAVE 420 12600 23478 140 4200 7826
DAVEP 588 12768 23646 196 4256 7882
MUX 504 5376 - 168 1792 -
MUXP 672 5544 - 224 1848 -
DMUX 504 5628 - 168 1876 -
DMUXP 672 5796 - 224 1932 -
DETECT 504 5460 10248 168 1820 3416
DETECTP 672 5628 10416 224 1876 3472
RAMP - - - - - -
SORT - - - - - -
DSORT - - - - - -

Appendix 4-12
 Appendix 4 Execution Speed of Instruction

Unit: ns
XGK-CPUS/E XGK-CPUH/A
Section Instruction Non- Executed Executed Non- Executed Executed
executed N=1 N=8 or X executed N=1 N=8 or X
FIWR - - - - - -
FIWRP - - - - - -
FIFRD - - - - - -
FIFRDP - - - - - -
Data
Table FILRD - - - - - -
Process FILRDP - - - - - -
Instruction FINS - - - - - -
FINSP - - - - - -
FIDEL - - - - - -
FIDELP - - - - - -
SEG 420 13188 23898 140 4396 7966
Display
SEGP 588 13356 24066 196 4452 8022
BINDA 336 15498 28938 112 5166 9646
BINDAP 504 15666 29106 168 5222 9702
DBINDA 336 25410 52290 112 8470 17430
DBINDAP 504 25578 52488 168 8526 17496
BINHA 336 8316 - 112 2772 -
BINHAP 504 8484 - 168 2828 -
DBINHA 336 12180 - 112 4060 -
DBINHAP 504 12336 - 168 4112 -
BCDDA 336 12096 - 112 4032 -
BCDDAP 504 12264 - 168 4088 -
DBCDDA 336 19824 - 112 6608 -
DBCDDAP 504 19992 - 168 6664 -
DABIN 336 6426 17346 112 2142 5782
DABINP 504 6594 17514 168 2198 5838
DDABIN 336 11172 3528 112 3724 1176
DDABINP 504 11340 3696 168 3780 1232
HABIN 336 11172 - 112 3724 -
HABINP 504 11340 - 168 3780 -
DHABIN 336 22512 - 112 7504 -
DHABINP 504 22680 - 168 7560 -
String DABCD 336 15456 - 112 5152 -
Process
DABCDP 504 15624 - 168 5208 -
Instruction
DDABCD 336 30324 - 112 10108 -
DDABCDP 504 30492 - 168 10164 -
LEN 336 2520 7812 112 840 2604
LENP 504 2688 7980 168 896 2660
STR 420 34314 - 140 11438 -
STRP 588 34482 - 196 11494 -
DSTR 420 69720 - 140 23240 -
DSTRP 588 69888 - 196 23296 -
VAL 420 28938 - 140 9646 -
VALP 588 29106 - 196 9702 -
DVAL 420 60690 - 140 20230 -
DVALP 588 60858 - 196 20286 -
RSTR 420 273630 - 140 91210 -
RSTRP 588 273798 - 196 91266 -
LSTR 420 292824 - 140 97608 -
LSTRP 588 292992 - 196 97664 -
STRR 336 1050000 - 112 350000 -
STRRP 504 1050000 - 168 350000 -
STRL 420 1050000 - 140 350000 -
STRLP 588 1050000 - 196 350000 -
Appendix 4-13
Appendix 4. Execution Speed of Instruction

Unit: ns
XGK-CPUS/E XGK-CPUH/A
Section Instruction Non- Executed Executed Non- Executed Executed
executed N=1 N=8 or X executed N=1 N=8 or X
ASCP 420 8232 23520 196 2800 7895
ASC 588 8400 23685 140 2744 7840
HEX 420 7098 20412 140 2366 6804
HEXP 588 7266 20580 196 2422 6860
RIGHT 420 18396 21630 140 6132 7210
RIGHTP 588 18594 21798 196 6198 7266
LEFT 420 17430 20664 140 5810 6888
LEFTP 588 17598 20832 196 5866 6944
MID 420 19026 22260 140 6342 7420
MIDP 588 19194 22428 196 6398 7476
String REPLACE 420 33348 - 140 11116 -
Process
Instruction REPLACEP 588 33516 - 196 11172 -
FIND 504 8904 - 168 2968 -
FINDP 672 9072 - 224 3024 -
RBCD 420 134820 - 140 44940 -
RBCDP 588 134988 - 196 44996 -
LBCD 420 153636 - 140 51212 -
LBCDP 588 153804 - 196 51268 -
BCDR 420 48972 - 140 16324 -
BCDRP 588 49140 - 196 16380 -
BCDL 420 80556 - 140 26852 -
BCDLP 588 80724 - 196 26908 -

Appendix 4-14
 Appendix 4 Execution Speed of Instruction

Unit: ns
XGK-CPUS/E XGK-CPUH/A
Section Instruction Non- Executed Executed Non- Executed Executed
executed N=1 N=8 or X executed N=1 N=8 or X
SIN 420 75798 - 140 25266 -
SINP 588 75966 - 196 25322 -
COS 420 73710 - 140 24570 -
COSP 588 73878 - 196 24626 -
TAN 420 155988 - 140 51996 -
Special TANP 588 156156 - 196 52052 -
Function
Instruction RAD 420 13062 - 140 4354 -
RADP 588 13230 - 196 4410 -
DEG 420 13062 - 140 4354 -
DEGP 588 13230 - 196 4410 -
SQRT 420 6972 - 140 2324 -
SQRTP 588 7140 - 196 2380 -
LIMIT 504 1848 - 168 616 -
LIMITP 672 1986 - 224 662 -
DLIMIT 504 1932 - 168 644 -
DLIMITP 672 2100 - 224 700 -
DZONE 504 26796 - 168 8932 -
Data DZONEP 672 26964 - 224 8988 -
Control
Instruction DDZONE 504 25704 - 168 8568 -
DDZONEP 672 25872 - 224 8624 -
VZONE 504 27510 - 168 9170 -
VZONEP 672 27708 - 224 9236 -
DVZONE 504 26418 - 168 8806 -
DVZONEP 672 26586 - 224 8862 -
DATERD 252 5796 - 84 1932 -
DATERDP 420 5964 - 140 1988 -
DATEWR 252 5964 - 84 1988 -
DATEWRP 420 6132 - 140 2044 -
ADDCLK 420 8526 - 140 2842 -
Time ADDCLKP 588 8694 - 196 2898 -
related
Instruction SUBCLK 420 8610 - 140 2870 -
SUBCLKP 588 8778 - 196 2926 -
SECOND 336 6636 - 112 2212 -
SECONDP 504 6804 - 168 2268 -
HOUR 336 7098 - 112 2366 -
HOURP 504 7266 - 168 2422 -

Appendix 4-15
Appendix 4. Execution Speed of Instruction

Unit: ns
XGK-CPUS/E XGK-CPUH/A
Section Instruction Non- Executed Executed Non- Executed Executed
executed N=1 N=8 or X executed N=1 N=8 or X
JMP - - - - - -
LABEL - - - - - -
Diverge CALL - - - - - -
Instrution CALLP - - - - - -
SBRT - - - - - -
RET - - - - - -
FOR - - - - - -
Loop NEXT - - - - - -
BREAK - - - - - -
STC 168 168 - 56 56 -
Flag CLC 168 168 - 56 56 -
CLE 168 168 - 56 56 -
EI - - - - - -
Interrupt DI - - - - - -
Instruction EIN - - - - - -
DIN - - - - - -
NEG 252 420 - 84 140 -
NEGP 420 588 - 140 196 -
DNEG 252 462 - 84 154 -
DNEGP 420 630 - 140 210 -
RNEG 252 1596 - 84 532 -
Sign
RNEGP 420 1764 - 140 588 -
Reverse
Instruction LNEG 252 1932 - 84 644 -
LNEGP 420 2100 - 140 700 -
ABS 252 1428 - 84 476 -
ABSP 420 1596 - 140 532 -
DABS 252 1512 - 84 504 -
DABSP 420 1680 - 140 560 -
RSET - - - - - -
RCLR - - - - - -
File ZRCLR - - - - - -
related EMOV - - - - - -
Instruction EDMOV - - - - - -
EBREAD - - - - - -
EBWRITE - - - - - -
GET - - - - - -
GETP - - - - - -
PUT - - - - - -
Special
PUTP - - - - - -
Module
Instruction GETM - - - - - -
GETMP - - - - - -
PUTM - - - - - -
PUTMP - - - - - -
PIDRUN - - - - - -
PID PIDPRMT - - - - - -
Instruction PIDPAUSE - - - - - -
PIDSTOP - - - - - -

Appendix 4-16
 Appendix 4 Execution Speed of Instruction

Unit: ns
XGK-CPUS/E XGK-CPUH/A
Section Instruction Non- Executed Executed Non- Executed Executed
executed N=1 N=8 or X executed N=1 N=8 or X
P2PSN - - - - - -
P2PWRD - - - - - -
Communi-
cation
P2PWWR - - - - - -
P2PBRD - - - - - -
P2PBWR - - - - - -
ORG - - - - - -
FLT - - - - - -
DST - - - - - -
IST - - - - - -
LIN - - - - - -
CIN - - - - - -
SST - - - - - -
VTP - - - - - -
PTV - - - - - -
STP - - - - - -
SKP - - - - - -
SSP - - - - - -
SSS - - - - - -
POR - - - - - -
SOR - - - - - -
PSO - - - - - -
NMV - - - - - -
INCH - - - - - -
Position RTP - - - - - -
Control
Instruction SNS - - - - - -
SRS - - - - - -
MOF - - - - - -
PRS - - - - - -
ZOE - - - - - -
ZOD - - - - - -
EPRS - - - - - -
TEA - - - - - -
TEAA - - - - - -
EMG - - - - - -
CLR - - - - - -
ECLR - - - - - -
PST - - - - - -
TBP - - - - - -
TEP - - - - - -
THP - - - - - -
TMP - - - - - -
TSP - - - - - -
TCP - - - - - -

Appendix 4-17
 Warranty

1. Terms of warranty
LSIS provides an 18-month warranty starting from the date of production.

2. Range of warranty
For problems within the terms of the warranty, LSIS will replace the entire PLC or repair the defective parts free
of charge except for the following cases.

(1) Problems caused by improper conditions, environment or treatment.

(2) Problems caused by external devices.
(3) Problems caused by the user remodeling or repairing the PLC.
(4) Problems caused by improper use of the product.
(5) Problems caused by circumstances where the expectations exceed that of the science and technology level
when LSIS produced the product.
(6) Problems caused by natural disaster.

3. This warranty is limited to the PLC itself only. It is not valid for the whole system which the PLC is attached to.
 LS values every single customers.
Quality and service come first at LSIS.
Always at your service, standing for our customers.

http://eng.lsis.biz

10310000510

■ HEAD OFFICE
■ LS Industrial Systems (Shanghai) Co., Ltd. >> China
LS tower, Hogye-dong, Dongan-gu, Anyang-si, Gyeonggi-do
Address: Room E-G, 12th Floor Huamin Empire Plaza,
1026-6, Korea http://eng.lsis.biz e-mail: [email protected]
No. 726, West Yan’an Road, Shanghai, China
Tel. (82-2)2034-4689, 4888 Fax.(82-2)2034-4648
Tel: 86-21-5237-9977
■ LS Industrial Systems Tokyo Office >> Japan
■ LS Industrial Systems(Wuxi) Co., Ltd. >> China
Address: 16F, Higashi-Kan, Akasaka Twin Towers 17- 22,
Address: 102-A National High & New Tech Industrial
2-chome, Akasaka, Minato-ku, Tokyo 107-8470, Japan
Development Area, Wuxi, Jiangsu, China e-mail: [email protected]
Tel: 81-3-3582-9128 Fax: 81-3-3582-2667
Tel: 86-510-534-6666 Fax: 86-510-522-4078
e-mail: [email protected]
■ LS Industrial Systems Beijing Office >> China
■ LS Industrial Systems Dubai Rep. Office >> UAE
Address: B-tower 17th Floor, Beijing Global Trade Center building,
Address: P.O.BOX-114216, API World Tower, 303B, Sheikh
No. 36, BeiSanHuanDong-Lu, DongCheng-District, Beijing, China
Zayed road, Dubai, UAE. e-mail: [email protected]
Tel: 86-10-5825-6025
Tel: 971-4-3328289 Fax: 971-4-3329444
■ LS Industrial Systems Guangzhou Office >> China
■ LS-VINA Industrial Systems Co., Ltd. >> Vietnam
Address: Room 1403, 14F, New Poly Tower, 2 Zhongshan Liu
Address: LSIS VINA Congty che tao may dien Viet-Hung
Rad, Guangzhou, China e-mail: [email protected]
Dong Anh Hanoi, Vietnam e-mail: [email protected]
Tel: 86-20-8326-6754 Fax: 86-20-8326-6287
Tel: 84-4-882-0222 Fax: 84-4-882-0220
■ LS Industrial Systems Chengdu Office >> China
■ LS Industrial Systems Hanoi Office >> Vietnam
Address: Room 2907, Zhong Yin B/D, No. 35, Renminzhong(2)-
Address: Room C21, 5th Floor, Horison Hotel, 40 Cat Linh,
Road, Chengdu, China e-mail: [email protected]
Hanoi, Vietnam
Tel: 86-28-8612-9151 Fax: 86-28-8612-9236
Tel: 84-4-736-6270/1 Fax: 84-4-736-6269
■ LS Industrial Systems Qingdao Office >> China
■ Dalian LS Industrial Systems co., Ltd, >> China
Address: 12th Floor, Guodong building, No52 Jindun Road,
Address: No. 15 Liaohexi 3 Road, economic and technical
Chengdu, China e-mail: [email protected]
development zone, Dalian, China e-mail: [email protected]
Tel: 86-532-580-2539 Fax: 86-532-583-3793
Tel: 86-411-8273-7777 Fax: 86-411-8730-7560

※ LS Industrial Systems constantly endeavors to improve its product so that 2009. 12

Information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
ⓒ LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd 2009 All Rights Reserved.